System Description
HiPath 3000
Version 1.2-3.0
April 2002
G281-0788-00
Warning
Hackers who unlawfully gain access to customer telecommunications systems are criminals. Currently, we do
not know of any telecommunications system that is immune to this type of criminal activity. Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc. will not accept liability for any damages, including long distance charges, which result from unauthorized use. Although Siemens has designed security features into its products, it
is your sole responsibility to use the security features and to establish security practices within your company,
including training, security awareness, and call auditing.
Siemens sales and service personnel, as well as Siemens business partners, are available to work with you
to help you guard against this unauthorized use of your telecommunications system.
April 2002
Job No. 5197
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by
any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of
Siemens. The software described in this publication is furnished under a license agreement and may be used
only in accordance with the terms of that agreement.
Request Siemens publications from your Siemens representative or the Siemens branch serving you. Publications are not stocked at the address below.
Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc.
1700 Technology Drive
San Jose, CA 95110
(408) 492-2000
1 (800) 765-6123
Fax: (408) 492-3430
Siemens and optiset are registered trademarks and HiPath is a trademark of Siemens AG.
All other trademarks and company names are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc. 2002. All rights reserved.
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
Contents
0
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-15
Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-19
1 Important Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Major New Features in Version 3.0 of HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.1 Extended Functionality of HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.2 New Features for HiPath 3000 V3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2.3 HiPath 3000 in the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.4 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.5 New optiPoint 500 Product Family (V3.0 SMR-3 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.3 Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3.1 Hardware optimization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3.1.1 Systems for free-standing installation (HiPath 3750 only) and wall mounting 1-5
1.3.1.2 Systems for installation in 19’’ cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1.3.1.3 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1.3.1.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR for HiPath 3000 (Not for U.S. and Canada) . 1-15
1.3.2 Extended Functionality of HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300 V1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1.3.3 New Features for HiPath 3000 V1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1.3.4 Optimization of the HiPath cordless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
1.3.5 HiPath 3000 in the LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1.3.6 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1.4 Sales-Oriented Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1.5 Technical Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1.6 Information from the Intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
1.7 Privacy and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
1.8 Feedback/Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
2 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 System-Related Capacity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2 HiPath 3750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1 Hardware Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.2 Board Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2.1 Distribution of PCM Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.3 Central Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3.1 CBCPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.2.3.2 UPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.2.3.3 LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.2.4 Peripheral Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.4.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.2.4.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-1
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
2.2.4.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4.4 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 Central Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2.1 CBCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2.2 UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 Peripheral Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3.4 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.5 Additional Power Supply from the EPSU2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Central Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.1 CBCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.2 PSUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2.3 UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Peripheral Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3.4 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3 Central Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4 SBSCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4.1 PSU One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 Peripheral Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-2
2-16
2-16
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-18
2-21
2-21
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-30
2-31
2-33
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-35
2-36
2-37
2-37
2-38
2-38
2-39
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-43
2-43
2-45
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-47
2-48
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
2.5.6.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6.2 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.6.3 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2 Hardware Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3 Central Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3.1 SBSCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3.2 PSU One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4.2 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4.3 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 Hardware Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2 Board Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2.1 Distribution of PCM Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3 Central Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3.1 CBCPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3.2 UPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3.3 LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4 Peripheral Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.5.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1 Hardware Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2 Central Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.1 CBRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.2.2 UPSC-DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3 Peripheral Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.3.4 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-48
2-48
2-48
2-49
2-49
2-50
2-51
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-53
2-53
2-53
2-54
2-54
2-55
2-55
2-59
2-59
2-60
2-61
2-62
2-62
2-63
2-64
2-64
2-66
2-66
2-66
2-66
2-69
2-70
2-70
2-71
2-71
2-72
2-73
2-73
2-74
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-76
2-76
0-3
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
2.8.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.4.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.1 Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2 Central Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2.1 CBRC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.2.2 UPSC-DR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3 Peripheral Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3.2 Trunk Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.3.4 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4 Additional System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4.1 System-related capacity limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9.4.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10 HiPath cordless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.2 System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.2.1 System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.2.2 Multi-cell Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.2.3 System Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.2.4 Important Features of HiPath cordless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.3 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.4 Components of HiPath cordless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.4.1 Mobile Telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.10.4.2 Base Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.11 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.13 Interface-to-Interface Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.14 Numbering Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15 Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.1 CE Compliance (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.2 SAFETY International. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.15.3 Environmental Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-78
2-79
2-79
2-80
2-81
2-81
2-82
2-82
2-83
2-84
2-84
2-84
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-86
2-87
2-87
2-87
2-88
2-90
2-91
2-92
2-92
2-92
2-94
2-95
2-97
2-98
2-99
2-99
2-99
2-99
3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Features for All Traffic Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.1 Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.1.2 Call Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3.1.3 Toggle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.1.4 Unscreened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.1.5 Screened Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.1.6 Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
0-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.1.7 Music on Hold (Internal or External Source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.8 Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.9 Consultation Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.10 Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.11 Setting the Signaling Method for Analog Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.12 optiPoint Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.13 Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.14 Overload Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.15 Shared Transfer Switch (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Features for General Incoming Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 ANI (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Distinctive Ringing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Call Waiting Tone/Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4 Call Management (CM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.5 Call Forwarding—No Answer (CFNA) With a Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.6 Call Forwarding (CF)—Busy and No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.7 Call Forwarding (CF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.8 Subscriber Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.9 Group Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.10 Group Call with Busy Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.11 Hunt Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.12 Leave Group Call/Hunt Group (Stop Hunt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.1 UCD Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.2 UCD Call Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.3 UCD Subscriber States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.4 Leave UCD Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.5 Work Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.6 Recorded Announcement/Music on Hold (MOH) with UCD . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.7 Overflow With UCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.8 Automatic Incoming Call Connection (AICC) With UCD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.9 UCD Night Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.10 UCD Group Status Display (Calls in Queue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.11 UCD Home Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.13.12 Transfer to UCD Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.14 Silent Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.15 Do Not Disturb (DND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.16 Ringer Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.17 Caller List/Station Number Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.18 Call Pickup Within Call Pickup Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.19 Targeted Call Pickup Outside of a Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.20 Call Pickup from an Answering Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.21 Fax Waiting Message/Answering Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.22 Deferring a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-30
3-32
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-39
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-43
3-44
3-46
3-48
3-53
3-56
3-58
3-61
3-62
3-64
3-65
3-67
3-68
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-78
3-79
3-81
3-82
3-83
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-88
3-89
3-91
3-93
3-94
3-95
3-96
0-5
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.2.23 Station Number Configuration Using Assistant T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3.2.24 Reject Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.3 Features for General Outgoing Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.3.1 Dual-Tone Multifrequency Transmission (DTMF)/Temporary Signaling Method
Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.3.2 Individual Telephone Lock (Changeover). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
3.3.3 System Telephone Lock (Changeover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.3.4 Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
3.3.5 Mobile PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
3.3.6 B Channel Allocation (V3.0 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
3.4 Features for General External Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.4.1 Multi-Device Connection (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.4.2 Multi-Device Connection (for U.S. Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
3.4.3 Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
3.4.4 Trunk Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
3.4.5 Call Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
3.4.6 Transit Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
3.4.7 Translate Station Numbers to Names for System Speed Dialing. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
3.4.8 Message Waiting Indication (MWI) at the Trunk Interface (V3.0 and later) . . . . 3-121
3.5 Features for Incoming External Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
3.5.1 Call Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-122
3.5.2 Group Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123
3.5.3 Night Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
3.5.4 Direct Inward Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
3.5.5 Selective Seizure of a DID Number Using a MUSAP Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-129
3.5.6 Signaling of Direct Inward Dialing Numbers for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-130
3.5.7 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-131
3.5.8 Intercept Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
3.5.9 Dual-Tone Multifrequency Direct Inward Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-136
3.5.10 Announcement Before Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-138
3.5.11 Collect Call Barring per Trunk (for Brazil Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-140
3.5.12 Collect Call Barring per Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
3.5.13 Analog Direct Inward Dialing via MFC-R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
3.5.14 Centralized Attendant Service CAS (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
3.6 Features for Outgoing External Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
3.6.1 Last Number Redial (LNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-146
3.6.2 System Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
3.6.3 System Speed Dialing in Tenant Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
3.6.4 Station Speed Dialing in System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
3.6.5 Trunk Seizure Type and Prime Line On (Automatic Line Seizure). . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
3.6.6 En-Bloc Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-158
3.6.7 Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
3.6.8 End-of-Dialing Recognition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-161
3.6.9 Trunk Signaling Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
0-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.6.10
3.6.11
3.6.12
3.6.13
3.6.14
3.6.15
3.6.16
3.6.17
3.6.18
3.6.19
3.6.20
Configurable Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
Traffic Restriction Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-166
Private Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
Trunk Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
Temporary Station Number Display Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
Denied List for Undialed Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-173
Assigning Speed-Dialing Numbers to ITR Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
Intercept With Telephone Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
Keypad Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
E911 Emergency Call Service for the USA (for U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
Automatic Call Completion on No Reply (CCNR) on the Trunk Interface (V3.0 and
later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
3.6.21 CLIP no screening (V3.0 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181
3.7 Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183
3.7.1 Carrier Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
3.7.1.1 Mercury Communications Limited Single Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
3.7.1.2 Mercury Communications Limited Two Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
3.7.1.3 Dial-In Control Server (DICS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
3.7.1.4 Corporate Network (CN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-187
3.7.1.5 Primary Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-187
3.7.2 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-188
3.8 Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
3.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
3.8.2 Carrier Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
3.8.3 Using Alternate Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-198
3.8.3.1 Carrier Access Methods Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-198
3.8.4 LCR Time of Day Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
3.8.5 LCR Outdial Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
3.8.6 Expensive Route Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
3.8.7 Overflow Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
3.8.8 LCR Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
3.8.9 Carrier-Select Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
3.8.10 Handling of Numbers and Destinations and Trunk Group Access Codes. . . . 3-200
3.8.11 Correlation With Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
3.8.11.1 Station-Related Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
3.8.11.2 Trunk-Related Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
3.8.12 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
3.8.13 LCR Dial Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
3.8.13.1 Rules for Creating LCR Dial Plan Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203
3.8.14 Route Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
3.8.15 Time Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
3.8.16 Outdial Rule Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-205
3.8.17 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208
3.9 Features for Internal Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-7
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.9.1 Internal Traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210
3.9.2 Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Repertory Dial Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212
3.9.3 Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214
3.9.4 Automatic Callback When Free or Busy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-215
3.9.5 Entrance Telephone/Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-217
3.9.6 Speaker Call/Handsfree Answerback/Internal Paging (OptiPage) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218
3.9.7 Transfer from Announcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-219
3.9.8 Radio Paging Equipment (PSE) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-220
3.9.8.1 Simple Radio Paging Equipment/Simple PSE (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-220
3.9.8.2 Radio Paging Equipment via ESPA/Enhanced Radio Paging Equipment (Not for
U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-221
3.9.9 Message Texts/Mailboxes/Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-222
3.9.10 Advisory Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-225
3.9.11 Internal Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-227
3.9.12 Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-229
3.9.13 Editing the Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231
3.10 Tenant Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-232
3.10.1 Tenant Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-233
3.11 Other Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236
3.11.1 Voice Channel Signaling Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-236
3.11.2 Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-237
3.11.3 Relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-239
3.11.4 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-243
3.11.5 Multilingual Text Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-245
3.11.6 Associated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-247
3.11.7 Associated Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-248
3.11.8 Display Number of Stations with Direct Trunk Access (for Austria Only) . . . . . 3-250
3.11.9 Services in the Talk State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-251
3.11.10 Reset Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-252
3.11.11 Relocate (Hoteling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-254
3.11.12 Automatic Wake-up System/Timed Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-257
3.11.13 Delete All Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-259
3.11.14 Team/Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
3.11.14.1 Team Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
3.11.14.2 Top Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-268
3.11.14.3 MULAP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-277
3.11.15 Storing Procedures on Procedure Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-289
3.11.16 Customer-Specific Display (V3.0 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-293
3.12 Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-294
3.12.1 Satellite CS Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-296
3.12.2 Tie Trunk Via TIEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-298
3.12.3 Closed Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-299
3.12.4 Toll Restriction with CorNet-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
3.12.5 Call Detail Recording With Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-302
0-8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.12.6 Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.7 Consultation Hold/Transfer/Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.8 Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.9 Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.10 Distinctive Ringing in the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.11 Callback on Free/Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.12 Station Number/Name Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.13 Call Forwarding With Rerouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.14 Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.15 Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.16 Central Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.17 Sharing System Speed Dialing in a Gateway System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.18 Sharing a Central Voice Mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19 QSig (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.1 Basic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.2 Central Attendant Position/Attendant Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.3 Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.4 Originator of the Intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.5 Busy Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.6 Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.7 Message Waiting Indication (MWI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.8 Central Cross-System Busy Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.9 System Telephone Lock-Reset Code (V3.0 SMR-3 and later) . . . . . . . .
3.12.19.10 COS Changeover (V3.0 SMR-3 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13 Features for Call Detail Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.1 Silent Reversal at Start and End of Call (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.2 Advice of Charges at Station During Call (AOC-D) (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . .
3.13.3 Call Duration Display on Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.4 Call Detail Recording at Station (CDRS) (Not for U.S.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.5 Call Detail Recording, Attendant (CDRA) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.6 Call Detail Recording Per Trunk (CDRT) (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.7 Account Code (ACCT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.8 Call Detail Recording Central (CDRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.9 Toll Fraud Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13.10 Printer Pipe Mode (V.24 [RS-232] Range Extension for Call Data) . . . . . . .
3.13.11 Call-Charge Display With Currency (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14 Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.1 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.2 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.3 Default Station Number Instead of Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) . . . . .
3.14.4 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.5 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.6 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.7 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-303
3-304
3-305
3-306
3-307
3-308
3-309
3-310
3-312
3-313
3-314
3-315
3-316
3-317
3-318
3-319
3-319
3-319
3-320
3-320
3-320
3-321
3-321
3-322
3-323
3-323
3-324
3-326
3-327
3-329
3-332
3-334
3-338
3-353
3-354
3-355
3-357
3-358
3-359
3-360
3-361
3-362
3-363
3-364
0-9
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.14.8 Advice of Charge (AOC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.9 Call Forwarding (CF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.10 External Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.11 Call Deflection (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.12 Subaddressing (SUB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.13 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.14 Competition of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.15 Call Hold (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.16 Three Party Service (3PTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.17 Call Waiting (CW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.18 Telephone Portability (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.19 User to User Signaling (UUS1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.20 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.21 Point-to-Point Connection on the User Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.22 Programming National and International Codes for Outgoing Calls. . . . . . . .
3.14.23 Caller ID After Release (Police) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14.24 Collect Call Barring for ISDN Trunks (V3.0 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15 U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.1 PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15.2 BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16 U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.1 Multi-Device Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.2 Call-By-Call Service Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.3 Dedicated (Pre-Provisioned) Service Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.4 Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.5 Camp-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.6 Conference Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.7 Equal Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.8 Special Access Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.9 Direct Inward Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.10 Multiple Subscriber Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.11 Calling Line Identification Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.12 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.13 Call Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.14 Three-Party Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.15 Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.16 Connected Line Identification Presentation and Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.17 Dialed Number Identification Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.18 B Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.19 Originating B Channel Selection Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.20 Terminating B Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.21 B Channel Cut-Through Operation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.22 Digital Keypad to DTMF Conversion on PRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.23 En-Bloc Sending. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0-10
3-365
3-366
3-368
3-369
3-370
3-371
3-372
3-373
3-374
3-375
3-376
3-377
3-378
3-379
3-380
3-381
3-382
3-383
3-384
3-389
3-392
3-392
3-393
3-394
3-395
3-396
3-397
3-398
3-399
3-400
3-401
3-403
3-404
3-405
3-406
3-407
3-408
3-409
3-410
3-411
3-412
3-413
3-414
3-415
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
3.16.24 Data Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.25 Basic Electronic Key Telephone System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.26 Call Appearance Call Handling Electronic Key Telephone System . . . . . . .
3.16.27 Called and Calling Party Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.28 Connected Party Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.29 Message Waiting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.16.30 Internal Voice Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.17 Host Link Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-416
3-417
3-418
3-419
3-420
3-421
3-422
3-423
4 HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 LAN Connecting Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.1 LAN Connection using an LIM board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.2 LAN Connection using HiPath HG1500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2.2 Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.2.3 Hardware Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2.4 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2.5 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2.6 Interfaces and Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.2.7 Supported Voice over IP Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.2.8 Determining the number HiPath HG 1500 boards necessary. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3 IP Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.3.2 Features of IP Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.3 Network-wide Features with IP Networking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.4 Requirements of the IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4 IP Payload Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.5 Workpoint Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5.1 optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5.2 optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.6 Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.6.1 HiPath Wireless BreezeNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.6.2 Implementation Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.6.2.1 Mobile optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.6.2.2 Wireless LAN Network Between Two HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.6.3 Main Components of HiPath Wireless BreezeNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.6.3.1 Access Point PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.6.3.2 PCMCIA-PC Card PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.6.3.3 Station Adapter PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.6.3.4 Workgroup Bridge PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.6.3.5 Wireless Base Unit BU-DS.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.6.3.6 Wireless Bridge RB-DS.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.6.4 Extension of a Wireless LAN Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.7 Applications over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-11
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
4.7.1 Call Detail Recording Central (CDRC) via IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1.1 TFTP Client in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1.2 TCP Client in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.1.3 TFTP Server in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.7.2 CSTA via IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8 Administration & Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2 SNMP Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2.2 Overview of SNMP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3 Administering HiPath 3000 via the LAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.4 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 via PPP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.5 Remote Administration of Plus Products via PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-31
4-31
4-32
4-32
4-33
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-39
4-40
5 Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 System Administration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 System Administration from a System Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 System Administration using the Service PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.3 Administration of the HiPath HG1500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Options in the Service Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Customer Database Backup (CDB Backup). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1.1 Automatic Customer Data Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1.2 Manual Customer Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.2.1 Transferring an APS by Replacing the MMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.2.2 APS Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.3 Diagnosis Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.3.1 Recording Board Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.3.1.1 Central Control Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.3.1.2 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.3.1.3 Peripheral Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.3.2 Recording Trunk Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.3.3 Recording Station Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.3.3.4 Recording the Status of the V.24 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.3.3.5 Trace Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3.3.6 Error History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.3.3.7 Testing Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.3.3.8 Analyzing System-wide Use of Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.3.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.3.5 Correcting Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.5.1 Automatic Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.5.2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.3.5.3 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.6 Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
0-12
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
5.3.6.1 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.1.1 Remote Administration with HiPath 3000 Manager E . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.1.2 DTMF Remote Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.2 Remote Correction of System Software (APS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.3 Remote Error Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.4 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.4.1 Remote System Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.4.2 Remote Administration of Plus Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6.4.3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7 Access Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7.1 Logon With User Name and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7.2 Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7.3 System Access Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7.4 Customer Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8.1 Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8.1.1 Format Identification and Command Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8.2 Issuing and Saving Log Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-26
5-28
5-30
5-31
5-31
5-31
5-34
6 Desktop Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.2 optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2.1 optiPoint 500 Telephones without Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2.2 optiPoint 500 Telephones with Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.3 Comparison of Features on all optiPoint 500 Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2.4 optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2.5 optiPoint 500 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.2.6 Restrictions for Using optiPoint 500 Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.2.7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3 Accessories for optiPoint 500 Telephone Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.3.1 Local Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.3.2 Headsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.3.3 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.4 optiset E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.4.1 optiset E Telephones Without Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.4.2 optiset E Telephones with Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6.4.3 Comparison of Features on all optiset E Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.4.4 optiset E Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.4.5 optiset E Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.4.6 Restrictions for Using optiset E Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.4.7 Electronic Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.5 Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6 Telephones for HiPath cordless. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.1 Gigaset 2000C Feature Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6.2 Gigaset 2000C pocket Feature Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-13
3000sbTOC.fm
Contents
6.6.3 Gigaset active Robust Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.6 Gigaset 2000L Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.7 Gigaset 2000L pocket Charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.8 Gigaset 3000L Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.9 Gigaset 3000L Micro Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 Attendant Consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 HiPath Attendant B Braille Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 optiClient Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.3 optiPoint Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 LAN Telephones/Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1 optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 optipoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.3 optiPoint IPadapter (supported up to and including V1.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
6-41
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-45
6-45
6-46
6-46
6-48
6-51
6-53
6-53
6-53
6-53
7 Plus Products and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
8 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
9 Output Formats for Call Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Compressed Output Format for Call Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.3 Long Output Format for Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-1
0-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbLOF.fm
Figures
Figures
0
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Figure 1-10
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
HiPath 3750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
HiPath 3550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
HiPath 3250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
HiPath 3150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
HiPath 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
HiPath 3500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Expansion cabinet rack ECR (not for U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Base Station BS3/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
System Overview HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
HiPath 3750 with Expansion Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame
(MDFU-E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Slot Numbers and Widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of one HiPath 3750 Cabinet. 2-18
Connecting the UPSM to Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Connecting UPSM, Ext. Charging Rectifiers and Battery Packs. . . . . . . 2-20
Dimensions and Slots in the HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Dimensions and Slots in the HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3350 with
PSUP/UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
HiPath 3250 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
HiPath 3250 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3250 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
HiPath 3150 System Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
HiPath 3150 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3150 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
HiPath 3700 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Slot numbers and widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of one HiPath 3700 Cabinet. 2-66
Connecting the UPSM to Battery Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Connecting the UPSM, Ext. Charging Recitifiers and Battery Packs . . . 2-68
HiPath 3500 Dimensions and Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-26
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-15
3000sbLOF.fm
Figures
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33
Figure 2-34
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Bild 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
0-16
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
HiPath 3300 Dimensions and Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption ofHiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Basic Architecture of a HiPath cordless System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
HiPath cordless - Network-wide Roaming and Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Base Station BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Call Management Relationships (Blocks 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Call Management Relationships (Blocks 3 and 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
E911 Expanded Emergency Call Service E911 (for USA only). . . . . . . 3-179
Sample LCR Flow Diagram (Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
General LCR Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-192
General LCR Flow (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196
Sample LCR Flow Diagram (for U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209
Example of a Team with Two Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-261
Example of a Team with Eight Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-264
Team with Eight Members: Default Key Assignments for Tel. A on
key module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-265
Example of Top with One Executive and One Secretary . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-268
Example of Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries. . . . . . . . . . 3-270
Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries: Default Key Assignments
for Executive 1 on key module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-271
Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries: Default Key Assignments
for Secretary 1 on key module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-272
Default Display in Idle State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-293
Example of a Customer-Specific Display in Idle State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-293
HiPath 3000 - Interfaces for Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-424
LAN Connection using the LIM Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
LAN Connection using HiPath HG1500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
IP Trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Options for Implementing the optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Mobile optiClient 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Wireless LAN Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Access Point AP-10 PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
PCMCIA-PC Card SA-PCR PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Station Adapter SA-10 PRO.11 and SA-40 PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Workgroup Bridge WB-10D PRO.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CDRC via IP - TFTP Client in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
CDRC via IP - TCP Client in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
CDRC via IP - TFTP Client in HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
HiPath 3000 - CSTA via IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
HiPath 3000 - Administration over LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
HiPath 3000 - Administration via the LAN Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 via PPP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbLOF.fm
Figures
Figure 4-19
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Remote Administration of Plus Products via PPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
System Administration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Example of Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
The User Interface for the optiPoint 500 Telephone with Display . . . . . . . 6-5
optiPoint 500 - Possible Configurations for Add-On Devices . . . . . . . . . 6-11
optiPoint 500 - Option bays (Adapter Slots) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
The User Interface for the optiset E Telephone with Display . . . . . . . . . 6-21
optiset E - Add-On Devices: Possible Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
optiLog 4me. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Display of an ENB Entry (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Feature Handset Gigaset 2000C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Feature Handset Gigaset 2000C pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Robust Handset Gigaset active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Feature Handset Gigaset 3000 Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Feature Handset Gigaset 3000 Micro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Connecting a Braille Console to optiClient Attendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Jacks for optiPoint IPadapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Main Connections for the optiPoint IPadapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-17
3000sbLOF.fm
Figures
0-18
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbLOT.fm
Tables
Tables
0
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 2-9
Table 2-10
Table 2-11
Table 2-12
Table 2-13
Table 2-14
Table 2-15
Table 2-16
Table 2-17
Table 2-18
Table 2-19
Table 2-20
Table 2-21
Table 2-22
Table 2-23
Table 2-24
Table 2-25
Table 2-26
Table 2-27
Table 2-28
Table 2-29
Table 2-30
Table 2-31
Table 2-32
Table 2-33
Table 2-34
Table 2-35
Table 2-36
Table 2-37
Sales-oriented documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
List of available technical documentation for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Information from the intranet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
HiPath 3000 - System-Related Capacity Limits (Maximum Numbers) . . . 2-4
Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board. . . . . . 2-8
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
UPSM bridging times with different battery packs per cabinet . . . . . . . . 2-18
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
EPSU2 - Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Capacity and bridging period for UPSC-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board. . . . . 2-56
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3700. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
UPSM Bridging Times with Different Battery Packs per Cabinet . . . . . . 2-66
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
HiPath cordless - System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Technical Data for Various Base Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-19
3000sbLOT.fm
Tables
Table 2-38
Table 2-39
Table 2-40
Table 2-41
Table 2-42
Table 2-43
Table 2-44
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
Table 3-9
Table 3-10
Table 3-11
Table 3-12
Table 3-13
Table 3-14
Table 3-15
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Table 6-3
Table 6-4
Table 6-5
Table 6-6
0-20
Subscriber Line Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Trunk and Tie Traffic Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Interfaces for Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges (with J-Y (ST) 2x2x0,6, 0.6 mm
diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Cable Lengths for Direct Trunk and CorNet-N Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000 V1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Distribution of Station Numbers . . . . . . . 2-98
Sample Entries in a Dial-Plan Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
Sample Entries in a Dial-Plan Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203
Sample Outdial Rule Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
HiPath 3000—Deleting Station Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-259
Transfer in Team (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Not Set)
(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-262
Transfer in Team (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Set) (for U.S. Only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-263
Team—Sequence of Operations for Consultation Hold on Second Line 3-263
Transfer in Top (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Not Set)
(Not for U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-269
Transfer in Top (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Set) (for U.S. Only). .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-269
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields . . . . . . . . . 3-345
Long output format - explanation of output fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-352
Supported LEC Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-385
Supported IEC Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-386
Inter-Exchange (IEC) Protocol Calling Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-387
Local Exchange (LEC) Protocol Calling Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-388
Number of required B-channels (HiPath HG 1500 boards) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Services Provided Across the Communications Platform with
Networking
4-11
Technical Requirements for the Service PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Run LED - Meaning of the LED Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Power Supply Status Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
HiPath 3000 Manager E - Example of Status Display of Peripheral Boards . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Variable Password: Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Fixed Password: Fixed User Groups and Their Access Rights . . . . . . . . 5-27
optiPoint 500 Telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Comparison of Features on all optiPoint 500 telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Part Numbers for optiPoint 500 Telephones and Accessories . . . . . . . . . 6-18
optiset E Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Comparison of Features on all optiset E telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sbLOT.fm
Tables
Table 6-7
Table 6-8
Table 6-9
Table 6-10
Table 7-1
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Table 9-1
Table 9-2
Available optiset E adapter configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Adapter Implementation in Primary and/or Secondary Telephone . . . . . 6-32
Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
optiPoint Attendant - Total Number of Function Keys after Addition of Key
Modules and BLFs
6-52
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000 . . . . . . . 7-2
Expansion Limits and Capacities for HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Hardware Capacities HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Compressed Output Format - Explanation of Output Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Long output format - explanation of output fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
0-21
3000sbLOT.fm
Tables
0-22
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
About This Manual
1 Important Notices
1.1 About This Manual
This manual describes the features and hardware of HiPath 3000, which consists of
the following systems:
●
HiPath 3750
●
HiPath 3700
●
HiPath 3550
●
HiPath 3500
●
HiPath 3350
●
HiPath 3300
●
HiPath 3250
●
HiPath 3150
Country-specific features and released applications may vary.
The Sales Information is therefore the only document that contains a binding description of the available features and the hardware scope for your country.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-1
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 3.0 of HiPath 3000
1.2 Major New Features in Version 3.0 of HiPath 3000
Version 3.0 is purely a software version and is provided for all models of the HiPath
3000 product family.
1.2.1 Extended Functionality of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000 V3.0 is the IP convergence platform for small and medium-sized business. The new version optimizes the use in IP environments and its expansion capabilities increase the range of possible uses.
1.2.2 New Features for HiPath 3000 V3.0
●
1-2
The maximum number of call destination lists for call forwarding destinations has
been increased to adapt to the increased expansion capabilities
(Section 3.2.4 on page 3-48):
–
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700: 500 call destination lists
–
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500: 376 call destination lists
–
HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300: 70 call destination lists
●
The maximum number of Team/Top configurations for HiPath 3750 and HiPath
3700 has been increased from 150 to 500 (see Section 3.11.14 on page 3-261).
●
Customer-specific display (Section 3.11.16 on page 3-293)
●
Collect call barring for ISDN trunks (Section 3.14.24 on page 3-382)
●
SMR-3 and later: B channel allocation (Section 3.3.6 on page 3-108)
●
SMR-3 and later: Message waiting indication (MWI) at the trunk interface
(Section 3.4.8 on page 3-121)
●
SMR-3 and later: Automatic call completion on no reply (CCNR) on the trunk interface (Section 3.6.20 on page 3-180)
●
SMR-3 and later: CLIP no screening (Section 3.6.21 on page 3-181)
●
SMR-3 and later: QSig networking (not for U.S.):
System telephone lock-reset code (Section 3.12.19.9 on page 3-321)
COS changeover (Section 3.12.19.10 on page 3-322)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 3.0 of HiPath 3000
1.2.3 HiPath 3000 in the LAN
IP Payload Switching (see Section 4.4)
IP payload switching optimizes communication between LAN-based IP workpoint clients.
In the past, two B-channels (with two DSP resources) in the HiPath HG 1500 and HiPath 3000-internal switching network were seized for internal network calls.
In HiPath 3000 V3.0 and later, VoIP voice data (payload) is transferred directly between two IP workpoint clients in the network. When this happens, both IP workpoint
clients have full access to all system features.
Payload switching is also implemented for IP networking (PBX routing).
By ceasing to use B-channels, we have managed to preserve HiPath HG 1500 resources and facilitate a higher volume of network-internal call traffic.
Section 4.2.2.8 contains information on determining the required number of HiPath
HG1500 boards (B channels) using the available IP Workpoint Clients.
1.2.4 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V3.0
Upgrading from HiPath 3000 V1.2
Upgrade by replacing the system software.
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E Office Rel. 1.0/2.2/3.0 or Hicom 150 H V1.0
see Section 1.3.6 on page 1-24
1.2.5 New optiPoint 500 Product Family (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint 500 telephones (see Section 6.2 on page 6-2) handle the digital communication of voice and data (voice communication only for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy). The three dialog keys and the display guarantee convenient and
interactive operation. Furthermore, the key lamp principle visualizes the activated
functions.
With the exception of optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint
500 telephones have a USB 1.1 interface. This allows for PC-supported telephoning
and Internet access over the USB interface of a PC.
The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF allow you to increase the
number of available function keys.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-3
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 3.0 of HiPath 3000
The different optiPoint 500 adapters provide a flexible extension to the telephone
workstation. Additional devices (such as personal computers, fax equipment, telephones, headsets) can be connected quickly because it is easy to build them on to
the bottom of the telephones (not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy)
and because the adapters are “plug’n’play”.
The optiPoint 500 telephones are compatible with the optiset E telephones. It is possible to operate both telephone families on one UP0/E board. You can also use telephones from the two families in mixed host-client configurations (earlier called the
master-slave or primary-secondary configuration).
1-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3 Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
Unless otherwise indicated, the new features listed below are available in Version
1.2.
1.3.1.1 Systems for free-standing installation (HiPath 3750 only) and wall mounting
HiPath 3750 (see Section 2.2 on page 2-6)
Figure 1-1
●
●
HiPath 3750
New CBCPR control board:
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
The first V.24 interface on the control board has been changed to a 9-pin
connector; the second V.24 interface is still a 25-pin connector.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
or CMI (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (Com Server V1.0 or later) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
–
Alternative music on hold using the MPPI module (optional)
You can have up to four SLC16 boards and up to 250 handsets for each system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-5
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3550 (see Section 2.3 on page 2-21)
Figure 1-2
●
1-6
HiPath 3550
New CBCC control board:
–
2 S0 interfaces integrated on the CBCC
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
The first V.24 interface has been integrated into the control board (9-pin); the
second V.24 interface (25-pin) is optional.
–
Up to 7 new BS3/1 base stations (max. 32 handsets) can be connected to
the UP0/E ports on the control board.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
and/or CMI (2-channel single-cell solution with BS3/S at the UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The CMA clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for CMI and networking (4-channel multi-cell solution with BS3/1 at UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (V.24/E module) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
●
You can connect up 16 base stations (for example, 16 x BS3/1 or 5 x BS3/3 +
1 x BS3/1 or 8 x BS2/2 or 8 x BS3/3 over 2 UP0/E) using the SLC16 (max. 64
handsets).
●
New UPSC-D uninterruptible power supply.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3350 (see Section 2.4 on page 2-33)
Figure 1-3
●
●
HiPath 3350
New CBCC control board:
–
2 S0 interfaces integrated on the CBCC
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
The first V.24 interface has been integrated into the control board (9-pin); the
second V.24 interface (25-pin) is optional.
–
Up to 3 new BS3/1 base stations (max. 32 handsets) can be connected directly to the UP0/E ports on the control board.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
and/or CMI (2-channel single-cell solution with BS3/S at UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The CMA clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for CMI and network (4-channel multi-cell solution with BS3/1 at UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (V.24/E module) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
New UPSC-D uninterruptible power supply
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-7
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3250 (see Section 2.5 on page 2-43)
Figure 1-4
1-8
HiPath 3250
●
New housing
●
New SBSCO control board
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the integrated flash memory
–
Up to 3 new BS3/1 base stations (max. 8 handsets) can be connected directly to the UP0/E ports on the control board
–
A 9-pin V.24 interface (V.24 adapter cable no longer required)
–
CMS clock module for CMI (2-channel cordless solution with BS3/S and
BS3/1 at UP0/E ports) (optional)
–
LIM module for LAN connection to central administration system (optional)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3150 (see Section 2.6 on page 2-49)
Figure 1-5
HiPath 3150
●
New housing
●
New SBSCS control board
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the integrated flash memory
–
A 9-pin V.24 interface (V.24 adapter cable no longer required)
–
CMS clock module for single-cell solution with a BS3/S at the UP0/E port
(optional)
–
LIM module for LAN connection to central administration system (optional)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-9
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.1.2 Systems for installation in 19’’ cabinets
To increase the options for using the system, additional 19’’ models are provided. The
housing designs have been optimized for integration into 19’’cabinets.
HiPath 3700 (see Section 2.7 on page 2-54)
Figure 1-6
●
1-10
HiPath 3700
New CBCPR control board:
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
The first V.24 interface on the control board has been changed to a 9-pin
connector; the second V.24 interface is still a 25-pin connector.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
or CMI (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (Com Server V1.0 or later) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
–
Alternative music on hold using the MPPI module (optional)
●
You can have up to four SLC16 boards and up to 250 handsets per system.
●
New ECR expansion cabinet rack (not for U.S. and Canada)
You can install a battery pack (48 V/7 Ah, 4 x 12 V) to run the UPSM as an uninterruptible power supply unit. You will required one ECR for each system cabinet.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3500 (see Section 2.8 on page 2-70)
Figure 1-7
●
HiPath 3500
New CBRC control board:
–
2 S0 interfaces have been integrated into the CBRC
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
The V.24 interface has been integrated into the control board (9-pin)
–
Up to 7 new BS3/1 base stations (max. 32 handsets) can be connected directly to the UP0/E ports on the control board.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
and/or CMI (2-channel single-cell solution with BS3/S at the UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The CMA clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for CMI and networking (4-channel multi-cell solution with BS3/1 at the UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (V.24/E module) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
●
New ECR expansion cabinet rack (not for U.S. and Canada)
You can install a battery pack (48 V/7 Ah, 4 x 12 V) to run the UPSC-DR as an
uninterruptible power supply unit.
●
New uninterruptible power supply: UPSC-DR
●
New peripheral boards: HXGSR2, SLU8R, 8SLAR, TLA4R, TS2R, STLS4R
●
New options: EXMR, UAMR, OPALR, STRBR
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-11
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
HiPath 3300 (see Section 2.9 on page 2-78)
Figure 1-8
●
1-12
HiPath 3300
New CBRC control board:
–
2 S0 interfaces have been integrated into the CBCC
–
The 16-MB MMC multimedia card replaces the FMC 8/10 flash card
–
V.24 interface has been integrated into the control board (9-pin)
–
Up to 3 new BS3/1 base stations (max. 32 handsets) can be connected directly to the UP0/E ports on the control board.
–
The CMS clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for networking
and/or CMI (2-channel single-cell solution with BS3/S at the UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The CMA clock module replaces the CGMC clock generator for CMI and networking (4-channel multi-cell solution with BS3/1 at the UP0/E port) (optional)
–
The LIM module replaces the LAN interface (V.24/E module) (optional)
–
The IMODC integrated analog modem replaces the IMOD (PCMCIA) (optional)
●
New ECR expansion cabinet rack (not for U.S. and Canada)
You can install a battery pack (48 V/7 Ah, 4 x 12 V) to run the UPSC-DR as an
uninterruptible power supply unit.
●
New uninterruptible power supply: UPSC-DR
●
New peripheral boards: HXGSR2, SLU8R, 8SLAR, TLA4R, STLS4R
●
New options: EXMR, UAMR, OPALR, STRBR
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.1.3 Boards
New control boards
A new hardware platform with optimized control boards is now available for the entire
range of models. Essentially, a new microprocessor system has been integrated to
guarantee the performance of the system for the enhanced functionality of future versions.
The control boards of the basic HiPath 3550, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3350 and HiPath
3300 systems have 2 S0 interfaces. This means that the slot, otherwise required for
a S0 board, is available for other peripheral boards.
The UP0/E ports on the control boards have been modified so you can now connect
up the new BS3/1 and BS3/S base stations directly for the integrated cordless solutions.
The first V.24 interface has been integrated into the control boards for all models. Mechanical design: 9-pin sub-D connector.
The second V.24 interface is still the same in all models (apart from HiPath 3250 and
HiPath 3150) and is still available as an option (standard in HiPath 3750 and HiPath
3700). Mechanical design: 25-pin sub-D connector.
The new MMC multimedia card with a capacity of 16 MB is now being used in all models in the range. The increased memory capacity
of the multimedia card also provides memory for the log files of the
Security feature by default.
New Peripheral Boards
Implementation of integrated Voice Mail System Xpressions Compact using the following new boards:
●
IVML8/IVML24 for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
●
IVMP8 for HiPath 3350
●
IVMP8R for HiPath 3300
●
IVMS8 for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350
●
IVMS8R for HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-13
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
New Options
In connection with the control boards, the following new optional boards are available.
CMS (Clock Module Standard)
The CMS module replaces the old CGMC clock generator. The
CMS must be used in the following situations:
Clock generator for the master system in the network
●
Clock generator for HiPath cordless during operation with the
●
SLC16 board
Clock generator for a single-cell cordless solution (2-channel
●
mode) with BS3/S base station
CMA (Clock Module ADPCM)
The CMA module is implemented exclusively in the HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems. The module
is required as a clock generator for HiPath cordless (4-channel
mode) with the BS3/1 base station when the new control boards
are connected directly to the UP0/E ports.
LIM (LAN Interface Module)
The LIM module enables you to integrate all HiPath 3000 models
into TCP/IP-based LANs economically for
central system administration (TCP)
●
call detail recording (CDRC)
●
APS transfer or
●
fault management.
●
A 10BaseT interface (10 Mbit) with an RJ45 jack is available for
connecting to the LAN.
IMODC (Integrated analog modem)
The format of the printed-circuit board on the integrated analog
modem for remote maintenance (remote access via analog
trunks) is new. The module is plugged into the appropriate slots
on the control boards (this is not possible in HiPath 3250 or HiPath 3150).
MPPI (optional music on hold from Beyertone)
The plug-in MPPI module can be used universally in all HiPath
3000 models making an economical solution available for an alternative music on hold.
1-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.1.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR for HiPath 3000 (Not for U.S. and Canada)
When installing the system, an ECR (see also Section 2.8.4.4 on page 2-77) in the
19’’ cabinet is required if
●
emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system
requires uninterruptible power. The necessary battery pack (48 V/7 Ah, 4 x 12 V)
is installed in the ECR.
●
the EPSU2-R external power supply unit is necessary. EPSU2-R is installed in
the ECR.
Figure 1-9
Expansion cabinet rack ECR (not for U.S. and Canada)
One ECR per system is required for both HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 and one ECR
per system cabinet is required for HiPath 3700.
Four height units are required for mounting an ECR in a 19’’ cabinet (one height unit
is approximately 1.7’’ = 43 mm).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-15
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.2 Extended Functionality of HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300 V1.2
Extended Capacity Limits (HiPath 3350 only)
Now that hardware restrictions have ceased to apply, the following maximum technical configuration is possible:
●
Up to 36 analog subscribers and 8 digital subscribers (with UPSC-D only)
OR
●
Up to 24 digital subscribers and 4 analog subscribers.
Additional subscribers can be connected up using optiPoint 500 adapters or optiset
E adapters (with a local power supply only).
CSTA interface
This is the same as the CSTA interface in the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 systems.
optiClient Attendant
The PC attendant console optiClient Attendant can be implemented to the same extent as in the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 systems.
Hicom Attendant BLF
The busy lamp field Hicom Attendant BLF can be implemented to the same extent as
in the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 systems.
1-16
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.3 New Features for HiPath 3000 V1.2
The functionality has been extended to include the following features:
New features in Hicom 150 H V1.0 or later
(Delta: Hicom 150 E Office Release 2.2 –> Hicom 150 H V1.0)
●
Optimized user interface for the CMI handset (see Section 6.6):
–
The simulation of the optiset E user interface on the CMI comfort handset enables users to use the system features that they are already familiar with
from their optiset E telephones.
–
You can receive and send internal text messages on the CMI handset.
–
A CMI handset can now be operated at the same time as an optiPoint 500 or
optiset E telephone using a single number.
●
Extended line keys (MULAP) (see Section 3.11.14)
The extra MULAP functionality provides optimized trunk keys for teams and executive/secretary configurations.
●
Mobile PIN (Flex Call) (see Section 3.3.5)
The mobile PIN makes it possible for an employee to make calls using colleagues’ telephones in which case the CDR information is assigned to his or her
own connection.
●
Relocate (see Section 3.11.11)
This feature allows an optiPoint 500 or optiset E station to use a procedure to
change the assignment between the physical telephone port and the logical station data (user profile).
●
Advice of charges at start of call (AOC-S) (see Section 3.13.2)
The AOC-S feature makes information on the expected charges available at the
start of the call. A prerequisite for this is that the call detail information must be
sent by the public exchange or by the carrier. AOC-S is provided in addition to
advice of charges during call (AOC-D) and advice of charges at end of call
(AOC-E).
●
Dual key assignment on the optiset E key module (see page 6-19)
External telephone numbers can be assigned to the second level of both the keys
on the optiset E key module and the programmable keys on the optiset E telephone. The first level is still available for programming with features or telephone
numbers.
●
Central system administration using SNMP (Section 4.8.3)
All products in the HiPath 3000 family can be administered in TCP/IP-based
LANs using SNMP (simple network management protocol) from a central office.
The system is connected to the LAN using either the optional LIM module (LAN
interface) or the HiPath HG1500.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-17
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
●
Extension of the CSTA functionality (see Section 3.17)
The CSTA interface has been extended to include the CSTA Phase 3 protocol to
ISO. The Phase 2 protocol to ECMA is still supported. The CSTA interface is
available on all systems for V1.2 or later (with the exception of HiPath 3250 and
HiPath 3150).
New features in HiPath 3000 V1.2 or later
(Delta: Hicom 150 H V1.0 –> Hicom 150 H V1.2)
1-18
●
Editing dialing/en-bloc dialing (see Section 3.9.13)
This feature allows users at optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones with displays
to delete digits already entered and to enter new ones. Dialing commences when
you press the OK button or when you lift the handset. If the handset has already
been picked up, dialing commences when you press the speaker key. If this feature is activated, en-bloc dialing only can be executed on the telephone; automatic dialing is not available.
●
Reject calls (see Section 3.2.24)
In the ringing state, initial incoming calls (internal or external) can be rejected by
pressing a button. The rejected call then follows the entries in Call Management
(e.g. the call is forwarded immediately to voicemail).
●
Procedures on keys (see Section 3.11.15)
Users can store procedures on programmable keys (first level only). This is done
in the same sequence used when executing the procedure normally.
●
Saving the account code for last number redial (see Section 3.6.1)
Automatic storage of the account code in the redial memory can be activated
throughout the system. If this feature is activated, the account code is stored automatically and can be re-used by means of the last number redial.
●
Extended functionality of V4.0 of the optiClient Attendant (see Section 6.7.2)
New features:
–
Names have replaced telephone numbers in the busy indication fields
–
Display for internal/external busy
–
Identification of the recall from parked (shown in the status line)
–
An external call that has been parked or put on hold is connected to the
optiClient Attendant party
–
Displays for reject and recall in the talk state
–
Status displays for call forwarding during ringing state (the party you are
looking for is displayed)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
●
Extension of the central call data record (see Section 3.13.8)
The CDRC call data record has been extended to allow you to display calls > 24
hours. Allocation of sections of the call to the basic call after an internal/external/
external conference has been implemented.
●
Call priorities for internal calls from voicemail/auto attendant (see Section 3.2.3,
immediate call waiting when busy)
You can define a code which will ensure that internal calls from voicemail/auto
attendant to the attendant console, for example, will be given the same priority as
external calls.
This new code is also used for immediate call waiting when busy. If the code has
been configured for the called party, the caller gets immediate call waiting with a
ring tone instead of a busy tone.
●
Optimization of serviceability (see Section 5.3)
Various features in the HiPath 3000 Manager E system have been optimized:
–
Improved error diagnosis using Tracestop at the telephone
–
Improved efficiency in the service due to faster APS transfer
–
Controlled release of remote connection
–
Administration of Plus Products using joint service access
–
Extension of the ISDN message decoder
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-19
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.4 Optimization of the HiPath cordless
The integrated cordless solution HiPath cordless has been enhanced to include a
new range of features and functions and network-wide features (see Section 2.10 on
page 2-86).
New Base Stations
Figure 1-10
Base Station BS3/1
The current BS2/2 base station is being replaced by the new base stations that have
been developed:
●
●
●
BS3/1 base station:
–
with one UP0/E port
–
designed for multi-cell mode (with handover)
–
two or 4 voice channels depending on the connection (CMS/CMA)
BS3/S base station:
–
with one UP0/E port
–
exclusively for single-cell mode (no handover)
–
two or 4 voice channels depending on the connection (CMS/CMA)
BS3/3 base station:
–
with three UP0/E ports
–
designed for multi-cell mode (with handover)
–
up to 12 voice channels depending on the connection
The BS3/3 base station can only be operated on the SLC16 board.
1-20
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
Outdoor housing for base stations
A special outdoor housing (with no heating) is provided for installing the base station
outside buildings or inside buildings with particularly harsh environmental conditions
(splash water or dust for example).
Enhanced cordless configuration for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
Up to 4 SLC16 boards can be implemented for Version 1.2 or later. This means that
the cordless configuration can be extended as follows:
●
up to 64 BS3/1 base stations (21 to 32 BS3/3 base stations depending on the
connection of the base station)
●
up to 250 handsets (max. 120 per SLC16 board)
Cordless networking features
●
Network-wide roaming
Version 1.2 and later of the HiPath 3000 system family support network-wide
roaming for up to 16 nodes. (Network-wide roaming is also available in conjunction with HiPath 4000.)
●
Network-wide handover
HiPath 3000 supports the handover function for switching radio cells between two
systems during the course of a call. The clocks in the systems are synchronized
by means of air synchronization of two base stations in close proximity. This function supports up to 4 nodes.
The synchronization base stations must be able to "see" one another electronically. In other words, the radio ranges of these base stations have to overlap. The
base stations for air synchronization are only used for exchanging clock information; calls are not processed by these base stations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-21
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.5 HiPath 3000 in the LAN
In the LAN network the following features are available in V1.2 and later:
Implementation of the LAN interface module LIM (see
Section 4.2.1 on page 4-2)
Allows the HiPath 3000 to be implemented in a LAN network
with applications such as administration using IP (TCP), fault
monitoring (SNMP) and display of call details (CDRC).
HiPath Gateway 1500 V2.0 (HiPath HG1500) (see
Section 4.2.2 on page 4-3)
HiPath HG1500 V2.0, the successor to the extremely popular
HiPath HG1500 V1.1, has been integrated into HiPath 3000
as a board. This means that HiPath 3000 migrate to communication servers in the corporate LAN. HiPath HG1500 allows
Ethernet LANs (10/100 Mbit/s) to connect directly to HiPath
3000. Modified hardware with a second LAN interface
(10 Mbit/s) is used with the new version 2.0 of the HiPath
HG1500.
IP Trunking (see Section 4.3 on page 4-7)
Implementation of the HiPath HG 1500 board allows HiPath
3000 systems to be networked over IP (CorNet-N “tunneling”
over IP with a maximum of 16 nodes and 1000 telephone
numbers).
The main advantage for users of IP telephony is a significant
cost saving through an infrastructure for data and voice. In
addition, the IP trunking functionality offers network-wide features such as call pickup, group call and other similar features.
HiPath AllServe 150
HiPath AllServe 150 is a solution within the framework of the
Siemens Enterprise convergence architecture. HiPath
AllServe 150 provides various applications on the basis of a
standard platform (PC server) for distributed network components and their users. At the same time, HiPath AllServe 150
allows communication and information systems (HiPath
3000) to be networked over the IP network and creates a
standard communication platform with distributed components.
1-22
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
optiClient 130 (see Section 4.5.1 on page 4-19)
The PC client optiClient 130 V2.0 allows innovative voice/
data communication over IP-based corporate networks. optiClient 130 V2.0 is available to the customer with two different
interfaces:
The “Phone” user interface simulates all of the functions
●
of an optiset E telephone.
The “Office” user interface is practically identical to the
●
user interface of the old optiClient 130 V1.x.
HiPath Wireless BreezeNET (see Section 4.6.1 on
page 4-24)
Siemens HiPath Wireless products provide a wireless network platform over which PCs, notebooks and local sub-networks can be networked with one another without the use of
wires. In addition, this platform can be used within the HiPath
environment for the mobile networking of IT terminals (handheld units, mobile IP telephones, clients and similar products). The radio components are fully compatible with the HiPath products and make available all LAN solutions in the
HiPath environment as mobile units.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-23
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
1.3.6 Upgrading to HiPath 3000 V1.2
Upgrades are available for wall-mounted models only.
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficePro Rel. 1.0/2.2/3.0 or HiPath 3750 V1.0
The upgrade package consists of a CBCPR control board, an MMC multimedia card
with system software V1.2 and customer documentation on CD-ROM. The following
components have to be replaced:
●
the control board (the new CBCPR control board will be used)
●
the system cabinets — to allow unrestricted expansions — (Germany only)
●
the following option boards, if available:
–
the CGM/CGMC clock generator replaces the CMS module
–
the IMOD analog modem replaces the IMODC
–
the LAN interface com server replaces the LIM module
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficePoint/Com Rel. 1.0
When upgrading, the basic unit has to be replaced.
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficeCom Rel. 2.2/3.0 or HiPath 3550 V1.0
The upgrade package consists of the CBCC control board, an MMC multimedia card
with system software V1.2 as well as customer documentation on CD-ROM. The following components have to be replaced:
●
the control board (the new CBCC control board CBCC will be used)
●
the following optional boards, if available:
–
the CGM/CGMC clock generator replaces the CMS module
–
the IMOD analog modem replaces the IMODC
–
the LAN interface com server replaces the LIM module
An existing SLC16 board for cordless base stations does not need to be replaced.
Base stations (old BS2/2 or new BS3/1) must only be operated in this case at the
SLC16 ports.
1-24
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Major New Features in Version 1.2 of HiPath 3000
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficePoint Rel. 2.2/3.0 or HiPath 3350 V1.0
The upgrade package consists of the CBCC control board, an MMC multimedia card
with system software V1.2 as well as customer documentation on CD-ROM. The following components have to be replaced:
●
the control board (the new CBCC control board will be used)
The new control board allows up to 3 base stations to be connected directly to specially designed UP0/E ports in the basic unit.
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficePointC Rel. 2.2/3.0 or Hicom 150 H OfficePointC V1.0
There are no plans for upgrading the OfficePointC system. In exceptional circumstances the upgrade package for HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3350 can be used.
Upgrading from Hicom 150 E OfficeOne/Start Rel. 1.0/2.2/3.0 or HiPath 3250/HiPath 3150
V1.0
When upgrading, the basic unit has to be replaced.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-25
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Sales-Oriented Documentation
1.4 Sales-Oriented Documentation
Store and ordering procedure for the following items:
●
German and English at the Fürth delivery center (LZF)
Fax: +49 911 654 4271
Mail: lzf@znnbg.siemens.de
Intranet: http://c4bs.spls.de/
●
Other languages and addresses
see list of stores at the following intranet address:
http://intranet.icn.siemens.de/vz_dc_2/en/lagerort.htm
Table 1-1
Sales-oriented documentation
Documentation
Languages
Data sheets
You can access data sheets over the Internet using the following address
http://w4.siemens.de/networks/hipath/en/download/index.htm
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3750/HiPath 3550/HiPath
3700/HiPath 3500
Brazilian, German, English, Portuguese, Slovakian, Spanish
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3350/HiPath 3250/HiPath
3150/HiPath 3300
German, English, Portuguese, Spanish
optiClient Attendant
Danish, German, English, Portuguese, Swedish
HiPath cordless
German, English
HiPath HG1500
German, English
optiset E phones
German, English, Spanish
optiPoint 500 phones
German, English, Spanish
HiPath 3000 Manager C
German, English
Brochures and promotional gifts
Please contact ICN EN Product Promotion.
1-26
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Technical Documentation
1.5 Technical Documentation
Store and ordering procedure for the following items:
Fürth delivery center (LZF)
Fax: +49 911 654 4271
Mail: lzf@znnbg.siemens.de
Intranet: http://c4bs.spls.de/
Table 1-2
List of available technical documentation for HiPath 3000
Documentation
●
●
Order number
Medium:
P31003 = electronic
A31003 = paper
Language:
xx = Language code
(e.g. 76 for English)
Electronic service manual HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0 on P31003-H1030-S403-*-6Z20
CD-ROM in 7 languages (English, German,
French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch)
Electronic system description HiPath 3000 V1.2P31003-H1030-X100-*-7418
3.0 on CD-ROM in 2 languages (English, German)
Customer documentation V3.0 on CD-ROM
(Contains all customer documentation for HiPath
3000 V3.0 in 7 languages)
P31003-H1012-C130-*-6Z19
System accessory pack HiPath 3000 V3.0 for all
systems, including the following parts:
System administration Assistant TC
●
Operating instructions optiPoint Attendant
●
Operating instructions DTMF/DP telephones
●
Operating instructions ISDN telephones
●
A31003-H1012-C116-*-xx19
Accessory pack optiPoint 500 phones in 7 languag- A31003-H8400-B989-*-6Z19
es
Accessory pack optiset E entry
A31003-M1550-B829-3-xx19
Accessory pack optiset E basic
A31003-M1550-B830-3-xx19
Accessory pack optiset E standard, optiset E advance plus/comfort, advance conference/conference
A31003-M1550-B831-3-xx19
Accessory pack optiset E memory
A31003-M1550-B832-3-xx19
Operating and installation instructions
optiClient Attendant V5.0
A31003-M1551-B874-*-xx19
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-27
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Information from the Intranet
1.6 Information from the Intranet
You can access the most up-to-date information on important topics over the
Siemens intranet. Here is a selection of what is available:
Table 1-3
Information from the intranet
Topic
Intranet URL
http://www.hipath.com
ICN EN HO Product Portfolio
http://netinfo4.wit.siemens.de/icnenho/product
Training Institute
http://intranet.icn.siemens.de/central-sales/training/eng/index.htm
Documentation Center
http://intranet.icn.siemens.de/vz_dc_2/en/index.htm
Electronic Documentation
http://netinfo2.icn.siemens.de/e_doku/en/index.htm
TopInfo-T Productcatalog
http://opus1.mchh.siemens.de:8118/
License Service Center Witten http://www.siewit.de
1-28
Sales Information
HiPath 3000 V1.2
http://netinfo4.wit.siemens.de/icnenho/product/
Hicom_150H_V1.2/sales_release_docu
Sales Information
HiPath 3000 V3.0
http://netinfo4.wit.siemens.de/icnenho/product/
hipath_3000_13/product/vf_doku
Service Information
http://netinfo4.wit.siemens.de/icnenho/
info_service
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Privacy and Data Security
1.7 Privacy and Data Security
Handling Personal Data
This telephone system uses and processes personal data (as in call detail recording,
telephone displays and customer data records).
In Germany, the processing and use of such data is subject to various regulations,
including those of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz,
BDSG). Observe all applicable laws in other countries.
The objective of privacy legislation is to prevent infringements of an individual’s right
to privacy based on the use or misuse of personal data.
By protecting data against misuse during all stages of processing, privacy legislation
also protects the material interests of the individual and of third parties.
Guidelines Applicable to Siemens AG Employees
Employees of Siemens AG are bound to safeguard trade secrets and personal data
under the terms of the company’s work rules.
It is imperative to observe the following rules to ensure that the statutory provisions
relating to service (on-site or remote) are strictly followed. This safeguards the interests of the customer and offers added personal protection.
Guidelines Governing the Handling of Data
A conscientious and responsible approach helps protect data and ensure privacy:
●
Ensure that only authorized persons have access to customer data.
●
Use the password features of the system with no exceptions. Never give passwords to an unauthorized person orally or in writing.
●
Ensure that no unauthorized person can ever process (store, modify, transmit,
disable or delete) or use customer data.
●
Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media (such as backup diskettes or log printouts. This applies to service calls as well as storage and
transport.
●
Ensure that data media that are no longer needed are completely destroyed and
that documents are not stored or left in places which are accessible to the public.
●
Work closely with your customer contact; this promotes trust and reduces
your workload.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
1-29
3000sb1.fm
Important Notices
Feedback/Comments
1.8 Feedback/Comments
To continually improve this system description, the editorial team welcomes your
comments. We would particularly like to know your views on the following:
●
Areas that need more information or graphics.
●
Areas that have too many details.
●
Areas that are difficult to understand.
●
Issues you would like to include.
Outside of the U.S., please send your comments to:
Siemens AG
Fachredaktion
ICN EN HO DC 4
Hofmannstrasse 51
D-81359 Munich
GERMANY
Fax.: + 49 89 722 33959
Key word:
System Description HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0 (please also specify the part number)
Also include your address, telephone and fax number so we can contact you if necessary. In the U.S., please refer to the reader comment form at the back of this document for information on how to submit comments about this manual.
1-30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
2 System Overview
Electrical Environment and Applications
HiPath 3000 has been designed for use in dwellings, business and industry. When the
system is operated in an industrial environment, additional measures may be necessary for ensuring immunity from electromagnetic radiation (refer to Section 2.15.3,
“Environmental Conditions”).
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3250
HiPath 3150
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3300
optiPoint 500 advance
optiPoint key module
optiPoint 500 standard optiPoint 500 basic /
economy
optiPoint BLF
Figure 2-1
optiPoint
acoustic adapter
●
analog adapter
●
recorder adapter
●
ISDN adapter
●
phone adapter
●
optiPoint 500 entry
System Overview HiPath 3000
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-1
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
System Families and Accompanying Models
To increase the options for using the system, additional 19’’ models are provided.
The housing designs have been optimized for installation in 19’’ cabinets.
The individual housing designs and the variable connecting capabilities allow the following HiPath 3000 systems to cover a wide customer range.
This system description contains information on all systems. Information on marketing individual models in different countries can be obtained at the responsible locations.
Starting with Version 3.0, all models in the HiPath 3000 system family (not HiPath
3250 and HiPath 3150) can be operated either as conventional telecommunications
systems (TC systems) or as IP systems only. In this case, the IP station connects
directly to the HiPath HG 1500 boards.
●
2-2
Systems for free-standing installation (HiPath 3750 only) and wall mounting
–
HiPath 3750, which consists of one basic cabinet and up to two expansion
cabinets, is the most powerful and comprehensive system in this family. Up
to 384 subscriber lines are possible when it is used as a TC system. Up to
500 IP subscribers can be connected when it is used as a pure IP system.
–
HiPath 3550 is a communication system for medium capacity demands of
up to 72 digital or 108 analog subscriber lines when used as a TC system or
a maximum of 188 IP subscribers when used as an IP system.
–
HiPath 3350, which has a maximum of 24 digital or 36 analog subscriber
lines, is the scaled-down version of the HiPath 3550. It is capable of operating up to 16 mobile stations. As a pure IP system, up to 62 IP subscribers
can be connected.
–
HiPath 3250 offers a capacity of 16 subscriber lines (including 8 mobile stations) in a single-board solution. An external power supply unit provides the
power.
–
HiPath 3150 represents the smallest system in the family. This system offers
a capacity of 6 subscriber lines in a single-board solution (an HiPath 3250
board with less equipment). It can also operate up to 8 handsets by connecting up a BS3/S base station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
●
Systems for installation in 19’’ cabinets
–
HiPath 3700, which consists of one basic cabinet and up to 2 expansion cabinets, is the most power system in this family. Both housing cabinets are identical to those of the HiPath 3750. Up to 384 subscriber lines are possible
when used as a TC system. When used as a pure IP system, up to 500 IP
subscribers can be connected.
–
HiPath 3500, when used as a TC system, meets medium capacity demands
with up to 48 digital or 44 analog subscriber lines and 32 mobile stations.
When used as an IP system, it can support up to 188 IP subscribers.
–
HiPath 3300, with a maximum of 24 digital or 20 analog subscriber lines, is
the scaled-down version of the HiPath 3500. In addition, it can operate up to
16 mobile stations. As a pure IP system, up to 62 IP subscribers can be connected.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-3
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
System-Related Capacity Limits
2.1 System-Related Capacity Limits
The information in the following two tables applies for fully-equipped systems, where
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 are laid out as three-cabinet systems.
Deviating capacity limits can be determined for sales purposes.
Table 2-1
HiPath 3000 - System-Related Capacity Limits (Maximum Numbers)
System
Stations/
Workpoint
Clients
(Any combinations up to
the maximum
number are
possible.)
Analog
Digital
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
(not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
384
384
44 (1081)
1
48 (72 )
4
4
1
4
2
1
16 (24 )
4
–
16 (24 )
Additional stations over
phone adapter
116
IP
500
192
96
–
–
Cordless
250
64 (BS on
SLC16) /
32 (BS on
CBCC)
16
8
8
Total stations TDM (Hosts
(master) incl. cordless)
384
84 (1561)
44 (601)
16
14
64
on max.
4 SLC16
16 on
SLC16
or
7 on CBCC
3
3
1
120 digital
(B channels)
or
120 analog
60 digital
(B channels)
or
60 analog
16 digital
(B channels)
or
16 analog
4 digital
(B channels)
2 digital
(B channels)
8
4
2
–
–
max. 16 /
1000
max. 16 /
1000
max. 16 /
1000
–
–
2
(1 x 9-pin,
1 x 25-pin)
2
(1 x 9-pin,
1 x 25-pin)
2
(1 x 9-pin,
1 x 25-pin)
1
(9-pin)
1
(9-v)
Base stations
Trunks
HiPath HG 1500 boards
IP network nodes/station numbers in the
LAN
V.24 interfaces
48
(721
12 (361)
)
1 only for specific countries or sales channels
2-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
System-Related Capacity Limits
System
Stations/Workpoint Clients
(Any combinations up to the
maximum number are possible.)
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3300
Analog
384
44
12 (201)
Digital
384
48
16 (241)
Additional stations over
phone adapter
116
48
16 (241)
IP
500
192
96
Cordless
250
32
16
Total stations TDM (Hosts
(Master) incl. cordless)
384
84
44
64
on max.
4 SLC16
7
3
120 digital
(B channels)
or
120 analog
60 digital
(B channels)
or
60 analog
16 digital
(B channels)
or
16 analog
8
4
2
Base stations
Trunks
HiPath HG 1500 boards
IP network nodes/station numbers in the LAN
max. 16 / 1000 max. 16 / 1000 max. 16 / 1000
V.24 interfaces
2
(1 x 9-pin, 1 x
25-pin)
1
(9-pin)
1
(9-pin)
1 only for specific countries or sales channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-5
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2 HiPath 3750
2.2.1 Hardware Overview
The HiPath 3750 system has a modular structure and as the requirements of the customer grow, it can be extended to up to 384 subscriber lines by adding new boards or
cabinets. An additional cabinet is referred to as an expansion cabinet. A HiPath 3750
system can have a maximum of three cabinets. The figure below shows a HiPath
3750 system with a basic cabinet, two expansion cabinets, and a main distribution
frame (MDFU-E).
The basic cabinet has 7 slots for peripheral boards. Expansion cabinets with 8 slots
each for peripheral boards are implemented for expansions. As a result, when 2 expansion cabinets are implemented, a total of 23 slots are available for boards; with
the exception of slot 7 in the basic cabinet, which has an installation width of 45mm,
all slots have an installation width of 30mm.
EC1
BC: Basic cabinet
EC: Expansion cabinet
MDFU-E
EC2
Figure 2-2
2-6
approx. 410 mm
BC
approx. 980 mm
approx. 670 mm
approx. 328 mm Cabinet depth:
- MDFU-E: 126 mm
- System cabinet: 390 mm
HiPath 3750 with Expansion Cabinets and Main Distribution Frame
(MDFU-E)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.2 Board Slots
Nine board slots are available in each cabinet. The following boards are assigned permanent slots:
●
CBCPR central processor board -> slot 01 in the BC
●
UPSM power supply unit -> slot 09 in the BC, slot 18 in EC1, slot 27 in EC2.
Depending on their width, peripheral boards can be inserted in slots 02 to 08 in the
BC, 10 to 17 in EC1 and 19 to 26 in EC2 (the adhesive label beneath each slot identifies the slot) (see Figure 2-3).
Slots in Basic and Expansion Cabinets
BC:
CBCPR
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
UPSM
EC1:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
UPSM
EC2:
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
UPSM
mm
45/30
30
30
30
30
30
30
45/30
90
X10
X20
X30
X40
X50
X60
X70
X80
X90
Figure 2-3
Slot Numbers and Widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2
2.2.2.1 Distribution of PCM Segments
Both expansion cabinets have the same HDLC address, which means that each expansion cabinet must be connected to a separate HDLC highway. The slots in the basic cabinet are assigned to HDLC highway 0. Because HDLC highway 0 is connected
to expansion cabinet 2 and the basic cabinet simultaneously, the basic cabinet receives its own collision-free HDLC addresses.
The new slot 7 implemented in basic 8-slot cabinets is connected in parallel with slots
5 and 6. This slot provides connections for a total of two S2M boards, which means
than only four B channels are available for the third slot (such as TIEL). In the expansion cabinets, every two PCM highways are routed to two adjacent slots in both cabinets, providing 64 B channels for four slots in a three-cabinet system.
The basic and expansion cabinets are connected in a star configuration.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-7
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when you do the
configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more than the 64
time-division multiplex channels that are available. The following table lists the number of time-division multiplex channels that the different boards require.
Table 2-2
Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board
Board
Number of time-division multiplex channels required
CR8N
8
HXGM
16
IVML8
8
IVML24
24
SLA8N, SLA16N, SLA24N Depends on the number of stations
2-8
SLC16
Depends on the number of mobile telephones logged
on
SLMO8, SLMO24
Depends on the number of stations (hosts (master)
and clients (slaves))
STMD8
16
TIEL
4
TML8W
8
TMOM
1
TMS2
30
TMT1
24
Caution
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, it is necessary that you observe the following rules for the configuration of boards:
SLC16
●
A maximum of one SLC16 per PCM segment; if possible, the SLC16 should
stay alone on the PCM segment.
IVML8, IVML24
●
– A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 per system.
– Only in the slot next to the UPSM in the basic cabinet (slot 08).
– You may not insert an SLMO8, SLMO24, or SLC16 on the PCM segment
of the IVML8 or IVML24.
– If there is a TMS2 on the PCM segment of the IVML8 or IVML24, only a
TIEL, TMOM, or TML8W is allowed on the free slot.
SLMO24
●
A maximum of two SLMO24s per PCM segment; the number of connected stations (hosts (master) and clients (slaves)) may not be more than 64.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
The illustrations below show the PCM segments (64 time-division multiplex channels
each) between the different HiPath 3750 system configurations.
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
U
P
S
M
BC
Figure 2-4
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
BC
Figure 2-5
U
P
S
M
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
U
P
S
M
EC1
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-9
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
U
P
S
M
EC1
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
BC
Figure 2-6
2-10
U
P
S
M
1 222222 2
9 012345 6
U
P
S
M
EC2
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.3 Central Components
2.2.3.1 CBCPR
Introduction
The CBCPR board performs all central control and switching functions for HiPath
3750.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 4, 8 and 12 channel CMI connections using the SLC16 board of
the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer).
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem.
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
V.24 Interfaces
●
To connect a service PC, you can access the first V.24 interface (9-pin SUB-D
plug) on the CBCPR from the front of the basic cabinet (after removing the cover).
●
You can access the second V.24 interface (25-pin SUB-D plug) via the backplane of the basic cabinet (X7).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-11
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.3.2 UPSM
Introduction
Each cabinet in HiPath 3750 requires one UPSM (uninterruptible power supply modular). This board integrates the power supply and battery management functions. No
other components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term
battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect one of the following to the UPSM:
●
One battery pack per system cabinet
●
One battery cabinet (BSG 48/38), including battery charger, or
●
One 48 Vdc network
An LED lights up to indicate that the UPSM is in operation. The UPSM must be replaced when defective (LED does not light up).
The UPSM is used in models for all countries. The ring frequency of the modular ring
generator can be parameterized to suit requirements.
Part Numbers
●
UPSM: S30122-K5950-S100, S30122-K5950-A100
●
Battery pack 4 x 12 V/7 Ah: S30122-K5950-Y200
(The connecting cable for the UPSM is part of the battery pack.)
Specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Max. input current consumption: 5.4 A - 2.7 A
●
Max. power consumption: around 430 W
●
Output voltage (battery charging voltage): 42.5 - 55.2 VDC
●
2-12
Output current (battery charge current): ≥ 0.8 A
(sufficient for battery set rating) = 7 Ah)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
●
Bridging times for power supplied via the battery pack 4 x 12 V or 7 Ah:
–
At 100% nominal load: approx. 60 min. bridging time
–
At 60% nominal load: approx. 100 min. bridging time
The battery recharging time is approx. 8.5 h.
Boundary conditions for the specified bridging times:
battery ambient temperature is approx. 22°C
The cut-off voltage is 1.7 V per cell
New batteries are fully charged.
Specifications of the Modular Ring Generator
●
Rated output voltages: 60/75 Vact
●
Output frequencies: 20/25/50 Hz
●
Output power
–
continuous: 4.0 VA
–
peak: 8.0 VA (3 minutes load/ 15 minutes pause)
BSG 48/38
You can use a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet in an upright housing instead of the battery
pack or a 48 V direct current supply to extend the bridging time in the event of a power
failure. The BSG 48/38 battery cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300) consists of
●
an upright housing
●
a charging rectifier
●
a 38 Ah/48 V battery set
The battery cabinet is designed for direct connection to the HiPath 3750 communication system.
2.2.3.3 LIM
The LAN interface module LIM (S30807-Q6930-X) is an optional subboard for all HiPath 3000 central control boards (see also Section 4.2.1).
The board provides an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mb) LAN connection via an 8-pole
RJ45 jack.
You cannot operate the LIM module and a HiPath HG1500 board simultaneously in
one system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-13
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.4 Peripheral Components
2.2.4.1 Subscriber Line Modules
Table 2-3
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
Type/Description
Boards per cabinet
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3750
IVML8
8
8
1
1
x
x
IVML24
24 24 1
1
x
x
SLA16
16
6
15
x
x
Board for connecting up to 16 analog telephones to
the system; also for connecting fax machines, modems, radio paging equipment, equipment for external music on hold, and voice mail systems.
SLA8N
8
6
18
x
-
Board with 8 analog interfaces1
SLA16N
16
6
15
x
x
Board with 16 analog interfaces1
SLA24N
24
6
10
x
x
Board with 24 analog interfaces1
SLC16
16 64 12
4
x
-
Board for connecting up to 16 CMI base stations (mobile telephones) to the system.
SLMO8
8 16 6
18
x
-
83
16
x
x
Board for connecting optiset E telephones. The
SLMO board comes in 8- and 24-port versions.
8 16 6
8
x
x
SLMO24 24 48
STMD8
These boards are for the integrated voice mail functions of the HiPath Xpressions Compact.
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for configuring
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers on the same
board.
1 250 stations are possible in the maximum configuration.
2 Exception: basic cabinets can have 2 SLC16 boards.
3 The maximum number of SLMO24 boards per cabinet depends on the number of slave stations.
2-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.4.2 Trunk Boards
TML8W
8
81
15
x
-
Board with eight ports for connecting loop start
trunks.
STMD8
8 16 6
8
x
-
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for configuring
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers on the same
board.
TMS2
30 30 4
4
x
-
Basic rate interface (BRI) board; can also be used for
tie trunk traffic.
TMST1
24 24 6
6
-
x
ISDN interface board
TMDID
8
3
9
-
x
Analog trunk board for direct inward dialing
TMGL8
8
6
15
-
x
Analog trunk board (ground/loop start)
TMAMF
8
x
-
Analog trunk board for direct inward dialing (MFCR2)
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Capacity
Boards per cabinet
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3750
B channels per board
Table 2-4
1 4 boards max. per cabinet in the case of TML8W with installed GEE8.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-15
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.4.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
TIEL
4
6
18
x
x
Board for providing four two-way analog tie trunk circuits with E&M signaling.
STMD8
8 16 6
8
x
-
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for connecting
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers (no feeding)
on the same board.
HXGM2
2 16 6
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3750 system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
TMS2
30 30 4
4
x
-
Basic rate interface (BRI) board; can also be used for
tie trunk traffic.
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Capacity
Boards per cabinet
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3750
B channels per board
Table 2-5
2.2.4.4 Options
TMOM
2-16
Capacity
Ports per
board
Country
4
U.S.
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3750
Rest of world
Table 2-6
x
-
Type/Description
TMOM board with four ports which provides the interface for connecting a radio paging system. Availability
is country-specific. Standards supported:
ESPA 4.4.3 and ESPA 4.4.5 (6-wire)
●
a,b,c,d interface
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
Table 2-6
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3750
TIEL
Ports per
board
4
x
x
Board for connecting announcement equipment (with
start/stop signaling for announcement before answering) in addition to its tie trunk circuit function.
REAL
Relay connections
4
x
x
Trunk failure transfers
1
Board for relay connection (such as a door opener)
and power failure transfer (ALUM). The board is located on the basic cabinet's backplane.
PFT1
Trunk failure transfers
1
x
-
PFT4
Trunk failure transfers
4
x
-
PFT1 and PFT4 boards for connection to the main distribution frame unit (MDFU-E) and transferring calls
from analog trunks to a telephone in a power failure
(note the signaling method used).
GEE8
Number of 8
analog
trunks supported
x
-
Board for recording call charge pulses from the trunk
on a country-specific basis for up to eight trunks. The
board can be plugged into the TML8 analog trunk circuit board.
HXGM2
(Voice &
Data)
No. of B
channels
16
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3750
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
HXGM2
(Data)
No. of B
channels
16
x
x
CR8N
x
x
The board has eight code transmitters and receivers.
LIM
x
x
Ethernet (10BaseT) interface
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-17
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
2.2.5 Additional System Data
2.2.5.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.2.5.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 850 kJ/h
Cabinet with UPSM
88-264 Vac
Maximum 430 W
Figure 2-7
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of one HiPath 3750 Cabinet
2.2.5.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPSM
Please refer to Section 2.2.3.2 for details on the UPSM.
UPSM Bridging Times with Different Battery Packs per Cabinet
Table 2-7
UPSM bridging times with different battery packs per cabinet
Number of Extensions
2-18
Approximate Bridging Time
7 Ah battery set
38 Ah battery set
10 - 20
1 h 50 min
7 h 30 min
21 - 40
1 h 20 min
6 h 30 min
41 - 68
1h
5h
69 - 80
50 min
4 h 30 min
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
UPSM
UPSM and Battery Packs with no Ext. Charging Rectifiers
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
EC2
UPSM
Battery packs
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
48 V/7 Ah
EC1
48 V/7 Ah
48 V/7 Ah
UPSM
S30122-K5959-Y200
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
BC
Note: This diagram shows
only the schematic connections between the different
components.
Figure 2-8
Connecting the UPSM to Battery Packs
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-19
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3750
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
UPSM
Connecting the UPSM with Battery Packs and Ext. Charging Rectifiers
88-264 V ~
EC2
50-60/25 Hz
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
UPSM
48 V
Charging rectifier
EC1
External battery
48 V/38 Ah
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
e.g. BSG 4838
UPSM
48 V
BC
Note: This diagram shows
only the schematic connections between the different
components.
48 V
Figure 2-9
2-20
Connecting UPSM, Ext. Charging Rectifiers and Battery Packs
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3 HiPath 3550
2.3.1 Hardware Overview
Mechanical Notes
The HiPath 3550 housing intended for wall mounting (Figure 2-10) contains one shelf
with six slot levels. The slot levels, numbered in ascending order from the attachment
side, have the following assignments:
●
Slot levels 1 to 3: peripheral boards (two slots per level).
●
Slot level 4: CBCC control board only.
●
Slot level 5: SIPAC slot (for HiPath 3750 boards).
●
Slot level 6: optional boards (up to 5 boards).
The power supply unit is located on the back of the subrack.
The connecting cables to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections) can be connected directly.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-21
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
Dimensions and Slots
3
Mounting
surface
4
5
OPTIONS
Slot 6
Slot 7
2
PERIPHERAL BOARD
Slot 8
Slot 9
1
450
CBCC
Slot 4
200
Slot 5
460
6
Slot levels
Notes:
When mounting the system on the wall, plan for at least 30 cm of clearance
●
on the board side for replacing the boards.
TS2 and TST1 boards can be installed in slot 7 and slot 9 only.
●
SLA8N, SLA16N, SLA24N, SLC16, and SLMO24 boards can be installed in
●
the SIPAC slot only.
Figure 2-10
2-22
Dimensions and Slots in the HiPath 3550
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.2 Central Components
2.3.2.1 CBCC
Introduction
The CBCC (Central Board with Coldfire Com) board performs all central control and
switching functions for HiPath 3550.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath
3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
supports all 4, 8 and 12 channel CMI connections using the SLC16 board in
the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
ADPCM (CMA) clock module
–
supports the 4-channel CMI connection over BS3/1 to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
in the same way as the CMS clock module small, provides the master clock
for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMA is used.
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer)
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-23
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
Interfaces
●
Eight UP0/E (digital subscriber line interfaces)
With HiPath 3000 V1.2 and later up to 7 BS3/1 base stations can be connected
directly for HiPath cordless
●
Four T/R (analog subscriber line interface)
●
Two S0 interfaces (trunk or subscriber)
●
V.24 interfaces
Initial V.24 interface on the CBCC; the second interface is implemented using the
option V24/1.
2.3.2.2 UPSC-D
Introduction
This board combines the power supply and battery management functions. No other
components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack.
If an HiPath 3750 board has been installed in the HiPath 3550, the UPSC-D cannot
supply sufficient power to the system. Additional power can be made available by
connecting the external EPSU2 power supply (see Section 2.3.5). For this, the
EPSU2's DC connection needs to be connected to the special -48 V-DC input on the
UPSC-D. The UPSC-D's internal 48 V output is deactivated when the external power
supply is connected.
Technical Specifications
2-24
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: approx. 180 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.3 Peripheral Components
2.3.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules
Table 2-8
Capacity
4SLA
4
5
x
-
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
8SLA
8
5
x
x
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
16SLA
16
5
x
-
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
IVMS8
8
8
1
x
x
Board for the integrated voice mail functions of the HiPath
Xpressions Compact.
SLU8
8 16
5
x
x
Board for connecting optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones (UP0/E)
STLS2
2
4
6
x
-
STLS4
4
8
6
x
x
Board for providing ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers
(no feeding) on the same board is possible.
SLA8N
8
1
x
-
HiPath 3750 board for connecting eight analog stations
(a/b, T/R)
Can be installed in Slot level 5 only
SLA16N
16
1
x
x
HiPath 3750 board for connecting 16 analog stations (a/
b, T/R)
Can be installed in Slot level 5 only
SLA24N
24
1
x
x
HiPath 3750 board for connecting 24 analog stations (a/
b, T/R)
Can be installed in Slot level 5 only
SLC16
16
1
x
-
HiPath 3750 board for connecting 16 CMI base stations
Can be installed in Slot level 5 only
SLMO24
24
1
x
x
HiPath 3750 board for connecting 24 optiPoint 500 and
optiset E telephones (UP0/E)
Can be installed in Slot level 5 only
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3550
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-25
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.3.2 Trunk Boards
Table 2-9
Capacity
TLA
2
6
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
TLA4
4
6
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
TLA8
8
6
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
TS2
30 30
1
x
-
Board for primary rate access; can be used for tie trunk
traffic.
STLS2
2
4
6
x
-
STLS4
4
8
6
x
-
Board for ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and stations (no
feeding) on the same board is possible.
TST1
1 24
1
-
x
PRI board
TMGL4
4
6
-
x
Trunk board for analog trunks
TMQ4
4
8
6
-
x
BRI board
TMAMF
8
-
-
x
-
Trunk board for analog direct inward dialing (MFC-R2)
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3550
2-26
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
Table 2-10
Capacity
TS2
30 30
1
x
-
Board for primary rate access; can be used for tie trunk
traffic.
STLS2
2
4
6
x
-
STLS4
4
8
6
x
-
Board for ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and stations (no
feeding) on the same board is possible.
HXGS2
Voice
and
Data
2
8
4
x
x
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3550
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3550 system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
2.3.3.4 Options
Table 2-11
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3550
ALUM4
Trunk failure
transfers
4
x
x
Trunk failure transfer lets you transfer loop start
trunks directly to internal analog stations in the
event of a power failure (note the signaling method used).
ANI4
Analog trunks
4
-
x
This board allows calling line identification (caller
ID) in conjunction with TMGL4.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-27
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
Table 2-11
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3550
GEE12
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (12 kHz) from the trunk.
GEE16
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (16 kHz) from the trunk.
GEE50
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (50 Hz) from the trunk.
x
x
Adapter for connecting the CBCC to the first options board.
x
x
One serial V.24 (RS-232) interface for connecting
a PC, printer, or Plus Products.
OPAL
V24/1
1
STBG4
x
-
Current-limiting module for LS interface (France
only)
EXM
Ports
1
x
-
External music on hold
EXMNA
Ports
1
-
x
External music on hold (A-LAW)
MPPI
x
-
Music on hold (MOH)
UAM
x
-
Announcement before answering/music on hold/
relay/sensor
x
x
Control relay module; provides 4 relays and 4
sensors for controlling external devices or detecting external control events.
STRB
Sensors
4
Relays
4
HXGS2
No. of B chanVoice and nels
Data
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3550 system directly to a local data network
(Ethernet).
HXGS2
Data only
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3550 system directly to a local data network
(Ethernet).
2-28
No. of B channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.4 Additional System Data
2.3.4.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.3.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation: approx. 360 kJ/h
HiPath 3550
88-264 Vac
maximum 180W
Figure 2-11
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3550
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-29
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
To use the uninterruptible power supply UPSC-D you must connect it to a battery unit
with 48 V (4 x 12 V) using a connecting cable.
The battery charger of the USPC is designed for batteries of up to 1.3 Ah max.
Capacity and Bridging Period with Uninterruptible Power Supply
The specifications of the bridging period for batteries in the event of power failure
have been established under the following conditions:
●
60% of the power supply has been utilized in the systems,
●
the ambient temperature of the batteries is +20 degrees Celsius,
●
the cut-off voltage is 1. V per battery,
●
the batteries are fully charged when the power failure first occurs.
The following approximate bridging times have been calculated under consideration
of the above conditions:
Table 2-12
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-D
System
Capacity/
battery voltage
Bridging period
HiPath 3550
1.2 Ah/48 V
15 minutes
HiPath 3550
7 Ah/48 V
3 hours
HiPath 3550
12 Ah/48 V
6 hours
Voltages per Battery Cell (Example of Yuasa Batteries)
Charging voltage with charging current limit:
2.4 V
Charging voltage with no charging current limit: 2.275 V
Discharging voltage:
1.7 V
The battery cell voltage is 2.0 V; the available capacity is drawn between 2.3 V and
1.7 V.
2-30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
2.3.5 Additional Power Supply from the EPSU2
If the capacity of the UPSC-D (HiPath 3550) is not sufficient extra power can be fed
in using the external power supply EPSU2. To do this, connect the DC connection of
the EPSU2 to the special DC input on the UPSC-D.
The EPSU2 is always supplied with UPS batteries which, in the event of a power failure, will guarantee a bridging period of approximately 30 minutes.
If additional external power feeding is required for HiPath 3500 or HiPath 3300 (19''
housing), the EPSU2-R should be used. This is installed in the expansion cabinet
ECR.
EPSU2 Technical Specifications
Table 2-13
EPSU2 - Technical Specifications
EPSU2
Siemens part numbers
S30122-X7221-X1(with UPS/battery packs)
Siemens part numbers, power cable
●
EPSU2 batteries
V39113-W5123-E891
Scope of delivery
●
●
●
●
●
C39195-Z7001-C17 Euro angled
C39195-Z7001-C20 GBR angled
AC/DC converter (EPSU2 with UPS batteries
loaded)
Operating instructions
AC connecting cable (protective grounding
plug, IEC-320 socket)
DC cable to UPSC-D (1 m/0.75mm², flexible,
tin-plated at both ends)
AC power
100 - 240 Vac
Frequency range
47 to 63 Hz
Connected output
200 W
Output power consumption/
nominal output
140 W
Mains/nominal voltage
54,2 V
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-31
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3550
Table 2-13
EPSU2 - Technical Specifications
EPSU2
Battery operation:
Permitted batteries
●
Manufacturer/type number
Number of batteries
●
Size (Ah)
●
Nominal voltage
●
Overload protection
●
●
●
●
●
●
CSB/EVX-1270, Hitachi/HP6.5-12, Yuasa/
NP6-12, Varta/Noack 43720303, Sonnenschein/0719143200
4 units, 12 V each
1.25 Ah
48 V (fully charged 54 V, discharge to 44 V)
Melting fuse 5 x 20 mm, 2.5 A/slow-blowing
Nominal current
2.5 A
Overload protection
Electronic current limiting circuit
Ambient temperature
In buildings, + 5 to +45 °C
Humidity
95%/non-condensing
Cooling
Natural convection
Protection
IP 21 (DIN 40050)
AC port (input)
IEC 320/16 (protective grounding power cable/IEC)
DC port (output)
Screw terminals for insulated lines:
Rigid = 0.5 – 2.5 mm2
●
Flexible = 0.5 – 2.5 mm2
●
Housing dimensions (W x D x 250 x 114 x 317
H in mm)
2-32
Weight
approx. 14.1 kg
Symbol
CE
Personal safety, insulation
EN60950 and IEC950
Grounding, shielding
Protection class 1, output is floating against
ground.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4 HiPath 3350
2.4.1 Hardware Overview
The HiPath 3350 housing intended for wall mounting (Figure 2-12) contains one shelf
with three slot levels. The slot levels, numbered in ascending order from the attachment side, have the following assignments:
●
Slot level 1: peripheral boards (two slots)
●
Slot level 2: CBCC central board only
●
Slot level 3: optional boards (up to 5 boards)
The power supply unit is located on the back of the subrack.
The HiPath 3350 does not need an external main distribution frame; the connecting
to the peripherals (such as telephones or trunks) connect directly to the boards.
Dimensions and Slots
128
OPTIONS
2
3
Slot 5
450
CBCC
Slot 4
460
Mounting
surface
1
Slot levels
Notes:
When mounting the system on the wall, plan for at least 30 cm of clearance on
the board side for replacing the boards.
Figure 2-12
Dimensions and Slots in the HiPath 3350
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-33
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4.2 Central Components
2.4.2.1 CBCC
Introduction
The CBCC (Central Board with Coldfire Com) board performs all central control and
switching functions for HiPath 3350.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath
3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
ADPCM (CMA) clock module
–
supports the 4-channel CMI connection over BS3/1 to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
in the same way as the CMS clock module small, provides the master clock
for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMA is used.
2-34
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer)
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
Interfaces
●
Eight UP0/E (digital subscriber line interfaces)
With HiPath 3000 V1.2 and later up to 7 BS3/1 base stations can be connected
directly for HiPath cordless
●
Four T/R (analog subscriber line interface)
●
Two S0 interfaces (trunk or subscriber)
●
V.24 interfaces
First V.24 interface on the CBCC; the second interface is implemented using the
option V24/1.
2.4.2.2 PSUP
The power supply point PSUP is intended for use in the wall-mounted housing. The
device plugs into a special slot and is secured by screws. It connects to the power
outlet using a modular power cord. A monitoring LED indicates the presence of the
5 V output voltage.
Technical Specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Power consumption: 60 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-35
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4.2.3 UPSC-D
Introduction
This board combines the power supply and battery management functions. No other
components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack.
Technical Specifications
2-36
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: approx. 90 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4.3 Peripheral Components
2.4.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3350
Type/Description
U.S.
Table 2-14
4SLA
4
2
x
-
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
8SLA
8
2
x
x
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
16SLA
16
2
x
x
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
IVMP8
8
8
1
x
x
IVMS8
8
8
1
x
x
Boards for the integrated voice mail functions of the HiPath Xpressions Compact.
SLU8
8 16
2
x
x
Board for connecting optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones (UP0/E)
STLS2
2
4
2
x
-
STLS4
4
8
2
x
x
Board for ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and stations (no
feeding) on the same board is possible.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-37
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4.3.2 Trunk Boards
Table 2-15
Capacity
TLA2
2
2
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
TLA4
4
2
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
TLA8
8
2
x
-
Trunk board for analog trunks
STLS2
2
4
2
x
-
STLS4
4
8
1
x
-
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for connecting
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers (no feeding) on
the same board.
TMGL4
4
2
-
x
Board for connecting analog trunks
TMQ4
4
2
-
x
BRI board
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3350
8
2.4.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
Table 2-16
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3350
STLS2
2
4
2
x
-
STLS4
4
8
1
x
-
2-38
Type/Description
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for connecting
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers (no feeding) on
the same board.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
Table 2-16
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
HXGS2
2
Voice and
Data
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3350
8
2
x
x
Type/Description
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3350
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
2.4.3.4 Options
Table 2-17
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3350
ALUM4
Trunk failure
transfers
4
x
x
Trunk failure transfer; this board transfers loop
start trunks directly to internal analog stations in
the event of a power failure (note the signaling
method used).
ANI4
Analog trunks
4
-
x
This board allows calling line identification (caller
ID) in conjunction with TMGL4.
GEE12
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (12 kHz) from the trunk.
GEE16
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (16 kHz) from the trunk.
GEE50
Number of call
charge receivers
4
x
-
This optional board records the country-specific
call charge pulses (50 Hz) from the trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-39
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
Table 2-17
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3350
x
x
Adapter for connecting the CBCC to the first options board
x
x
Serial V.24 (RS-232) interfaces for connecting a
PC, printer, or Plus Products
STBG4
x
-
Current-limiting module for LS interface (France
only)
EXM
x
-
External music on hold
EXMNA
-
x
External music on hold (A-LAW)
MPPI
x
-
Music on hold (MOH)
UAM
x
-
Announcement before answering/music on hold/
relay/sensor
x
x
Control relay module; provides 4 relays and 4 sensors for controlling external devices or detecting
external control events.
OPAL
V24/1
STRB
Interfaces
1
Sensors
4
Relays
4
No. of B chanHXGS2
Voice and nels
Data
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3350 system directly to a local data network
(Ethernet).
HXGS2
Data only
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3350 system directly to a local data network
(Ethernet).
2-40
No. of B channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
2.4.4 Additional System Data
2.4.4.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.4.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
●
●
approx. 140 kJ/h
for op. with
PSUP
approx. 180 kJ/h
for op. with
UPSC-D
HiPath 3350
88-264 Vac
Maximum 90 W
Figure 2-13
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3350 with
PSUP/UPSC-D
2.4.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
The normal power supply unit PSUP can always be replaced with the UPSC-D unit.
To use the uninterruptible power supply UPSC-D you must connect it to a battery unit
with 48 V (4 x 12 V) using a connecting cable.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-41
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3350
Capacity and Bridging Period with Uninterruptible Power Supply
The specifications of the bridging period for batteries in the event of power failure
have been established under the following conditions:
●
60% of the power supply has been utilized in the systems,
●
the ambient temperature of the batteries is +20 degrees Celsius,
●
the cut-off voltage is 1. V per battery,
●
the batteries are fully charged when the power failure first occurs.
The following approximate bridging times have been calculated under consideration
of the above conditions:
Table 2-18
2-42
Capacity and bridging period for UPSC-D
System
Capacity/
battery voltage
Bridging period
HiPath 3350
1.2 Ah/48 V
15 minutes
HiPath 3350
7 Ah/48 V
3 hours
HiPath 3350
12 Ah/48 V
6 hours
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5 HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5.1 System Environment
S0
option 1
S0 (1)
Digital trunk
Euro ISDN
S0 (2)
Digital trunk
Euro ISDN
S0 (1)
Digital trunk
Euro ISDN
S0 (2)
CorNet slave
S0 (2)
CorNet slave
S0 (2)
Digital trunk
Euro ISDN
10BaseT
LAN
V.24
Service PC
Printer
or
S0
option 2
or
S0
terminal
S0 (1)
S0
option 3
or
S0
terminal
S0 (1)
Analog
terminals
a/b
optiPoint 500 U
P0/E
optiset E
BS3/1 / BS3/S Cornet TS
Euro ISDN
S0
option 4
4 x a/b
4 x UP0/E
SBSCO
Adapter
Figure 2-14
HiPath 3250 System Environment
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-43
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
The existing S0 interfaces can be used as follows:
Option 1:
●
S0 (1) for use as a digital trunk circuit
●
S0 (2) for use as a digital trunk circuit
Option 2:
●
S0 (1) for use as a digital trunk circuit
●
S0 (2) for use as a CorNet slave
Option 3:
●
S0 (1) for connecting an S0 terminal (not fed from the system)
●
S0 (2) for use as a CorNet slave
Option 4:
2-44
●
S0 (1) for connecting an S0 terminal (not fed from the system)
●
S0 (2) for use as a digital trunk circuit
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5.2 Hardware Overview
Mechanical Notes
The HiPath 3250 is a single-cabinet system for mounting on the wall. The system has
four analog and four digital subscriber lines (UP0/E). However, you can double the
number of digital lines by using phone adapters (primary/secondary arrangement).
The housing contains the single-board system and the MDF.
The cables to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections or other devices) are
connected directly to the board and fed out.
Dimensions
Mounting
surface
365 mm
293 mm
67 mm
Figure 2-15
HiPath 3250 Dimensions
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-45
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5.3 Central Components
2.5.4 SBSCO
Introduction
The SBSCO (single board system with coldfire one) S30810-Q2937-A201 is the single-board module for HiPath 3250. The board provides the following features and outputs:
Functions
●
Signaling unit (SIU)
●
PCM highway switching and conference circuit
●
Battery-buffered real-time clock (approx. 100 hours backup time)
Interfaces
2-46
●
Four digital UP0/E subscriber lines
In HiPath 3000 V1.2 or later, up to three BS3/1 base stations can be connected
directly for HiPath cordless (see Section 2.10, “HiPath cordless”).
●
Four analog a/b (T/R) subscriber lines
●
Two digital S0 interfaces (CO (default) or station)
●
Clock generator: CMS
Supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350,
HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
Music on hold: MPPI
●
Announcement before answering: AM
●
V.24 interface
●
MMC multimedia card (APS and boot)
●
LIM LAN interface module
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5.4.1 PSU One
Introduction
The two following PSU types are used:
●
S30122-K5837-M
●
S30122-K5837-S
Technically, the two power supplies are identical and interchangeable.
The device’s operating state (on or off) is indicated by a LED.
Technical Specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Power consumption: approx. 25 W
2.5.5 Peripheral Components
HiPath 3250 is the single-board solution (SBS) for a complete switching system. Because the subscriber line and trunk interfaces are integrated in the control board, no
peripheral boards are necessary.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-47
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3250 (Not for U.S.)
2.5.6 Additional System Data
2.5.6.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.5.6.2 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
No uninterruptible power supply can be ordered at this time.
2.5.6.3 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 15 kJ/h
HiPath 3250
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 22 kJ/h
88 264 Vac
Desktop or plug-type
ac adapter
Maximum 25 W
Figure 2-16
2-48
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3250
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6 HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6.1 System Environment
S0
terminal
S0 (2)
Analog
terminals
a/b
optiPoint 500 U
P0/E
optiset E
BS3/1 / BS3/S Cornet TS
Euro ISDN
2 x S0
S0 (1)
Digital trunk
Euro ISDN
10BaseT
LAN
V.24
Service PC
Printer
4 x a/b
2 x UP0/E
SBSCS
Adapter
Figure 2-17
HiPath 3150 System Environment
The existing S0 interfaces can be used as:
●
S0 (1) for use as a digital trunk circuit
●
S0 (2) for connecting an S0 terminal (not fed from the system)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-49
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6.2 Hardware Overview
Mechanical Notes
The HiPath 3150 is a single-cabinet system for mounting on the wall. The system has
four analog and two digital subscriber lines (UP0/E). However, you can double the
number of digital lines by using phone adapters (primary/secondary arrangement).
The housing contains the single-board system and the MDF.
The cables to the peripherals (telephones, trunk connections or other devices) are
connected directly to the board and fed out.
Dimensions
Mounting
surface
365 mm
293 mm
67 mm
Figure 2-18
2-50
HiPath 3150 Dimensions
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6.3 Central Components
2.6.3.1 SBSCS
Introduction
The SBSCS (Single Board System with Coldfire Start) S30810-Q2937-B201 is the
single-board module for HiPath 3150. The board provides the following features and
outputs:
Functions
●
Signaling unit (SIU)
●
PCM highway switching and conference circuit
●
Battery-buffered real-time clock (approx. 100 hours backup time)
Interfaces
●
Two digital UP0/E subscriber lines
In HiPath 3000 V1.2 and later a single-cell solution can be connected directly with
a BS3/S for HiPath cordless (see Section 2.10, “HiPath cordless”).
●
Four analog a/b (T/R) subscriber lines
●
One digital S0 interface CO, one digital S0 interface station
●
Clock generator: CMS
Supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350,
HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
Music on hold: MPPI
●
Announcement before answering: AM
●
V.24 interface
●
MMC multimedia card (APS and boot)
●
LIM LAN interface module
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-51
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6.3.2 PSU One
Introduction
The two following PSU types are used:
●
S30122-K5837-M
●
S30122-K5837-S
Technically, the two power supplies are identical and interchangeable.
The device’s operating state (on or off) is indicated by a LED.
Technical Specifications
2-52
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Power consumption: approx. 25 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3150 (Not for U.S.)
2.6.4 Additional System Data
2.6.4.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.6.4.2 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
No uninterruptible power supply can be ordered at this time.
2.6.4.3 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 15 kJ/h
HiPath 3150
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 22 kJ/h
88 264 Vac
Desktop or plug-type
ac adapter
Maximum 25 W
Figure 2-19
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3150
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-53
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7 HiPath 3700
2.7.1 Hardware Overview
The HiPath 3700 system has a modular structure and as the requirements of the customer grow, it can be extended to up to 384 subscriber lines by adding new boards or
cabinets. An additional cabinet is referred to as an expansion cabinet.
You will need a special mounting kit for installing the system in a 19’’ cabinet.
A HiPath 3700 system can include a maximum of three cabinets. The 19’’ cabinets
must be placed beside one another and they must also be accessible from the rear.
The basic cabinet has 7 slots for peripheral boards. Expansion cabinets with 8 slots
each for peripheral boards are implemented for expansions. As a result, when 2 expansion cabinets are implemented, a total of 23 slots are available for boards; with
the exception of slot 7 in the basic cabinet, which has an installation width of 45mm,
all slots have an installation width of 30mm.
Dimensions
EC1
EC2
approx. 980 mm
approx. 410 mm
BC
Depth of the system cabinet: 390 mm
Necessary height units per box for
19“ cabinet assembly: 11
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7“ = 43 mm)
Figure 2-20
2-54
HiPath 3700 Dimensions
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.2 Board Slots
Nine board slots are available in each cabinet. The following boards are assigned permanent slots:
●
CBCPR central processor board -> slot 01 in the BC
●
UPSM power supply unit -> slot 09 in the BC, slot 18 in EC1, slot 27 in EC2.
Depending on their width, peripheral boards can be inserted in slots 02 to 08 in the
BC, 10 to 17 in EC1 and 19 to 26 in EC2 (the adhesive label beneath each slot identifies the slot) (see Figure 2-21).
Slots in Basic and Expansion Cabinets
BC:
CBCPR
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
UPSM
EC1:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
UPSM
EC2:
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
UPSM
mm
45/30
30
30
30
30
30
30
45/30
90
X10
X20
X30
X40
X50
X60
X70
X80
X90
Figure 2-21
Slot numbers and widths in “8-Slot” BC, EC1, and EC2
2.7.2.1 Distribution of PCM Segments
Both expansion cabinets have the same HDLC address, which means that each expansion cabinet must be connected to a separate HDLC highway. The slots in the basic cabinet are assigned to HDLC highway 0. Because HDLC highway 0 is connected
to expansion cabinet 2 and the basic cabinet simultaneously, the basic cabinet receives its own collision-free HDLC addresses.
The new slot 7 implemented in basic 8-slot cabinets is connected in parallel with slots
5 and 6. This slot provides connections for a total of two S2M boards, which means
than only four B channels are available for the third slot (such as TIEL). In the expansion cabinets, every two PCM highways are routed to two adjacent slots in both cabinets, providing 64 B channels for four slots in a three-cabinet system.
The basic and expansion cabinets are connected in a star configuration.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-55
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, make sure when you do the
configuration that the boards on a PCM segment do not require more than the 64
time-division multiplex channels that are available. The following table lists the number of time-division multiplex channels that the different boards require.
Table 2-19
Number of Time-Division Multiplex Channels Required Per Board
Board
Number of time-division multiplex channels required
CR8N
8
HXGM
16
IVML8
8
IVML24
24
SLA8N, SLA16N, SLA24N Depends on the number of stations
2-56
SLC16
Depends on the number of mobile telephones logged
on
SLMO8, SLMO24
Depends on the number of stations (hosts (master)
and clients (slaves))
STMD8
16
TIEL
4
TML8W
8
TMOM
1
TMS2
30
TMT1
24
Caution
To guarantee that the system operates without blocking, it is necessary that you observe the following rules for the configuration of boards:
SLC16
●
A maximum of one SLC16 per PCM segment; if possible, the SLC16 should
stay alone on the PCM segment.
IVML8, IVML24
●
– A maximum of one IVML8 or IVML24 per system.
– Only in the slot next to the UPSM in the basic cabinet (slot 08).
– You may not insert an SLMO8, SLMO24, or SLC16 on the PCM segment
of the IVML8 or IVML24.
– If there is a TMS2 on the PCM segment of the IVML8 or IVML24, only a
TIEL, TMOM, or TML8W is allowed on the free slot.
SLMO24
●
A maximum of two SLMO24s per PCM segment; the number of connected stations (hosts (master) and clients (slaves)) may not be more than 64.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
The illustrations below show the PCM segments (64 time-division multiplex channels
each) between the different HiPath 3700 system configurations.
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
U
P
S
M
BC
Figure 2-22
PCM Segments for a One-Cabinet System
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
BC
Figure 2-23
U
P
S
M
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
U
P
S
M
EC1
PCM Segments for a Two-Cabinet System
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-57
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System
“8-Slot” cabinets
1 111111 1
0 123456 7
U
P
S
M
EC1
C 000000 0
B 234567 8
C
P
R
BC
Figure 2-24
2-58
U
P
S
M
1 222222 2
9 012345 6
U
P
S
M
EC2
PCM Segments for a Three-Cabinet System
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.3 Central Components
2.7.3.1 CBCPR
Introduction
The CBCPR board performs all central control and switching functions for HiPath
3700.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 4, 8 and 12 channel CMI connections using the SLC16 board in
the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer)
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
V.24 Interfaces
●
To connect a service PC, you can access the first V.24 interface (9-pin SUB-D
plug) on the CBCPR from the front of the basic cabinet (after removing the cover).
●
You can access the second V.24 interface (25-pin SUB-D plug) via the backplane of the basic cabinet (X7).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-59
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.3.2 UPSM
Introduction
Each cabinet in HiPath 3700 requires one UPSM (uninterruptible power supply modular). This board integrates the power supply and battery management functions. No
other components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term
battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect one of the following to the UPSM:
●
One battery pack per system cabinet
●
One battery cabinet (BSG 48/38), including battery charger, or
●
One 48 Vdc network
An LED lights up to indicate that the UPSM is in operation. The UPSM must be replaced when defective (LED does not light up).
The UPSM is used in models for all countries. The ring frequency of the modular ring
generator can be parameterized to suit requirements.
Part Numbers
●
UPSM: S30122-K5950-S100, S30122-K5950-A100
●
Battery pack 4 x 12 V/7 Ah: S30122-K5950-Y200
(The connecting cable for the UPSM is part of the battery pack.)
Specifications
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 VAC - 240 VAC
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Max. input current consumption: 5.4 A - 2.7 A
●
Max. power consumption: around 430 W
●
Output voltage (battery charging voltage): 42.5 - 55.2 VDC
●
2-60
Output current (battery charge current): ≥ 0.8 A
(sufficient for battery set rating) = 7 Ah)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
●
Bridging times for power supplied via the battery pack 4 x 12 V or 7 Ah:
–
At 100% nominal load: approx. 60 min. bridging time
–
At 60% nominal load: approx. 100 min. bridging time
The battery recharging time is approx. 8.5 h.
Boundary conditions for the specified bridging times:
battery ambient temperature is approx. 22°C
The cut-off voltage is 1.7 V per cell
New batteries are fully charged.
Specifications of the Modular Ring Generator
●
Rated output voltages: 60/75 Vact
●
Output frequencies: 20/25/50 Hz
●
Output power
–
continuous: 4.0 VA
–
peak: 8.0 VA (3 minutes load/ 15 minutes pause)
BSG 48/38
You can use a BSG 48/38 battery cabinet in an upright housing instead of the battery
pack or a 48 V direct current supply to extend the bridging time in the event of a power
failure. The BSG 48/38 battery cabinet (S30122-K5950-F300) consists of
●
an upright housing
●
a charging rectifier
●
a 38 Ah/48 V battery set
The battery cabinet is designed for direct connection to the HiPath 3700 communication system.
2.7.3.3 LIM
The LAN interface module LIM (S30807-Q6930-X) is an optional subboard for all HiPath 3000 central control boards (see also Section 4.2.1).
The board provides an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mb) LAN connection via an 8-pole
RJ45 jack.
You cannot operate the LIM module and a HiPath HG1500 board simultaneously in
one system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-61
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.4 Peripheral Components
2.7.4.1 Subscriber Line Modules
Table 2-20
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
Type/Description
Boards per cabinet
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3700
IVML8
8
8
1
1
x
x
IVML24
24 24 1
1
x
x
SLA16
16
6
15
x
x
Board for connecting up to 16 analog telephones to
the system; also for connecting fax machines, modems, radio paging equipment, equipment for external music on hold, and voice mail systems.
SLA8N
8
6
18
x
-
Board with 8 analog interfaces1
SLA16N
16
6
15
x
x
Board with 16 analog interfaces1
SLA24N
24
6
10
x
x
Board with 24 analog interfaces1
SLC16
16 64 12
4
x
-
Board for connecting up to 16 CMI base stations (mobile telephones) to the system.
SLMO8
8 16 6
18
x
-
83
16
x
x
Board for connecting optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones. The SLMO board comes in 8- and 24-port
versions.
8 16 6
8
x
x
SLMO24 24 48
STMD8
Boards for the integrated voice mail functions of the
HiPath Xpressions Compact.
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for configuring
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers on the same
board.
1 250 stations are possible in the maximum configuration.
2 Exception: basic cabinets can have 2 SLC16 boards.
3 The maximum number of SLMO24 boards per cabinet depends on the number of slave stations.
2-62
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.4.2 Trunk Boards
TML8W
8
81
15
x
-
Board with eight ports for connecting loop start
trunks.
STMD8
8 16 6
8
x
-
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for configuring
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers on the
same board.
TMS2
30 30 4
4
x
-
Basic rate interface (BRI) board; can also be used
for tie trunk traffic.
TMST1
24 24 6
6
-
x
ISDN interface board
TMDID
8
3
9
-
x
Analog trunk board for direct inward dialing
TMGL8
8
6
15
-
x
Analog trunk board (ground/loop start)
TMAMF
8
x
-
Analog trunk board for direct inward dialing (MFCR2)
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Capacity
Boards per cabinet
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3700
B channels per board
Table 2-21
1 4 boards max. per cabinet in the case of TML8W with installed GEE8.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-63
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.4.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
TIEL
4
6
18
x
x
Board for providing four two-way analog tie trunk circuits with E&M signaling.
STMD8
8 16 6
8
x
-
ISDN basic rate interface (BRI) board for connecting
ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers (no feeding)
on the same board.
HXGM2
2 16 6
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath
3700 system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
TMS2
30 30 4
4
x
-
Basic rate interface (BRI) board; can also be used for
tie trunk traffic.
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Capacity
Boards per cabinet
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3700
B channels per board
Table 2-22
2.7.4.4 Options
Table 2-23
2-64
Ports per
board
Country
4
U.S.
TMOM
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3700
x
-
Type/Description
TMOM board with four ports which provides the interface for connecting a radio paging system. Availability
is country-specific. Standards supported:
ESPA 4.4.3 and ESPA 4.4.5 (6-wire)
●
a,b,c,d interface
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
Table 2-23
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3700
TIEL
Ports per
board
4
x
x
Board for connecting announcement equipment (with
start/stop signaling for announcement before answering) in addition to its tie trunk circuit function.
REAL
Relay connections
4
x
x
Trunk failure transfers
1
Board for relay connection (such as a door opener) and
power failure transfer (ALUM). The board is located on
the basic cabinet's backplane.
PFT1
Trunk failure transfers
1
x
-
PFT4
Trunk failure transfers
4
x
-
PFT1 and PFT4 boards for connection to the patch
panel and transferring calls from analog trunks to a
telephone in a power failure (note the signaling method
used).
GEE8
Number of 8
analog
trunks supported
x
-
Board for recording call charge pulses from the trunk
on a country-specific basis for up to eight trunks. The
board can be plugged into the TML8 analog trunk circuit board.
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3700
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
HXGM2 No. of B
(Voice & channels
Data)
16
x
x
HXGM2
(Data)
16
x
x
CR8N
x
x
The board has eight code transmitters and receivers.
LIM
x
x
Ethernet (10BaseT) interface
No. of B
channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-65
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.5 Additional System Data
2.7.5.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.7.5.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 850 kJ/h
Cabinet with UPSM
88-264 Vac
Maximum 430 W
Figure 2-25
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of one HiPath 3700 Cabinet
2.7.5.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPSM
Please refer to Section 2.7.3.2 for details on the UPSM.
UPSM Bridging Times with Different Battery Packs per Cabinet
Table 2-24
UPSM Bridging Times with Different Battery Packs per Cabinet
Number of Extensions
2-66
Approximate Bridging Time
7 Ah battery set
38 Ah battery set
10 - 20
1 h 50 min
7 h 30 min
21 - 40
1 h 20 min
6 h 30 min
41 - 68
1h
5h
69 - 80
50 min
4 h 30 min
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
UPSM
UPSM and Battery Packs with no Ext. Charging Rectifiers
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
EC2
UPSM
Battery packs
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
48 V/7 Ah
EC1
48 V/7 Ah
48 V/7 Ah
UPSM
S30122-K5959-Y200
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
BC
Note: This diagram shows
only the schematic connections between the different
components.
Figure 2-26
Connecting the UPSM to Battery Packs
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-67
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
UPSM
Connecting the UPSM to Battery Packs and Ext. Charging Rectifiers
88-264 V ~
EC2
50-60/25 Hz
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
UPSM
48 V
Charging rectifier
EC1
External battery
48 V/38 Ah
88-264 V ~
50-60/25 Hz
e.g. BSG 4838
UPSM
48 V
BC
Note: This diagram shows
only the schematic connections between the different
components.
48 V
Figure 2-27
2-68
Connecting the UPSM, Ext. Charging Recitifiers and Battery Packs
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3700
2.7.5.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada)
When installing the system, an ECR in the 19’’ cabinet is required if emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system requires uninterruptible power. The necessary battery pack is installed in the ECR.
One ECR for each system cabinet is required.
There are switches for the line and battery voltage on the front panel as well as a fuse
for protecting the battery circuit.
The jacks for the line and battery voltage are located on the rear of the housing. The
line voltage is only fed through and can be interrupted using a switch.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-69
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8 HiPath 3500
2.8.1 Hardware Overview
Mechanical Notes
The HiPath 3500 housing intended for use with 19’ cabinets (Figure 2-28) contains
four slot levels with the following assignments:
●
Slot levels 1-3: slide-in shelves for peripheral boards (2 boards can be plugged
in on each level)
●
Slot level 4: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board
●
Slot level 5: optional boards (up to 3 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The connection to peripherals (telephones, trunks, and others) is done using MW8
sockets in the front panels of the boards.
Dimensions and Slots
155 mm
0
38
440 mm
mm
Slot levels:
5 (options)
Slots 1-3
4 (CBRC)
Slot 6
Slot 7
3 (peripheral boards)
Slot 8
Slot 9
2 (peripheral boards)
Slot 4
Slot 5
1 (peripheral boards)
Necessary height units for 19“ cabinet assembly: 4
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7“ = 43 mm)
Figure 2-28
2-70
HiPath 3500 Dimensions and Slots
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8.2 Central Components
2.8.2.1 CBRC
Introduction
The CBRC (Central Board Rack with Coldfire Com) board performs all central control
and switching functions for HiPath 3500.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath
3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
ADPCM (CMA) clock module
–
supports the 4-channel CMI connection over BS3/1 to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
in the same way as the CMS clock module small, provides the master clock
for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMA is used.
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer)
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-71
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
Interfaces
●
Eight UP0/E (digital subscriber line interfaces)
Up to 7 BS3/1 base stations can be connected directly for HiPath cordless
●
Four analog a/b (T/R) subscriber lines
●
Two digital S0 interfaces (CO (default) or station)
●
One V.24 interface
2.8.2.2 UPSC-DR
Introduction
This board combines the power supply and battery management functions. No other
components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack.
Technical Specifications
2-72
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: approx. 180 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8.3 Peripheral Components
2.8.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules
8SLAR
8
IVMS8R
8
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3500
Type/Description
U.S.
Table 2-25
5
x
x
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
8
1
x
x
Board for the integrated voice mail functions of the HiPath
Xpressions Compact.
SLU8R
8 16
5
x
x
Board for connecting optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones (UP0/E)
STLS4R
4
6
x
x
Board for providing ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers
(no feeding) on the same board is possible.
8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-73
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8.3.2 Trunk Boards
Table 2-26
Capacity
TLA4R
4
6
x
-
Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM and call metering receiving equipment board
TMGL4R
4
6
-
x
Trunk board for analog lines
TST1
1 24
1
-
x
PRI board
STLS4R
4
6
x
x
Board for providing ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers
(no feeding) on the same board is possible.
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3500
8
2.8.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
Table 2-27
2-74
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
HXGSR2 2
Voice and
Data
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3500
8
4
x
x
Type/Description
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3500
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8.3.4 Options
Table 2-28
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3500
-
x
This board allows calling line identification (caller ID)
in conjunction with TMGL4R.
OPALR
x
x
Adapter for connecting the CBRC to the first options
board.
EXMR
x
x
External music on hold
MPPI
x
-
Music on hold (MOH)
UAMR
x
-
Announcement before answering/music on hold/relay/
sensor
x
x
Control relay module; provides 4 relays and 4 sensors
for controlling external devices or detecting external
control events.
ANI4R
STRBR
Analog
trunks
4
Sensors
4
Relays
4
HXGSR2 No. of B
Voice and channels
Data
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3500
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
HXGSR2
Data only
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3500
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
No. of B
channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-75
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
2.8.4 Additional System Data
2.8.4.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.8.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 180 kJ/h
HiPath 3500
88-264 Vac
Maximum 90 W
Figure 2-29
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption of HiPath 3500
2.8.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
To use the uninterruptible power supply UPSC-D you must connect it to a battery unit
with 48 V (4 x 12 V) using a connecting cable.
Capacity and Bridging Period with Uninterruptible Power Supply
The specifications of the bridging period for batteries in the event of power failure
have been established under the following conditions:
●
60% of the power supply has been utilized in the systems,
●
the ambient temperature of the batteries is +20 degrees Celsius,
●
the cut-off voltage is 1. V per battery,
●
the batteries are fully charged when the power failure first occurs.
The following approximate bridging times have been calculated under consideration
of the above conditions:
2-76
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3500
Table 2-29
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-DR
System
Capacity/
battery voltage
Bridging period
HiPath 3500
1,2 Ah/48 V
15 minutes
HiPath 3500
7 Ah/48 V
3 hours
HiPath 3500
12 Ah/48 V
6 hours
2.8.4.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada)
When installing the system, an ECR in the 19’’ cabinet is required if emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system requires uninterruptible power. The necessary battery pack is installed in the ECR.
There are switches for the line and battery voltage on the front panel as well as a fuse
for protecting the battery circuit.
The jacks for the line and battery voltage are located on the rear of the housing. The
line voltage is only fed through and can be interrupted using a switch.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-77
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9 HiPath 3300
2.9.1 Hardware Overview
Mechanical Notes
The HiPath 3300 housing intended for use with 19’ cabinets (Figure 2-30) contains
three slot levels with the following assignments:
●
Slot level 1: slide-in shelves for two peripheral boards
●
Slot level 2: slide-in shelf for CBRC control board
●
Slot level 3: optional boards (up to 3 modules)
The power supply is on the rear panel of the subrack.
The connection to peripherals (telephones, trunks, and others) is done using MW8
sockets in the front panels of the boards.
Dimensions and Slots
80 mm
m
380
440 mm
m
Slot levels:
3 (options)
Slots 1-3
2 (CBRC)
Slot 4
Slot 5
1 (peripheral boards)
Necessary height units for 19“ cabinet assembly: 2
(one height unit corresponds to approx. 1.7“ = 43 mm)
Figure 2-30
2-78
HiPath 3300 Dimensions and Slots
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9.2 Central Components
2.9.2.1 CBRC
Introduction
The CBRC (Central Board Rack with Coldfire Com) board performs all central control
and switching functions for HiPath 3300.
Subboards
Depending on the application, the following subboards (some of which are optional)
can be implemented:
●
CMS clock module small
–
supports all 2-channel cordless connections to the HiPath 3550, HiPath
3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
provides the master clock for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMS is used.
●
ADPCM (CMA) clock module
–
supports the 4-channel CMI connection over BS3/1 to the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems.
–
in the same way as the CMS clock module small, provides the master clock
for digital networking.
Table 2-35 contains additional information on when CMA is used.
●
MMC multimedia card
This plug-in memory card contains the CDB backup and the version-specific
APS. It should be noted that the MMC can only be replaced by one of the multimedia cards released by Siemens AG. Cards that have not been released may
have a different internal structure, which will affect timed access and some features (for example, CDB backup and APS Transfer)
●
IMODC integrated modem card Columbus
This plug-in card allows remote service (analog mode up to 14.4 Kbps), without
having to use an external modem
●
LIM LAN interface module
This subboard makes available an Ethernet (10BaseT/10 Mbit) LAN connection
using an 8-pin RJ45 jack.
●
MPPI (music on hold)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-79
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
Interfaces
●
Eight UP0/E (digital subscriber line interfaces)
Up to 3 BS3/1 base stations can be connected directly for HiPath cordless
●
Four analog a/b (T/R) subscriber lines
●
Two digital S0 interfaces (CO (default) or station)
●
One V.24 interface
2.9.2.2 UPSC-DR
Introduction
This board combines the power supply and battery management functions. No other
components are required if operated as a power supply. To maintain short-term battery emergency operation after a power failure, that is, to use uninterruptible power
supply functions, you must also connect a battery pack.
Technical Specifications
2-80
●
Nominal voltage range: 100 Vac - 240 Vac
●
Nominal frequency: 50 Hz - 60 Hz
●
Ring generator: 75 Vac, 20/25/50 Hz
●
Partial voltages: +5 Vdc, –48 V
●
Battery charger: 4 x 12 V (40.8 V-55.2 V)
●
Power consumption: approx. 90 W
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9.3 Peripheral Components
2.9.3.1 Subscriber Line Modules
8SLAR
8
IVMP8R
8
IVMS8R
8
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Subscriber Line Modules for the HiPath 3300
Type/Description
U.S.
Table 2-30
2
x
x
Board for connecting analog stations (a/b, T/R)
8
1
x
x
8
1
x
x
Boards for the integrated voice mail functions of the HiPath Xpressions Compact.
SLU8R
8 16
2
x
x
Board for connecting optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones (UP0/E)
STLS4R
4
1
x
x
Board for providing ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers
(no feeding) on the same board is possible.
8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-81
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9.3.2 Trunk Boards
Table 2-31
Capacity
TLA4R
4
2
x
-
Trunk board for analog lines including ALUM and call metering receiving equipment board
TMGL4R
4
2
-
x
Trunk board for analog lines
STLS4R
4
1
x
x
Board for providing ISDN basic rate access.
Configuration of ISDN trunks, tie trunks, and subscribers
(no feeding) on the same board is possible.
Ports per board
U.S.
Type/Description
Rest of world
Country
Max. number of
boards per system
B channels per board
Board
Name
Trunk Boards for the HiPath 3300
8
2.9.3.3 Boards for Tie Trunk Traffic
Table 2-32
2-82
Max. number of
boards per system
Rest of world
U.S.
HXGSR2 2
Voice and
Data
Country
B channels per board
Capacity
Ports per board
Board
Name
Tie Trunk Traffic Boards for the HiPath 3300
8
2
x
x
Type/Description
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3300
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9.3.4 Options
Table 2-33
Country
Type/Description
U.S.
Capacity
Rest of world
Board
Name
Optional Boards for the HiPath 3300
-
x
This board allows calling line identification (caller ID)
in conjunction with TMGL4R.
OPALR
x
x
Adapter for connecting the CBRC to the first options
board.
EXMR
x
x
External music on hold
MPPI
x
-
Music on hold (MOH)
UAMR
x
-
Announcement before answering/music on hold/relay/
sensor
x
x
Control relay module; provides 4 relays and 4 sensors
for controlling external devices or detecting external
control events.
ANI4R
STRBR
Analog
trunks
4
Sensors
4
Relays
4
HXGSR2 No. of B
Voice and channels
Data
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3300
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
HXGSR2
Data only
8
x
x
HiPath HG1500 board for connecting the HiPath 3300
system directly to a local data network (Ethernet).
No. of B
channels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-83
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
2.9.4 Additional System Data
2.9.4.1 System-related capacity limits
see Table 2-1
2.9.4.2 Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
Max. heat dissipation:
approx. 180 kJ/h
HiPath 3300
88-264 Vac
Maximum 90 W
Figure 2-31
Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption ofHiPath 3300
2.9.4.3 Specifications for the Uninterruptible Power Supply
The power supply unit PSUP can always be replaced with the UPSC-D unit.
To use the uninterruptible power supply UPSC-D you must connect it to a battery unit
with 48 V (4 x 12 V) using a connecting cable.
2-84
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath 3300
Capacity and Bridging Period with Uninterruptible Power Supplies
The specifications of the bridging period for batteries in the event of power failure
have been established under the following conditions:
●
60% of the power supply has been utilized in the systems,
●
the ambient temperature of the batteries is +20 degrees Celsius,
●
the cut-off voltage is 1. V per battery,
●
the batteries are fully charged when the power failure first occurs.
The following approximate bridging times have been calculated under consideration
of the above conditions:
Table 2-34
Capacity and Bridging Period for UPSC-DR
System
Capacity/
battery voltage
Bridging period
HiPath 3300
1,2 Ah/48 V
15 minutes
HiPath 3300
7 Ah/48 V
3 hours
HiPath 3300
12 Ah/48 V
6 hours
2.9.4.4 Expansion Cabinet Rack ECR (Not for U.S. and Canada)
When installing the system, an ECR in the 19’’ cabinet is required if emergency battery operation is necessary during a power failure or if the system requires uninterruptible power. The necessary battery pack is installed in the ECR.
There are switches for the line and battery voltage on the front panel as well as a fuse
for protecting the battery circuit.
The jacks for the line and battery voltage are located on the rear of the housing. The
line voltage is only connected through and can be interrupted using a switch.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-85
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
2.10 HiPath cordless
2.10.1 Introduction
For Version 1.2 and later of HiPath 3000, HiPath cordless can be used on all systems
in the product line.
The newly developed BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X) base station can be
●
directly connected to the UP0/E interfaces in the central control boards for HiPath
3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.
●
directly connected to the UP0/E interfaces in the SLC16 board for HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3700.
To ensure the operation of a maximum of one base station on the central control
board’s UP0/E interfaces of the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150,
HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300, a BS3/S (X30807-X5482-X100) single-cell base station can be used. In this case, it is not possible to expand with additional base stations.
A mix of both the BS2/2 (S30807-H5471-X200), BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X), and BS3/
3 (S30807-H5485-X) base stations may be used on one SLC16 board.
However, the BS3/1 base station cannot be simultaneously connected to the SLC16
board and the CBCC within one HiPath 3550 system.
Up to four SLC16 boards can be used within HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. These
boards provide complete cordless functionality (roaming and seamless connection
handover) (refer to Section 2.10.2.3).
The new air synchronization (DECT node synchronization DNS) feature is now available in all HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 systems that have CBCC and in all HiPath
3500 and HiPath 3300 systems that have CBRC. This feature connects networked
systems to one another using so-called synchronization base stations or SBS. This
enables system-wide handover. Air synchronization does not require additional hardware.
2-86
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
System 1
BS3/1
System 2
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
V1.2
V1.2
BS3/1
BS3/1
BS3/1
CorNet-N networking
Figure 2-32
Basic Architecture of a HiPath cordless System
2.10.2 System Properties
2.10.2.1 System Connection
Depending on the expansion level, the system is connected up to the system control
via radio switching stations or directly. The entire cordless system is controlled and
the station data administered directly by the system software; the advantage of this
is that system administration is made very simple.
The number of base stations and handsets that are supported will depend on the expansion level. Each of the UP0/E interfaces can make available 2 or 4 voice channels
depending on the hardware configuration, which means that in the entire cordless
range with 4 radio switching stations up to 256 connections can be established. A
maximum of 7 base stations and up to 28 connections are possible with a direct connection.
2.10.2.2 Multi-cell Technology
The radio coverage that is required in the building or in the company’s grounds is provided by multi-cell technology. In this process, the radio cells of the base stations installed in the company overlap which means that calls in the whole cordless system
area can be set up and processed seamlessly even when you change location
(Roaming and Handover).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-87
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
2.10.2.3 System Networking
Up to four SLC16 boards can be implemented within the HiPath 3750 and the HiPath
3700 systems. Consequently, unlimited availability (Roaming and Handover) can be
achieved by a single system in a range with up to 64 base stations and 250 handsets
(mobile telephones).
Various versions of this functionality are also offered network-wide. Dedicated lines
must be available between the systems by means of the CorNet N protocol to be able
to use this functionality. Voice connections are switched through and data is exchanged over the dedicated line.
Network-wide Roaming
“Network-wide roaming” guarantees the connection within a network. When you
“roam” between the network nodes, the connection is interrupted. A total of up to 16
nodes can support the “Network-wide roaming” function.
Feature
●
●
●
max. 16 networked systems
accessible using a common
station number (roaming
among the systems/nodes)
call interruption when changing
between systems/nodes
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
HiPath 3700
with
without
SLC16
SLC16
HiPath 3500
X
X
X
X
Seamless Connection Handover
The “Seamless Connection Handover” function is also supported in the network by
the HiPath 3550 (without SLC16), HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 systems only. Up to 4 nodes are supported.
The networking range is limited to the receiving range of the base stations, which are
required for synchronizing the radio ranges.
In addition to the dedicated line for “Network-wide roaming”, you will also need to synchronize the base stations in various nodes.
2-88
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
Feature
●
●
●
max. 4 networked systems
accessible using a common
station number (roaming
among the systems/nodes)
no call interruption when
changing between the systems/nodes (seamless connection handover)
Figure 2-33
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
HiPath 3700
with
without
SLC16
SLC16
HiPath 3500
X
X
HiPath cordless - Network-wide Roaming and Handover
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-89
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
2.10.2.4 Important Features of HiPath cordless
2-90
●
Access to the functionality of the communication systems HiPath 3000 such as
automatic recall, conference or call forwarding for example.
●
Personal preference settings
●
Each subscriber has his or her own station number
●
Area coverage throughout the network
●
High level of privacy through DECT/GAP standard
●
Voice quality matches that of a corded telephone
●
The user interface for the mobile telephones has been largely adapted to that of
the optiset E telephones.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
2.10.3 System Configuration
The following table indicates the maximum possible system configuration parameters
for the HiPath cordless. It also shows when
●
CMA or CMS is necessary.
●
an analog trunk access is possible.
Table 2-35
System
SLC16 CMA/
CMS
HiPath cordless - System Configuration
Base stations
Simultaneous calls per BS
BS3/1
BS3/S
BS2/2
BS3/3
MaximumBS3/1 BS3/S BS2/2 BS3/3 number
of MTs
Analog
trunk access
HiPath 3150
–
CMS
–
max.1
–
–
2
–
–
8
no
HiPath 3250
–
CMS
max. 3
–
–
2
–
–
–
8
no
–
CMS
–
max. 1
–
–
2
–
–
8
no
–
CMS
–
max. 1
–
–
2
–
–
8
no
–
CMA
–
max. 1
–
–
4
–
–
8
yes
–
CMA
max. 3
–
–
4
–
–
–
16
yes
–
CMS
–
max. 1
–
–
2
–
–
8
no
–
CMA
–
max. 1
–
–
4
–
–
8
yes
–
CMA
max. 7
–
–
4
–
–
–
32
yes
HiPath 3550 max. 1 CMS max. 16
–
max. 8
4
–
8
12
64
yes
HiPath 3750 max. 4 CMS max. 64
HiPath 3700
–
max. 32
4
–
8
12
250 (with
4 SLC16)
yes
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
Comments:
BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X) is a new base station (Figure 2-34) that supports a maximum
●
of 4 calls simultaneously.
BS2/2 (S30807-H5471-X200) is a base station that facilitates up to 8 simultaneous calls.
●
BS3/3 (S30807-H5485-X) is a new base station that can only be operated using the
●
SLC16 board. The connection via at least two UP0/E interfaces is essential. It supports a
maximum of 12 calls when connected using three UP0/E interfaces.
BS3/S (X30807-X5482-X100): The BS3/S single-cell base station guarantees the opera●
tion of a maximum of one base station on the UP0/E interfaces of the central board. It is
not possible to operate additional base stations.
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300: It is possible to operate the BS3/1
●
base station on the UP0/E interfaces of the central board only in connection with the CMA
clock module.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-91
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
2.10.4 Components of HiPath cordless
2.10.4.1 Mobile Telephones
The mobile telephones in the Gigaset series can be used from 2000. A detailed description of these mobile telephones is provided in Section 6.6
2.10.4.2 Base Stations
Types
●
BS3/1 (S30807-H5482-X) is a new base station (Figure 2-34) that supports a
maximum of 4 calls simultaneously
Figure 2-34
2-92
Base Station BS3/1 S30807-H5482-X
●
BS2/2 (S30807-H5471-X200) is a base station that facilitates up to 8 simultaneous calls (only with upgrades).
●
BS3/3 (S30807-H5485-X) is a new base station that can only be operated using
the SLC16 board. The connection via at least two UP0/E interfaces is essential. It
supports a maximum of 12 calls when connected using three UP0/E interfaces.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
HiPath cordless
●
BS3/S (X30807-X5482-X100): The BS3/S single-cell base station guarantees
the operation of a maximum of one base station on the UP0/E interfaces of the
central board. It is not possible to operate additional base stations.
Technical Specifications
Table 2-36
Technical Data for Various Base Stations
Parameter
BS3/1 and BS3/S
BS3/3
Outdoor cover
Power supply voltage
range
42 to 54 V
42 to 54 V
–
Power consumption
max. 1.70 W
max. 3.20 W
–
Housing dimensions
(W x D x H in mm)
181 x 139 x 69
202 x 172 x 43
296 x 256 x 90
Weight
approx. 0.3 kg
approx. 0.5 kg
approx. 1.0 kg
Temperature range
Relative humidity
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
for indoor use:
– 5 to + 50 oC
–
for outdoor use:
– 20 to + 45 oC
–
up to 95 %
2-93
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Technical Specifications
2.11 Technical Specifications
The power consumption values for PSU and UPS apply at full load.
The UPS power consumption values include simultaneous battery charging. UPS
power consumption drops to PSU levels during maintenance charging.
Higher power consumption levels can be achieved by installing a UPSC-D in the HiPath 3350 (PSU power consumption = 100 W and UPS power consumption = 130
W).
Table 2-37
Maximum system values
Technical Specifications
HiPath
3750
HiPath
3550
HiPath
3350
HiPath
3250
HiPath
3150
HiPath
3700
HiPath
3500
HiPath
3300
(not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Power consumption of PSU
–
–
60 W
25 W
25 W
–
–
–
Power consumption of UPS1
430 W
180 W
90 W
–
–
430 W
180 W
90 W
Line voltage
AC line frequency
Weight
100 – 240 VAC (not for U.S); 120 VAC (for U.S. only)
50 – 60 Hz (not for U.S); 60 Hz (for U.S. only)
8 kg
22 kg
6 kg
0,7 kg
(48.46 lb.) (17.62 lb.) (13.22 lb.) (1.54 lb.)
(per fully
equipped
cabinet)
0,7 kg
22 kg
8 kg
6 kg
(1.54 lb.) (48.46 lb.) (17.62 lb.) (13.22 lb.)
(per fully
equipped
cabinet)
Expansion cabinet rack ECR
(not for U.S. and Canada):
6.5 kg (14.32 lb.) without
●
battery pack
17.5 kg (38,54 lb.) with bat●
tery pack
1 UPS not for U.S.
2-94
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Interfaces
2.12 Interfaces
Table 2-38
Station
Subscriber Line Interfaces
Interface
Connection
Protocol
Digital
UPO/E (2-chan- optiPoint 500 and optiset E telenel)
phones with adapters or UP0/E
card
Analog
a/b (T/R)
Analog telephones, group 2, 3 fax, DTMF/DP
Vtx, voice mail, data via V.24 (RS232) adapter (modem), announcement devices, MOH
Cordless
UPO/E
CMI base station
CorNet-TR
Digital (ISDN)
Nonvoice
S0 (2-channel)
S0 PC card, group 4 fax, telephones (no feeding)
DSS1
Table 2-39
Trunk and Tie Traffic Interfaces
Trunk traffic/
tie traffic
Digital
CorNet-TS
Interface
Connection
Protocol
S2M FV (30-channel)
ISDN trunk
Tie trunk networking
DSS1
CorNet N
QSig
S0 FV (2-channel)
(FV = dedicated line)
ISDN trunk
Tie trunk networking
DSS1
CorNet N
QSig
Analog
LS
Analog trunk, PSE
DTMF/DP
Analog
E&M
Analog tie trunk
DTMF/DP
IP
LAN
10BaseT 10/100
TCP/IP
(FV = dedicated line)
Digital
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-95
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Interfaces
Table 2-40
Option
2-96
Interfaces for Options
Interface
Connection
Profi-PSE
ESPA
PSE
Announcement
before answering
a/b (T/R)
E&M
Announcement device without start/
stop control or with start/stop control
V.24/CSTA
V.24 (RS-232) Service PC (first V.24 (RS-232) interface), applications (CSTA) or call detail printer/call charge computer
(second V.24 (RS-232) interface)
Protocol
optiClient Atten- UP0/E
dant
optiClient Attendant via UP0/E card or CorNetcontrol adapter
TS
Floating contacts
Relays
Door opener, messenger call, and
others, 4 floating contacts
ALUM
Relays
Analog power failure transfer for 4
trunks
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Interface-to-Interface Ranges
2.13 Interface-to-Interface Ranges
Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges
Table 2-41
Telephone Interface-to-Interface Ranges (with J-Y (ST) 2x2x0,6,
0.6 mm diameter)
Telephone Interfaces
Range in m
Loop Resistance in
Ohms
ISDN-S0 point-to-point
< 600
156
ISDN-S0 point-to-multipoint
< 150
39
ISDN-S0 wall outlet to terminal
< 10
–
Analog users
< 2000
520
UP0/E exchange to primary telephone
< 1000
230
UP0/E primary to secondary telephone
< 100
23
Trunk and CorNet-N Ranges
The table below provides the maximum cable lengths for direct trunk and CorNet-N
wiring. The values apply to ideal conditions, which means that there can be no joints.
The real conditions must be measured on-site.
Table 2-42
Interface
S0
S2M
Cable Lengths for Direct Trunk and CorNet-N Wiring
Cable
Diameter
Attenuation
per km
Max. Cable
Length
ICCS cable
J-2Y(ST)Y4x2x0,51 LG
ICCS Data5
0.51 mm
7.5 dB
at 96 kHz
800 m
Installation cable
J-2Y(ST)Y ≥ 10x2x0,6 ST
III BD
0.6 mm
6.0 dB
at 96 kHz
1000 m
A-2Y0F(L)2Y ≥ 10x2x0,6
(full PE insulation, filled)
0.6 mm
17 dB
at 1 MHz
350 m
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-97
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Numbering Plan
2.14 Numbering Plan
HiPath 3000 provide one default numbering plan for users.
Table 2-43
Numbering Plan for HiPath 3000 V1.2
Station Numbers
HiPath
3750
HiPath HiPath
3550
3350
Station numbers for users
(UP0/E primary, analog, S0,
CMI)
3841
188
20/188
Station numbers for adapters
or data terminals
(UP0/E secondary, TA analog,
TA S0,TA RS232, S0)
116
188
20/188
Station numbers for groups or
hunt groups
3002
150
20
Station numbers for users
3 digits
HiPath
3250
HiPath HiPath HiPath HiPath
3150
3700
3500
3300
20
20
0
8
2/3 digits
Maximum length of station
numbers
6 digits
Maximum length of numbers
for direct inward dialing (DID)
11 digits
3841
188
20/188
116
188
20/188
3002
150
20
3 digits
2/3 digits
1 For V3.0 and later, a maximum of 500 station number are possible for IP stations in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
2 For V3.0 and later, a maximum of 800 station numbers are possible for hunt groups.
Table 2-44
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 - Distribution of Station Numbers
Port Type
2-98
Station Number
Primary ports
100 - 349
Primary ports
500 - 633
Secondary ports
634 - 749
Groups
350 - 499
Groups
8600 - 8749
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Compliance
2.15 Compliance
2.15.1 CE Compliance (Not for U.S.)
The systems conform to the following guidelines:
Guideline
R&TTE-Direktive 1999/5/EEC
Standard
●
●
●
●
EN 60950 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 (Safety)
EN 50082-1 (EMC Immunity Industrial)
ETS 300 329 (DECT Air Interface)
TBR 06 (DECT Air Interface)
2.15.2 SAFETY International
IEC 60950 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4
2.15.3 Environmental Conditions
Operating Conditions (Electrical)
●
Operating limits
Room temperature: + 5 to + 40 °C (+ 41 to + 104° F)
Absolute humidity: 2 to 25 g H2O/m3
Relative humidity: 5 to 80%
●
System ventilation is by convection only. Forced-air ventilation is not required.
Caution
Avoid exposing the system to direct sunlight and heaters (excessive heat may damage the system).
If condensation has formed on a system, do not start up the system until the it has
thoroughly dried.
Operating Conditions (Mechanical)
The systems are intended for stationary use.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
2-99
3000sb2.fm
System Overview
Compliance
2-100
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
3 Features
Chapter Contents
This chapter discusses the following topics:
(The information on the HiPath 3250 and HiPath 3150 does not apply to the U.S.)
Topic
Section 3.1, Features for All Traffic Types
page 3-19
Section 3.2, Features for General Incoming Traffic
page 3-43
Section 3.3, Features for General Outgoing Traffic
page 3-99
Section 3.4, Features for General External Traffic
page 3-109
Section 3.5, Features for Incoming External Traffic
page 3-109
Section 3.6, Features for Outgoing External Traffic
page 3-146
Section 3.7, Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
page 3-183
Section 3.8, Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
page 3-195
Section 3.9, Features for Internal Traffic
page 3-210
Section 3.10, Tenant Service
page 3-232
Section 3.11, Other Features
page 3-236
Section 3.12, Networking
page 3-294
Section 3.13, Features for Call Detail Recording
page 3-323
Section 3.14, Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
page 3-357
Section 3.15, U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
page 3-383
Section 3.16, U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
page 3-392
Section 3.17, Host Link Interface
page 3-423
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-1
3000sb3.fm
Features
List of the described features in alphabetical order
Numerics
3PTY
See three-party service
A
account code 3-334
ACCT
See account code
ACD, see uniform call distribution 3-68
advice of charge 3-365
advice of charges during a call (not for U.S.) 3-324
advisory messages 3-225
AICC 3-79
allocation mode 3-386
alternate carriers (U.S. only) 3-198
analog direct inward dialing with MFC-R2 3-142
ANI4 (for U.S. only)
feature 3-43
announcement before answering 3-138
configuring 3-138
announcements 3-32
anti tromboning 3-304
AOC
See advice of charge
AOC-D (not for U.S.) 3-324
assigning speed-dialing numbers to ITR groups 3-174
associated dialing 3-247
associated services 3-248
attendant consoles
network 3-314
audible tone monitoring 3-159
automatic call completion on no reply (CCNR) on the trunk interface 3-180
automatic call distribution, see uniform call distribution 3-68
automatic callback when free or busy 3-215
automatic incoming call connection with UCD 3-79
automatic line seizure 3-156
B
B channel allocation 3-108
babyphone 3-229
basic MULAP groups 3-277
3-2
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
basic rate interface 3-383
CAID 3-389, 3-390
CO protocol 3-390
parameters 3-389
PDID 3-389
SPID 3-389, 3-390
basic-rate trunks
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
B-channel allocation mode 3-386
B-channel cut-through operation mode 3-413
B-channel selection 3-410
originating 3-411
terminating 3-412
booking a line 3-169
busy lamp field 3-213
busy override 3-39
C
CACH EKTS
See call appearance call handling electronic key telephone system
CAID
See call appearance identification
calculation accuracy 3-355
call allocation 3-122
call appearance call handling electronic key telephone system 3-418
call appearance identification 3-389
definition 3-390
call charges
display with currency 3-355
call deflection 3-369
call detail recording
at station 3-327
attendant (not for U.S.) 3-329
central 3-338
compressed output format 3-342
compressed output format (LAN) 3-345
long output format 3-352
per trunk (not for U.S.) 3-332
call detail recording, attendant 3-329
call distribution
See uniform call distribution (UCD)
call duration display on terminal 3-326
call forwarding 3-58, 3-366
U.S. ISDN 3-404
call forwarding busy and no answer 3-56
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-3
3000sb3.fm
Features
call forwarding unconditional (CFU) 3-368
call forwarding-no answer
after a timeout 3-53
call hold 3-19, 3-373
call keys 3-117
least cost routing and (U.S. only) 3-201
call management
announcement before answering 3-138
feature 3-48
call park 3-21
call pickup
answering machine 3-94
from an answering machine 3-94
within call pickup groups 3-91
call waiting 3-46, 3-375
U.S. ISDN 3-407
call waiting tone 3-46
call-by-call service 3-393
called and calling party number display services 3-419
caller list/station number storage 3-89
calling line identification presentation 3-361, 3-403
calling line identification restriction 3-362
calls
data 3-416
calls in queue 3-82
camp-on
(U.S. ISDN only) 3-396
carrier access methods for LCR (U.S. only) 3-198
carrier types (LCR) 3-184, 3-197
corporate network (CN) 3-187
dial-in control server (DICS) 3-186
Mercury Communications Limited Single Stage (not for U.S.) 3-184
Mercury Communications Limited Two Stage (not for U.S.) 3-185
primary carrier 3-187
carrier-select override (U.S. only) 3-200
least cost routing 3-205
CAS centralized attendant service 3-144
CCBS
See completion of calls to busy subscribers
CD
See call deflection
CDRA
See call detail recording, attendant
3-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
CDRC
See call detail recording central
CDRC outgoing without connection 3-338
CDRC ticket without connect 3-338
CDRS
See call detail recording at station
CDRT
See call detail recording per trunk (not for U.S.)
central office protocol 3-390
central voice mail server, network 3-316
centralized attendant service CAS 3-144
CF
See call forwarding
CFNA
See call forwarding-no answer
CH
See call hold
change display 3-293
changeover
individual telephone lock 3-101
system telephone lock 3-103
class of service 3-163
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-200
CLIP
See calling line identification presentation
CLIP no screening 3-181
CLIR
See calling line identification restriction
closed numbering 3-299
CM
See call management
codes for outgoing calls 3-380
collect call barring for ISDN trunks 3-382
collect call barring per station 3-141
collect call barring per trunk 3-140
COLP
See connected line identification and presentation
COLR
See connected line identification restriction
completion of calls to busy subscribers 3-372
compressed output format for CDRC 3-342
compressed output format for CDRC via LAN 3-345
conference 3-28, 3-374
trunk to trunk 3-28
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-5
3000sb3.fm
Features
conference calls
U.S. ISDN 3-397
configurable toll restriction 3-163
connected line identification 3-408
connected line identification presentation 3-363
connected line identification restriction 3-364
connected party displays 3-420
consultation hold 3-34
converter (CSTA interface) 3-423
CorNet-N
access for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-198
call waiting 3-306
closed numbering 3-299
consultation hold 3-304
extension number 3-303
incoming calls 3-303
name display 3-309
number display 3-309
pickup 3-304
station name 3-303
toll restriction 3-300, 3-303
transfer 3-304
COS 3-163
credit card call access 3-399
CSO
see carrier-select override
CSTA interface 3-423
currency
call charge display with 3-355
customer-specific display 3-293
CW
See call waiting
D
data calls 3-416
date 3-237
date and time display 3-237
D-channel encoding type 3-386
dedicated service 3-394
deferring a call 3-96
delete all station numbers 3-259
denied list for undialed trunks 3-173
dial plan
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-199, 3-202
dialed number identification service 3-409
3-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
dial-in control server access for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-199
DID
See direct inward dialing
direct inward dialing 3-128, 3-358
U.S. ISDN 3-400
direct inward system access
description 3-131
direct station selection 3-212
DISA
See direct inward system access
display
called party 3-419
connected party 3-419, 3-420
date and time 3-237
number of stations with direct trunk access (Austria only) 3-250
distinctive ringing 3-44
DND
See do not disturb
DNIS
See dialed number identification service
do not disturb 3-86
ringer cutoff 3-86
door opener 3-217
DSS
See direct station selection
DTMF or rotary pulse dialing
selecting in least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
DTMF tones
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
dual-tone multifrequency
converting for PRI 3-414
dual-tone multifrequency direct inward dialing 3-136
dual-tone multifrequency transmission (DTMF) 3-99
E
E911 emergency call service for USA 3-178
ECT
See explicit call transfer
editing station numbers 3-231
editing the telephone number 3-231
EKTS
See electronic key telephone system
electronic key telephone system
DID 3-400
U.S. ISDN 3-417
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-7
3000sb3.fm
Features
electronic notebook
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
emergency call service ECS 3-178
emulation type 3-386
en-bloc dialing 3-158
en-bloc sending 3-415
end-of-dialing recognition 3-161
enhanced radio paging equipment (not for U.S.)
features 3-221
entrance telephones 3-217
equal access 3-398
Euro-ISDN features 3-357
executive MULAP groups 3-277
executive/secretary configuration, see Top configuration 3-268
expensive route identification (U.S. only) 3-200
explicit call transfer 3-378
external call forwarding 3-368
F
fax waiting message/answering machine key 3-95
features
correlation with least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-200
features in alphabetical order 3-2
flex call 3-106
flexible numbering 3-299
forced account codes
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
foreign exchange non-ISDN facility 3-393
frame/line/encoding 3-386
G
group call 3-62
group call with busy signaling 3-64
group ringing 3-123
H
handsfree answerback 3-218
hold 3-19, 3-373
U.S. ISDN 3-405
Host Link Interface 3-423
hoteling 3-254
hotline 3-105
hunt group 3-65
3-8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
I
incoming calls
CorNet-N 3-303
night answer 3-126
incoming preference 3-280
individual telephone lock (changeover) 3-101
intercept conditions 3-133
intercept position
network 3-314
Intercept with telephone lock 3-175
inter-exchange carriers
CAC 3-197
CIC 3-197
operator access 3-399
protocols 3-385
interfaces
BRI 3-383
PRI 3-383
internal directory 3-227
internal paging 3-218, 3-219
internal traffic 3-210
internal traffic restriction groups
feature 3-166
INWATS facility 3-393
IP networking 3-294
ISDN 3-383
CAID 3-389, 3-390
SDID 3-390
SPID 3-389
See also U.S. ISDN or Euro-ISDN features
K
key programming 3-115, 3-117
keypad
converting DTMF for PRI 3-414
keypad dialing 3-176
keys
DSS 3-212
redial 3-146
repdial 3-212
L
LAN interface, PSTN interface 3-423
language settings 3-245
languages, loading 3-245
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-9
3000sb3.fm
Features
last number redial (LNR) 3-146
LCR
See least cost routing
least cost routing 3-183
alternate carriers (U.S. only) 3-198
and basic-rate trunks (U.S. only) 3-201
and call keys (U.S. only) 3-201
and DTMF tones (U.S. only) 3-201
and electronic notebook (U.S. only) 3-201
and forced account codes (U.S. only) 3-201
and MUSAP keys (U.S. only) 3-201
and repertory dial keys (U.S. only) 3-201
and station redial (U.S. only) 3-201
and system speed-dialing (U.S. only) 3-201
and toll restriction (U.S. only) 3-201
carrier access methods (U.S. only) 3-198
carrier types 3-197
carrier-select override (U.S. only) 3-200, 3-205
CorNet-N (U.S. only) 3-198
correlation with other features (U.S. only) 3-200
dial plan (U.S. only) 3-199, 3-202
dial-in control server (U.S. only) 3-199
expensive route identification (U.S. only) 3-200
main carrier (U.S. only) 3-198
MCL single stage access (U.S. only) 3-198
MCL two stage access (U.S. only) 3-198
number handling (U.S. only) 3-200
operation (U.S. only) 3-208
outdial rules
letters (U.S. only) 3-205
parameters (U.S. only) 3-205
outdial rules (U.S. only) 3-199, 3-204, 3-205
primary rate access (U.S. only) 3-199
route table (U.S. only) 3-204
route table paths (U.S. only) 3-204
route table search order (U.S. only) 3-204
routing tables (U.S. only) 3-202
selecting DTMF or rotary pulse dialing (U.S. only) 3-201
time of day evaluation (U.S. only) 3-199
time table (U.S. only) 3-205
U.S. only 3-195
least cost routing class of service (U.S. only) 3-200
least cost routing overflow (U.S. only) 3-200
leave group call/hunt group (stop hunt) 3-67
3-10
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
leave UCD group 3-74
letters
for LCR outdial rules (U.S. only) 3-205
local exchange carriers
carrier types 3-197
operator access 3-399
protocols 3-385
location identification number LIN 3-178
locking telephone
system 3-103
long output format for CDRC 3-352
M
main carrier for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-198
malicious call identification 3-371
manager/secretary configuration, see Top configuration 3-268
MCID
See malicious call identification
MCL single stage carrier access (U.S. only) 3-198
MCL two stage carrier access (U.S. only) 3-198
message texts/mailboxes (information function) 3-222
message waiting 3-222
U.S. ISDN 3-421
voicemail 3-422
message waiting indication at the trunk interface 3-121
MFC-R2 trunk 3-142
mobile PIN 3-106
MSN
See multiple subscriber numbers
MULAP 3-261, 3-277
multi-device connection 3-109, 3-392
multilingual text output 3-245
multiple subscriber numbers 3-359
configuring default station numbers instead 3-360
U.S. ISDN 3-401
MUSAP keys
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
music on hold
internal/external source 3-30
relays 3-239
MWI at the trunk interface 3-121
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-11
3000sb3.fm
Features
N
N11 access 3-399
names
assigning to stations 3-214
called party display 3-419
calling party display 3-419
translating station numbers for speed dialing 3-120
national and international codes for outgoing calls 3-380
networking 3-294
call forwarding with rerouting 3-310
call waiting 3-306
callback on free/busy 3-308
CDR with networking 3-302
central attendant console 3-314
closed numbering 3-299
conference 3-313
consultation hold/transfer/pickup 3-304
distinctive ringing in the network 3-307
incoming calls 3-302, 3-303
open numbering 3-299
recall 3-305
satellite capability 3-296
sharing central voice mail server 3-316
sharing system speed-dialing in a gateway system 3-315
station number/name display 3-309
toggle 3-312
toll restriction with CorNet N 3-300
night answer 3-125
activating 3-126
night service 3-125
number of B channels for PRI parameters 3-386
O
offset 3-350
open numbering 3-299
operation of least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-208
operator assisted credit card call access 3-399
optional control relay modules
relay 3-239
OptiPage 3-218
optiPoint 500
adapters
key module 3-212
optiPoint BLF 3-213
optiPoint Attendant 3-37
3-12
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
optiPoint BLF 3-213
optiPoint key module 3-212
originating B-channel selection 3-411
outdial rules
least cost routing
letters (U.S. only) 3-205
parameters (U.S. only) 3-205
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-204, 3-205
outdial rules for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-199
outgoing calls
LNR 3-146
redial 3-146
outgoing preference 3-281
OUTWATS facility 3-393
overflow
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-200
overflow (UCD) 3-78
overload indication 3-41
P
paging 3-218
parameters
for LCR outdial rules (U.S. only) 3-205
park 3-21
path replacement 3-304
phantom direct inward dialing 3-389
assigning numbers 3-391
pickup
trunk key 3-116
point-to-point connection 3-379
PRI carrier access for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-199
primary rate interface 3-383
B-channel allocation 3-386
D-channel encoding type 3-386
emulation type 3-386
frame/line/encoding 3-386
number of B channels 3-386
protocol type 3-385
trunk group calling service 3-387
priority calls 3-71
private trunk 3-168
procedure keys 3-289
project calls 3-334
protocol type, primary rate interface 3-385
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-13
3000sb3.fm
Features
PSE
See radio paging equipment (not for U.S.)
PtP
See point-to-point connection
public network trunks
setting up in least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
Q
QSig 3-317
basic features 3-318
busy override 3-320
central attendant position 3-319
COS changeover 3-322
intercept by central attendant position 3-319
resetting the lock code 3-321
R
radio paging equipment 3-220
PSE simple 3-220
via ESPA 3-221
recall 3-35
recorded announcement/music on Hold (UCD) 3-76
reject calls 3-98
relays 3-239
relocate 3-254
repdial
See repertory dial keys
repertory dial keys
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
programming 3-212
reply text 3-225
reset activated services 3-252
resetting services 3-252
ringer cutoff 3-88
room monitor 3-229
route table
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-204
route table paths
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-204
route table search order
least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-204
routing tables (LCR) 3-188
routing tables (U.S. only) 3-202
3-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
S
screened transfer 3-26
search order
of LCR route table 3-204
selecting DTMF or rotary pulse dialing in LCR (U.S. only) 3-201
selective seizure of a DID number via a MUSAP key 3-129
sending information text 3-222
sensors 3-243
service profile identifier 3-389
BRI 3-390
maximum values 3-390
services in the talk state 3-251
setting the signaling method for analog stations 3-36
shared transfer switch 3-42
signaling of direct inward dialing numbers for incoming calls 3-130
silent monitoring 3-85
silent reversal at start and end of call 3-323
simple PSE
See radio paging equipment
speaker call 3-218
special access 3-399
speed dialing
network 3-315
station 3-154
system 3-149
station number configuration via Assistant T 3-97
station numbers, deleting 3-259
station redial
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
station speed dialing in system 3-154
stations
universal night answer 3-126
stimulus interface 3-176
storing procedures 3-289
SUB
See subaddressing
subaddressing 3-370
subscriber groups 3-61
switch (relay) 3-239
system administration
activating services in the talk state 3-251
System number - incoming 3-181
System number - outgoing 3-181
system speed dialing
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-15
3000sb3.fm
Features
network 3-315
outgoing external traffic 3-149
sharing in a gateway system 3-315
system speed-dialing
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
system speed-dialing in tenant systems 3-152
system telephone lock
changeover 3-103
T
targeted call pickup outside of a PU group 3-93
Team configuration 3-261
example with 2 members 3-261
example with 8 members 3-264
Team keys 3-265
Team/Top 3-261
Teilehmerrufnummer unterdrücken 3-181
telephone lock
individual 3-101
system 3-103
temporary signaling method changeover 3-99
temporary station number display suppression 3-171
tenant services 3-232
configuring 3-233
terminal portability (TP) 3-376
terminating B-channel selection 3-412
text messages 3-222
three-party conference 3-374, 3-406
three-party service 3-374
tie trunk non-ISDN facility 3-393
TIEL 3-298
time 3-237
time of day evaluation for least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-199
time table, LCR (U.S. only) 3-205
toggle 3-23
trunk key 3-116
toll fraud monitoring 3-353
toll restriction 3-163
and least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
Top configuration 3-268
example with 1 exec./1 secr. 3-268
example with 2 exec./2 secr. 3-270
Top keys 3-270
traffic restriction groups 3-166
3-16
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
transfer
U.S. ISDN 3-395
UCD groups 3-84
transfer from announcement 3-219
transit traffic 3-118
translate station numbers to names for system speed dialing 3-120
TRGs
See traffic restriction groups or internal traffic restriction groups
trunk group calling service 3-387
trunk groups 3-113
trunk keys 3-115
trunk queuing 3-169
trunk seizure type 3-156
trunk signaling method 3-162
trunks
setting up in least cost routing (U.S. only) 3-201
trunk-to-trunk conference 3-28
U
U.S. ISDN
B-channel allocation 3-386
BRI 3-383
CO protocol 3-390
D-channel encoding type 3-386
emulation type 3-386
frame/line/encoding 3-386
interfaces 3-383
multi-device connection 3-392
number of B channels (PRI) 3-386
PRI 3-383
protocol type 3-385
trunk group calling service 3-387
UCD
See uniform call distribution
uniform call distribution 3-68
call prioritization 3-71
group status display 3-82
groups
AICC 3-79
home agent 3-83
night answer 3-81
queues 3-70
subscriber states 3-72
work 3-75
universal night answer position 3-126
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-17
3000sb3.fm
Features
unscreened transfer 3-24
user to user signaling (UUS1) 3-59, 3-377
V
V.24
range extension for call data 3-354
voice channel signaling security 3-236
voice mail
central network server 3-316
voicemail 3-422
W
work time (UCD) 3-75
3-18
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1 Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.1 Call Hold
Definition
Users can place an active call on hold. Placing a call on hold means that the call stays
connected, but in a waiting state, until the user retrieves it. After placing a call on hold,
the user can either retrieve the held call or place another call on the same line.
A distinction is made between common hold and exclusive hold.
With common hold, any party can retrieve the held call; with exclusive hold, only the
party who placed the call on hold can retrieve it.
The following describes other situations involving Hold states:
●
Call Waiting (refer to Section 3.2.3 for more details)
When a station is involved in a call and a second call is waiting to be answered,
you can scroll to and select the prompt Call Waiting. This places the first caller
on exclusive hold at your telephone and answers the incoming call. This is also
known as the feature Answer Hold. You can process the second call (transfer,
park) or “Quit and Return” to the held party and the incoming call is dropped.
●
Toggle and Automatic Hold (refer to Section 3.1.3 for more details)
When a station, using a trunk key or call key, is engaged in one conversation and
another call is incoming on another key, you can automatically place the current
call on exclusive hold and answer the incoming call by pressing the flashing key.
You can then toggle between the 2 calls at will. The lines are alternately on Consultation Hold and the last call handled will recall if you go on-hook.
Alternatively, you can place your original caller on Common Hold, by first pressing the HOLD key before answering the incoming call. Anyone with an appearance of the Trunk key or Call key can take the call by pressing the slowly flashing
key.
●
Consultation Hold and transfer (refer to Section 3.1.4 and Section 3.1.5 for
more details)
When a station is engaged in a conversation, whether or not the call is on an outside line button or not, you can place the current conversation on Consultation
Hold to consult with another internal or external party. The held party is on exclusive hold on your telephone.
●
Hold and retrieve trunk (refer to Section 3.4.4 for more details)
This allows the display user to place an outside trunk call on hold whether there
is an appearance of the trunk or not on the telephone. Pressing the Hold/transfer
key, the trunk is placed on exclusive hold and the display provides the information
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-19
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
on the held trunk, which reads Line held on xxx, where xxx is the trunk number.
You can go on-hook. To retrieve the held line, press the Retrieve line button or
dial the access code followed by the trunk number.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.1.2, Call Park, on page 3-21
●
Section 3.1.3, Toggle, on page 3-23
●
Section 3.1.6, Conference, on page 3-28
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-20
Requirement or Condition
Trunk key, Retrieve
key
You can retrieve a call that was placed on hold by pressing
either a trunk key (when the LED is flashing slowly), by
pressing the Retrieve key, or by entering a code from the
Program/Service menu. The trunk to be seized must be
suffix-dialed (with the exception of the trunk key).
Internal calls
(for U.S. Only)
To place an internal call on hold, users must either park the
call or use an internal consult key.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.2 Call Park
Definition
With call park, users can place both internal and external calls on hold. Parked calls
can be answered from any telephone in the system.
Users can activate the call park feature only when they are on another call. Users
must assign a virtual number (park slot 0 through 9) to the call that they want parked.
They must then enter the slot number to receive the call.
A parked call that is not retrieved within a given time (default is 160 seconds) recalls
the originator and follows the recall rules.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.1.1, Call Hold, on page 3-19
●
Section 3.1.3, Toggle, on page 3-23
●
Section 3.1.6, Conference, on page 3-28
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
Max. 10
Max. 10
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Number of calls
parked simultaneously
Max. 10
Max. 10
Max. 10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Park
You cannot park an undialed trunk.
Park
You must answer a call before you can park it.
Conference
You cannot park a conference call.
Call forwarding
In the case of a recall, a parked call does not follow call forwarding.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-21
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Subject
3-22
Requirement or Condition
DTMF
DTMF mode is not deactivated when you activate the park
feature. This applies both to the station that parked the call
and to the parked station.
Occupied park slots
If the park slot selected for parking a call is already occupied, a tone sounds, and the number does not appear on
the screen. Select another park slot.
DND
A station in DND can place a call in a park location; however, if the parked call recalls and no other destination has
been identified in call management, the call automatically
is disconnected after the recall timer expires.
MOH
Parked callers hear Music on Hold (MOH).
CorNet-N
An incoming call over a CorNet-N link can only be placed
in a Park location at the destination node. A call parked in
one node cannot be retrieved from another node over the
CorNet-N link.
DISA
The call park feature cannot be activated from a DISA connection.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.3 Toggle
Definition
Toggle enables a user to toggle between two parties, placing one of the parties on
hold. The toggle feature can be used for internal and external calls.
The rules for consultation hold also apply to the active call. Users cannot toggle between conference calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Hold
If you are on hold, you cannot use the toggle feature.
DTMF
DTMF is not deactivated when you activate the toggle feature.
Two incoming calls
If the second party is also an incoming call, the user can
answer the incoming call by using the feature Call Waiting
(default access code is *55) then Toggle between the first
and second call as explained above.
Line keys
Users with line keys (Call keys, Trunk keys) can toggle between one call and another by pressing the flashing line
key for the other incoming call, and Toggle between both
by pressing one line key then the next. The lines are in exclusive hold.
Exception: In the case of the General Call key appearances, users should always press the Hold button, followed by
the Release button, before pressing another General Call
key appearance. This places the first call on Common Call.
Otherwise the call remains on Consultation Hold.
Music on Hold
MOH is always connected to the held party.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-23
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.4 Unscreened Transfer
Definition
Users can transfer an internal or external call to another internal station before the
called party answers. The other station can be in the same system or it can be in a
networked system (CorNet-N or QSig [not for U.S.]).
If the requested station is unavailable, the call will remain in a wait state until the line
is free (camp on). Only two calls can be transferred to a busy station simultaneously.
A telephone with display at the transfer destination can display the number of either
the station initially called or the calling party.
Calls transferred to a station which is call forwarded follow the forwarding mode set at
the internal destination.
A call transferred to an external destination over an analog loop start trunk does not
recall because the HiPath 3000 does not know the state of the final destination. In this
case, a pseudo answer is provided.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-24
Requirement or Condition
External transfer destination
You cannot place an unscreened transfer to an external
destination.
Recall
If a transferred call is not answered within a certain period
of time, the system initiates a recall.
Recall timer
A transferred call that is not answered recalls to the transferring station. The recall timer, Callback timeout for transfer before answering (default is 45 seconds), is started
when the transferring station releases the call from the station. This timer also controls the length of time that a caller
is camped on the destination station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call charges
Toll charges are assigned to the switching station until the
call is picked up or released. After the destination station
answers, the charges are assigned to it.
Call charges
If the destination is an external destination, the call charges are assigned to the transferring station as long as the
destination answers the call.
DSS
Pressing a DSS key from a talking state, results in an immediate Consultation call with the party designated by the
DSS key. In effect, it replaces the procedure: Consult +
destination.
Do Not Disturb
Transferring a call to a station in Do not Disturb results in
an immediate recall to the transferring station.
If the transferring station is itself in a Do Not Disturb state,
a Recalling transferred call overrides the DND function and
rings the telephone.
Music on Hold
The called party hears MOH, if provided.
External destinations
An external call can only be transferred to another external
destination (in the same system or in another node via
CorNet-N) if one of the trunks can provide release supervision (ground start, PRI, BRI, DID, T1).
Busy stations
Only two calls can be transferred to a busy station simultaneously. On a display telephone, the state of the called party (if internal) is displayed—Busy or Do Not Disturb.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-25
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.5 Screened Transfer
Definition
Users can use screened transfer by initiating a consultation call to an internal user (a
third party) after answering a call. After the third party answers, the user can hang up
the phone, transferring the call received.
Users can also transfer an internal call to an external destination. The receiving station can be in the same system as the called party, or it can be in a different networked
system (CorNet-N). If the requested station is busy and the call is nevertheless transferred, the call camps on until the line is free.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-26
Requirement or Condition
Call charges
Toll charges are assigned to the switching station until the
call is transferred. After the destination station answers,
the charges are assigned to it.
External destination
In the case of an external destination, the transfer must be
initiated.
DSS
Pressing a DSS key from a talking state, results in an immediate Consultation call with the party designated by the
DSS key. In effect, it replaces the procedure Consult + destination.
Music on Hold
The called party hears MOH, if provided.
External destinations
An external call can only be transferred to another external
destination (in the same system or in another node via
CorNet-N) if one of the trunks can provide release supervision (ground start, PRI, BRI, DID, T1).
Busy stations
Only two calls can be transferred to a busy station simultaneously. On a display telephone, the state of the called party (if internal) is displayed—Busy or Do Not Disturb.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Transfer to CF station
Calls transferred to a station that is call forwarded follow
the forwarding mode set at the internal destination. The
display on a display telephone indicates the final destination.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-27
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.6 Conference
Definition
A user can combine up to five stations into a conference call.
The user setting up the conference can individually disconnect stations from the conference or release the conference entirely. In addition, the user can also exit the conference without terminating it, even if the conference includes external stations (trunkto-trunk conference).
If internal stations still remain in the conference, the new conference leader is the user
who has been in the conference the longest. If only external stations remain in the
conference and no backward release criterion is present (on loop-start trunks), a timer, Time until warning tone, in main station interface transit con, is started; the default
time is: 5 minutes. When this timer expires, the remaining stations receive a warning
tone and the conference is disconnected after default 10 seconds. This timer, Time
from warning tone until release, is variable from 0 to 42 min.
The initiator of the conference is designated as the Conference Master. If the conference master leaves the conference, control of the conference is passed on to the first
internal member which was part of the conference.
Members of the conference call can leave the conference by going on-hook or by answering a call waiting. However, they must call the conference master to be added on
to the conference once again.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-28
V1.0 or later
Conferences per system
6
3
3
3
3
Stations per conference
5
5
5
5
5
External stations per
conference
4
4
4
4
4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Conference
Internal users cannot participate in more than one conference in the system (except with CorNet-N).
Analog stations
The following restrictions apply to HiPath 3350 and HiPath
3300:
Analog stations can set up no more than a three-party conference. Up to four analog telephones can be passive participants in a conference.
Analog stations
Analog stations are not checked to see if they are voice devices.
Voice, data transmission
You can set up a conference between voice stations only.
Call charges
Toll charges are assigned to the party who set up the toll
call. When a call is transferred or released, the toll charges
are assigned to the remaining internal station from the moment the call is released.
Conference participants when external
applications are connected via CSTA
CSTA Phase II places a limit on the length of CSTA messages. Conferences with more than three participants exceed this limit and can cause the connected applications
to malfunction when at least one station is monitored by
CSTA.
This is why the option to expand conferences to include
more than three participants is not offered in the menu and
will be rejected if you try to invoke it with a code.
DISA
The conference feature cannot be invoked from an external DISA station.
Park
Conference calls cannot be parked.
Silent Monitoring
Silent Monitoring limits the maximum number of conferences. Maximum number of conferences possible in system = maximum number of simultaneous Silent Monitoring
stations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-29
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.7 Music on Hold (Internal or External Source)
Definition
An integrated music source (hardware module) makes it possible to play music for
waiting parties during switching operations.
As an alternative, you can use the following optional modules with HiPath 3350, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3300 and HiPath 3500 (in the U.S., the EXMNA board is included
with every HiPath 3000 system):
●
EXMNA (connection option for an external music source) (for U.S. only)
●
EXM (connection option for an external music source) (not for U.S)
●
EXMR (connection option for an external music source)
●
MPPI (with music component) (not for U.S)
All HiPath 3000 models allow you to define up to six MOH sources on analog interfaces for the six possible ITR groups (Section 3.10.1, Tenant Service Configuration).
Devices other than Genius or Mozart must be connected to a 600 Ohm transformer.
The EXMNA card limits the level at which MOH can be heard over outside lines and
is therefore FCC compliant without external limiters.
Callers hear MOH if in Consultation Hold state, Park state, and in a transfer state if
configured. Also, queued callers in an UCD environment can hear MOH if so configured.
MOH can be configured in one of three ways:
3-30
1.
No Music on Hold: The held party will only hear silence.
2.
MOH with ring tone: The held party will first hear MOH during the Consultation
process. When a call is transferred to the destination, the MOH is replaced by
ringback tone.
3.
MOH without Ring Tone: The held party will hear MOH until the called party answers the call.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
HW options
x
x
–
–
Free analog subscriber ports
SLA16,
SLA8/16/
24N,
TIEL
SW requirements
EXM,
EXMR,
EXMNA,
MPPI
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
EXMNA
Requirement or Condition
EXMNA is used only in the U.S.
EXM, EXMR, EXMNA, Connecting the EXM, EXMR, EXMNA or MPPI board auMPPI
tomatically switches the system over to the external music
source.
MOH
You must unplug the external music source, EXM module,
or EXMNA module to activate internal music on hold.
MOH (not for U.S.)
HiPath 3250 provides limited internal MOH.
MOH source
You cannot use the logical port “0” as an MOH source.
MOH source at analog If the MOH source is turned on (loop active) you need to
ports
disconnect and then reconnect it (interrupting the loop) after configuring the analog port.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-31
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.8 Announcements
Definition
For uniform call distribution (UCD), announcement before answering, and DTMF direct inward dialing (DID), users can connect announcement equipment. This announcement replaces music on hold (MOH) in certain situations (such as during hold
or while a station is busy or being transferred).
Announcement devices can be connected to analog interfaces, or can be connected
using E&M in the HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 system. Start/stop control can be implemented using relays and sensors or E&M. Up to 32 stations can be connected to
an announcement device.
Both interfaces provide sequenced messages (as opposed to barge-in); however, the
E&M interface can advise the announcement device to return to start when the queue
is empty. With the SLA interface method, the announcement device must reach the
end of its message before returning to start. This can be critical if the message is
lengthy.
The following types of announcement are available:
●
Recorded Announcement/Music on Hold (MOH) with UCD on page 3-76
●
Announcement Before Answering on page 3-138
●
Dual-Tone Multifrequency Direct Inward Dialing on page 3-136
●
Message Texts/Mailboxes/Message Waiting on page 3-222
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
3-32
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
free analog subscriber
ports (+
REAL for
Start/
Stop),
analog tie
traffic
TIEL
x
x
x
x
Free analog subscriber ports
(+ STRB/STRBR for Start/Stop)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Announcement devices
16
4
1
1
1
Simultaneous announcements
30
30
30
30
30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-33
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.9 Consultation Hold
Definition
This feature allows users to place a new internal or external call on hold and consult
with an existing caller on the same line by placing the existing caller on hold. The consultation call ends when the user retrieves the held call. If the user hangs up instead
of retrieving the held call, the held call is transferred or recalled.
If users place an external call on hold and place another external consultation call,
they must use the telephone transfer feature to connect the two calls.
Analog telephones can connect external calls to external stations using the conference feature.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.1.4, Unscreened Transfer, on page 3-24
●
Section 3.1.5, Screened Transfer, on page 3-26
●
Section 3.1.6, Conference, on page 3-28
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-34
Requirement or Condition
Redial
You can use the redial feature when you are in a consultation call.
Do not disturb
It is not possible to set up a consultation call to a busy subscriber who has activated do not disturb.
DTMF mode
Initiating a consultation call will deactivate DTMF mode if it
is active; it is reactivated when a consultation call is terminated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.10 Recall
Definition
A held call that is not answered or a call that was not switched successfully is signaled
at the initiating station as a recall. A display telephone at the initial caller’s location
can display the number of either the switched internal or external station or the number of the destination.
An automatic recall is always carried out if:
1.
A call was parked for a certain period or was placed on common hold and was
not answered. The recall occurs when the hold/park timer expires (recall a
parked connection).
2.
An unscreened transfer was placed to a party who did not answer the call within
a certain period (recall a transferred/switched trunk).
3.
An unscreened transfer was placed to a station and the destination did not exist,
was busy with a second call, the telephone was defective (in the case of digital
telephones) or the transfer type was not allowed (transfer external call to external
destination). An immediate recall is carried out in these cases.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-35
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.11 Setting the Signaling Method for Analog Stations
Definition
After the system boots, all analog station ports are set to DTMF dialing. If users need
to change an analog station port to dial pulsing, they can use Assistant T or HiPath
3000 Manager E. Users do not need to reset the system after changing the signaling
method. The new signaling method is functional immediately.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Signaling method
3-36
Requirement or Condition
If a dial pulsing signal is detected, the code receiver remains active so toll restrictions are not circumvented.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.12 optiPoint Attendant
Definition
Users can configure up to six telephones in the HiPath 3000 system to carry out
switching services. The optiPoint Attendant telephone simultaneously serves as an
intercept position and an attendant console (AC). All calls are routed to the AC if direct
inward dialing is not available or if no station can be reached via the call allocation
algorithms in call management (intercept). The operator then redirects incoming calls
to the stations selected. For additional information, see also Section 6.7.3, optiPoint
Attendant
Users can also configure a PC as the attendant console (PC AC). This specially configured PC is known as optiClient Attendant and is described in detail in Section 6.7.2
For the layout and assignment of function keys on the optiPoint Attendant, refer to
Section 6.7.3, optiPoint Attendant.
Individual Intercept positions can be configured for day operation and another for
night operation. Up to 4 optiPoint key modules can be connected to the optiPoint Attendant.
In general, external calls are directed to Call keys whereas internal calls appear on
DSS/Repdial keys on the optiPoint key modules.
Intercept and attendant positions can form Hunt Groups. A hunt group where all
members are busy, is not intercepted to the intercept position. The waiting calls remain in the queue.
Calls can be configured system-wide to be intercepted in the following conditions:
●
Ring No answer, Busy, Invalid number dialed, Incomplete number, on an unanswered recalls and when an attempt is made to dial from specific stations which
have activated CodeLock.
●
In the case of Ring No Answer, the system first checks the Call Management tables for further configured destinations. If there are no none, the call is then diverted to the intercept position.
CorNet-N
CorNet-N calls can be internal or external depending on their source. If the calling
party is an internal station in a remote node, the call is flagged as internal. If the call
is from a trunk in the remote node, the call is flagged as external.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-37
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
General requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
Digital subscriber line module
x
x
–
–
optiPoint 500 standard, optiPoint 500 advance,
optiset E advance plus/comfort, advance conference/conference, or memory telephone (system telephone)
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-38
Requirement or Condition
Overflow
You can configure numeric and time overflow to a programmable overflow destination.
A maximum of 6 optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones can
be configured with overflow display.
Undialed trunk
You can switch an undialed trunk.
Busy external line
You can selectively release busy external lines.
Second number
You can also reach the AC under a second station number
(default 9, USA/GBR 0).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.13 Busy Override
Definition
Authorized users and the current intercept position (day or night) can use a code or
key to override a call in progress at an internal station. The participating stations are
notified of the busy override by an alerting tone and a screen display.
The feature can be invoked during the busy signal or during the camp on state.
During an override condition,
●
if the called party goes on-hook, all parties are released.
●
if the party which was connected to the called party goes on-hook, the overridden
and overriding parties remain connected.
●
if the overriding party goes on-hook first, the original conversation can continue
and the conference bridge is removed.
●
If the called party had activated DND, the conversation will nevertheless be overridden. However, a station authorized to use the Busy Override feature, cannot
override a station with DND active and in an idle state.
Any Voice terminal in the system can be configured for this capability.
A station with Data security (Assistant T) or Call Waiting rejection (HiPath 3000 Manager E) active, cannot be overridden.
CorNet-N
Override cannot be invoked over a CorNet-N link.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-39
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
Requirements and Conditions
3-40
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Voice channel signaling security
You cannot override a call if the called station or the internal party it is connected to is entered as a data station
(voice channel signaling security), or if the called party is
dialing a number.
Hunt group
Busy override is not possible if all stations are busy when
a group or hunt group is called.
S0 station
It is not possible to override an S0 station.
Attendant console
The busy override feature is activated by default and cannot be deactivated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.14 Overload Indication
Definition
Users can activate an overload indicator (attendant console) for a fixed station (first
station port in the system). When the user presses the key, the waiting calls are displayed (key LED). The following signaling types are possible:
●
Flashing: Waiting call and busy AC.
●
Flickering: Waiting call was not answered within 30 seconds; there are more calls
than can be processed by the attendant consoles.
●
Off: The AC is not overloaded.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
x
x
Digital subscriber line module
SW requirements
x
x
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Overload indication
Requirement or Condition
An LED that is already flickering is not reset to flashing.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-41
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for All Traffic Types
3.1.15 Shared Transfer Switch (Not for U.S.)
Definition
A shared transfer switch allows an analog trunk connection to be used for two stations. The switch divides the signal into positive and negative half-waves and assigns
each to a station. The network provider (such as Deutsche Telekom AG in Germany)
installs the shared transfer switch.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Shared transfer switch This feature is for Germany only.
3-42
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2 Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.1 ANI (for U.S. only)
Definition
The ANI feature (automatic number identification) displays the calling party’s station
number, which is transmitted over analog trunks.
While the phone is ringing, the station number is transmitted by BFSK (binary frequency shift keying) during the first ringing phase. HiPath 3000 support the feature
only until the called party lifts the handset. Internally, the system handles ANI data
just like an ISDN number.
To run the ANI feature, you must have the ANI4 (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350) or ANI4R
(HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300) options board, which is used in conjunction with the
TMGL4 or TMGL4R trunk board.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
–
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
ANI4
ANI4R
ANI4
ANI4R
–
–
SW requirements
–
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Country specifics
Requires country-specific boards or firmware versions.
Trunk boards
The trunk boards used must support call charging module
assignment GMZ (not for U.S.).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-43
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.2 Distinctive Ringing
Definition
Distinctive tones indicate different call types. This enables the user to distinguish between incoming internal and incoming external calls. In ISDN systems, acoustic information is secondary to displays on the screen because different features can have
the same ring signaling.
Depending on the telephone, three different types of acoustic signaling are possible:
●
●
●
for optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones:
–
Ring type 1 = External call CO (for example, double ring)
–
Ring type 2 = External call CO2 (for example, triple ring)
–
Ring type 3 = External call CO3 (for example, short/long/short)
for analog telephones (Germany only):
–
Ring type 1 = External call CO (for example, double ring)
–
Ring type 2 = Recall
–
Ring type 3 = Door bell ring
for analog telephones (not for Germany):
–
Ring type 1 = External call CO (for example, double ring)
–
Ring type 2 = External call CO (for example, double ring)
–
Ring type 3 = External call CO (for example, double ring)
The ring cadences depend on the country.
For U.S. Only: External cadences for optiset E telephones
Assistant T
Type 1
External call ring cadence
HiPath 3000 Manager E
External Call
●
●
Type 2
External Call CO 2
●
●
●
Type 3
External Call CO 3
●
●
●
3-44
125 ms ON/250 ms OFF,
125 ms ON/1500 ms OFF
200 ms ON/ 100 ms OFF
200 ms ON/100 ms OFF
200 ms ON/1700 ms OFF
100 ms ON/100 ms OFF
200 ms ON/100 ms OFF
100 ms ON/1900 ms OFF
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Country specifics
Requirement or Condition
Ring signals are country-specific and determined by the
approval authorities.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-45
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.3 Call Waiting Tone/Call Waiting
Definition
If a caller reaches a busy extension, a call waiting tone sounds after 5 s to let the
called party know that a call is waiting (camped-on). The called party then has the
option of answering the call without ending the call in progress. If the called party has
a display telephone, the display also indicates that the camped-on call is waiting.
An immediate call waiting tone is possible at a busy extension for V1.2 and later. The
appropriate flag must be set for the port. The calling party hears the ring tone immediately instead of the busy tone.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
16
16
SW requirements
Number of waiting
calls per station
V1.0 or later
16
16
16
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-46
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting rejection
If a station has activated call waiting rejection (signaling
security), a call cannot camp on.
CorNet-N
CorNet-N calls are treated like internal calls.
Group call
If one or more stations in a group call are free, the call will
be offered to them. The other group members are not signaled. If all stations are busy, all of them receive a call waiting signal.
Speaker call
Speaker calls to busy stations are not possible.
Recall
Recalls of low-priority external calls that cannot be signaled are intercepted. Displaced internal calls are released.
Silent call waiting
Users can deactivate the call waiting tone for external calls
using a procedure or HiPath 3000 Manager E. This setting
does not affect signaling on the display.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting Tone On/
Off
Individual stations can enable/disable the tone at their station. Default is: Tone On.
Call Waiting Rejection This station flag prevents any type of call waiting tone to be
on
injected in the conversation. This flag is also called Data
Line Security in the HiPath 3000 Manager E. When set,
this flag will also prevent this station from being overridden.
The calling station will only hear busy tone.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-47
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.4 Call Management (CM)
Definition
Call management (CM) determines how incoming calls are to be handled depending
on the trunk type and the day and night services. Call management consists of four
blocks:
Block 1: Two call allocation tables exist for calls on analog or digital (ISDN) trunks
without a direct inward dialing (DID) option (see Figure 3-1). One call allocation table
is evaluated during day service, and the other table during night service. For each
trunk, these tables contain a reference to further day and night lists. Call management
goes directly to these lists when a direct inward dialing (DID) call arrives. In the default
setting, DID calls on all trunks that lead to an intercept are signaled at the day or night
intercept position. Intercept criteria can also be entered in these tables.
Block 2: A total of three lists exist for day service, internal calls, and night answer (see
Figure 3-1). These lists contain references to one of the possible call destination lists.
Block 3: The call destination lists are seven-column table (see Figure 3-2). A row of
this table is also referred to as a CM element. The first four columns contain procedures. The stations and groups entered in these columns are called consecutively depending on the call forwarding—no answer (CFNA) time.
The fifth column contains an entry that determines the time until CFNA occurs.
The sixth column contains an entry indicating the night bell type and the telephone
that should also be called.
The seventh column defines when the night bell entered in column six should be
called (either immediately or after the first CFNA time entered in column five).
Block 4: If group numbers have been entered in the call destination lists, the last call
management table handles any additional allocation. This table is provided for hunt
groups (linear and circular) and group calls (see Figure 3-2).
3-48
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Block 2
Block 1
16 = incoming calls
1616 = call allocation trunk, day
L1
DAY
Without DID
during day
11
22
16 = incoming calls
1618 = call forwarding - no answer
16183 = ext. calls, day
Stn no. 11 14
.
.
22 14
Lmax G7
Entries:
R1-Rn; G1-Gm
Gm 3
.
Rn
DID day
5
16182
Internal calls
Stn no. 11 16
Internal
day/night
24 16
1617 = Call allocation
trunk, night
L1
NIGHT
Without DID
during night
Lmax
G8
14
Figure 3-1
Gm 1
.
Rn 16
16184
Ext. calls, night
.
Stn no. 11 15
.
23
Entries:
R1-Rn; G1-Gm
DID
night
Call dest. list 14
Call dest. list 15
Call dest. list 16
*
15
14 15
G1 15
Gm 15
.
Rn
4
Entries, call destination lists:
up to and including V1.2 = 70
●
V3.0 and later =
●
–
500 for HiPath 3750,
HiPath 3700
–
376 for HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3500
–
70 for all other systems
Call Management Relationships (Blocks 1 and 2)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-49
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Block 3
16 = incoming calls
Block 4
16 = incoming calls
1618 = call forwarding - no answer
1615 = hunt group or group call
16181 = call dest. lists
W = dialed
stn. number
16151 = called stn.
Call forwarding 1
to stn. no. 4
Call dest. 1. 2. 3.
W R4 G1 –
3
R47 1
List 2
W R7 G2 –
5
R11 2
List 3
W R8 Gm –
3
*1
1
R9 A2 A3
–
3
–
1
R1 G3 –
–
3
–
1
List 1
.
.
.
.
List 14
List 15
R4 G8 –
R20 –
–
–
10
–
–
3
21
3
List 16
W – – –
.
.
Call management dest.
.
. max. list
see page 3-51
= no entry
= the port assigned to the
no. is called
Gx = group x with the call type
assigned there
W(dial) = selected stn no. or stn.
S = system search
Ax = UCD group x (1-60) is called
Figure 3-2
–
2
3
5
6
7
8
14 28
72
19 –
–
–
–
1
11 23
12
37 –
–
–
–
4
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
1
–
.
.
.
.
Gm
(group)
4
–
.
.
.
12 37
–
–
.
.
.
–
–
–
–
1
16152 = call type
2
1 = circular hunt group
2 = linear hunt group
3 = group call
1
16187 = night bell, mode
1
2
= is called immediately
= is called after the first forwarding time (column 5)
16186 = night bell, location
Entries:
–
Rx
G2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Call dest.
3-50
G1
(group 1)
5.
4.
.....
–
= no night bell
Rx = the port assigned to the no. is called
*1-*4 = relay option, relay 1 - 4
16185 = time until call forwarding
Call Management Relationships (Blocks 3 and 4)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
SW requirements
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Number of call destination lists up to and
including V1.2
70
Number of call destination lists for V3.0
and later
500
376
Number of UCD
groups
60
60
70
10
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call management
CM does not treat a station as a call forwarding—no answer destination if its telephone has failed, if the user has
activated do not disturb or has activated data protection
and is busy, or if the user does not have trunk access (for
external calls).
Call management
If CM cannot find a station to which it can switch the call, it
follows the intercept criteria.
Group/hunt group
If no stations in a group or hunt group are available, the call
camps on at all telephones in the group.
Entrance telephone
Stations that cannot be reached via direct inward dialing
(such as entrance telephones) should not be entered as
stations to which calls are allocated; otherwise, an intercept will occur.
DTMF DID
With DTMF DID/DISA, an analog call can be released before the call forwarding—no answer process has concluded because the system uses fixed timers to prevent the
trunks from freezing up.
Night bell
If a CM element does not have any entries in the first four
columns, the system immediately calls the night bell regardless of the entry in the seventh column.
Call management
If a system search is the item in a CM element, the system
ignores subsequent entries in this CM element.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-51
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
3-52
Requirement or Condition
Call management
If a call can no longer be signaled in the system (due to an
AC failure, for example), the system sends a busy signal or
releases the call.
Solution:
Make an entry in the second column of the AC’s call destination list.
System search
The system searches all stations and:
Does not follow call forwarding
●
Skips executive stations
●
Routes only one call to each station
●
Ignores call ringing groups
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.5 Call Forwarding—No Answer (CFNA) With a Timeout
Definition
With this feature, calls arriving at a specific destination are forwarded if they are not
answered within a specified period.
Call forwarding—no answer in conjunction with direct inward dialing, call allocation,
and internal calls is carried out according to station numbers in call management.
Each call signaled at a station is also signaled at stations in the call ringing group; in
other words, the call is forwarded to these stations as well.
This type of forwarding is also referred as Fixed call forwarding—no answer ; in that,
once the destination has been set in the database, it cannot be activated/deactivated
or changed by the end user. The destination can only be changed by maintenance
personnel via Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E. Call Forwarding—no answer in
conjunction with Direct inward dialing, Call allocation, and Internal calls is carried out
according to station numbers in Call Management. Up to three Call forwarding-no answer destinations can be configured in the Call Management tables for the stations.
That is, if the initial station has assigned a ring no answer destination, the incoming
call forwards to that assigned destination. If in turn this second destination does not
answer, Call Management searches for a further destination to route the call.
Call forwarding—no answer chaining is only possible between destinations in the CM
tables. That is, if a destination has Call Forwarding (CF) configured on the telephone,
the incoming call forwards to this destination, but will NOT forward to a further destination even if that destination is itself forwarded.
A call forward destination can be a voice mail hunt group.
If the last destination in CM is busy, the incoming call does not progress beyond the
ringing telephone until the busy telephone becomes idle. At which time, the call is forwarded to the now idle telephone.
The external and internal call ring cadences are carried over from one destination to
the other.
Incoming Caller ID (PRI and BRI) is also carried over from one destination to the next.
Except if CF external: then Caller ID is not presented, just the original CF number
called.
Each call signaled at a station is also signaled at stations in the call ringing group.
That is, the calls are forwarded to these stations as well.
CorNet-N
Calls can be forwarded over a CorNet-N link.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-53
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Related Topic
Section 3.2.4, Call Management (CM), on page 3-48
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
3
3
SW requirements
Max. no. of CFNA destinations per station
no.
V1.0 or later
3
3
3
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-54
Requirement or Condition
Call forwarding - no
answer
If the CFNA destination is unavailable and no other call forwarding operation is configured for the trunk, call forwarding—no answer is not carried out.
External call forwarding
You can specify whether the system follows an external
call forwarding procedure that a station has programmed in
the CFNA table.
External call forwarding
If you activate external call forwarding—no answer for the
entire trunk, the system circumvents internal call management (for more information, refer to the ISDN features CFB
and CFNR).
DISA
This feature cannot be activated/deactivated or changed
by other than the Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E.
DND
A secondary destination which has activated DND, will be
skipped.
Analog telephones
There is no indication at these telephones that the call being presented is a forwarded call.
Display telephones
An incoming call to a forwarded telephone displays the
prompt: Call from:xxx. Secondary forwarding destinations
will display the prompt: Call from:xxx, where xxx is the original destination dialed by the caller.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Hunting to external
call forwarding destination
The system-wide flag controls the call forwarding - no answer if an external CF has been activated within a call destination list.
If the flag is not set, the call forwarding - no answer ends at
the external CF destination.
If the flag is set, the call forwarding - no answer continues
out of the external CF destination to the station entered in
the call destination list.
Note: For CF on loop start trunks, the flag functions only if
you have entered a call cycle for the cal forwarding - no answer.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-55
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.6 Call Forwarding (CF)—Busy and No Answer
The following call forwarding types are available:
●
Call forwarding—no answer
If an extension does not answer, the system forwards the call to an answering
machine or voice mail system after a programmable period of time.
●
Call forwarding—busy
Callers who call a busy extension receive a busy signal. The call destination list
determines whether the system carries out call forwarding—busy.
The following are special situations:
●
Group call
A group is always busy if all members of the group are busy.
●
Hunt group
A hunt group is always busy if all hunt group members are busy.
●
Free group
A free group is busy if at least one group member is busy and the caller reached
the group by dialing the group number.
●
UCD groups
The system does not check this parameter for UCD groups.
●
Announcements
This parameter has no effect on announcements.
if a station signals a call and the call forwarding destination is busy, the call remains
at the station. The system checks the call forwarding destination repeatedly until the
destination is free.
Incoming calls on trunks that do not support busy signaling are forwarded or intercepted.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
3
3
SW requirements
Max. no. of CF destinations per station no.
3-56
V1.0 or later
3
3
3
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Conditions
Call forwarding - no
answer
If the call forwarding destination is unavailable and no other call forwarding operation is configured for the trunk, call
forwarding—no answer is not carried out.
External call forwarding
You can specify whether the system follows an external
call forwarding procedure that a station has programmed in
the call forwarding table.
External call forwarding
If you activate external call forwarding—no answer for the
entire trunk, the system circumvents internal call management (for more information, refer to the ISDN features CFB
and CFNR).
Call waiting
If a user has activated call waiting, the caller camps on
even if the user did not configure busy call forwarding in the
local call management table.
If call waiting is not possible for this user and the user has
not configured busy call forwarding, the caller receives a
busy signal.
Hunting to external
call forwarding destination
The system-wide flag controls the call forwarding - no answer if an external CF has been activated within a call destination list.
If the flag is not set, the call forwarding - no answer ends at
the external CF destination.
If the flag is set, the call forwarding - no answer continues
out of the external CF destination to the station entered in
the call destination list.
Note: For CF on loop start trunks, the flag functions only if
you have entered a call cycle for the cal forwarding - no answer.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-57
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.7 Call Forwarding (CF)
Definition
Call forwarding (CF) enables users to forward all incoming calls (including speaker
calls) to another destination. Call forwarding is based on the station number, regardless of how the call reached the activating telephone. If trunk keys have been configured, users can also activate CF individually for a specific trunk key. The following
destinations are possible:
●
Another subscriber station
●
The attendant console
●
An external destination
●
A voice messaging system
●
A hunt group
●
ACD groups (such as Hicom Agentline Office)/UCD groups
The user is notified when call forwarding is activated. Notification can be in the form
of a special dial tone, an indication on the display, or an LED signal.
Outgoing calls can still be made when call forwarding is activated.
End users can choose to forward only external calls or only internal calls. One single
access code is used to deactivate any of these choices.
Call forwarding is implemented on a station number basis, regardless of how the call
reached the activating telephone. If trunk keys have been configured, CF can also be
activated individually for a specific trunk key.
External Destination
The call forward destination can be an external party. Instead of entering an internal
station number, enter the trunk access code, followed by the external number. Since
it is possible that an incoming external call could be forwarded to an external destination, the system will check whether the combination of trunks can guarantee release
supervision. (See table below) If not, a timer is started Time up to warning tone for
MSI - transit and default is 300 seconds. When the timer expires, a warning tone is
heard by both parties and another timer is started Time between warning tone and
release, default of 10secs, after which time the trunks are released.
CorNet-N
Calls can be forwarded over a CorNet-N link.
If a call is forwarded to another node, and it in turn is forwarded back to the originating
node, the CorNet-N links will be released, if the function Rerouting is activated.
3-58
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Incoming Caller ID (PRI, BRI) is passed from one destination to another within the
same system. It is not transferred over CorNet-N to a remote node. If a voice mail system is located in a remote mode, and the call is forwarded, the voice mail system will
receive the station number of the original called party.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20
20
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Max. no. of simultaneous CFW operations
150
50
20
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Do not disturb (DND)
You cannot program CF on a telephone where DND is active.
Chaining
Up to five call forwarding procedures can be chained.
MSN trunk forwarding
In V1.0 and later, any user who has an assigned MSN for
direct inward dialing can forward this number to the trunk
(the feature must be requested from the carrier).
Ext. call forwarding
You can program only one external CF destination key on
each telephone.
Ext. call forwarding
When dialing external destinations, users must prefix the
destination number with the CO trunk group code.
External call forwarding
User to User Signaling UUS can be deactivated using the
flag “Deactivate UUS per direction” (routing parameters).
One effect is that the transmission of the A party’s calling
number is suppressed for external call forwarding in a
User-to-User-Info-Element.
Prime Line
If Prime Line (automatic trunk seizure) is active, you must
press the extension key before dialing an internal station
number. In this case, you need not enter the trunk group
code for external destinations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-59
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
Analog telephones
Requirement or Condition
When using analog telephones, S0 telephones (not for
U.S.), and CMI telephones (not for U.S.) telephones, you
must wait for a confirmation tone after entering external
destinations.
Appointment, autoWhen an appointment comes due, the reminder does not
matic wake-up system follow call forwarding.
CF destination is an
ACD/UCD group
3-60
A call is not forwarded to an ACD/UCD group in the following cases:
A station is a member of a hunt group. If the hunt
●
group is called and a station with CF to an ACD/UCD
group is next in line, the call is not forwarded; instead,
the next station in the hunt group is called directly.
A station is a member of a group call. If the group is
●
called, the call is not forwarded to the ACD/UCD
group.
A station is a member of a group call no answer. If the
●
group is called, the call is not forwarded to the ACD/
UCD group. Exception: The first station entered has
activated CF to the ACD/UCD group. In this case, the
call is forwarded.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.8 Subscriber Groups
Definition
Subscriber groups are preconfigured in the HiPath 3000 systems. They are provided
as a common pool for the following features:
●
Group call (with or without busy signaling)
●
Hunt group (linear or circular)
●
Paging
The type of group determines how the system handles each group. This means that
each group can be either a group call or a hunt group. Names can be assigned to the
individual groups from the system administration.
Default numbers are provided in the Assistant T and E but can be changed:
●
General Hunt Group Call default call numbers are 350 to 499.
●
UCD group default call number are from 440 to 499 (within in the General Hunt
Group).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20/8
20/8
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Groups/stations
150/20
150/20
20/8
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call forwarding
When a call is forwarded to a group, the system ignores
call forwarding set by individual members of the group.
Call groups
Stations can belong to more than one group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-61
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.9 Group Call
Definition
Incoming internal and external calls are signaled simultaneously to all the stations in
a group. The first station to answer the call is connected to the calling party.
You can implement group call in call management.
Any type of telephone can be used in a Group Call group. The telephones must be
located in the same node.
Each Call Group can be assigned a name in database: 16 characters maximum.
The first station to answer the call is connected to the calling party. Subsequent calls
are signalled at the remaining idle extensions. When all members are busy, they are
signalled with Call Waiting tone. The first member to go on-hook will receive the waiting call.
Feature Interaction
A member of a group can activate DND. This means that the telephone will no longer
ring when called through the Hunt Group number or when called directly.
Only display telephones can deactivate/activate Call Waiting Tone (#87/*87). They
will not be signalled of a call waiting, but will receive a waiting call when they go onhook.
Data Line security in Assistant T (Call Waiting rejection in HiPath 3000 Manager E)
can be configured for a member telephone. An idle telephone rings when a call enters
the group; however, a telephone is not advised of a call waiting, and if it goes on hook
and calls are waiting, the telephone does not ring until a “new” call enters the queue.
Individual members of a group can Call forward-all calls on their telephones. With this
feature active, the destination telephone becomes part of the group. However, if the
first member of the group Call forwards - no answer to an internal destination, all calls
to the pilot number of the group are immediately forwarded to that destination. Individual members can be reached by their station numbers, except for the first member.
Only the forward destination can reach the first member through its station number.
3-62
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Displays
●
Internal calls: At the calling party, the display shows the name of the group assigned via Assistant T (16-15-3) or HiPath 3000 Manager E (Incoming Call ->
Hunt Group -> Name). The group members with a display telephone see the station number placing the call Call from: xxx.
●
External calls: The group members’ display will show the calling party number.
(same as call to a single station).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20/8
20/8
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Groups/stations
150/20
150/20
20/8
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Ext. call forwarding
If at least one subscriber in a group has activated external
call forwarding, you cannot make an unscreened transfer
within the group.
Analog telephones
The system does not check whether analog telephones
are present. As a result, you must log the telephone onto
the system by lifting the handset once.
Intercept
If the call cannot be signaled at any station, it is intercepted.
Call waiting
Busy stations receive call waiting or ring injection if no other stations are available.
Group call on/off
Each member of a group call can dial #85 to leave group
call and *81 to reenter group call.
Hunt group
If a station is active in group call and a hunt group, any
changes (such as dialing *81 or #81) apply to both features.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-63
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.10 Group Call with Busy Signaling
Definition
If a group member is busy, incoming calls to the group receive a busy signal. The call
also camps on at the busy station.
This type of group (defined in Assistant T as Grp call, No answer and in HiPath 3000
Manager E as RNA under Type) functions in the similar manner as a Group Call arrangement; that is, when a new call enters an idle group, all member telephones ring.
The first member to go off hook, is connected to the calling party.
However, if there are any subsequent calls to the pilot number while one member is
busy, the calls camp on to the busy extension. No other telephone in the group is signalled. The other members are nevertheless allowed to place outside calls and to receive calls if their individual station number is dialed.
This type of arrangement is useful where an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone is
associated with a wireless telephone.
Any type of telephone can be used in a Call Group.
Each Call Group can be assigned a name in database with 16 characters maximum.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20/8
20/8
SW requirements
Groups/stations
V1.0 or later
150/20
150/20
20/8
Requirements and Conditions
3-64
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting rejection
The call does not camp on if the busy station has activated
call waiting rejection.
Direct inward dialing
If a station in the group is called directly, the call is signaled
at the dialed extension.
Group
If an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone in the group is defective, the group is treated as though it were busy.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.11 Hunt Group
Definition
A hunt group implements a call distribution cycle within a subscriber group. The stations in the hunt group are linked so that a call to the group that reaches a busy member or is not answered is forwarded to the next available station within the group.
The following hunt group options are available:
●
Circular selection: The search begins with the station after the last station selected. If the call is not answered, it is forwarded to the next station after a timeout
(CFNA in call management).
●
Linear selection: When a call arrives, the search always begins with the first station in the group.
The stations can be reached either by a hunt group number or by the user’s station
number, depending on the hunt group type.
You can set up hunt groups in call management.
Each Hunt Group can be assigned a name in database with 16 characters maximum.
The stations can be reached either by a hunt group pilot number or by the user’s station number, depending on the hunt group.
In the case of a Linear Hunt group, the last member of the hunt can be a pseudo number leading to a voice mail system. The pseudo number is the call number which will
be transmitted to the voice mail system. It is also possible to have a call forwarding
within the destination list.
One station can simultaneously be a member of two groups. Calls from either group
are presented to the agent in the normal manner. If the user has a display telephone,
he or she can identify the source of the call by the name assigned to the trunk/trunk
group.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20/8
20/8
SW requirements
Groups/stations
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
150/20
150/20
20/8
3-65
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting
If all stations in a hunt group are busy, the call camps on at
all stations.
Call signaling
If all hunt group stations hang up simultaneously, call signaling begins at all stations that previously had waiting
calls.
Do not disturb (DND)
If all stations in the hunt group activate DND, a call management procedure handles the call.
Hunt group
Stations can belong to more than one group.
Queue
If the number of calls directed to the hunt group exceeds
the number that can currently be processed, the excess
calls are placed in a queue. You can configure an announcement or music to be played for calls placed in the
queue (entry in call management before the hunt group).
Overflow, call forward- You can use call management to set up an overflow station
ing—no answer
as a CFNA destination for hunt groups.
3-66
Hunt group on/off
Each member of a hunt group can dial #85 to leave the
hunt group and *85 to reenter the hunt group.
Group call
If a station is active in group call and a hunt group, any
changes (such as dialing *85/#85) apply to both features.
Telephone type
Any type of telephone can be used in a Hunt Group.
Group call on/off
Each member of a group call can dial *85 to leave the
group call and #85 to join it again.
CDRC
Same rules apply as in a normal conversation. Elapsed
time of call is assigned to last station which handled the
call.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.12 Leave Group Call/Hunt Group (Stop Hunt)
Definition
An internal extension that is entered in call management as a member of one or more
groups (including MULAP groups) can:
●
leave and rejoin individual selected groups and
●
leave and rejoin all groups
by entering a code, using the service menu or pressing a key.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
20/8
20/8
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Groups/stations
150/20
150/20
20/8
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
User access
The user must be part of a subscriber group to have access to this feature.
Default access codes
The default access codes are #85 to leave the Hunt Group
and *85 to rejoin the group.
DISA
Users can activate this function from a DISA connection for
their station or for other stations (Associated Services).
Call Management
If all members of a group invoke the Leave Hunt Group feature, internal callers are diverted to the next Call Management destination, or if not defined, the call receives a busy
tone.
Leave selected groups Executive members cannot leave executive MULAP
groups.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-67
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Definition
With uniform call distribution (UCD), incoming internal or external calls are automatically assigned to the station (agent) idle longest in a UCD group.
If all stations in a UCD group are busy, any additional incoming calls are placed in the
queue and then distributed to the group members according to the priority of the call
and the length of time it has been waiting. Announcements or music can be played
for the waiting callers.
Users (agents) can log on from any telephone by entering an ID. After logging on, the
agent is available and is permanently assigned to that telephone until logged off. The
assignment is retained even after a system reset.
The UCD group can be forwarded (night answer for UCD).
UCD groups are handled differently from the Call/Hunt Groups in the system call
processing.
There are 150 Subscriber groups in the system. Of which, 60 can be UCD groups.
The default access pilot numbers are 440 to 499.
The Pilot number can be changed but it must be a unique number, up to 6 digits in
length. A name can be given to each group, with up to 16 characters each.
The agents states are maintained in the event of a power failure.
Agents
Any type of telephone can be part of a UCD group. Analog connections can also be
used for remote agents (teleagents).
A UCD group contains agents that belong to a work group. Agent indexes are associated with each of the UCD groups. Each index contains up to 32 agent IDs. A maximum of 150 agents can be active simultaneously in the system. Accordingly, 150
fixed agent IDs can be assigned to one of up to 60 UCD groups. An ID can only be
assigned to one group. Several IDs can be assigned to one agent, permitting the
agent to work in more than one UCD group; however, the agent can only be active in
one group at a time.
Certain system features are only available to UCD members.
An agent can logon/logoff from any optiset E, optiPoint 500 or analog telephone connection in the system using an ID. The agent is available after logon, and is permanently assigned to this device until logoff. An agent can only be logged on from one
3-68
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
device at a time and only one agent can be logged on per device. Each agent is assigned to one work group only. After logging off, the agent is no longer available for
UCD calls.
At logon, this assignment to the UCD groups is checked. The port to which an agent
logs on is stored in the non-volatile memory in order to retain the assignments should
the system be reset.
Agent Indexes are defined in the following manner:
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E: Options ->Incoming Calls ->UCD groups ->members.
●
Assistant T: 31-1.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
UCD groups
60
60
10
–
–
UCD agents
Max. 150
Max. 150
Max. 150
–
–
ID numbers
150
150
150
–
–
1
1
1
–
–
Agents per station
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-69
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.1 UCD Queues
Definition
If all stations (agents) in a UCD group are busy, incoming calls are placed on hold and
entered in a queue.
Agents of a UCD group can display the number of calls in the queue for their UCD
group. Waiting parties in the queue can receive an announcement or music on hold.
To display the number of UCD calls in queue, users with display telephones can program a feature key or during a call, press Program/Service, scroll to and select UCD?,
and scroll to and select the wanted feature. Alternatively, during a conversation, users
can press the Program/Service key and dial the access code.
Non-display and analog telephone users must dial the access codes from an idle
state or, if during a conversation, they must temporarily put the calling party on Consultation Hold by pressing the Consultation key followed by the access code. Or, in
the case of an analog telephone, a hookswitch flash must be performed.
Non-display telephones (optiset E or optiPoint 500) can have buttons on the telephones programmed for specific features; however, this can only be done via HiPath
3000 Manager E.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-70
V1.0 or later
Queues per UCD
group
1
1
1
–
–
Number of calls in
queue (per UCD
group)
30
for UCD groups 1 to 59,
72
for UCD group 60
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.2 UCD Call Prioritization
Definition
Within the queue, incoming internal and external calls for the UCD group are prioritized according to call type.
The system distributes waiting calls to the UCD group according to priority and then
the length of time they have been waiting. In other words, a high-priority waiting call
is answered before a low-priority call that has been waiting longer.
In the case of trunk circuits, the priorities are assigned according to trunk (per B channel).
A priority of 1 to 10 is allocated for the classification of internal calls. The system then
distributes the queued calls to the UCD group according to the priority and queue
time; that is, a queuing call with a high priority can be answered sooner than a call
queuing for a longer time but with a lower priority. With trunk circuits, the system assigns priorities on a per trunk basis (per B channel). The system evaluates incoming
calls for a UCD group by the priority established.
Priority levels are set in HiPath 3000 Manager E. The Internal call priority is also established on the HiPath 3000 Manager E Priority screen, under Priorities for internal
calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
Priority levels
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
10
10
10
3-71
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.3 UCD Subscriber States
Definition
After a user (agent) logs onto the system, the current status of the UCD station where
the agent logged on appears on the display. The following states are possible:
●
Available: UCD calls are signaled to the UCD group member (agent).
●
Unavailable: The UCD member (agent) has logged off from the workstation (to
take a break or leave the group).
●
Work time: The user (agent) needs time to process a UCD call.
●
Autowork time: The member (agent) is automatically removed from the UCD
group for a certain period after processing a call.
●
UCD incoming call: The member (agent) is processing a UCD call (even after
transfer).
●
Non-UCD internal call: An internal non-UCD call is in progress.
●
Non-UCD external incoming call: An external non-UCD call is in progress.
●
Non-UCD external outgoing call: The member (agent) is engaged in an outgoing external non-UCD call.
●
Removed: The telephone has physically failed.
Members (agents) can log off when they have completed their work and are no longer
available. They can still be reached directly via their direct inward dialing (DID) number.
The above list of UCD subscriber states do not represent the actual display prompts
on the telephone.
After a user logs onto the system, the status of the UCD station is automatically set
to Available. The display prompt confirms this status. Whenever the agent changes
states, the change is displayed; however, the highest priority display (Available/not
available) appears and remains on the display.
3-72
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Do not disturb (DND),
call forwarding (CF)
Members (agents) who activate DND or CF are logged off.
Call forwarding—no
answer (CFNA)
If a member (agent) does not accept a call, the system automatically treats the member like an unavailable agent
when CFNA is activated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-73
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.4 Leave UCD Group
Definition
Members (agents) can temporarily leave a UCD group(for breaks, and so on) but still
remain logged on to the UCD group. The system continues to signal direct calls to this
agent. If necessary, the agent can send a message to any station, for instance to ask
for help.
When an agent logs on to the group, the agent is immediately and automatically
placed in the “available” state and can start processing calls.
Display telephones can program Feature keys Available/Not available on the optiset
E and optiPoint 500. Non-display telephones can have a key programmed using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Call forwarding—no
answer (CFNA)
3-74
Requirement or Condition
CFNA is activated when all members (agents) have left the
UCD group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.5 Work Time
Definition
With this feature, UCD members (agents) can temporarily prevent calls from being
assigned to their workstations. This allows them to leave the UCD group for short periods to complete paperwork following a call. The agent is still logged on to the UCD
group. Calls to the UCD group bypass any workstation that has this feature activated.
In addition, members (agents) can activate autowork time. In this case, the agent is
automatically removed from the UCD group for a certain period after processing a
call.
The automatic wrap up time is variable up to 100 seconds, in steps of 5 seconds (ring
cycle). At the end of the automatic wrap up time, the agent is placed back in the group.
An agent in the Work state can still be called by dialing the station number.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-75
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.6 Recorded Announcement/Music on Hold (MOH) with UCD
Definition
This feature allows customers to play a greeting message (announcement before answering) to internal callers or external callers while they are being switched. Trunkby-trunk assignment of announcement devices is possible.
With UCD, music and/or further announcements can be played to callers if they cannot be switched immediately. These announcements (or music) can be played in any
order (up to seven) until a group member (agent) becomes available.
It is possible to play music on hold or announcements from a connected external announcement device using the following types of devices:
●
Devices that always start at the beginning of the message when activated (such
as greeting messages).
●
Continuous playback devices (for announcements and music on hold).
The announcements can be assigned to each UCD group individually.
The HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 supports access for 16 unique announcements
and one MOH source. The HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 supports 4 announcements
and one MOH source. Each UCD group can be configured with up to 7 announcement steps. A unique announcement and the duration of the announcement can be
defined for each step. The time is defined as ring cycles, that is in increments of 5
seconds. The announcement script can be configured to play a single time or continue to cycle until the call is answered; this is configured in the UCD group parameter
Announcement change.
Analog ports can be configured as a digital announcer interface. E&M Tie line ports
can also be used in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 as the interface to the digital
announcer.
The STRB option board can be used in the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 to control
the start of the external announcement device in lieu of the contacts on the TIEL circuit card in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
Announcement devices are configured with a start time and a listen duration time.
Music on Hold devices are endless loop type recordings with continuous play attributes. Up to 32 parties held in queue can hear an announcement.
The Announcement Delay Time parameter is used to configure the delay before a
queued call is switched to the recorded announcement device (allowed value 0-600
seconds). Each call to an UCD Group gets an announcement. If no announcement
device is configured, the internal MOH is sent to the calling party. To suppress the announcement, the delay should be configured to the maximum value, assuming that
the call will be answered within this time.
3-76
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
For more information, refer to Music on Hold (Internal or External Source) on page 330.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
Free ana- EXM, EXMR, MPPI
log subs. (not for U.S.), free anaports
log subs. ports
TIEL
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
Ann. devices
16
4
1
–
–
Max. no. of announcements per group
7
7
7
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Seven announceAlthough only four announcement devices can be connectments per group in Hi- ed to HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500, seven announcePath 3550
ments can be used per group by connecting an individual
announcement device or combining the four devices.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-77
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.7 Overflow With UCD
Definition
If a call in the queue is not answered within a specific period, the agent is switched to
unavailable mode and the call is transferred to the next available UCD member
(agent). The call is forwarded to an overflow destination (CFNA destination) only if all
UCD agents are unavailable. Users can specify the destination and time in call management.
Users can also define a maximum number of waiting calls. If this maximum limit is exceeded, any new calls are forwarded to the overflow destination.
The overflow destination can also activate external call forwarding.
The overflow destination can be a voice mail system. The number forwarded to the
voice mail system is the original called party’s number.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
Overflow per group
3-78
V1.0 or later
3
3
3
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.8 Automatic Incoming Call Connection (AICC) With UCD
Definition
This feature allows members (agents) to answer incoming calls without performing
any operator actions. To do this, the member must have a headset and an enable key
on the telephone. A tone in the headset lets the UCD member know that a call has
arrived, and the call is then automatically switched through.
Automatic incoming call connection (AICC) can be configured separately for each
UCD group. This feature activates automatically if a headset is detected or configured
at a station.
Automatic incoming call connection (AICC) can be configured separately for each
UCD group and applies to the whole group. Using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E, stations must be individually configured for headset operation; however, if the
HiPath 3000 systems detect a headset adapter, the system automatically sets the
headset flag in the database. AICC activates automatically if a headset is detected or
configured for a telephone. The headset flag is set in the Set up Station tab in the HiPath 3000 Manager E.
The system routes calls to agents configured for AICC whether there is a headset
physically connected or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
V1.0 or later
–
–
optiPoint 500 or optiset E,
headset, release key
–
–
SW requirements
General requirements
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Analog telephones
Requirement or Condition
Analog stations cannot use this feature because the system cannot guarantee that a telephone is physically connected to the port.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-79
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
Display telephones
3-80
Requirement or Condition
A brief tone is heard in the headset, signalling to the agent
that a call has arrived, and the call is answered automatically.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.9 UCD Night Answer
Definition
UCD groups can activate a group-specific night answer independent of system night
answer. If agents have activated the night answer feature for their own UCD group, all
calls for this group are routed to the appropriate UCD night station.
Each user can activate or deactivate group-specific night answer. All users remain
logged on after night answer has been activated. If system night answer is active simultaneously, it has priority, and call management follows it.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Agent status
If you activate the night answer feature, your current status
does not change.
System night answer
UCD night answer can be activated independently of system night answer and vice versa. If a call reaches a UCD
group by way of system night answer, the call remains in
the UCD group independently of UCD night answer.
Group-specific night
answer destination
The group-specific night answer destination can be an internal, external, or any other UCD group.
Calls currently being
processed
Calls that are being processed during activation of UCD
night answer are not affected.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-81
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.10 UCD Group Status Display (Calls in Queue)
Definition
Users can use a procedure or code to display the number of calls waiting in the
queue.
Users can program a feature button on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone for
this feature.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
–
HW requirements
Digital subscriber line module
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
–
–
General requirements optiset E or optiPoint 500 with display
3-82
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.11 UCD Home Agent
Definition
Users can integrate an off-premises extension (analog telephone) into the UCD group
as a home agent.
The off-premise station (OPS) telephone is configured in Call Management.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
UCD
Requirement or Condition
Only the most important functions are accessible via
codes (logon, work, unavailable).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-83
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.13.12 Transfer to UCD Groups
Definition
Internal and external calls can be transferred to a UCD group. If the call is not answered within a certain period, a recall is carried out. This time is fixed and cannot be
changed.
Announcements can be played for the external transferred calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
Max. number of UCD
groups
V1.0 or later
60
60
10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-84
Requirement or Condition
Announcements
Internal transferred calls do not receive announcements.
Recall
The recall time for transferring calls to UCD groups is longer than for other stations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.14 Silent Monitoring
Definition
An authorized user can monitor a call in progress at any internal station without the
other party’s knowledge.
For V1.2 and later, it is possible for all stations in the system to use the Silent Monitoring capability, rather than just one station. Set the appropriate flag for each authorized station.
Some states require that the outside caller be advised that the call may be monitored.
The monitoring station can only be an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone; monitored
telephones can be of any type.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Silent Monitoring
This feature can be used in the following countries only:
Australia, Brazil, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, India,
Ireland, Malaysia, the Netherlands, Singapore, South Africa, Thailand, USA, international markets.
Silent monitoring
The call can be overridden only using code *944 + station
number (not from a menu).
Signaling
The call is not signaled at the overridden station (no display, no alerting tone, no sound).
Conference
Silent Monitoring limits the maximum number of conferences. Maximum number of conferences possible in system = maximum number of simultaneous Silent Monitoring
stations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-85
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.15 Do Not Disturb (DND)
Definition
Users can activate do not disturb (DND) on their stations so that no incoming calls
are put through.
A user who has activated DND hears a special dial tone after lifting the handset.
When the feature is active, the message Do not disturb is also displayed on optiset E
or optiPoint 500 telephones with display. On all other optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones, the station LED indicates a busy state.
The attendant console, night station, or any authorized station can override DND. In
this case, the caller first hears a busy signal after dialing the number. The call is then
signaled to the station that has activated DND. If the station has activated the ringer
cutoff feature, the call is signaled visually only. If the station with do not disturb activated is engaged in a call, the incoming call is signaled as call waiting.
A caller who dials a telephone with DND activated receives a busy signaland is not
allowed to camp on.
The Flags screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway of the HiPath
3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Flags screen to see if a station has activated DND or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-86
Requirement or Condition
AC, night station
The AC and night station cannot activate DND.
Call forwarding
You cannot specify DND if call forwarding is active on the
same telephone.
Call forwarding
You cannot activate call forwarding to a telephone with
DND.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
Callback
Requirement or Condition
If a callback is initiated to a station with DND activated, the
callback is not executed until DND is deactivated. If the
subscriber with DND activated initiates a callback, this will
override the DND function.
Appointment, autoIf a station has set an appointment and activated DND, an
matic wake-up system audible signal is sent to the telephone when the appointment comes due.
DISA
The feature can be activated by users for their own stations, or can be activated by one user for another (Associated Services).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-87
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.16 Ringer Cutoff
Definition
If this feature is activated by an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display, incoming calls are signaled with a brief alerting tone and then shown in the display only.
The Flags screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway of the HiPath
3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Flags screen to see if a station has activated Ringer Cutoff
or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
General requirements
V1.0 or later
optiset E or optiPoint 500 with display
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Ringer cutoff
Requirement or Condition
You can only activate this feature for optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephones with display.
Appointment, autoIf a station has activated ringer cutoff and an appointment
matic wake-up system comes due, it is signaled audibly.
3-88
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.17 Caller List/Station Number Storage
Definition
Unanswered calls to an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone can be automatically
stored in a chronological caller list. The time of each call is specified, and the user
can dial the entered callers directly.
Users can also manually store incoming and outgoing calls in the caller list.
You can program a system parameter so that the telephone also automatically stores
external calls that were answered. Because the parameter is system-wide, this setting applies to all caller lists in the system.
Each new entry can be automatically indicated by an LED. In addition, unanswered
entries can be displayed on the screen by pressing a preprogrammed key. The LED
is deactivated as soon as the user retrieves the list.
On telephones with a 2-line display, the oldest entry is displayed first.
This feature is valid only for display telephones.
By default, the feature is active for all telephones and stores all incoming internal and
incoming external ISDN calls (which have caller ID information from the CO). Any station can be prohibited from using the feature by changing the station default. Also, a
system-wide flag can change the Caller List mode to store only external call information instead of internal and external.
The Caller List operates in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner. If the List is full, and another call rings in, the oldest call in the list is deleted, and so on.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E stn. UP0/E stn. UP0/E stn. UP0/E stn. UP0/E stn.
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
General requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
Subscriber group
Lists/entries
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Maximum of 10 entries
650/10
650/10
100/10
100/10
100/10
3-89
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-90
Requirement or Condition
Analog trunk
Only calls with a station number or a name are recorded
(calls on analog trunks are not recorded).
Power failure
The entries are deleted in the case of a power failure or a
system reset.
Internal/external calls
You can store either external calls only or both internal and
external calls.
Repeated calls
If a subscriber calls repeatedly, only the time of the entry is
updated.
Group
If you belong to a group, you can access the group’s caller
list in addition to your own caller list.
Storing an external
answered call
You can access the “store station number” function manually from the service menu.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.18 Call Pickup Within Call Pickup Groups
Definition
Calls that are signalled acoustically at a station in a call pickup group are simultaneously indicated by an LED (next to the programmed key) and signaled on the displays of the other group members. The call can be picked up by pressing the programmed key or dialing a code. Acoustic pickup signaling (after 5 rings) can also be
configured system-wide.
The time from start of ring to acoustic notification of all group members, is not variable. If there are several calls ringing the group, they are picked up in order of arrival.
Calls destined for Call Keys, Trunk Keys or General Call Keys, can be picked up by
another user. The LED on these keys will indicate busy after the pick up. Calls directed to MUSAP keys can be picked up, but after pick up, they will show the key as idle.
The following versions of call pickup are also available:
●
Targeted Call Pickup Outside of a Pickup Group on page 3-93
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
8/8
8/8
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Groups/stations
32/32
32/32
8/8
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call pickup
Only voice devices can be selected. A station can belong
to only one group.
Recall
Callback
Recall and callback calls are not signaled to the other
group members.
Do not disturb (DND)
Stations that have activated DND do not receive call pickup
signaling.
Transfer
Unscreened transfer calls cannot be picked up within the
group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-91
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
Subject
3-92
Requirement or Condition
Groups
All group members are authorized to pick up calls.
Call waiting
A camped-on call can be picked up. If more than one call
is waiting, the first caller is always picked up.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.19 Targeted Call Pickup Outside of a Pickup Group
Definition
Users can also pick up calls for other internal parties who do not belong to the same
call pickup group and therefore do not appear on the screen. This increases the likelihood that incoming calls are always answered. To pick up the call, the user must
press a programmed call pickup key or enter a code and then dial the selected party’s
station number.
Display telephone users can program a feature key on their telephone for this feature
or as with non-display telephones, request that this feature key be installed via HiPath
3000 Manager E.
Calls destined for Call Keys, Trunk Keys or General Call Keys can be picked up by
another user. The LED on these keys will indicate busy after the pick up. Calls directed to MUSAP keys can be picked up, but after pick up, the key indicates it is idle.
The following versions of call pickup are also available:
●
Call Pickup Within Call Pickup Groups on page 3-91
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting
A camped-on call can be picked up. If more than one call
is waiting, the first caller is always picked up.
CDRC
Charges and/or elapsed time incurred as a result of a
Picked up call, are assigned to the station which picked up
the call.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-93
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.20 Call Pickup from an Answering Machine
Definition
optiset E or optiPoint 500 users have the option of picking up a call that has already
been answered by an answering machine by pressing the appropriate DSS key. This
releases the connection to the answering machine.
Several optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones can have the appearance of the Answering machine DSS key, affording each the opportunity to pick up the call.
The purpose of this feature is to allow the answering device to act as a filter for incoming calls. The called party can decide to accept the call or let the device record the
caller’s message.
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephone users have the option of picking up a call that
was already answered by an answering machine by pressing the appropriate DSS
key. This releases the connection to the answering machine. Several optiset E and
optiPoint 500 telephones can have the appearance of this DSS key, affording each
the opportunity to pick up the call
An incoming call is received at the answering machine. The LED for the DSS key corresponding to the answering machine is lit at the user’s telephone. If users want to
talk to calling parties directly, they press the DSS key. This connects them to the calling party and disconnects the answering machine.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E station
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
General requirements
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-94
Requirement or Condition
Answering machine
The answering machine port must be configured as an answering machine in system administration.
Answering machine
You must program an Answering machine call pickup DSS
key on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone for this feature to work.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.21 Fax Waiting Message/Answering Machine
Definition
A Fax/Answering Machine key has an LED to let the user know that a fax waiting message or a call for the answering machine has arrived.
A call directed to an analog port configured as a FAX machine or as an Answering
Machine lights an LED at a station to advise the user that the FAX or the Answering
Machine has answered an incoming call. The LED is lit steadily.
The user can turn off the LED by pressing the key.
The HiPath 3000 Manager E can program a key on the optiset E or optiPoint 500. The
button name in the Key Programming tab is Message for FAX/answ.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E station
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
General requirements
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Program key
You must also enter the station number when programming the key.
Analog port
The analog port must be configured as a fax machine or
answering machine.
Info key
The LED goes out when you press the key.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-95
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.22 Deferring a Call
Definition
While an incoming call is being signaled at a station, the called party can set up an
outgoing connection without answering the incoming call.
The waiting call is then signaled as a camped-on call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E station
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
General requirements
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-96
Requirement or Condition
Deferring the call
You must have trunk keys or at least two call keys programmed on the telephone.
Deferring the call
An key for the feature must be available.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.23 Station Number Configuration Using Assistant T
Definition
HiPath 3000 automatically assign the following:
●
Internal station numbers (depending on the configuration)
●
Internal group numbers (depending on the model)
Station number assignment does not need to be explicitly configured. This feature allows users to modify the preset internal station numbers using Assistant T.
You can use the menu option Search for number to locate individual station numbers.
After you enter an internal station number, its logical port is displayed in the format
SSPP (SS = slot, PP = port).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
SW requirements
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Max. number of internal station numbers
In accordance with the HW configuration
Max. number of internal group numbers
150
150
150
20
20
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Station number configuration
Requirement or Condition
An internal station or group number must always be unique
in the system and must not conflict with other station numbers in the numbering plan.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-97
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Incoming Traffic
3.2.24 Reject Calls
Definition
This feature allows internal and external incoming initial calls to be rejected by pressing
●
the release key on optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones with display or
●
the consult key on mobile telephones (CMI).
The rejected call then follows the Call Management. If there is no other call destination, the previously called destination is called again.
Model-Specific Data
Topic
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display / mobile
telephone
V1.2 or
later
V1.2 or
later
V1.2 or
later
V1.2 or
later
V1.2 or
later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Recall, callback, park, Transferred recalls, queued callbacks, held or parked calls
hold
cannot be rejected.
Group call, hunt group In these cases, the entire group call ends and follows Call
call, MULAP
Management. The call is released if there is no other call
destination.
3-98
Call forwarding
There is no immediate call forwarding after the call is rejected. The entries in Call Management determine the next
step.
Intercept
This follows the intercept criteria in Call Management.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3 Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.1 Dual-Tone Multifrequency Transmission (DTMF)/Temporary Signaling
Method Changeover
Definition
When this feature is activated, all keystrokes that the user enters on the dialing keypad while engaged in an internal or external call are transmitted as DTMF digits.
Users can activate this feature:
●
System-wide (automatic DTMF).
Users are automatically switched over to DTMF mode after each successful connection (even with CMI [not for U.S.]).
●
Individually while engaged in an internal or external call by pressing a key or entering a code.
Afterwards, all keystrokes from the dialing keypad are transmitted as DTMF digits. The feature is activated temporarily and is deactivated when the handset is
replaced.
DTMF mode remains activated even when the following features are activated:
●
Transfer
●
Consultation hold
●
Toggle
●
Call pickup
●
Accepting a camped-on call
Users can configure the pulse/pause in the system. However, configuring the pulse/
pause is not recommended. Contact your second-level service organization if required.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-99
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Dial pulsing (DP) station
DP stations cannot use this feature.
Station on hold
A station on hold cannot transmit any DTMF signals.
Conference, call park, DTMF mode remains activated during a conference, durrecall
ing a recall, or in call park mode.
3-100
Other features during
DTMF mode
When DTMF mode is active, you must always use the Program/Service key to activate features during a call.
Voice mail
DTMF mode is automatically activated when a station configured as voice mail is selected.
US DTMF Default
In the US, this default value for this feature is On.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.2 Individual Telephone Lock (Changeover)
Definition
Users can activate a telephone lock that restricts outgoing external calls (COS 1), although they can continue to place internal calls and forward incoming calls to internal
stations. Users activate the telephone lock by pressing a key or dialing a code and
entering their 5-digit personal identification number (PIN).
System speed dialing remains active while the telephone lock is on.
While the Telephone Lock feature is activated, the user can only use the following features:
●
System speed-dialing
●
Room Monitor
●
Speaker Call
●
internal calls
●
conferences with internal stations
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-101
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-102
Requirement or Condition
Extension trunk access
After telephone lock is activated, the extension trunk access is set to a system-wide class of service (default = 1).
Extension trunk access
After telephone lock is activated, you can reduce the class
of service but not select a higher class of service.
Telephone lock
While telephone lock is active, you cannot activate any features that could result in charges being assigned to this station. Exception: system speed dialing.
Telephone type
This feature works with any type of telephone in the system.
Non-display/analog
feature reminder
Upon going off-hook, broken dial tone is presented to the
user as a reminder that a feature is active on the telephone.
Invoke from a talk
state
During a conversation, the user presses the Consultation
key (or performs a switch hook flash in the case of an analog telephone), putting the current conversation on Consultation Hold. The user then dials the access code and the
PIN and confirmation tone is returned. The user can then
return to the held party by pressing the Consultation key
once again.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.3 System Telephone Lock (Changeover)
Definition
An authorized user can lock a telephone for an internal station. This feature has the
same function as the individual telephone lock. The telephone lock can be deactivated from the attendant console or the station.
System speed dialing remains active while the telephone lock is on.
While the Telephone Lock feature is activated, the user can only use the following features:
●
System speed-dialing
●
Room Monitor
●
Speaker Call
●
internal calls
●
conferences with internal stations
The function #0 = Reset all services does not deactivate this feature. It is not possible
to change the PIN from a locked telephone.
If the authorized station has activated a Telephone Lock, the authorized user must
first deactivate the Telephone Lock feature before attempting to activate/deactivate
another station’s Telephone Lock.
To activate/deactivate another station’s telephone lock, the authorized station does
not need to know or use the individual’s PIN. No PIN is required to activate/deactivate
the other stations’ Telephone Lock.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.3.2, Individual Telephone Lock (Changeover)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-103
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-104
Requirement or Condition
Extension trunk access
After telephone lock is activated, the extension trunk access is set to a system-wide COS (default = 1).
Extension trunk access
After telephone lock is activated, you can reduce the class
of service but not select a higher class of service.
Telephone lock
While telephone lock is active, you cannot activate any features except for system speed dialing, room monitor,
speaker call, and conferences with internal stations.
Feature Active Notice
At the destination telephone, the user is advised of a feature activation by hearing broken dial tone when going off
hook, or if the user has a button for this feature, the LED
will be lit. If the telephone is unlocked, the broken dial tone
is removed and/or the LED is extinguished.
Non-display/analog
If the authorized station is a non-display or analog telephone, the user, from an idle state, can access the feature
by dialing *943, followed by the destination station for
which Telephone Lock is to be activated/deactivated, followed by * to activate or # to deactivate. Confirmation tone
is returned only after all digits have been dialed. Error tone
will not be returned if the authorized station inadvertently
attempts to lock an already locked telephone, or attempts
to unlock an already unlocked telephone
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.4 Hotline
Definition
With the hotline feature, the telephone automatically connects to a predefined internal
or external destination after the user lifts the handset. Users can also configure the
feature so that the two locations connect only after a defined period (hotline after timeout). This delay is configured centrally and can be activated and deactivated on each
station.
Call forwarding and call forwarding—no answer are evaluated at the destination.
If the Hotline Delayed station (originator) dials a digit before the timeout limit, the timer
is cancelled and the station is not forwarded to the Hotline destination whether another digit is dialed or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
1
1
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Hotline destinations
6
6
1
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
Requirement/Condition
DND
If the destination station is in Do not disturb (DND), the
caller hears busy tone.
Destination
●
●
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
If the internal destination is busy, the caller camps on.
If the internal destination is a display telephone, the
destination’s display shows Call from: xxx, where xxx
is the Hotline originator’s station number.
The destination can be an internal station, an external
destination (up to 32 digits can be programmed in HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T) or a Subscriber
group.
3-105
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.5 Mobile PIN
Definition
This feature allows a user (active station) to conduct internal or trunk calls (flex calls)
from a remote telephone (passive station) using his or her own user profile (station
number, name, toll restriction, call detail recording). The call detail data (CDRC/
CDRS) is assigned to the active station.
To activate this feature, perform one of the following steps on the remote terminal:
●
Enter “Mobile PIN” code + local station number + PIN
●
Call service menu + enter local station number + enter PIN
●
Press the programmed key + enter local station number + enter PIN
The feature remains activated until the active station terminates the call.
As long as this feature is activated, the current telephone (passive station) cannot be
reached under its actual station number. Do not disturb is activated.
An active station can be a:
●
Station
●
MULAP (in this case, the PIN of the primary station in the MULAP group is requested)
An active station cannot be a:
●
Hunt group
●
ACD group
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-106
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Services
This feature supports only the voice service.
Call detail data
Call detail data (CDRC/CDRS) is assigned to the station
number of the active station. The passive station number
is supplied as additional information.
If the active station is the primary station in a MULAP
group, call charges are recorded just as though the MULAP primary station had placed the call.
Recall
A recall is signaled on the passive station telephone but is
no longer part of the flex call. For this reason, it is conducted using the profile of the passive station (number, name
and classes of service).
Busy indication
Busy indication applies to the passive station telephone.
Only the trunk of the active station is signaled as busy.
Features that can be
used after flex call is
activated
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Speaker call (paging)
Conference
Busy override (busy override class of service taken
from active station)
Toggle
Park
Consultation hold
Transfer
Call pickup (during a flex call, calls are picked up using
the profile of the active station)
Do not disturb
Call forwarding
Send message (message waiting)
Callback
Station number suppression
Group ringing
3-107
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General Outgoing Traffic
3.3.6 B Channel Allocation (V3.0 and later)
Definition
This feature allows you to allocate outgoing connection B channels on an S2M link to
different trunk groups.
For outgoing calls, only B channels that also correspond to the trunk group are selected (by the code-selected trunk group, overflow trunk group, or LCR-selected trunk
group). If there is no free B channel available for this trunk group, the system rejects
the connection request and reacts in the way it has been configured.
Incoming calls are always accepted if a B channel in the corresponding S2M line is
available, regardless of the trunk group. This is usually the B channel offered by the
partner. If the remote system or the public network does not support B channel allocation, there is no guarantee that the call will be correctly assigned to the right trunk
group.
HiPath 3000 Manager E allocates an S2M link to the trunk groups; a route can be assigned to each line (B channel).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
–
–
–
TMS2
TS2 /
TS2R
–
–
–
–
–
–
V3.0 SMR-3 and later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
IP networking
3-108
Requirement or Condition
B channel allocation is not useful in IP networking because
it is not possible at this time to assign incoming calls to the
correct trunk group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4 Features for General External Traffic
3.4.1 Multi-Device Connection (Not for U.S.)
Definition
HiPath 3000 can be operated on an ISDN multi-device connection (S0 bus). This allows parallel operation with other ISDN devices located on the same connection. You
can program a DID number up to 11 digits long (multiple subscriber number [MSN] of
the multi-device connection).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
STMD8
SW requirements
x
x
x
x
S0 trunks
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
ISDN terminals
Any parallel-connected ISDN terminals must be given an
MSN to ensure unique call assignments.
Trunk groups with PP
and PMP
If you connect different basic access points (point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint) to the system, they must be entered in different trunk groups.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-109
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.2 Multi-Device Connection (for U.S. Only)
Definition
The HiPath 3000 systems support ISDN data and video devices using an Industry
standard ST interface. The ISDN terminal devices are connected to the system using
the ISDN adapter or a port on an S0 interface card:
●
STLS4 for the HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3550
●
STLS4R for the HiPath 3300 and HiPath 3500
●
STMD8 on the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
The ISDN devices are assigned a call number for internal dialing and an 11-digit Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) for incoming DID applications.
Each ST port consists of two 64 Kbps channels. Two devices can be connected to the
ISDN adapter. Eight devices can be connected to an S0 port on an interface card. The
devices connected on an S0 port share the 128 Kbps bandwidth for video and data
calls.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Operation
In a BRI environment, each CO B channel is assigned a Special Profile Identifier
(SPID) number and a Terminal Identifier (TID) for identification purposes from the
Public Network. The SPID and TID received from the network provider must be associated with the call number assigned to the data or video equipment connected to the
ST interface. If a system is equipped with three BRI trunks, the maximum number of
ISDN data sessions is either three 128 Kbps sessions or six 64 Kbps sessions. Typically CACH (Call Appearance Call Handling) values or Phantom Directory numbers
are required for Voice terminals only. In some COs, CACH values or Phantom Directory numbers can be required for the ST data devices as well.
Due to the complexity of BRI configuration, it is recommended that ST applications
be limited to 128 Kbps. The call number for each ST port must be associated with a
Public Network SPID. This means that the number of 64-Kbps channels that can be
called up is limited to the number of Public Network SPIDs.
Refer to the Configuration Note for S0 Device Installation.
The STLS4 module is used also as a trunk interface in Europe. For subscriber applications, the receive and transmit leads must be reversed before connecting to the
first device on the bus. This crossover is already performed in the ISDN adapter.
Usually the ST device is connected to an ISDN NT-1 adapter and the SPID-TID numbers assigned by the CO are programmed in the device. However, since the ST device is located behind the switch on an ST bus, the HiPath 3000 provide SPID-TID
3-110
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
identification control. Each ST channel used by the ST device requires a Call Number
for internal dialing. An MSN number also is required to enable the ST device to communicate with the HiPath 3000 system.
The protocol should always be set to ATT NI-1 in the ST device. The HiPath 3000 perform all protocol conversions.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Operation
In a PRI or CorNet-N environment, SPIDs, TIDs and CACH values are not required.
Internal SPID/TID entries called Multiple Subscribers Numbers (MSN) are used by
the ST devices for call setup. DID numbers must be assigned to each channel that
connects to an ST device.
The DID numbers can be assigned from the numbers received from the CO. The DID
number can be from 1 to 11 digits. The DID numbers are required to set up incoming
calls to the device.
Assign a call number to each No-Port station port used for the ST device. The call
number can be from 1 to 6 digits. The call number does not need match the DID number.
An MSN number must be assigned to the ST device for each B-Channel required for
the application. The MSN numbers act as SPIDs for the ST device. The MSN number
can be from 7 to 14 digits. If the entry is 9 to 14 digits, the last 2 digits are used as the
TID number. The last 2 digits should be 00 for B channel 1, and they should be 01 for
B channel 2 on each ST interface used.
It is suggested that the MSN number consists of the DID number, followed by 5 zeros,
followed by a 2-digit TID number.
Related Topic
Section 3.16.10, Multiple Subscriber Number, on page 3-401
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
S0 board
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-111
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
3-112
Requirement/Condition
ISDN terminals
Any parallel-connected ISDN terminals must be given an
MSN to ensure call assignments.
Trunk groups with PP
and PMR
If you connect different basic access points (point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint) to the system, they must be entered in different trunk groups.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.3 Trunk Groups
Definition
The external trunks in the system can be combined into trunk groups by B channels.
The order in which the trunk groups are seized can be linear (always the first free
trunk) or circular (after the last trunk seized in the outgoing direction). An overflow
trunk group can be configured for each of the trunk groups. If all the trunks in a trunk
group are busy during a seizure attempt, the search for trunks continues in the overflow trunk group. The search is performed in the specified overflow trunk group only.
If all the trunks are busy in this trunk group as well, no additional overflow attempts
are made.
It is common practice to seize outgoing trunks starting with the highest numbered
trunk, whereas incoming trunks will seize the lowest numbered trunks first. In the
case of Key Systems, this reduces the risk of glare, or collision on loop start trunks.
A trunk group key can be assigned for these trunk groups. The key is for outgoing
calls only. A maximum of 10 Trunk group keys can be configured on one station. Trunk
group keys can appear on more than one optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone. These
keys can only be installed on display telephones.
Calls placed on Trunk group Keys are subject to COS toll restriction levels and rules.
The system can monitor the line for the presence of dial tone. If not present, the system releases the trunk, and an error message is generated and recorded. The display
user is presented with the text Not possible and reselect the Trunk group key to seize
another trunk.
It is possible to turn off the detection and set fixed delay; contact your second-level
Service group if this is recommended.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-113
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
Subject
Trunk groups
No. of trunk group
keys on optiset E or
optiPoint 500
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
16 trunk
16 trunk
8 trunk
groups groups, 64
groups
with up to B chan- with max.
72 B channels
all B channels per
nels per
trunk
trunk
group
group
6
6
6
4 trunk groups with
max. all B channels
per trunk group
4
4
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-114
Requirement or Condition
Analog trunks
You must physically disconnect analog trunks from the
trunk group.
optiset E or optiPoint
500, trunk group key
You can program up to 6 or 4 trunk group keys on an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone. If all trunks in a trunk
group are busy, its trunk group key lights up.
Overflow
If a trunk group is busy and overflow for this trunk group is
entered in the system, the system continues searching in
the overflow trunk group. If all trunks in this trunk group are
also busy, no second overflow operation is performed.
Prime Line on (automatic line seizure)
With prime line, trunks can be programmed in other trunk
groups. You cannot define an overflow from trunk group 1
to another trunk group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.4 Trunk Keys
Definition
On optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones, users can program trunk keys by B channel.
This enables them to answer a call or seize a trunk by pressing the trunk key. The
LED signals the trunk status.
LED
Meaning
Off
Trunk is free
Continuously lit
Trunk is busy
Flickering
Incoming call or recall
Flashing slowly
Trunk is on hold
Flashing rapidly
Call waiting mode; call is at own station
Users can use the trunk keys for the following features:
●
Call pickup
●
Retrieve trunk on exclusive hold
●
Retrieve trunk on common hold
●
Answer calls
●
Toggle between several different trunks
A Trunk key is used for receiving incoming trunk calls and placing outgoing calls on
the selected trunks. A Trunk key represents an analog CO trunk appearance, a BRI
link appearance, a T1 DS0 channel, or an analog E&M Tie line channel.
A Trunk key can not be programmed on the same station that is using Call Keys to
manage the trunk group associated with the trunk appearance.
A Trunk key can appear on more than one station. All stations with the appearance of
the Trunk key can also ring on an incoming call, if they are programmed in a Call
Group, otherwise they only have LED signalization.
A user can place a trunk appearance on Common Hold by pressing the Hold key and
going on-hook. The trunk appearance will flash slowly at all other appearances of the
Trunk key.
Calls placed on Trunk keys are subject to COS toll restriction levels and rules.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-115
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
Trunk keys can be used in a Centrex environment. The system can cut through immediately to the Centrex CO to allow the user to hear if special tones, indicating Message Waiting. In this case, Dial Tone Detection must be turned off because the special
CO tones are not recognized by the HiPath 3000 as dial tone.
Feature Interaction:
●
Call pickup: An incoming call ringing on a Trunk key can be picked from another
station via the feature Call Pickup - Group or via Call Pickup - Directed.
●
Retrieve trunk on exclusive hold: A Trunk key is placed on exclusive hold at
the station which put it on Hold by pressing another flashing Trunk key which results in a Toggle operation. To retrieve the held trunk, the user needs only to
press the flashing key.
●
Retrieve trunk on common hold: Another user with the appearance of the
same Trunk key, can retrieve a trunk call on Common Hold (Appearance flashing
slowly) by pressing the flashing key.
●
Answer calls: Any user with the appearance of the trunk can answer an incoming call on the Trunk key by pressing the flickering Trunk key.
●
Toggle between several different trunks: If a user has an appearance of several Trunk keys on his or her telephone, the user can toggle between any of the
trunks by pressing the desired Trunk key. The first trunk is placed on Consultation
Hold at the station. Any subsequent depression of another Trunk key places the
last call on Consultation Hold at that telephone. If the user goes on-hook at any
point, the last held party is immediately recalled per the Consultation Hold procedure.
●
Call Forwarding: An incoming call appearing on a Trunk key can be forwarded
by the station to another destination. If the forward destination does not have an
appearance of the trunk, the user can handle the call via the dialog keys as a normal incoming call. If the forward station answers the call, the LED on all appearances of the Trunk key will be steadily lit.
If the station has forwarded the external calls to a voice mail system, the original
destination’s station number is forwarded to the voice mail system.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-116
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E telephone
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.5 Call Keys
Definition
Users can program up to 10 call keys (together with multiple subscriber numbers outside of the U.S. and MUSAP keys in the U.S.) on an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone. These keys are used for incoming and outgoing calls. The call keys are assigned to trunks virtually; that is, the trunks are not permanently assigned to a specific
key (like trunk group keys). When performing an outgoing external seizure, users
press a call key to seize a trunk group. When users connect without a call key, an
available call key is automatically seized, depending on the trunk group. With incoming calls, an available call key corresponding to the trunk group is also assigned.
The call keys should be viewed as temporary trunk keys that allow quick access to
the following features:
●
Answering and signaling calls and recalls
●
Toggle
●
Cancel consultation hold
●
Pickup
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital telephone
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Max. no. of call keys
per optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
10
10
10
x
x
10
10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Trunk groups, busy
state
The busy state is not displayed for the entire trunk group.
Unscreened transfer,
recall
The call key is reassigned if the internal destination is not
reached following unscreened transfer and a recall occurs.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-117
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.6 Transit Traffic
Definition
Transit traffic refers to external voice calls that are handled by the telephone system
in the incoming and outgoing directions. External connections can be set up to either
the central office or to a networked system.
It is possible to handle transit traffic both manually and automatically over digital
trunks and analog lines with a backward release criterion. Transit traffic can also be
processed on analog trunks without a backward release criterion (loop start) by using
timeout control followed by automatic release (maximum time is 42 minutes). Transit
traffic is needed in the following situations:
●
Networked systems
●
Trunk-to-trunk connections (including DISA)
●
Transition from a private network to the public network and vice versa
Transit traffic is used in conjunction with the following features:
●
Call forwarding
●
Transfer
●
Callback (CorNet-N and QSig networks; if supported on the trunk side, transit
traffic can be used externally as well)
●
Message waiting for central voice mail servers in CorNet-N and QSig (not for
U.S.) networks.
External access from a remote node is not possible over HiPath 3550 or HiPath
3500 BRI trunks. Such calls are intercepted to the HiPath 3550 or HiPath 3500 intercept position.
Definition of Features Associated with Transit Traffic
●
3-118
Call forwarding: A trunk-to-trunk connection is possible using Call Forwarding No Answer (only with a pseudo port) or Call Forwarding (CF) to an external destination. Care should be taken concerning the release capability of the trunks.
Using LCR, an incoming call can also be forwarded (CF or CNA) to a CorNet-N
link to a station in the remote node, to the Attendant in the remote node, to a voice
mail system in the remote node, or rerouted to an external destination by the remote node. When calls from a HiPath 3000 are routed through a CorNet-N link
to internal and external destinations, the CorNet-N channels must be split between these functions. In the case of a transfer to a remote voice mail system,
the HiPath 3000 sends the originally called destination’s station number to the
voice mail to activate the proper answer message.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
Always refer to the latest CorNet-N Configuration Note or the CorNet-N Sales Positioning Guide for the latest information.
●
Transfer: It is possible for the user to transfer calls (screened and un-screened)
to an external destination or to a remote node, via a CorNet-N link.
The transfer can also be initiated by a voice mail call processing feature or by an
IVR which automatically transfers, unscreened, a call to an external or CorNet-N
destination.
●
Callback: If Callback was activated by the user to a CorNet-N user in a remote
node (a closed numbering scheme is required to activate this feature), the Callback will be activated the same as an internal Callback activation. (This feature
is not available with connections to a ROLM 9005.)
●
Message waiting for central voice mail servers in CorNet-N networks: Message Waiting notification is possible from a remote voice mail system connected
via CorNet-N links. In the case of PhoneMail, the SW version must be 6.3 or higher.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
S0/S2M board
SW requirements
x
V1.0 or later
x
x
x
TLA board
–
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Loop-start trunks
(loop-start/groundstart in U.S)
Requirement or Condition
Loop-start trunks are automatically released after a programmable period (default: 310 seconds. A tone sounds
10 seconds before release). The time parameters only can
be changed by using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-119
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.7 Translate Station Numbers to Names for System Speed Dialing
Definition
With system speed-dialing calls, the name of the destination programmed in the system speed-dialing facility is displayed after outgoing dialing instead of the speed-dialing number. If the station number of an incoming call corresponds to a station number
in system speed dialing, the name of the caller appears on the display.
This feature only applies to systems with ISDN trunk connections or with Analog Caller ID on the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300.
The HiPath 3000 filters out the access code in the System Speed Dial table; however,
the rest of the number must be an exact match to the incoming number for this feature
to function.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
300
300
SW requirements
Number of speed-dialing numbers
3-120
V1.0 or later
1000
1000
300
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for General External Traffic
3.4.8 Message Waiting Indication (MWI) at the Trunk Interface (V3.0 and
later)
Definition
You can use this function only if the public exchange supports it.
You can activate and delete the “Mailbox key”.
This function supports sending (service menu or code) from the idle, ringing, busy,
and talk states and supports the receiving of messages.
On the receiver side, telephones with a display show the message “Please call back”.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V3.0 SMR-3 and later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
3-121
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5 Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.1 Call Allocation
Definition
Within call management, two call allocation tables are provided for incoming calls on
analog or digital trunks. One of these tables is evaluated for day service and the other
for night service. These tables define the station to which a call should be forwarded.
This feature can also be used to assign a trunk to a specific station.
The Ringing Assignments screen in HiPath 3000 Manager E is used to determine
which stations (or groups) are assigned to each of the system trunks. Each port is
assigned a call number in the Stations/Groups: Line Assignments table. This call
number can be the internal call number of an active or an inactive station or group.
Different call numbers can be assigned for day and for night. The call number in this
table tells the system that when a call comes in through that port, it should be signaled, not at this station, but according to the Call Destination List for this station.
Refer to Section 3.2.4, Call Management (CM) for details.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-122
Requirement or Condition
DTMF DID
An analog call may be released before call forwarding—no
answer is completed. This is due to the permanent timers
that prevent trunks from becoming frozen.
Call allocation table
A number of calls can be waiting simultaneously at the stations entered in the call allocation tables.
Intercept
Calls are intercepted if they cannot be switched because
there are no available stations.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.2 Group Ringing
Definition
Users can administer a personal list of internal station numbers that are also called
when their stations are signaled.
In this list, users can also enter their own station numbers. They might do this, for example, if a station number is permanently routed to another station (executive/secretary).
This feature is available to all types of telephones.
A feature button can be programmed on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones to
activate/deactivate the feature. More than one Group Ringing button can be programmed on one telephone to allow for different variations. More than one button can
be activated at one time, however, the maximum number telephones to ring cannot
exceed five.
The Forwarding screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway in HiPath 3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Call Forwarding screen to see if a station has a Ring
Group activated or if it is part of a Ring Group.
This feature can be activated/deactivated via a DISA connection by its own station
user or for another user with the aid of the feature Associated Services.
Group Ringing can be invoked during a conversation by following the above procedure using the Program/Service key.
If the feature is used frequently, the user can place the feature on a vacant button on
the telephone. The feature button name is Ringing Group On in the button menu.
When the feature is active, the LED is lit.
The station flag “no group ringing on busy” determines which stations in a call ringing
group receive a call when the primary telephone (the one activating the feature) is
busy, and which ones do not.
If the same station or smartset is in the ringing group of more than one master telephone, the flag applies to all calls signaled at this station or smartset.
If the flag is not set, group ringing always takes place, provided that the station in the
call ringing group is available (default).
If the flag is set, group ringing depends on the availability of the primary telephone:
●
If the primary telephone is available, group ringing takes place immediately
●
If the primary telephone has activated call waiting, group ringing takes place after
a 5-second delay.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-123
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
●
If the primary telephone cannot receive a call, or if call waiting is inactive, call
ringing does not take place.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Recall
System search
Callback
Group ringing is not carried out with an immediate recall
(operator error), system search, or callback.
Call forwarding (CF)
If the station that activated group ringing has also activated
call forwarding, group ringing is not carried out.
Do not disturb (DND)
If the station in the call ringing group has activated DND,
group ringing is not carried out at that station.
Appointment
An active timed reminder does not follow group ringing.
No group ringing when If the flag is set, no group ringing will take place if the stabusy
tion is busy.
3-124
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.3 Night Answer
Definition
Night answer forwards all calls that reach the attendant console to a predefined destination. Users can define either an individual station or a group as a destination. Users can also use a central bell in conjunction with night answer to alert any personnel
(night shift) to night calls.
HiPath 3000 distinguishes between day service, fixed night answer, and variable night
answer.
In the case of day service and fixed night answer, incoming external calls follow the
tables and call destination lists entered in CM for day service and night answer, regardless of the station type.
With variable night answer to a voice station, calls follow the call destination lists for
fixed night answer and are then intercepted by the variable night station. All other call
destinations for fixed night answer are considered to be invalid and are replaced by
the variable night station. As a result, the system behaves in every respect in the
same way as it would for call forwarding to a night destination.
A list for night answer controls external DID calls. This method is also known as assigned night answer because it enables users to assign different night destinations to
individual lines.
Night Service
The Night Service function defines how calls are handled when the system is placed
in night service mode.
The maximum number of stations that can be authorized to place the system into
night service is five. The list can be changed via HiPath 3000 Manager E (Authorized
Station for Night Service list).
An Intercept station can also be defined for Night Service. This station does not need
to be the same station called during Night Service. This intercept position can be an
individual station or a group. Separate intercept positions can be entered for day calls
and for night calls. The Night Intercept position will intercept the same type of calls as
the Day Intercept position. The Day Intercept position can be programmed to intercept any or all of the following types of calls:
●
no answer
●
busy
●
wrong number
●
incomplete
●
recall
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-125
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
System Administration assigns which trunks ring into which station (See Call Management) in Day mode and in Night mode. When the system is switched to night service, the system checks against the Call Allocation - Night list in Assistant T (Ringing
Line Assignments list in HiPath 3000 Manager E) to see where to send the incoming
call. The destinations can be either an individual station or a group.
Users can also use a central bell in conjunction with Night answer to alert any personnel (night shift) to night calls. In Call Management, an additional station can be
called by means of the Additional call number entry shown as Second Target in Call
Destination Lists in HiPath 3000 Manager E. This entry supports the common ringer
function. An actuator (relay) or an additional extension at which a call is also to be
signaled is entered here. The last field Type defines when ringing assignment takes
place (immediate or after CF timeout).
The night bell (instead of a telephone) may be physically connected to the station interface, in which case, the night bell can be answered by dialing the station number
or by call Pick up, if so configured.
An external night bell adapter may be required to prevent excessive current from
damaging the station interface.
A Night answer station can be any type of telephone, providing their COS allows, at
minimum, for incoming calls.
When in Night mode, all stations use the Night COS table. The table, similar to the
Day COS table, also has 15 classes to choose from. (Refer to Section 3.6.10, Configurable Toll Restriction for details).
A variable night station (universal night answer position) can be specified. The variable night station can be configured by any of the stations authorized to place the system in Night Service mode.
This feature can be activated/deactivated via a DISA connection by the station user.
If the feature is used frequently, the user can place the feature on a vacant button on
the telephone. The feature button name is Night answer on in the button menu. During
programming of the button, it can be configured to activate the default destination(s)
or a variable destination. The variable destination can still be overwritten by the access code. In either case, the LED on the key remains lit.
3-126
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
Night Service Security
To prevent unauthorized deactivation of Night Service (returning the system to its normal day COS toll Restriction scheme), the authorized user can activate Individual
Telephone Lock at the telephone.
If there are several authorized stations, they must all activate Telephone Lock to ensure security.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call forwarding
Calls follow call forwarding if activated on the night station.
Night station
An intercom only phone cannot be entered as a night station.
Lines
Variable night answer makes no distinction between the individual trunks; that is, calls on all trunks reach the night
station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-127
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.4 Direct Inward Dialing
Definition
With direct inward dialing (DID), an incoming call can reach a station without intervention by the attendant console.
This feature is handled in call management. The internal and external numbering systems are defined in the numbering plan.
Public Networks require that DID calls to a station that is out of service, or is otherwise
unreachable (for example, do not disturb) must be intercepted to a station, an answering position, or to an announcement device. It is therefore necessary to program intercept destinations for DID stations.
In HiPath 3000 Manager E and Assistant T, the DID number corresponding to an internal call number can up to 11 digits in length.
For an incoming call on an ISDN PRI line, the PBX number is blanked out to the left
of the incoming call number. The remaining portion of the call number is interpreted
by the system as a DID number.
DID calls can appear on MUSAP keys. Refer to Section 3.5.5, Selective Seizure of a
DID Number Using a MUSAP Key.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Outside of U.S.: S0 trunk board
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Entrance telephone,
MOH, room monitor,
speaker telephone
type
3-128
Requirement or Condition
These stations cannot be reached from the outside by direct inward dialing.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.5 Selective Seizure of a DID Number Using a MUSAP Key
Definition
For users to seize one of the system DID numbers for outgoing calls, they must either
use a procedure or configure a multiple station appearance (MUSAP) key. This key is
assigned a DID number in the system. However, pressing this key is not sufficient for
seizure. The trunk group, trunk, or Prime Line must be suffix-dialed for seizure to occur.
For incoming calls, the MUSAP key functions as a call key. The LED is activated in
the same way as for trunk keys, call keys, or DSS keys, depending on the status of
the trunk key to which it is connected. Features such as toggle and consultation hold
are possible.
For outgoing calls, the MUSAP key functions as a call key after the external seizure
is completed.
A MUSAP key is used as a target location for incoming DID calls from the public network. The key can also be used as a target for incoming calls from a CorNet-N location. If the station is assigned a MUSAP key, the DID number associated with the key
is sent to the ISDN Public Network on BRI and PRI outgoing calls.
Up to 10 MUSAP keys can be programmed on the same station to support rollover
buttons for additional calls to the same DID number. A maximum of 10 MUSAP and/
or Call Keys can be programmed on an optiset E and optiPoint 500.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
x
x
Digital trunk board
SW requirements
x
x
–
–
10
10
V1.0 or later
Max. no. of MUSAP
keys per telephone
10
10
10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
MUSAP
Requirement or Condition
MUSAP keys do not seize trunk groups directly. After you
press the key, you must dial the trunk group separately.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-129
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.6 Signaling of Direct Inward Dialing Numbers for Incoming Calls
Definition
When an internal station receives an external call, the direct inward dialing (DID)
number that the caller originally dialed is displayed. A variety of acoustic signaling
methods are also available to signal the call. The LED assigned to the appropriate
MUSAP key (see Section 3.5.5) also signals the call.
Three different types of acoustic signaling are possible depending on the telephone.
Refer to Section 3.2.2.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E station or analog station
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Signaling
3-130
Requirement or Condition
Not for S0 stations (not for U.S.).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.7 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Definition
Direct inward system access (DISA) enables users to use features in the HiPath 3000
system via an external connection. External callers must enter a password to gain access to the system. They can then use certain system features just like an internal
user. They can also set up an outgoing external seizure via the incoming external
connection.
Users can use the following features via DISA:
●
Direct services for internal stations:
Send message texts, relay on/off, night answer on/off, advisory message on/off,
group ringing on/off, telephone lock on/off, do not disturb on/off, call forwarding
on/off, leave/join hunt group, reset services.
●
Associated services:
Advisory message on/off, group ringing on/off, telephone lock on/off, do not disturb on/off, call forwarding on/off, leave/join hunt group, reset services.
An internal station can also be reached via DISA. In the case of a fixed numbering
plan (such as in France), virtual networking is also possible.
The DISA access line can be configured as dedicated, or it can be accessed during
day or night operation; these parameters are set in the General Flags of Lines/Networking/Parameters tabs in HiPath 3000 Manager E; in the DISA day/night field, code
receiver (CR) parameters can be configured for each line.
One of the following options may be selected:
●
Line always has CR connected
●
Line has CR connected during day only
●
Line has CR connected during night only
●
Line has no CR connection
The DISA trunk is released at the completion of each function/feature. The user must
reenter the system if another function needs to be accomplished.
The stations authorized to access the system via DISA must first be configured in
System Administration.
A DISA trunk can be a DID number or a LS/GS trunk. If the DISA trunk is a DID number, this number is programmed in System parameters. The field allows up to 12 digits. If the trunk is LS/GS, the trunk is programmed in the Ringing Assignments.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-131
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
A password is required to log onto the system. This password consists of the internal
station call number and the Telephone Code lock PIN. Entry of the password is only
acknowledged after a timeout or entry of the end symbol #. This selection is systemwide and is done in the System Parameters.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-132
Requirement or Condition
Analog trunk
Night answer
Analog trunks can be programmed for DISA access. They
can be used as normal analog trunks during the day and
then switched over to DISA mode when the night answer
function is activated.
Call data output
DISA calls are specially marked in call data output.
System speed dialing
The system speed-dialing memory can be used via DISA.
Trunk
The trunk is released each time you activate the service.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.8 Intercept Conditions
Definition
Intercept forwards incoming calls to another destination. A call is intercepted if the
original destination is invalid or if limitations exist.
Users can specify the following as intercept destinations:
●
PC AC
●
Station
●
Hunt group
●
Announcement (external announcement device)
If an intercept position or AC is configured in the system, calls are routed to this intercept position during an intercept. If an intercept position has not been configured, intercepted calls are signaled at the station that has a call assignment for the intercepted trunk.
During intercepts, call management is entered using the intercept station as the basis. If the intercept position cannot be reached, the call is signaled at a night bell, if
entered, or the call waits in a queue at the intercept position.
Users can activate the intercept feature under the following conditions:
●
Intercept no answer
If there is no answer, the call follows the entries in call management. If the end of
the CM elements is reached, the system determines whether or not an intercept
after timeout should occur. If the system cannot find a station to which it can route
the call, the call is intercepted.
●
Intercept busy, if no additional forwarding is possible.
If a station is busy, the system determines whether or not call waiting is possible.
If call waiting is not possible (signaling security or intercept criterion), the call follows the entries in call management. If the call cannot be signaled at any station,
the system determines whether the call should be intercepted or released.
In general, intercept busy only applies to the first call, not to switched or outgoing
connections. A recall of an external station is not immediately intercepted when
the destination station is busy; instead, call waiting is activated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-133
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
●
Intercept if incomplete or invalid number dialed
When an incorrect station number was dialed, the system determines whether
the call should be intercepted or released. Calls are always intercepted with
pseudo-DID.
●
Intercept if no number dialed
If no station number is dialed within a timeout, the system determines whether
the call should be intercepted or released. If an intercept position has not been
configured, the interception follows the call assignment per trunk.
●
Intercept with Serial FWD
It is not possible to chain calls for forwarding; an attempt to initiate this procedure
is rejected on activation. For example, if a station has activated external call forwarding and the call destination has also forwarded its calls, you have a chained
calls situation. This is not allowed by the system. If this flag is turned on, these
calls are intercepted.
●
Codelock Diversion
If the telephone lock for a station is active, and a trunk group code is dialed from
that station, the call is immediately forwarded to the intercept destination. The
Codelock Diversion function is set individually for each station through the Flags
screen in the Set up Station Parameters.
One intercept position can be configured for Day operation. During Night Service, the
same destination or a different destination can be configured as the intercept position.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-134
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Hunt group
Intercepts cannot extend beyond a hunt group; the call is
forwarded to the first hunt group station and always remains in the hunt group.
Release
Calls with the service ID data service (ISDN message) are
released, not intercepted.
Incomplete dialing
Not evaluated in the case of a central intercept position.
Tenant service
When a tenant service is configured, users can only configure intercepts on a cross-system basis. This means that
intercept no answer (for example) applies to all system users.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-135
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.9 Dual-Tone Multifrequency Direct Inward Dialing
Definition
This feature enables users to use direct inward dialing (DID) on non-DID trunks such
as analog trunks. This type of pseudo-DID is achieved by suffix-dialing dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) digits.
External calls that reach the system via this feature are released after a timeout if they
are not answered. This prevents analog trunks from freezing up. The timer Release
if no dialing is activated when the trunk answers. Default time is 10 seconds.
An announcement lets callers know that they can use DID. A customized announcement is available in the system. This feature requires an external announcement device.
Operating
The user calls the trunk number flagged as DTMF DID. The system answers. No tone
is presented to the user. The user dials the station number and is connected. If the
call is not answered within 60 seconds (not variable) the trunk is automatically released.
If a recorded announcement has been configured for callers, the caller can be presented with an audio message and can start dialing. During the announcement a
Code Receiver is on line to detect dialing.
The announcement device is connected to an analog port and must be able to
present an open loop to the system at the end of the message.
Refer also to Section 3.5.10, Announcement Before Answering.
3-136
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
Analog trunk board
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
DTMF DID
If the incoming call is not answered within 60 seconds, the
trunk is released.
Intercept
The trunk is released 30 seconds after the call is intercepted.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-137
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.10 Announcement Before Answering
Definition
This feature plays an announcement for external callers from an optional external announcement device. This applies to both analog and digital trunks.
The announcement can be played either parallel to ringing or only if the call is placed
in the announcement device queue. The announcement begins after a programmable
period and can be heard by several callers simultaneously.
Users can configure an announcement before answering to relieve an intercept station. For this purpose, users connect an announcement device, which is capable of
answering an incoming call and forwarding it to a specific station. This feature is configured with call management.
Users must configure the subscriber ports that connect to announcement devices as
answering machines. If the announcement device is connected to an analog port and
it must be able to present an open loop to the system at the end of the message.
The UCD feature can also be used to start the announcement only after a programmable period. The announcement can be heard by several callers simultaneously.
The feature can be used to present callers with a company message before being answered, for example, by the Attendant or by a group.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
TIEL or
anlaog
port
3-138
x
x
Analog port
SW requirements
No. of callers who can
hear an announcement simultaneously
x
V1.0 or later
30
30
30
30
30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Group/station
Requirement or Condition
If the announcement port is entered as a call forwarding—
no answer destination, the appropriate announcement is
played if the group or station is busy. The call is then forwarded to the next station or the programmed intercept criteria apply.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-139
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.11 Collect Call Barring per Trunk (for Brazil Only)
Definition
This feature provides for automatic release of incoming collect calls; users can configure it individually for each analog trunk (loop start). If this feature is enabled for a
trunk, the system opens the loop for 2 s (default value) one second (default value) after an incoming call is accepted. This ensures that collect calls are released in the
network, while other calls continue unaffected.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
–
–
–
HW requirements
Analog
trunk
(loop
start)
Analog
trunk
(loop
start)
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0
or later
V1.0
or later
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Collect call barring per Only available in Brazil. This setting is ignored in all other
trunk
countries.
3-140
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.12 Collect Call Barring per Station
Definition
This features allows automatic release of incoming collect calls. Users can configure
it separately for each station, even in combination with functions such as call forwarding, call pickup, or intercept.
Users can also program collect call barring system-wide. This applies if a caller dials
a hunt group instead of an individual station or misdials a number.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
x
x
–
–
–
TMAMF
TMAMF
–
–
–
–
–
–
(HiPath
3550 only)
SW requirements
V1.0 or
later
V1.2 or
later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Collect call barring per Neither the system-wide parameters for collect call barring
trunk
nor the setting made for the stations affect trunk calls (analog trunks).
Collect call barring per Only for MFC R2 countries that offer this feature.
trunk
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-141
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.13 Analog Direct Inward Dialing via MFC-R2
Definition
An MFC-R2 trunk is an analog trunk interface for direct inward dialing that allows external callers to reach extensions directly without the assistance of an attendant.
The system supports MFC-R2 (SMFC) as the default setting, MFC-R2 with caller ID,
tone dialing, and dial pulsing. It is not possible to use tone dialing and MFC-R2 (with
or without caller ID) simultaneously.
To implement the CLIP feature (see Section 3.14.6) for incoming calls, you can enter
the calling party number when MCF-R2 (SMFC) is active. When receiving calls for
which the trunk supplies this information, the calling party’s number appears on the
screen of the called party’s telephone.
This feature must be configured for each trunk (signaling method parameter set to
MFC-R2 with caller ID).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
–
–
–
TMAMF
TMAMF
–
–
–
–
–
–
(HiPath
3550 only)
SW requirements
3-142
V1.0 or
later
V1.2 or
later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Analog direct inward
dialing with MFC-R2
Available in Brazil, India, Malaysia, Singapore and ATEA
countries only. The setting is ignored in all other countries.
The ATEA countries listed below require country initialization with the international country code = 21. In addition,
parameter PAR_05 (System status - System-wide Boards: MFC/R2 table) must be set in HiPath 3000 Manager E expert mode.
Egypt = 05h (default)
●
Nigeria = 06h
●
Oman = 07h
●
Saudi Arabia = 08h
●
Syria = 09h
●
Tunesia = 0Ah
●
United Arab Emirates = 0Bh
●
Caller ID
Displayed exactly as received from the trunk. The system
does not add any digits (such as trunk access codes or discriminating digits) or remove any digits (such as the local
area code supplied by the central office). Likewise, the displayed station number cannot be redialed directly and
does not appear in the caller list.
Caller ID
Not available in Singapore.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-143
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
3.5.14 Centralized Attendant Service CAS (for U.S. only)
Definition
This feature allows for the conservation of T1 TIE line trunks when the attendant at a
center PBX system answers a call that originated at the store PBX (branch) and who’s
destination extension is also at the store PBX. Without the CAS feature, this type of
scenario would force the system to use 2 T1 channels for every call that was transferred back to the branch. CAS will conserve the T1 channels by releasing the T1
channel after the call is transferred so that no T1 channels are in use for the duration
of the call after transfer.
The typical CAS application for a Federated store consists of the CAS store PBX
(branch), the CAS center PBX (center) and a minimum of two tie lines that function
as release link trunks RLT.
The typical RLT is a channel on a T1 card in the branch PBX that is mapped in a private network to a CAS center to be answered by a pool of operators.
A typical store (branch PBX) would have a T1 card with the first 8-12 channels
mapped as tie trunks to one hub to carry standard tie line traffic. 2 or more of the remaining channels on the same T1 card are mapped as RLT’s.
Example for an incoming call: A customer calls the branch PBX on the main DID number. The branch PBX then routes this DID call to a RLT. The RLT carries the call to the
CAS center and the CAS operator answers the call. The operator finds out what our
customer is calling for and then transfers the call to the appropriate extension in the
branch PBX.
If all RLT’s are busy then the call will que. The caller will hear a recording all operators
are busy please hold. When a RLT becomes idle then the queued call hits the RLT.
The transfer process consists of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The CAS center operator hits the „CAS flash” key after have talked to the customer and found out which extension number to transfer the call to.
The CAS center PBX transmits a „hook switch flash“ over the RLT.
The branch PBX recognizes the „hook switch flash“ and puts the DID trunk on
hold and gives dial tone back to the CAS operator.
The CAS center operator dials the destination extension number.
The branch PBX receives the extension number and starts to ring the phone.
At this point the CAS center operator can
stay on the call and wait for answer and do a supervised transfer, or
release the call and let the transfer finish as unsupervised transfer.
●
When the CAS operator releases the call the RLT drops, the branch PBX finish’s
the transfer.
●
7.
3-144
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Incoming External Traffic
8.
9.
The DID trunk is directly connected to the destination extension.
The RLT is idle and ready for the next call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
HW requirements
TMST1
TST1
SW requirements
V1.0
V1.0
–
–
–
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
CAS store PBX
(branch)
Requirement or Condition
HiPath 3000 supports the CAS store PBX (branch) of the
application.
CAS center PBX (cen- Support for the CAS center PBX (center) of the application
ter)
is supplied by another type of PABX (e. g. Rolm 9005 or a
Lucent switch) that supports the center where the attendants are located in the application.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-145
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6 Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.1 Last Number Redial (LNR)
Definition
Each time users place an outgoing call, the dialed number is stored. On optiset E or
optiPoint 500 telephones with displays, the system stores the last three numbers dialed.
To retrieve a specific number and use it to set up another call, press the Redial key.
●
Press the key once to dial the last number dialed.
●
Press the key twice to dial the next-to-the-last number dialed.
●
Press the key three times to dial the number that was stored the longest.
On optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones without displays, the system stores only the
last number dialed.
For V1.2 and later, the system also uses the last number redial memory to store account codes ACCT that were entered. This is true only if the appropriate system-wide
flags are set.
Last Number Redial
This feature applies only to non-display optiset E or optiPoint 500 models; however, it
uses the same feature key (Redial) as the Expanded Redial feature for display telephones.
Only external calls are saved. Every new outgoing call overwrites the previous number stored. This is also true if System or Station speed dial is used. When using LCR
access, only the number dialed by the station is stored in the LNR memory.
A call to a user in a networked system over a CorNet-N link is stored in LNR memory;
likewise, an external call routed via CorNet-N to a trunk in another node, is also
stored.
This feature cannot be invoked if Telephone Lock has been activated.
Each time users place and dial an external destination, the number is stored. If the
destination was busy or not reachable, users can press the redial key to redial the
same number.
This feature can only be invoked from the Redial key. No feature access code is possible.
3-146
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Expanded Redial
This feature applies only to display optiset E or optiPoint 500; however, it uses the
same feature key (Redial) as the Last Number Redial feature for non-display telephones.
The system stores the last three external calls dialed by a display telephone. The expanded redial memory operates in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner; that is, the fourth
external call number placed from that telephone is placed at the top of the redial table,
and the oldest call is removed from memory, and so on.
Only external calls are saved. This is also true if System or Station speed dial is used.
A call to a user in a networked system over a CorNet-N link is stored; likewise, an external call routed via CorNet-N to a trunk in another node is also stored.
This feature cannot be invoked if Telephone Lock has been activated.
Any post-dialed digits beyond the initial destination, (for example, digits sent to a connected voice mail system) are not stored in expanded redial memory. In the case of
a call routed through LCR, only the number dialed by the station is stored.
This feature can only be invoked from the Redial key. No feature access code is possible.
To reach the last number dialed, the user presses the Redial key once, and after a
brief delay the number is dialed. Alternatively, the user can view the last three entries
by pressing the Redial key successively and selecting the number to be redialed.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
UP0/E telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Max length of stored
number
Maximum number of
entries
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
25 digits+code
3
3
3
3
3
3-147
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-148
Requirement or Condition
LNR
DTMF signals are not considered dialing information and
are not stored. This does not apply to mobile telephones,
which store DTMF signals in the internal redial memory.
LNR
After CO through-connect to the initial destination, further
post-dialed digits are not stored.
System speed dialing
Speed-dialing numbers overwrite redial memory.
Telephone lock
You cannot use redial if the telephone lock is active.
Internal calls
Internal calls have no effect on the redial memory.
Telephones without
displays
Only the last number dialed can be stored.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.2 System Speed Dialing
Definition
Users can store frequently dialed station numbers in system memory. For convenience, the system uses a short code to represent each station number so that the
user does not need to dial the complete number.
Speed-dialing numbers are predefined in the system. Users can dial the codes from
any subscriber station that is assigned to a speed-dialing group.
Use the redial key or the pound (#) key to program a dial pause and DTMF
changeover.
●
Only external calls can be stored.
●
A name can be associated with each destination.
●
This feature cannot be invoked if Telephone Lock has been activated.
●
System Speed Dial overrides the COS Toll Restriction rules.
●
System Speed Dial feature is system-wide and cannot be split, for example in the
case of Tenant Service.
●
The default access code is *7 followed by the index number. The abbreviated
speed dial numbers are therefore:
●
System model
Abbreviated number
HiPath 3350
*7 000 to *7 299
HiPath 3550
*7 000 to *7 999
HiPath 3750
*7 000 to *7 999
A feature button can be programmed on an optiset E and optiPoint 500. The button simulates the dialing of the access code (*7). The user is then prompted (display) to enter the index number.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-149
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Speed-dialing entries
in the system
1000
1000
300
300
300
Max. length of speeddialing entries
25 digits
+
6 digit
trunk access code
25 digits
25 digits
25 digits
25 digits
16
16
16
16
16
Max. no. of charactters per name
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-150
Requirement or Condition
External station numbers
Speed-dialing destinations can contain external station
numbers only.
External station numbers
The external station number must include the trunk group
or seizure code.
Translation of station
numbers to names
You can assign a name to each speed-dialing destination.
Tenant service
If a tenant service is implemented via toll restrictions, the
system does not check whether trunk seizures are authorized. If speed dialing is used, the system automatically
seizes the next free trunk, regardless of whether or not the
user is authorized to seize this trunk. As a result, an incorrect system number may be displayed at the destination.
For this reason, users should only implement tenant service via ITR groups.
Entrance telephone
The entrance telephone cannot access speed-dialing
numbers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Assistant T
If using Assistant T, enter the speed dial number first, then
enter the corresponding name. Assistant T will not allow a
name to be entered for a specific index unless a number
has been previously entered. Names can only be entered
using the memory telephone or the HiPath 3000 Manager
E.
Disallowed digits
Assistant T and HiPath 3000 Manager E both check the
first digit(s) of the speed-dial number you are programming
against the default or current digits used in your database
for external access codes. For example: entering the
speed dial number 71 510 555 1212, may be disallowed if
the digits 7 or 71 or 715 are not CO access codes.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-151
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.3 System Speed Dialing in Tenant Systems
Definition
This feature lets you select specific speed-dialing destinations, depending on the internal traffic restriction (ITR) groups. To do this, you can assign a range of speed-dialing numbers to internal traffic restriction groups using HiPath 3000 Manager E or
system administration.
When a user dials a speed-dialing number, the system identifies the ITR group for the
number, which determines whether the user is authorized to dial this number. If not,
an error message appears and the dialing attempt is rejected.
The speed-dialing number ranges can overlap in the ITR groups.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Speed-dialing entries
in system
1000
1000
300
300
300
Max. length of speeddialing entry
25 digits
+
6-digit
trunk access code
25 digits
25 digits
25 digits
25 digits
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-152
Requirement or Condition
External station numbers
Speed-dialing destinations can contain external station
numbers only.
External station numbers
The external station number must include the trunk group
or seizure code.
Translation of station
numbers to names
You can assign a name to each speed-dialing destination.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Tenant system
If a tenant service is implemented using toll restrictions,
the system does not check whether trunk seizures are authorized. If speed-dialing is used, the system automatically
seizes the next free trunk, regardless of whether or not the
user is authorized to seize this trunk. As a result, an incorrect system number may be displayed at the destination.
For this reason, users should implement tenant service
only via ITR groups.
Entrance telephone
The entrance telephone cannot access speed-dialing
numbers.
ITR groups
You cannot enter more than one speed-dialing number
range for the same ITR group.
ITR groups
By default, all speed-dialing numbers are assigned to ITR
group 1.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-153
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.4 Station Speed Dialing in System
Definition
The user can create a separate speed-dialing list for frequently dialed numbers.
Users can enter external numbers in the system database. Access depends on the
station’s dial-up access rights. Users must enter the trunk group code before the station number.
There is only one list of maximum 10 numbers per telephone. The HiPath 3000 systems have a pool of dial entries which is shared with the feature Repdial. (HiPath
3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3500 = 2000 entries, HiPath 3350 and
HiPath 3300 = 300 entries). The system does NOT dedicate 10 Station speed dial entries per telephone. Any unused entries remain in the entry pool and can be used by
other stations. It is therefore possible that a station user may not be able to program
an entry on the telephone even though not all entries in the list have been used. This
could indicate that the system pool of entries has been fully used up.
All types of telephones have access to this feature.
Station speed-dial numbers are stored in the system but must be entered by the individual user from the telephone. System Administration cannot enter these numbers
for a user. Only external calls can be stored. A name can be associated with each
destination.
This feature cannot be invoked if Telephone Lock has been activated.
3-154
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Maximum number of
station speed-dialing
entries per station
10
10
10
10
10
Maximum length of
station speed-dialing
entry
25
digits +
code
25
digits +
code
25
digits +
code
25
digits +
code
25
digits +
code
Maximum number of
speed-dialing entries
in the system
2000
2000
300
300
300
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Telephones without
display
Following station number entry, telephones without a display must wait for the confirmation tone.
Analog telephones
(with DP),
S0 stations
Station speed dialing is not possible.
Internal station numbers, features
You cannot store internal station numbers and features in
the station speed-dialing list.
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephones
In the case of optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones, users
can store station speed dialing using codes or the telephone’s programmable keys.
Repdial keys, station Station speed-dialing destinations can be assigned until
speed-dialing memory station speed-dialing memory in the system is exhausted.
Speed-dialing memory is used for both repdial keys and
station speed-dialing destinations.
Rotary dial analog
telephones
Station speed-dialing is not possible.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-155
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.5 Trunk Seizure Type and Prime Line On (Automatic Line Seizure)
Definition
The HiPath 3000 systems permit trunk seizure via the trunk keys or call keys on an
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone.
Trunk seizure is also possible from any telephone using the trunk or trunk group
codes. To seize the second trunk using a trunk or call key, Prime Line must be active
and a second trunk group assigned.
Trunk seizure via trunk group code is not possible by entering the trunk group code
and pressing the trunk group key.
When the system receives a seizure request, it searches for an available trunk in the
trunk group. If a trunk is available, it is seized.
Prime Line
The Prime Line feature is a system-wide feature that allows users to dial directly to
external destinations without the use of Trunk or Trunk Group keys. The external access code is automatically dialed by the system. Only one outgoing Trunk Group is
possible with this arrangement. To dial internal stations, the user must first press the
Internal key and dial the station number.
When this feature is NOT active in the system, the reverse operation is true; that is,
internal stations can be dialed directly, while outside connections require a Trunk,
Trunk Group key or an access code.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
Trunk board
x
x
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-156
Requirement or Condition
Trunks
You must use system administration to cancel nonexistent
or physically disconnected trunks.
COS changeover
If you activate a telephone lock, you cannot seize a trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Entrance telephone
You cannot seize a trunk from an entrance telephone.
Hold/park
An undialed or partially dialed trunk cannot be parked or
placed on hold.
Automatic line seizure optiset E entry and optiset E basic, and optiPoint 500 tele(Prime Line on)
phones cannot use this feature.
Prime Line on (automatic line seizure)
With automatic line seizure, you can program trunks in different trunk groups. You cannot define an overflow from
trunk group 1 to another trunk group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-157
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.6 En-Bloc Dialing
Definition
With en-bloc dialing, the digits dialed are combined to form a block, stored in the system, and forwarded when they are recognized as complete.
If no additional digits are entered within a certain period (timer: End of Dial on Incomplete dialing; the default time is 15 seconds), the system interprets the last number
entered as the last digit in the block.
When the timer expires (when the last dialed digit is recognized), dialing automatically
begins. Dialing can also be started manually by entering the end-of-dialing code (#).
In the case of PRI, en-bloc dialing to the central office is mandatory. Block dialing is
also used in Cornet-N networks.
Timing parameters are only accessible via the Expert Level in HiPath 3000 Manager
E. Contact your second-level service group if a change is required.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.7, Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.), on page 3-183
●
Section 3.8, Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only), on page 3-195
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
Digital trunk board
x
x
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-158
Requirement or Condition
CorNet-N
En-bloc dialing is used in CorNet-N networks.
QSig
En-bloc dialing is used in QSig networks.
USA, PRI
En-bloc dialing is required with PRI in the USA.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.7 Dial Tone Detection
Definition
The system always links analog trunk connections to the Dial Tone Detection routine.
The system checks the trunk to determine whether the audible tone is present. The
dialing information is not transmitted to the trunk until this check has been performed.
The reason for this is that the time until the CO dial tone is received can differ depending on the network operator and network status.
Dial Tone Detection is performed:
●
After trunk seizure
●
After dialing of administrable digits (for example, discriminating digit in the main
communications server, LCR)
●
When a second dial tone is monitored
Dial Tone Detection may not be appropriate, for example, in a Centrex environment,
where different tones (to indicate CO Call Forwarding activation, etc.) need to be
heard by the user. In such cases, the Trunk Supervision flag (Dial Tone Detection)
must be turned off. Then a trunk seizure delay can be programmed before dialing can
begin. If trunk supervision is activated, the system waits until a dial tone is detected,
even if No pause is selected in this field.
The Trunk Seizure delay choices are No Pause, 1, 3, 6 or 9 seconds.
If Trunk Supervision is activated, and dial tone is not detected (timer: Dial Tone Monitoring time, default 10 seconds), this line is taken out of operation if there is no dial
tone after seizure. Thereafter, the system checks at cyclical intervals whether a dial
tone is once again present. When it is, the line in question is put back into operation.
Dial tone monitoring time.
The Dial Tone Monitoring timer is only accessible via the Expert Level in HiPath 3000
Manager E. Contact your second-level service group if a change is required.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
Analog trunk board
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-159
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-160
Requirement or Condition
Audible tone
If audible tone monitoring is not possible or not desired,
you can configure a pause before dial.
Audible tone
You can modify the monitoring of a second audible tone
and the audible tone monitoring time only using HiPath
3000 Manager E.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.8 End-of-Dialing Recognition
Definition
As in the case of en-bloc dialing, the end of dialing is signaled either automatically
after the timer expires or manually when the user enters the end-of-dialing code (#).
The timer invoked in this case is End-of-dial on incomplete dialing. If dialing is not
continued within the specified timeout, an end-of-dial is generated automatically. The
default is 15 seconds.
Timing parameters are only accessible via the Expert Level in HiPath 3000 Manager
E. Contact your second-level service group if a change is required.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
Trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
End-of-dialing time
Requirement or Condition
The longer the time for end of dialing, the longer it takes for
the final digit to be transmitted on an analog trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-161
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.9 Trunk Signaling Method
Definition
The signaling methods currently in use are:
●
Dial pulsing (DP)
●
Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF)
Pulses are analyzed in the case of DP, while tones are analyzed in the case of DTMF.
When the system uses analog trunk boards, the signaling method is automatically detected as long as the user has not configured a signaling method or pause before dial.
Otherwise, the signalling method can be set on a per trunk basis.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
Analog trunk board
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-162
Requirement or Condition
Signaling method
If you set the trunk to PABX (communications server), the
DTMF method is activated.
Pause before dial
If you configure pause before dial, the DP signaling method is activated.
Power reset (power
failure)
The signaling method that is detected is stored until the
next power reset (power failure).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.10 Configurable Toll Restriction
Definition
Each user in a communications server can be assigned different toll restrictions. Each
time a station attempts to seize a trunk, that station’s class of service (COS) is
checked (toll restriction). The system distinguishes between 15 different classes of
service:
●
0 = no trunk access
●
1 = outward-restricted trunk access
●
2 to 7 = allowed lists
●
8 to 13 = denied lists
●
14 = unrestricted trunk access
System configurations with CorNet-N and/or a fax server use class of service 7 for
these trunks and devices. In this case, you should not assign class of service 7 to a
subscriber with restricted access. Instead, use classes of service 0 to 6 and 8 to 14
for these subscribers.
The following list describes the classes of service in greater detail.
●
No trunk access
Users can make internal calls only. Users can use speed-dialing destinations.
Cannot make calls via CorNet-N link.
●
Outward-restricted trunk access (incoming authorized)
Users can only answer external calls. Users can use speed-dialing destinations.
●
Allowed lists
Allowed lists define the station numbers that the user is allowed to dial. If no numbers are entered in an allowed list, the station functions like a telephone with outward-restricted trunk access.
●
Denied lists
Denied lists define the station numbers that the user is not allowed to dial. If no
numbers are entered in a denied list, the station functions like a telephone with
unrestricted trunk access.
●
Unrestricted trunk access
Users can answer and set up incoming and outgoing calls without restriction.
The Allowed numbers lists contain the digit sequences which may appear at the start
of a call number. The maximum length of the digit sequence is seven digits (0..9, *,#).
A maximum of 100 entries can be made in the allowed numbers list no. 1 and the lists
numbered 2-6 each contain a maximum of 50 entries.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-163
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
The Barred numbers lists contain the digit sequences which cause a call number to
be rejected. The maximum length of the digit sequence is seven digits (0..9,*,#). A
maximum of 50 entries can be made in the barred numbers list no. 1 and the lists
numbered 2-6 each contain a maximum of 50 entries.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
HW requirements
x
x
Trunk connection
SW requirements
x
x
–
–
V1.0 or later
Number of classes of
service
15
15
15
15
15
Number of characters
in list entries
25
25
25
25
25
Total number of allowed lists
6
6
6
6
6
Allowed lists, long
100 entries
1
1
1
1
1
Allowed lists, short
10 entries
5
5
5
5
5
Total no. of denied lists
6
6
6
6
6
Denied lists, long
50 entries
1
1
1
1
1
Denied lists, short
10 entries
5
5
5
5
5
Requirements and Conditions
3-164
Subject
Requirement or Condition
System speed dialing
You can use system speed-dialing destinations regardless
of the COS.
Toll restriction
The toll restriction classes of service regulate which denied or allowed lists are used for the stations for each trunk
group. The classes of service apply to data and voice stations.
CS/CorNet-N/QSig
If the trunk group for networking is set to communications
server (CS), the toll restriction check is not performed.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Subject
Requirement or Condition
CorNet-N/QSig
With networking, you should enter the trunk access code
of the main communications server as a second trunk access code so that the toll restriction will be checked when
a trunk in the main communications server is seized.
Toll restriction for two
networked systems
When there is an external seizure of a station from the satellite CS (with COS 2-13) over the main CS, the main CS’s
first denied list always does the seizing.
For this reason, keep the first denied line of the main CS
free for the assessment of the stations from the satellite
CS.
The system keeps COS 0, 1 and 14 of the satellite CS.
Least cost routing
(LCR)
A distinction is made between classes of service and the
LCR class of service; if both are configured, both apply..
Telephone lock
After telephone lock is activated, you can reduce the class
of service but not select a higher class of service.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-165
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.11 Traffic Restriction Groups
Definition
Multiple traffic restriction groups (ITRs), also known as Connection Groups (CON),
are provided in the system for all stations. These groups define information on toll restriction and trunk group reference (incoming or outgoing) for stations and trunks.
An ITR matrix defines whether a station
●
Is authorized to seize a trunk
●
Can seize a trunk only in the incoming or only in the outgoing direction
●
Can seize a trunk in the incoming and outgoing directions
●
Is authorized to seize certain speed-dialing destinations
●
Can access another station internally
The CON matrix permits or suppresses traffic between stations/lines within a subsystem and between subsystems. The CON matrix is configured system-wide.
The system default setting assigns all stations and trunks to ITR group 1. That is, all
stations are allowed to seize all trunks in the system. Which of the six groups can connect to which other groups is entered in the matrix.
Tenant Service call restrictions would be defined with the ITR (CON).
Related Topic
Section 3.6.10, Configurable Toll Restriction, on page 3-163
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
6
6
SW requirements
No. of ITR groups
3-166
V1.0 or later
6
6
6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
ITR group
All stations and trunks are assigned to ITR group 1 by default.
MOH devices
Up to six MOH devices can be defined for the six possible
ITR groups. This means that the analog interfaces used for
connection are part of the ITR groups. The particular MOH
device used depends on the ITR group of the station that
places the call on hold.
MOH source
You cannot use the logical port “0” as an MOH source.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-167
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.12 Private Trunk
Definition
The private trunk feature provides a station with immediate access to a trunk via a
programmable feature key.
Users can program toll restrictions for private trunks by using the traffic restriction
group (ITR) feature or by configuring a separate trunk group.
Care should be exercised when configuring a Private Trunk. By definition, a Private
Trunk implies that it will only terminate at one station. However, because features are
implemented on a device-basis, activation of some features could impact the operation of the Private Trunk, for example, DND, Call forward, intercept.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-168
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.13 Trunk Queuing
Definition
If users receive a busy signal following a trunk seizure request (because no free trunk
is available), they can use a procedure to queue on a seized trunk (book a line). As
soon as the trunk becomes available, the system recalls the first user in the queue.
The user hears the CO dial tone and can set up the external connection.
It is not possible to invoke Trunk Queueing if the attempted call was placed through
LCR.
Trunk Queueing can be invoked when all trunks on a Trunk group key show busy.
If the user is busy at the time of the recall, the trunk will camp on to the busy station
and if the camp-on to is not answered within the default 20 seconds, the reservation
is cancelled and the trunk is offered to the next station in the queue list.
If the user activated DND prior to receiving a recall from a queued trunk, the trunk
reservation is cancelled and the trunk is offered to the next station in the queue list.
If the user had invoked Call forward (CFNA or CF), the recalling trunk will ignore the
call forward and continue to ring at the requesting station. If not answered within default 20 seconds, the trunk reservation is cancelled.
A recalling trunk cannot be picked up by either Call Pick up - group or Call pick up Directed.
If a reservation is placed against a trunk which has an appearance at one or more
stations, the Trunk key’s LED flashes at the recall rate at the station that invoked the
queue request. The LED will be lit steadily at all other appearances.
Only one queue/reservation request is possible per telephone. If a second reservation is attempted, it overwrites the first.
A system-wide flag, Trunk reservation, enables/disables this feature
This feature can be invoked in one of the following two ways:
●
Manual reservation (for display telephones)
●
Automatic reservation (for all other types of telephones)
Trunk Reservation—Automatic
When this flag is activated and if a station is not assigned a free trunk after the usual
trunk seizure procedures (random or specific), Busy tone is signaled at the station.
After a fixed period (5 seconds), a positive acknowledgment tone is applied and the
trunk is reserved, provided that the station has the appropriate CO call privilege.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-169
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Trunk Reservation—Manual
●
This feature is available only to display telephones.
●
This feature does not need to be configured in the database.
Trunk reservation is not possible in hands-free mode. In this case, the system interrupts call setup when it recognizes that the line is seized.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-170
Requirement or Condition
Queue trunk
A station can queue only one trunk.
Queue trunk
Trunk queuing does not apply to S0 (not for U.S.).
Recall
A recall does not follow call management.
Speakerphone mode
Users can also use trunk queuing in speakerphone mode
Trunk
If a number of stations queue a trunk, the trunk is assigned
in the order that the requests were received.
LCR
If LCR is active, trunks can not be queued.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.14 Temporary Station Number Display Suppression
Definition
This feature prevents a calling or called party from receiving a station number display.
The feature is designed as a changeover function; the changeover applies until it is
deliberately canceled (changeover repeated).
This feature applies only to incoming from or outgoing calls to an ISDN public network
connection. The system-wide flag, Call Number suppression on, can be set to suppress the system Caller ID display. The default setting is off; that is, the number is not
suppressed.
The feature is designed as a changeover function; that is, the changeover applies until it is deliberately canceled (changeover repeated).
The system-wide flag Call Number Suppression Override does not apply in the US.
All types of telephones can invoke this feature.
The Flags screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway of HiPath
3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Flags screen to see if a station has activated Number Suppression or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Station number transmission
Temporary station number suppression must be supported
by the trunk.
System-wide station
number display suppression
If station-wide station number display suppression is activated (CLIR and COLR), it cannot be overridden.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-171
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Subject
3-172
Requirement or Condition
CLIR
It is possible to ignore an activated CLIR setting and display the station number of the calling station. This feature
is helpful in various situations, as in of emergency calls.
Default access codes
*86 to suppress, #86 to display the number
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.15 Denied List for Undialed Trunks
Definition
This feature restricts the dial-up access rights for a trunk selected by the attendant
console. An attendant console may seize an outside line and transfer it to an internal
station. This feature restricts the dial-up access rights for a trunk selected by the attendant console; the user receiving the transferred trunk will not be able to reach the
destinations denied by the class of service (COS) level.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
SW requirements
x
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Class of service
Requirement or Condition
The class of service of the selected reference station applies.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-173
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.16 Assigning Speed-Dialing Numbers to ITR Groups
Definition
You can assign a specific speed-dialing number to a specific user or a specific trunk.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Number of speed-dial- You can configure up to six speed-dialing groups (from
ing groups
KWZx to KWZy), including overlapping ones.
3-174
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.17 Intercept With Telephone Lock
Definition
If a station with an activated telephone lock (codelock) dials a trunk group code, the
system immediately forwards the call to the entered intercept destination. If the station makes a call to a destination for which it is unauthorized, the extension indicated
always receives a signal.
The “Codelock intercept” function can be configured for each station individually using “Set up station: Parameters”.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
x
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
3-175
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.18 Keypad Dialing
Definition
In some countries, network provider services are controlled using keypad dialing instead of functional control. To activate these services in the central office, you can use
the so-called stimulus interface for V1.2 and later of the HiPath 3000.
The user acknowledges the message traffic using the display. As a result, keypad dialing can be done only on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display, mobile
telephones (HiPath cordless) with optiset E or optiPoint 500 menu navigation and IP
telephones with stimulus interfaces.
An authorized station can activate keypad dialing using the service menu or using the
*503 code. This is possible only in the idle state. Then the station must select an ISDN
trunk that the feature can use.
The actions carried out using keypad dialing are not subject to any system control.
HiPath 3000 cannot prevent improper use, such as call charges fraud or trunk blocking.
The customer must be informed that Siemens AG accepts no liability whatsoever for
damages resulting from the improper use of this feature!
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-176
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
digital trunk connection
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display, mobile
telephone (HiPath cordless) with optiset E or optiPoint 500
menu navigation, or IP telephone with stimulus interface
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Telephone lock
Keypad dialing cannot be used when the telephone lock
has been activated.
ISDN telephones
ISDN telephones are not supported.
Services
Each network provider determines which services can be
used with keypad dialing.
Call detail recording
Depending on the messages sent by the central office
(such as when connecting), keypad dialing entries can
have consequences for the call data recording. The number of the station using keypad dialing, the line used, and
the time period when the feature was executed are protocolled.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-177
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.19 E911 Emergency Call Service for the USA (for U.S. only)
Danger
In systems with the E911 emergency service activated for the USA, you are not allowed to use the Relocate feature (see Section 3.11.11 on Page 3-254) if the system
has more than one Location Identification Number (LIN).
Definition
The E911 expanded emergency call service makes it possible to transmit information
about the physical location of a station in addition to the station number. Therefore
not only the number of the station placing the call is available in the emergency call
center, but the location too.
This requires that each subscriber line with a valid DID number be assigned a Location Identification Number LIN. The LIN is an unambiguous number that corresponds
to the 10-digit NANP (North American Numbering Plan). Subscriber lines that are
physically close to one another are given the same LIN. The emergency call center
has a database that contains all the LINs and that uses the transmitted LIN to identify
the name and address of the one placing the emergency call.
Danger
Quick help after an emergency call is possible only when valid information concerning the location of the caller who is in trouble is available. For this reason, the correct
assignment of the LINs to the available DID number must always be guaranteed.
If the customer assumes the system administration, then the customer also assumes the responsibility for the correct assignment of the LINs. In this case, the customer must be informed that Siemens AG accepts no liability whatsoever for damages resulting from the improper use of this feature.
V1.2 and later of HiPath 3000 supports this feature for analog (loop start protocol) and
digital trunks (Primary Rate Interface PRI).
Analog trunks require an additional converter (such as Telident STS) to translate the
transmitted DTMF characters (LS protocol) into the CAMA protocol used for the
Emergency Call Service ECS (see Figure 3-3).
3-178
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
HiPath 3000
Public
telecommunication network
PRI
PRI
HiPath 3000
CorNet-N
CorNet-N
PRI
PRI
Analog
Public
exchange
Emergency
call center
Analog
Database with
Automatic Location
Identification ALI
Analog
Loop Start (HKZ)
Converter
CAMA
Station sends
emergency call
Figure 3-3
E911 Expanded Emergency Call Service E911 (for USA only)
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature for analog
trunks available in
–
HW requirements
–
SW requirements
Feature for digital
trunks available in
x
x
–
–
analog (LS) trunk connection
–
–
–
V1.2 or later
–
–
x
x
–
–
–
HW requirements
digital (PRI) trunk connection
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
E911 emergency call
service
Requirement or Condition
for USA only
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-179
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.20 Automatic Call Completion on No Reply (CCNR) on the Trunk
Interface (V3.0 and later)
Definition
You can use this function only if the public exchange supports it.
An internal subscriber who reaches an available external subscriber can activate a
call completion request in the trunk. As a result, the system monitors the connection
of the called subscriber. As soon as the called subscriber initiates a connection setup
and then ends this connection, the system attempts to produce a connection between
the two subscribers.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-180
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
trunk connection
SW requirements
V3.0 SMR-3 and later
x
x
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
3.6.21 CLIP no screening (V3.0 and later)
Definition
The essential characteristic of this feature is that the HiPath 3000 “System number outgoing” does not have to be the same as the “International/national system number
- incoming“.
To make this possible, the “System number” parameter that has been used until now
has been split into “System number - incoming” and “System number - outgoing” for
V3.0 SMR 3 and later.
Incoming and outgoing calls usually use the same system number. In this case, the
entry under “System number - outgoing” is either empty or the same as the one under
“System number- incoming”. If this is not the case, you can
●
enter a different number under “System number - outgoing”.
●
use the routing parameter “No. and type, outgoing” to define whether the entered
“System number - outgoing” contains the station number without area code (subscriber), with area code (national), or also with the international country code (international).
You can also activate the flag “Suppress station number” for special customer applications. This prevents the system from sending out the DID number of the station
along with the “Station number - outgoing”.
Example: You want to prevent customers from directly reaching a service staff member who is reached centrally with a general service number. To conceal his or her own
DID number, enter the general service number as “System number - outgoing” and
activate the “Suppress station number” flag. Then called subscribers see only the
general service number on their display as the CLIP.
In a Centrex environment, you generally enter the number of the Centrex group as
“System number - outgoing” and deactivate the “Suppress station number” flag. The
called subscriber then sees the Centrex number plus station DID number as the CLIP.
If the entry under “System number - outgoing” is empty, the system automatically
sends the entries under “System number - incoming”.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-181
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Outgoing External Traffic
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V3.0 SMR-3 and later
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
CLIP no screening
3-182
Requirement or Condition
You must configure the “no screening” option for the trunk
connection in the public exchange.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
3.7 Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Least cost routing provides HiPath 3000 with automatic control over the path of an
outgoing call. This path can be one of various public-network carriers or a private network. Based on routing tables, the system seeks the least expensive connection path
for the outgoing call.
The system seizes a trunk only after it has scanned the routing tables. The system
sends dial tone as a function of the dial plan so that the station is informed of the
ready-to-dial condition. The signals dialed are buffered until the routing tables have
been scanned. Only then does the system make the connection.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
15
15
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Number of LCR classes of service
15
15
15
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
LCR
If all the least expensive connection paths have been
seized, LCR automatically switches to defined more expensive paths. The system can signal user of this fact both
visually and acoustically.
LCR
The dialed station number is displayed until the station
number information on the other party is received.
LCR
If LCR is activated, the system checks for the least costly
route for every trunk seizure (except when a trunk code is
dialed).
LCR
Digits can be transmitted either singly or en-bloc, depending on the access method and the dial plan.
LCR
After an account code is entered, it applies to the entire
connection setup.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-183
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
Subject
Requirement or Condition
LCR
The allowed and denied lists are also used for LCR. The
toll restriction check then refers to the digits dialed at the
station without considering the trunk group code.
LCR class of service
The LCR class of service determines whether a station
can use the route recommended in the path table.
Prime Line on (automatic line seizure)
LCR is not possible when Prime Line is active.
3.7.1 Carrier Types
Since in many cases individual carriers provide specific connections and conditions
at different tariffs (sometimes with different signaling methods), least cost routing can
be used to automatically select the most economical connection or most economical
carrier for each outgoing phone call.
The following carrier types and networks are available for implementing least cost
routing (LCR).
3.7.1.1 Mercury Communications Limited Single Stage
Definition
With this type of LCR, a prefix is used to dial the desired network carrier and the station number is subsequently dialed.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
MCL Single Stage
3-184
Requirement or Condition
Dialing is carried out in the D channel (with ISDN) or as
normal dialing (on analog trunks).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
3.7.1.2 Mercury Communications Limited Two Stage
Definition
With this type of least cost routing, the system initially selects the carrier using a configurable access code (as with single stage). Afterwards, the system also waits for a
connect (synchronization during timeout).
After the connect, the system transmits an authorization code and the destination station number as DTMF signals in the B channel.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
MCL
Requirement or Condition
With synchronization during timeout, you must program a
pause of 2 to 12 seconds.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-185
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
3.7.1.3 Dial-In Control Server (DICS)
Definition
With this type of least cost routing, the system uses the routing table to determine
whether the call should be made via the DICS or the public network. If the DICS is
used, the system dials the DICS using a configurable access code and an authorization code and transmits the station number dialed by the station in the SUB address
(on the D channel). The DICS checks the authorization based on the CLIP information and the transmitted authorization code.
If the DICS is not present during the first connection setup, the system reroutes the
connection to the public network. This alternative access must be configured.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Station number suppression
Requirement or Condition
Temporary or permanent station number suppression cannot be activated.
ISDN/SUB addressing The ISDN feature SUB must be applied for or released in
the public network.
Analog trunk
3-186
DICS can only be used with ISDN.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
3.7.1.4 Corporate Network (CN)
Definition
A corporate network is an alternative network, such as a company-owned network,
that is connected directly to the HiPath 3000.
The LCR function determines the corresponding trunk group based on the station
number dialed and then routes the call either via the trunk group in the public exchange or via the trunk group in the corporate network.
If necessary, the system translates the station number.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
3.7.1.5 Primary Carrier
Definition
When a trunk is seized by the primary carrier, simplified dialing is performed by enbloc dialing or by dialing individual digits into the public network.
If primary carrier was the method selected in the outdial rule table, forwarding in the
trunk group table is not performed for entries after the route configured as a primary
carrier.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-187
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
3.7.2 Routing Tables
Definition
The routing tables evaluate the digits dialed by the user and determine the station
number that the system should dial. In the process, the digits are modified as necessary. This modification can mean that digits are repeated, suppressed, added, or reordered. It is also possible to add a dial pause and change the signaling method. A
distinction is made between the following types of routing tables:
●
Outdial rule table: This table determines how the digits dialed by the user will
be converted and dialed by the system. The following special characters can be
defined:
A: Repeat remaining fields (transmit). This letter causes all subsequent digit
fields to be transmitted. The point of reference is the last field pointer before
A. The combination E1A is permitted only at the beginning of a string.
D (n): Dial digit sequence (1 to 25 digits). This letter can be inserted multiple
times and at any position in the string.
E (n): Repeat field from dial plan (from 1 to 10 times). This letter can be inserted multiple times and at any position in the string. E can also appear in
any order with relation to (n). A specific field can be addressed multiple
times, including in sequence. With the exception of E1, this letter can be surrounded by any parameter.
P (n): Pause (1 to 60 times the system-wide pause unit). This letter can be
inserted multiple times and at any position in the string.
M (n): Authorization code (1 to 16). This letter must not be in the final position.
S: Switch, changes signaling methods from DP to DTMF (with CONNECT,
PROGRESS or CALL PROC with PI). This letter can be inserted in the string
only once and may not be in the final position. The C parameter cannot be
used after S.
U: Use subaddress signaling method. This letter can be inserted in the string
only once and may not be in the final position. Subsequent characters are
again dialed in INFO. The S, P, and C parameters cannot be used after U.
C: Access code. This letter can be inserted in the string only once. The subsequent characters are transmitted without a dial pause and are used for single stage, two-stage, DICS (not for U.S.), BRI, and PRI carrier access.
●
3-188
Authorization code: The authorization code is divided into the carrier ID and
customer ID. The carrier ID is entered as one entry in the authorization code table
and the customer ID is entered as another entry in the authorization code table.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
The authorization code entry in the outdial rule then consists of the two authorization codes. Only a protected authorization code is supported (represented by
*****).
●
Class of service: Each station is assigned a class of service (COS). A station
can then seize a path only if its COS is greater than or equal to the COS in the
path table; for example, a station with a COS 7 cannot seize a path with COS 8.
●
Schedule: Up to eight time zones per day can be configured for each day of the
week to control LCR. A search is performed based on the schedule ID entered in
the path table to determine whether the current time matches the value entered
in the schedule. If it does and if the correct class of service is present, dialing is
performed as per the outdial rule entered in the path table.
●
Path table: Up to 254 path tables with 16 paths each can be created. Each path
in a path table is described by a combination of the trunk group, outdial rule, toll
restriction, schedule, and an option for warning against a more expensive route.
The table is scanned from top to bottom. The system checks to determine whether the trunk group is free and the station has the requisite class of service. If so,
the system dials per the outdial rule and schedule entered in the path table.
Depending on the entry in the path table, a warning can be issued to the station
informing the user that the call is being routed. This warning can be signaled by
a warning tone and a display message. The display shows the outdial rule name.
●
Dial plan: Each station number dialed for external traffic is checked against the
dial plan for up to 30 positions (including field separator and trunk group code).
If the number dialed matches an entry in the dial plan, LCR is handled in accordance with the path table in the dial plan.
To use all available features (such as callback) in conjunction with LCR, the trunk
group code must be separated from the dialed station number by a dash (–) in
the dial plan (sample dial plan entry: 0–CZ).
The first entry in a dial plan does not have to be a trunk group code; it can also be
a station number in a networked system.
The following station number entries are valid:
0...9: Permissible digits
-: Field separator
X: Any digit from 0 to 9
N: Any digit from 2 to 9
Z: One or more digits to follow up to the end of dialing
C: Simulated dial tone (can be entered up to three times)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-189
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
To block incoming external calls, enter a dash (–) in the Routing table field of the
dial plan.
Example:
Dialed Digits
(Code + Station Number)
Path
Table
Explanation
9C1-900-XXX-XXX
–
The dash (–) blocks all 900 numbers.
9C1-976-123-3456
–
The dash (–) blocks only the number
976-123-3456.
Do not confuse the hyphen (–) in the Dialed digits field, which separates the digit
blocks in the number, with the dash in the Path table field, which blocks the numbers.
Digit analysis
Dial plan
Dialed digits
1
Path
table
3 - 1728134 - Z
Path table
1
2
...
514
Trunk
Outdial rule
group
(name)
Bündel
Wahlregel
TG 1
MCL(Name)
1 ...
Requisite
SchedWarning 254
class of serv. ule
benötigte
Zeitplan Warnung
10 Berechtigung
A
None
TG 1Rtg.
1 1 BT MCL
15 10
Rtg. 1
BT
A
15
A
A
Tonekeine
Ton
Outdial rule table
Dialing
(if trunk group is free and the
class of service and schedule are appropriate)
Name
Outdial rule
Type
1
BT
A
Primary carrier
2
MCL Easy
D132A
MCL single stage
MCL
D131P6SM1A
MCL two stage
Telliance 1
D904711UM2A
DICS
Telliance 2
D904811UM2A
DICS
Telekom
A
Primary carrier
SCN
D900A
CN
...
50
Figure 3-4
3-190
Sample LCR Flow Diagram (Not for U.S.)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
The dialed call number is used as the criterion for the connection path to be used.
The system can evaluate up to 24 digits of the digit sequence plus up to 9 field separators. The digit sequence that can be dialed can consist of up to 32 digits. The evaluation can be carried out both destination dependently and time dependently and in
dependence on the station's LCR class of service (COS).
The system contains 254 route tables with 16 routes each. The LCR class-of-service
is evaluated hierarchically for LCR.
The outdial rule is described in the HiPath 3000 Manager E by its name, which consists of not more than 16 characters, and in the System Administration by its index.
The station can cancel automatic selection by seizing a line directly (Carrier Select
Override - CSO). The LCR class-of-service cannot be transferred between CorNet-N
networked systems.
General Operating Principle
The system analyzes the number dialed to determine if the digits input are valid. If the
digits are recognized, a reference route table is scanned for Route group choices.
Once the Route group is selected, the availability of the route is checked against the
time schedule. If the Route group is available, the LCR COS requirement assigned to
the route group is compared to the LCR COS associated with the dialing device. If the
LCR COS associated with the dialing station is equal to or greater than the route
group COS, the Toll Restriction tables are checked for additional screening information. This process is repeated for every call using the system LCR application.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-191
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
User dials access code
and number
Route group is selected
Is your route available?
What time is it?
No: Try the next route
group or return busy
tone
Is your LCRCOS equal
to or higher than the requirement?
No: Try the next route
group or return busy
tone
Are there any toll restriction tables that prevent you from dialing
the number on the selected route group?
Yes: Go to the toll restriction tables for analysis
Insert out-dial rule
Call is processed
Figure 3-5
3-192
Route table is selected
Expensive
warning tone?
General LCR Flow
●
A system-wide flag activates LCR via Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E.
●
When LCR is activated, the check is performed for every trunk seizure (except
when dialing a trunk code).
●
If all the least expensive connection paths have been seized, LCR automatically
switches to defined more expensive paths. The user can be signaled of this fact
both visually and acoustically.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
●
In the case of outgoing calls on the ISDN network, the dialed number continues
to be displayed until the destination number information on the other party is received.
●
Digits can be transmitted either per digit or en-bloc, depending on the access
method and the dial plan.
●
Once an account code is entered, it applies to the entire connection setup.
●
The allowed and denied lists are also used for LCR. The toll restriction check then
refers to the digits dialed on the station without the trunk group code.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
No. of path tables
254
254
254
254
254
Number of paths per
path table
16
16
16
16
16
No. of time zones
8
8
8
8
8
No. of outdial rules
254
254
254
254
254
Number of characters
per outdial rule
40
40
40
40
40
No. of dial plans
514
514
514
514
514
Number of digits dialed (including trunk
group code)
32
32
32
32
32
No. of digits evaluated
25
25
25
25
25
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-193
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (LCR) (Not for U.S.)
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-194
Requirement or Condition
LCR
With per-digit dialing, the last element in the outdial rule
cannot be E(n); it may be E(n)A.
Networking
In networking with open numbering, route optimization
cannot be activated.
Least cost routing
(LCR)
If primary carrier is entered as a type in the outdial rule, rerouting is not done in the path tables.
If routing should be carried out when the trunk is busy or
when S0 lines are disrupted, the type should be set to Single Stage.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
3.8 Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
3.8.1 Introduction
This section explains the definitions and procedures used by the HiPath 3000 least
cost routing (LCR) feature to control the path over which outgoing calls are routed to
the public network.
The system analyzes each trunk call placed using least cost routing. If the digits are
recognized, a reference route table is scanned for route-group choices. After the
route group is selected, the availability of the route is checked against the time schedule. If the route group is available, the LCR class-of-service requirement assigned to
the route group is compared to the LCR class of service associated with the dialing
device. If the LCR class of service associated with the dialing device is equal to or
greater than the route-group class of service, the toll-restriction tables are then
checked for additional screening information.
The dialed call number is used as the criterion for the connection path to be used.
The system can evaluate up to 24 digits of the digit sequence plus up to 9 field separators. The digit sequence that can be dialed can consist of up to 32 digits. The evaluation can be carried out both destination dependently and time dependently and in
dependence on the station's LCR class of service (COS).
General Operating Principle
The system analyzes the number dialed to determine if the digits input are valid. If the
digits are recognized, a reference route table is scanned for Route group choices.
Once the Route group is selected, the availability of the route is checked against the
time schedule. If the Route group is available, the LCR COS requirement assigned to
the route group is compared to the LCR COS associated with the dialing device. If the
LCR COS associated with the dialing station is equal to or greater than the route
group COS, the Toll Restriction tables are checked for additional screening information. This process is repeated for every call using the system LCR application.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-195
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
User dials access code
and number
Route group is selected
Is your route available?
What time is it?
No: Try the next route
group or return busy
tone
Is your LCRCOS equal
to or higher than the requirement?
No: Try the next route
group or return busy
tone
Are there any toll restriction tables that prevent you from dialing
the number on the selected route group?
Yes: Go to the toll restriction tables for analysis
Insert out-dial rule
Call is processed
Figure 3-6
3-196
Route table is selected
Expensive
warning tone?
General LCR Flow (for U.S. Only)
●
A system-wide flag activates LCR via Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E.
●
When LCR is activated, the check is performed for every trunk seizure (except
when dialing a trunk code).
●
If all the least expensive connection paths have been seized, LCR automatically
switches to defined more expensive paths. The user can be signaled of this fact
both visually and acoustically.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
●
In the case of outgoing calls on the ISDN network, the dialed number continues
to be displayed until the destination number information on the other party is received.
●
Digits can be transmitted either per digit or en-bloc, depending on the access
method and the dial plan.
●
Once an account code is entered, it applies to the entire connection setup.
●
The allowed and denied lists are also used for LCR. The toll restriction check then
refers to the digits dialed on the station without the trunk group code.
3.8.2 Carrier Types
Since in many cases the individual carriers provide specific connections and conditions at different tariffs (with different signaling methods, when applicable), the least
cost routing feature can be used for automatically selecting the most economical connection or most economical carrier for each outgoing telephone call.
The following carrier types and networks are available for implementing least cost
routing (LCR):
●
AT&T
●
MCI
●
Sprint
●
Westinghouse
●
U.S. Government Federal Telephone System FTS-2000
Connections to the local exchange carrier (LEC) are toll-free. Connections to the inter-exchange carrier (IEC) are handled by the carriers listed above. The LEC has a
default IEC that it uses for long distance calls unless the user selects another carrier.
To select another carrier, the user must first dial the IECs Carrier Access Code (CAC)
and Carrier Identification Code (CIC).
There are two different types of CIC numbering schemes: one for a 3-digit CIC and
another for a 4-digit CIC. The four-digit code consists of the three-digit code preceded
by the number 0. For example, the CIC for MCI is 222 or 0222.
The CAC for a three-digit CIC is 10, and the CAC for a four-digit CIC is 101.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-197
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
3.8.3 Using Alternate Carriers
Alternate carriers may be connected to each trunk route group. The selection of the
carrier is defined in the least cost routing outdial-rule section.
3.8.3.1 Carrier Access Methods Supported
Main Carrier
When seizing a trunk using the main carrier, the system can use en-bloc dialing or
send single digits to the public network to set up the outgoing call. Note that this access method is used when routing calls over the public switching network.
MCL Single Stage
The system calls the selected carrier using a prefix and then dials the destination
number. Digits are sent in the D channel when using ISDN service or as normal dialing when using analog service. This selection may be used in CorNet applications for
advancing to public network facilities for overflow applications.
MCL Two Stage
The system calls the selected carrier using a prefix in this method as well. After a
short synchronization phase, it sends a programmable authorization code and then
the destination number using DTMF digits.
Corporate Network (CorNet)
When a corporate network (CN) method is used, the alternate network is connected
directly to the HiPath 3000. This can be seen as a company network. LCR determines
the trunk group by analyzing the number the user has dialed and routes the call either
over the CO trunk group or over the corporate network. This method allows both an
open and closed numbering plan to be implemented by manipulation of digits.
3-198
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
Dial-In Control Server
The system calls the selected carrier using a prefix and calls a dial-in control server
(DICS). The authorization code and the destination number are transmitted within the
SUB address. Dialing information is sent in the D channel.
Primary Rate Interface
The choice of a carrier or of a calling service is encoded in the following information
elements:
●
Network specific facility
●
Operator system access
●
Transit network selection
LCR Dial Plan
The dialed destination number serves as a criterion for the route group to be used.
The system can evaluate up to 24 digits in the dialed sequence plus the routing code.
The system evaluates and routes the call based on a time of day schedule and the
station’s least cost routing class of service.
Destination-Dependent Evaluation
The dialed digit sequence may be converted to a new digit sequence after evaluation,
or it may be preceded by additional digits such as the carrier information of the destination.
3.8.4 LCR Time of Day Evaluation
The time table allows the system to evaluate the availability of a selected route according to a maximum of eight time zones. For each weekday, the number can be
evaluated in hour:minute intervals throughout the day.
3.8.5 LCR Outdial Rules
The dialed number can be converted to any new digit sequence (up to 40 digits). The
system can evaluate up to 514 digit sequences dialed from the station. Wildcards may
be used in the LCR dial-plan table. The system supports 254 outdial rules for digit
translation requirements as well.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-199
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
3.8.6 Expensive Route Identification
If the first route selection in the route table is busy, the LCR function can advance to
the next expensive path configured in the route group table. The system can notify the
user of this with an audible signal, an optical signal, or both. Users can then decide
whether they would like to use the assigned path or hang up.
3.8.7 Overflow Options
When the LCR function determines that the preferred trunk or tie-trunk group cannot
be used, it can select an alternate trunk group within the selected route-group table.
3.8.8 LCR Class of Service
Up to 15 station-specific trunk classes of service are possible. The class of service
setting controls access to the configured route groups in the LCR route-group table.
3.8.9 Carrier-Select Override
Carrier-select override (CSO) can be implemented using selective line seizure. In this
case a connection can only be set up via the main carrier.
3.8.10 Handling of Numbers and Destinations and Trunk Group Access
Codes
All numbers except internal station numbers are stored as an LCR digit string. All
numbers dialed by a user are displayed without routing information. The dialed numbers remain displayed until answer supervision is received from the central office. If
more than one trunk group access code is programmed for a trunk group, the first access code is the default.
If the number of the called party during an outgoing connection is also stored in the
optiset E or optiPoint 500 caller list or if a callback is activated, the number dialed by
the user is stored instead of the destination number sent by the system. In this case,
the trunk group access code is also stored so that the system can recall the party
from the caller list using the correct access code.
3.8.11 Correlation With Other Features
This section describes how the least cost routing application interacts with other system features
3-200
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
3.8.11.1 Station-Related Features
●
System speed-dialing call numbers must be prefixed with the LCR access codes
for proper operation.
●
Station redial will insert the access code used for the original call.
●
Repertory dial keys to external destinations must have the LCR access code for
proper operation.
●
Electronic notebook entries on optiset E memory telephones must include an
LCR access code.
●
General call keys will be activated when the route is selected by the system.
●
Call keys will be activated when the route is selected by the system.
●
MUSAP keys may be used for external calling using the LCR access code.
●
DTMF tones may be input manually when answer supervision is received.
●
Toll restriction class of service is checked as part of the LCR analysis.
3.8.11.2 Trunk-Related Features
●
Basic rate ISDN trunks may be accessed by stations assigned CACH values or
PDID values.
●
Verified forced account codes may be requested before a selected route group is
accessed.
●
DTMF or rotary pulse dialing may be selected based on the outdial rule
Additional Information Concerning the Setup of Public Network Trunks
●
The class of service configured is valid on a locked terminal (code lock).
●
It is possible to send speed-dialing numbers after selecting the network.
●
If speed-dialing numbers are used without first selecting the network, the default
network is used (carrier-select override).
●
When LCR is activated, no trunk group overflow is performed. An alternative
route can be determined using the path table.
●
When LCR is activated, no digit repetition is performed; the routing tables are followed instead.
●
Message waiting and automatic callback follow the rules for LCR.
●
An account code entered by the user is valid for the whole connection, even if
more than one route over different trunk groups was tried during connection setup.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-201
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
●
In the case of connections via other network providers or carriers, the provider or
carrier may not transmit the actual connection costs, i.e., it may send the HiPath
3000 only the charges to the dial-in node (such as a dial-in control server [Europe
only]).
3.8.12 Routing Tables
The routing tables evaluate the digits that the user has dialed and determine the destination number to be dialed from the system. The digits may be changed (manipulated) during this process. Digit translation makes it possible to repeat, suppress, and
add digits or convert digit sequences. It is also possible to insert an inter-digit pause
and change the signaling method. A distinction is made between the routing tables
discussed in the following sections.
3.8.13 LCR Dial Plan
In the case of external calls, the system checks each number dialed up to a total of
25 digits, including field separators and trunk-group access codes. The dial-plan entry is associated with a route group for the destination number and the system assigns this path to the station for setting up the connection.
The dial plan may be separated into unique fields for identification and configuration
purposes using the outdial rules. Table 3-1 shows the numbers 4922000 and
14084922000 entered in the dial-plan table.
Table 3-1
Sample Entries in a Dial-Plan Table
Field 1
Field 2
Field 3
9
C
492
–
2000
9
C
1
–
408
6265932
1
Reset boards
and port assignments stored in
the system.
Field 4
–
492
Field 5
–
2000
The following entries are valid for the destination:
3-202
●
0...9
Allowed digits
●
–
Field separator (maximum of 10 fields per dial-plan entry)
●
C
Simulated dial tone (can be entered up to three times). This entry is
also interpreted as a field separator.
●
X
Any digit between 0 and 9
●
N
Any digit between 2 and 9
●
Z
One or more digits follow before end of dialing
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
●
C
Simulated dial tone (can be entered up to three times)
Notes: The character # within a dial string means end of dialing or signaling method
changeover. For this reason, * and # are not valid entries. Outdial rules may be used
to insert the * and # in the dial string to the public network.
Do not confuse the dash (-) symbol in the destination field, which functions as a field
separator, with the dash in the Route Table field, which functions as a call blocker
(refer to Table 3-2).
If Prime Line is used, no LCR is possible.
For the LCR dial plan to accurately select the route group, the dial-plan entries must
be entered as follows.
Entries should be placed in ascending numeric order from 0 to 9. Specific dialed numbers must precede wildcard entries to prevent conflicts in matches with wildcard entries. Table 3-2 is an example of the suggested entry order.
Table 3-2
Entry No.
Sample Entries in a Dial-Plan Table
Dialed Digits
(code + station no.)
Route Table
1
9C0Z
1
2
9C011Z
3
9C492-5001
1
4
9CNXX-XXXX
1
5
9C1-NXX-XXX-XXXX
1
6
9C1-900-XXX-XXX
-1
7
9C1-976-123-3456
-2
...
254
1 In this example, the dash (-) blocks all 900 numbers from being dialed.
2 In this example, the dash (-) blocks only the specific number (976-123-3456)
from being dialed.
The fields formed by the field separators “–” and “C” in the dial plan can be addressed
selectively to repeat, suppress, exchange, or insert digits.
3.8.13.1 Rules for Creating LCR Dial Plan Entries
●
The first field should contain only a programmed trunk group access code. It must
not contain any wildcards.
●
The wildcards N and X can occur more than once in any field except the first field.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-203
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
●
The wildcard Z can occur only in the last field. It represents an undetermined
number of suffix digits.
●
A digit sequence can be divided into a maximum of 10 fields.
3.8.14 Route Table
A route table contains up to 16 paths. Each path is described by a combination of the
following:
●
Route group
●
Outdial rule
●
Trunk access
●
Time schedule plan
●
Code for an expensive path
Paths
The system contains 254 path tables, each with 16 paths. LCR evaluates the trunk
access in hierarchical order.
Search Order
The system searches the path table from top to bottom. If the located path is busy, or
if the station does not have the proper class of service, the system continues to the
next path.
Outdial Rule
The outdial rule is described in HiPath 3000 Manager E by its name, which can be up
to 16 characters long, and by its index in system administration.
3-204
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
Carrier-Select Override
Users can deactivate automatic selection within the path by selecting a specific carrier (carrier-select override, CSO). For CSO to work, the requested carrier must be
located in the dial plan and the path table assigned by the dial plan, and the user must
have the required trunk access.
3.8.15 Time Table
To control LCR it may be necessary to configure up to eight time zones per day. These
time zones are programmable for every day of the week. Each day begins at 12:00
a.m. Entering the end time in each of the columns delineates the time zones.
3.8.16 Outdial Rule Table
Table 3-3 is a sample outdial rule table. The outdial rule table determines the following:
●
The way the digits entered by the user are converted and dialed by the system
●
The route on which dialing will take place
●
The maximum amount of time the LCR function has to control dialing
●
Up to 254 outdial rules, each up to 40 characters long, can be defined.
Outdial rules are defined by the following parameters:
A: Repeat all remaining fields (transmit).
D (n): Dial a digit sequence (1 to 24 digits).
E (n): Repeat field (1 to 10) from dial plan.
M (n): Authorization code (1 to 16). This letter must not be in the final position.
P (n): Pause (1 to 60 times the system-wide pause unit)
S: Switch, changes signaling methods from DP to DTMF (with CONNECT,
PROGRESS or CALL PROC with PI).
C: Access code
U: Use subaddress signaling method.
N (n): Network SFG (1 to 5) or Band Number (1)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-205
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
Table 3-3
Sample Outdial Rule Table
Number
Name
Outdial Rule
A
Type
1
Dial All
2
Dial Fld 2 Then 3 E2E3
Main network provider
3
Dial All _P_ D444 AP1D444
Main network provider
4
Dial 4 Dial All
Corporate network
D4DA
Main network provider
...
254
The outdial rules provide access to different carriers via digit translation. The outdial
rules address the dial plan fields selectively for the following operations:
●
Repeating digits
●
Suppressing digits
●
Exchanging digits
●
Inserting digits
●
Inserting pauses
●
Switching the signaling method
●
Detecting a dial tone.
Using the A Parameter
The parameter A ensures that all subsequent digit fields are transmitted. The reference point is the last field indicator preceding A. The parameter A can occur more
than once in the string and can be placed in any position. The AA combination has
the same effect as A. The E1A combination is permitted only at the beginning of a
string.
Using the D Parameter
The parameter D (n) can occur more than once in the string and can be placed in any
position. The parameter D (n) can be surrounded by any other parameters. It should
be no more than 25 characters long.
3-206
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
Using the E Parameter
The parameter E (n) can occur more than once in the string and can be placed in any
position. The parameter E (n) can be arranged in any order, depending on n. A determining field can be addressed more than once, even consecutively. With the exception of the E1A combination, E (n) can be surrounded by any other parameters. The
n can be any number between one and 10.
Using the M Parameter
The parameter M (n) can occur only once in the string. The parameter M (n) should
not be placed in the final position in the string. The n can be any number between one
and 16.
Using the P Parameter
The parameter P (n) can occur more than once in the string and can be placed in any
position. The parameter P (n) can be surrounded by any other parameters. The pause
length is n times the length of the system pause. The n can be any number between
one and 60.
Using the S Parameter
The parameter S can occur only once in the string and should not be placed in the
final position in the string. It cannot precede the C parameter.
Using the C Parameter
The parameter C can occur only once in the string. The digits following C are sent
without dial pause. The parameter C is used for carrier access with single stage, two
stage, DICS and PRI. It cannot be used after S.
Using the U Parameter
The parameter U can occur only once in the string. It should not be placed in the final
position in the string. The subsequent characters are re-selected in INFO. The following parameters may not be used after U:
●
S
●
P
●
C
●
M
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-207
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
Using the N Parameter
The parameter N can occur only once in the string and should not be placed in the
first position. The subsequent digits are the SFG or the band number, depending on
the calling service.
Authorization Code
Up to 16 authorization codes with a maximum of 16 digits can be entered for accessing services from different carriers. The codes may be used for accessing special
common carriers or adding additional digits to a dial string as part of the outdial rule.
Example:
53276543
One secure authorization code is provided (displayed as **********).
3.8.17 Operation
The system does not seize a trunk until it has completed the routing tables. To inform
the user that the telephone is ready for dialing, you can insert a dial tone into the LCR
dial plan using the letter C. The dialed digits are buffered until the system completes
the routing tables. Only then is a connection set up.
The route table (1 to 254) is first determined via the dial plan on the basis of the dialed
destination number. If the destination number is not found in the dial plan, the user
receives a busy signal.
The route table for each route element describes the following:
●
The trunk group assigned to the path
●
The outdial rule
●
The trunk access needed for seizure
●
The required time plan
●
The code of an expensive path (warning tone)
The out-dial rule determines the outgoing dialing procedure for the selected trunk
group. Selection may be unsuccessful for one of the following reasons:
●
Busy route group
●
Time-of-day restriction
●
LCR class-of-service restriction
In this case, another carrier can be selected via the alternative paths. You can configure an expensive-path warning tone to sound when an expensive carrier is selected.
3-208
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Least Cost Routing (for U.S. Only)
The destination number that the user dialed is generally displayed until the requested
party answers (ALERT or CONNECT). Then the destination number reached is displayed if available. The dialed destination number is stored in the station's redial
memory.
Figure 3-7 shows a sample LCR flow diagram.
Digit analysis
Dial plan
Dialed digits
(code + stn. no.)
1
9 - 5551222 - Z
Route
table
Route table
1
2
...
514
1
Trunk
Outdial rule
group
(name)
Trunk
Outdial rule
(name)
TG 1group Sprint
...
Requisite
SchedWarning 254
class of serv. ule
Requisite
SchedWarning
10 class of serv.A ule
None
TG 1TG
MCL
1 1 PacBell
15 10
TG 1
BT
A
15
A
ToneNone
A
Tone
Outdial rule table
Dialing
(if trunk group is free and the
class of service and schedule are appropriate)
Name
Outdial rule
Type
1
PacBell
A
Main Provider
2
MCI
D222A
PRI
Sprint
D333P6SM1A
2-layer mode
AT&T
D288A
PRI
Siemens
D10231UM2A
CN
AT&T
A
Primary carrier
SCN
D900A
CN
...
50
Figure 3-7
Sample LCR Flow Diagram (for U.S. Only)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-209
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9 Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.1 Internal Traffic
Definition
Internal traffic refers to connections between two internal stations. If the system is
equipped with Prime Line on, users can set up an internal call on optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephones by using the extension key.
If Prime Line on is not configured, users can set up an internal call by dialing the internal station number.
The Prime Line feature is a system-wide feature that allows users to dial directly to
external destinations without the use of Trunk or Trunk group keys. The external access code is automatically dialed by the system. Only one outgoing Trunk group is
possible with this arrangement. To dial internal stations, the user must first press the
Internal key and dial the station number.
Without Prime Line, outside connections require a Trunk, Trunk group key, or an access code.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-210
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Extension key
LED signaling is not assigned to the extension key.
Prime Line on (automatic line seizure)
Prime Line is a system-wide feature that allows users to
dial directly to external destinations without the use of call
or trunk keys. The requisite trunk or trunk group code is automatically dialed by the system.
If Prime Line is deactivated, you must press a trunk or call
key or dial a trunk or trunk group code to set up an external
connection.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-211
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.2 Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Repertory Dial Key
Definition
The programmable function keys on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones (or key
modules) can be configured as direct station select (DSS) keys. In this case, users
program the keys with the number of an internal station or station group. Pressing the
DSS key calls the destination station (direct station selection). The associated LED
indicates the call status of the station (ringing, busy, free).
The DSS key is also used as a means to quickly transfer an incoming call to another
station. The user, during a conversation with an external party, can press a DSS key;
this places the current call on Consultation Hold. The user can then transfer the call
screened or unscreened to the DSS destination. If the destination does not answer,
a recall is effected and the user can retrieve the call by pressing the DSS key once
again.
A DSS appearance can appear on multiple stations. A station cannot have a DSS key
with its station on the telephone.
The HiPath 3000 has programmable Repertory Dial (Repdial) keys. Repdial keys
store destination numbers. Feature access codes cannot be stored under a Repdial
key. External destinations up to 25 digits, including the trunk, trunk group, and LCR
access code, can be stored under a Repdial key as well as internal Call Group numbers. When operating the repdial key, the LED is not functional.
Programming of RepDial destinations and DSS keys must be done via HiPath 3000
Manager E in the case of non-display telephones. DSS keys can also be programmed
by the user on a display telephone.
Model-Specific Data for optiPoint key module
Subject
Feature available in
3-212
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard,
optiPoint 500 advance, optiset E advance plus/comfort, optiset E advance conference/conference, optiset E memory
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Max. number of key
modules per telephone
4
4
4
4
4
Max. number of key
modules per system
100
100
30
30
30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Max. number of programmable keys per
key module
16
16
16
16
16
Number of key modules per cabinet
50
–
–
–
–
Model-Specific Data for optiPoint Busy Lamp Field BLF (optiPoint BLF)
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
–
–
–
HW requirements
optiPoint 500 basic,
optiPoint 500 standard,
optiPoint 500 advance
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
–
Max. number of optiPoint BLFs per telephone
2
1
–
–
–
Max. number of optiPoint BLFs per system
12
6
–
–
–
Max. number of programmable keys per
optiPoint BLF
90
90
–
–
–
Number of optiPoint
500 telephones with
optiPoint BLF
6
6
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
DSS
This feature functions on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones only.
Pick up
A call can be picked up by pressing the DSS key for that
station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-213
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.3 Names
Definition
Users can assign names to each station, to each station group, and to each trunk
group. These names are displayed for internal calls (including calls via CorNet-N). If
an incoming call does not contain station number information (analog trunk), the trunk
group name is displayed. If the incoming call contains station number information (ISDN), this information is displayed. Refer to Section 3.4.7, Translate Station Numbers
to Names for System Speed Dialing, on page 3-120 for more information.
A memory telephone is required as Assistant T to enter characters of the alphabet.
Characters which can be used: all letters found on the memory telephone keyboard,
digits 0-9, * , #.
If no name has been assigned to an internal station, the number is displayed instead.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-214
V1.0 or later
Maximum number of
letters in station and
group names
16
16
16
16
16
Maximum number of
letters in trunk group
names
10
10
10
10
10
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.4 Automatic Callback When Free or Busy
Definition
Users can activate an automatic callback to a free or busy internal station. When the
callback destination finishes its call (when busy) or initiates an outgoing call, the system calls back. First, the system calls the user who initiated the call. After that user
answers, the system calls back the station the initiating user wishes to speak with. For
more information on external callbacks, refer to Section 3.12.11 on page 3-308.
A telephone can initiate up to two Callback requests and be the destination for up to
two requests. Further requests beyond these limits are rejected.
Callback requests are deleted when:
●
the call is completed
●
the initiator cancels the request
●
the system deletes daily at 11:57 p.m. all callbacks that were initiated towards
other CorNet-N nodes
Callback requests can be set on internal stations and groups, but not to groups located in other CorNet-N nodes.
Callback Requests Set on a Group
●
A request set on a hunt group is set on the first member of the group.
●
A request set on a Group Call is set on the first member of the group.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
65
65
SW requirements
Callbacks per station
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
65
65
65
3-215
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-216
Requirement or Condition
Callback
The callback is not deleted until the call is completed or the
initiating station deletes the callback.
Callback
Every night at 11:57 p.m., all callbacks that are not within
the system (CorNet) are deleted.
Callback
A callback can be set to an internal group (not DSS1, CorNet-N, or QSig [not for U.S.). The callback is stored with
the first station in the group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.5 Entrance Telephone/Door Opener
Definition
With this feature, the system signals a defined user (entrance telephone ring destination) when the doorbell function activates. Lifting the handset connects the user at the
entrance telephone with the user at the ring destination. The ring destination user can
then activate the door opener from the ring destination if desired.
In addition, users can activate the door opener from the entrance telephone by entering a 5-digit PIN using a hand-held DTMF transmitter. Users can also set up a voice
connection to the entrance telephone.
The following settings can be implemented:
●
Opener: In this configuration, the door opener is set up via an analog interface;
the entrance telephone must be connected via an adapter.
●
DTMF: This setting specifies whether the door opener is activated by a DTMF
transmitter.
●
Call forwarding: This specifies determines whether the call from the entrance
telephone is forwarded to an external call forwarding destination.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Entrance telephone or ET/A or ET w/amplifier
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Max. no. of entrance
telephones
4
4
4
1
x
1
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Entrance telephone
ring destination
If a call is already indicating camp-on at the entrance telephone ring destination, an intercept is performed. If the intercept station is also busy, the system searches all optiset
E and optiPoint 500 telephones.
Night answer
Night answer is not taken into account in the signaling.
HiPath 3250 (not for
U.S.)
Door busy and messenger call are possible using the optiset E control adapter.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-217
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.6 Speaker Call/Handsfree Answerback/Internal Paging (OptiPage)
Definition
A speaker call allows an internal connection to be set up without the called user lifting
the handset; the speaker on the called user’s telephone is activated. Handsfree answerback without lifting the handset can be done via phones with a microphone.
Through lifting the handset, the call becomes a normal two-party call.
Speaker calls permit announcements to groups (paging zones) of up to 20 stations.
This feature is also called internal paging. In this case, group members have no
handsfree answerback option. If a member of a paging group goes off hook during a
page, the call then becomes a normal two-party call. Group members can include optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones.
Speaker calls and internal paging are possible with internal optiset E or optiPoint 500
telephones with speakers. They are activated by means of a key or a code. For each
extension, it is possible to configure whether the user can receive a speaker call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with speaker
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-218
Requirement or Condition
Handsfree answerback
When you dial *96, the microphone is automatically activated for each speaker call. You can deactivate this function by dialing #96.
Do not disturb (DND)
You cannot use this feature with stations that have activated DND.
Toggle, consultation
hold, transfer
You cannot use toggle, consultation hold, or transfer with
this feature.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.7 Transfer from Announcement
This feature lets you make announcements to groups (paging zones). It is also known
as internal paging. Members of the group can answer the call handsfree.
The procedure is as follows:
●
A user answers an external call.
●
The user places a consultation call and begins the group announcement.
●
The system sets up a two-party call when another party lifts the handset or turns
on the speaker, and the party who answered the call hangs up. The remaining
group members are removed from the call.
Speaker calls and internal paging are available on internal optiset E or optiPoint 500
telephones with speakers. You can use a key or code to activate the feature, and you
can program the speaker call capability separately for each extension.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with speaker
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Handsfree answerback
When you dial *96, the microphone is automatically activated for each speaker call. You can deactivate this function by dialing #96.
Do not disturb
You cannot use this feature with stations that have activated DND. However, an authorized caller can override do not
disturb, in which case a busy signal sounds for five seconds. The user then receives a call (not a speaker call).
Toggle, consultation
hold, transfer
The toggle, consultation hold, and transfer features are not
available.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-219
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.8 Radio Paging Equipment (PSE) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Radio paging equipment can be used to transmit type-dependent voice announcements or alphanumeric data (test messages) to users with portable radio receivers.
Users being sought can use a procedure to answer this call from any telephone.
Radio paging equipment (PSE) can be connected via analog interfaces, analog trunk
circuits, or a special module (TMOM for enhanced radio paging equipment in HiPath
3750 and HiPath 3700 only). There are two types of PSE:
●
Simple radio paging equipment
●
Enhanced radio paging equipment (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 only with
TMOM)
3.9.8.1 Simple Radio Paging Equipment/Simple PSE (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Simple PSE allows users to transmit voice announcements and numeric data to the
PSE user. One of the two types of message informs PSE stations of waiting calls. Users being sought can use a procedure to answer the call from any telephone.
Radio paging equipment can be the destination for call forwarding or group ringing; it
can also be a member of a group.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
Analog ports
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Simple radio paging
equipment
3-220
Requirement or Condition
Does not support expanded call processing characteristics
such as those available with enhanced radio paging equipment.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.8.2 Radio Paging Equipment via ESPA/Enhanced Radio Paging Equipment (Not for
U.S.)
Definition
Enhanced radio paging equipment also includes certain communications server functions. It offers the following options:
●
Transmission of alphanumeric data
●
Automatic connection setup to the paging subscriber after answering
●
Automatic transmission of paging subscriber‘s number
●
Storage of up to 15 paging and answer requests
●
Radio paging for internal and external calls
●
Waiting for callback answer with handset on or off hook
●
Selectable displays and ring and paging procedures (selected when entering the
paging request)
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
–
–
–
–
HW requirements
TMOM
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0
or later
–
–
–
–
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
Voice call
Dependency/Limitation
Voice calls are not possible.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-221
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.9 Message Texts/Mailboxes/Message Waiting
Definition
●
Sending a message
Internal extensions can select a text message from an internal system message
list and send the message to any internal optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
with display. Users can transmit these messages in the idle, ringing, or busy
state, or during a call. (During a call, the station number information is omitted.)
A station that can be reached via a CorNet-N tie trunk is also considered to be
an internal station. The initiating party can also be an analog voice mail system
or central voice mail server in the CorNet-N network. A separate, fixed text is
available for messages from these devices.
●
Receiving a message
The system indicates the presence of a message depending on the type of telephone. The following applies to the default setting:
–
On optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones with display, a waiting message is
signaled via the display and a Mailbox key, if programmed. In addition, there
is acoustic signaling using a special dial tone.
–
On optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones without display, a message is signaled by the Mailbox key. In addition, there is acoustic signaling using a special dial tone.
–
(Not for U.S.) On special analog telephones with a mailbox LED (special
board), a waiting message is signaled via the LED (not a key). These extensions must be configured accordingly. An audible signal also sounds, like on
analog telephones. To signal messages with the mailbox LED, set the PSUI
ring voltage (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) to 75 V.
–
On analog telephones, a waiting message is signaled by a special dial tone
(HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3250, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300) or
by the announcement “Message waiting” (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700).
–
On mobile telephones, a waiting message is signaled by an advisory ring
and the mailbox symbol appearing on the screen.
You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to adjust the optic and acoustic signaling in
the following way:
If the flag “Status display for info message” is not set, the status display “Display
infos” is not visible until you scroll in the system menu.
Use the Plus Products flag “Acoustic message signaling” to set whether the signaling on optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones and other telephones should use
the special dial tone or an announcement (only for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700)
or if no signaling should be done.
3-222
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
●
Callback
On telephones with display, a caller can retrieve information such as the sender’s
name and number, text message, date, and time using a dialog menu. The user
can then call back the sender of the message without entering a station number.
To activate callback on analog telephones, users must use a procedure code; on
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones without a display, users can press a Mailbox
key.
●
Deleting a message
The sender and receiver can use a dialog menu or a procedure code to delete
the message. Otherwise, the message is deleted only if it results in a call to the
station.
●
Central voice mail server
A station in a satellite communications server can program use call forwarding or
call forwarding—no answer to send its calls to the central voice mail server. Calls
received are then indicated at the station via message waiting. External station
numbers cannot be programmed in the call management lists. For this reason, a
pseudo port should be configured as a PhoneMail® port for call forwarding to the
external voice mail server.
The default text messages are:
0 = Please callback
1 = Someone is waiting
2 = Appointment
3 = Urgent call
4 = Do not Disturb
5 = Fax waiting
6 = Dictation please
7 = Please come see me
8 = Please make copies
9 = Ready to depart
This feature can be activated/deactivated via a DISA connection, by its own station
user.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-223
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Maximum number of
simultaneous texts
100
100
30
30
30
Maximum number of
characters in text
24
24
24
24
24
No. of message texts
10
10
10
10
10
Max. no. of messages
on optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
with display
5
5
5
5
5
Max. no. of messages
on mobile telephones
5
5
5
–
–
Max. no. of messages
1
1
1
1
1
on optiset E or opti+ voice
+ voice
+ voice
+ voice
+ voice
Point 500 telephone
mail mes- mail mes- mail mes- mail mes- mail meswithout display or anasage
sage
sage
sage
sage
log telephone.
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-224
Requirement or Condition
Message texts
The texts are automatically deleted when a call is set up
between the two stations.
Message texts
Telephones with alphanumeric keyboards can also be
used to enter individualized texts that are not stored.
Voice mail
A separate text is available for voice mail. The maximum
number of texts is not affected by the system.
Special dial tone/
announcement
With HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, an announcement is
issued instead of a special dial tone.
France
The country-specific default for France is to use the special
dial tone as the acoustic signaling for all telephones.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.10 Advisory Messages
Definition
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display can activate an advisory message
that has been configured in the system. When a user calls a station that has activated
this type of message, the advisory message appears on the caller’s display.
Messages can contain variable parameters. The user enters the parameters (such as
the time) when activating the feature. Users can use the numeric keypad on the telephone to enter additional characters.
With an optiset E memory telephone, users can enter and send, but not store, an additional, individualized message.
The message is also displayed at the initiator’s telephone so that co-workers are also
advised. 10 default system-wide advisory messages are provided. These can be
changed via administration, using Assistant T, HiPath 3000 Manager C, and HiPath
3000 Manager E.
This feature can be activated/deactivated via a DISA connection, by its own station
user or for another user with the aid of the feature Associated Services.
The Flags screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway of HiPath
3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Flags screen to see if a station has activated an Advisory
Message or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Number of advisory
messages in system
10
10
10
10
10
Max. no of characters
in advisory message
24
24
24
24
24
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-225
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Call forwarding
3-226
Requirement or Condition
With call forwarding, the telephone displays the advisory
message of the called station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.11 Internal Directory
Definition
On all optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display, users can view a directory
of all internal stations with their names and numbers. In addition, users can view entries from the system speed-dialing facility (name, destination station number), to
search for and call the desired station. The name of the desired station is entered directly using the GSM procedure.
After selecting the Directory option from the menu, you can enter the name of the
party you want to reach directly with the GSM procedure. To do this, press the key
containing the letter you wish to access. Press the key once to access the first letter,
twice to access the second letter, and three times to access the third letter (the one
farthest to the right).
You can also program a key to provide access to the feature, or you can select either
Internal stations? or System speed dial. Then you scroll through each name by selecting Next? or scroll to and select the first letter of the wanted name. Selecting a
name automatically dials the destination.
Users of optiset E memory telephones use the keys on the keyboard:
●
Dial and Enter (Return) key: dials the number beside the cursor.
●
Card key: Retrieves entries from the highlighted name.
●
End key: Closes the telephone directory.
●
Up and Down keys: moves the cursor up or down.
HiPath 3000 Manager E allows you to define whether a station number will appear in
the directory for each station individually.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
x
x
x
3-227
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-228
Requirement or Condition
Electronic directory
After selecting the Directory menu command, users can
enter the name of the desired station directly using the
GSM procedure.
To do this, press the key displaying the required letter. If the
letter is in the first position, press the key once. If it is in the
second position, press the key twice. If the letter is in the
third position (that is, the farthest to the right), press the
key three times.
All the letters in the name can be entered consecutively,
using this procedure. Of course, scrolling through the dialog keys is also possible.
Electronic notebook
(ENB)
If you activate the telephone’s local ENB, you cannot use
the internal directory feature.
System speed dialing
If system speed dialing is selected, names are displayed
only if the telephone directory is activated.
Directory
On telephones with a two-line display, groups are formed
for the search. In the case of optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones with ENB, the keyboard can be used for a search.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.12 Room Monitor
Definition
The room monitor feature can be used to monitor a room. All telephone types can be
used for this purpose. Only internal stations can use room monitoring.
When a user monitors a room, the room monitor telephone receives no call signaling,
and the call is immediately through-connected.
A system-wide flag must be set via HiPath 3000 Manager E only.
To monitor a room, monitored telephones without a microphone must have the handset off-hook.
If an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone calls a station activated as a room monitor,
in the standard configuration the microphone on the calling optiset E or optiPoint 500
telephone is deactivated.
If a call is received by a monitoring station, camp on tone is heard at the monitoring
station, but not at the monitored station. The user must disconnect from the monitored
station call connection to answer the incoming call. The user can once again call the
monitored station at a later time. The feature is still active at the monitored station until
it goes on-hook.
The Flags screen is one of three screens in the System Status pathway of HiPath
3000 Manager E that provides station-specific (rather than system-specific) status information. You can use the Flags screen to see if a station has activated Room Monitor or not.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Room monitor
Requirement or Condition
To monitor a room, telephones without a microphone must
have the handset off-hook (exception: optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with speakerphone function).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-229
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
Subject
3-230
Requirement or Condition
Hunt group
If the room monitor station is in a hunt group, the station is
not taken into account for incoming calls to the hunt group.
Analog trunks
If you connect an external station by consultation hold to a
station that has activated room monitoring, the external
trunk must have a backward release criterion.
Room monitor
If an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone calls a station activated as a room monitor, the speakerphone function on
the calling telephone is deactivated in the standard configuration.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Internal Traffic
3.9.13 Editing the Telephone Number
Definition
This feature allows the user to edit the station number digits before the digit transmission; this is common with mobile telephones, among others.
The user can edit after entering the first digit. After entering a sequence of digits, the
user can edit it from right to left by pressing a key; each time the key is pressed, one
digit is deleted. The user first enters the complete correct sequence of digits and then
presses the confirm key or lifts the handset to start the digit transmission.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call waiting
Call waiting during editing is possible because the telephone is in the digit input state and is busy for incoming
traffic.
Consultation hold
After a consultation hold, the telephone is in the digit input
state. This makes it possible to edit station number digits.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-231
3000sb3.fm
Features
Tenant Service
3.10 Tenant Service
The tenant service feature is implemented using existing features. This means that it
is not necessary for users to explicitly configure subsystems.
Users can control permitted and barred connections between individual stations and
trunks via traffic restriction groups.
The functionality of all features remains unchanged.
Features in tenant service include:
3-232
●
Intercept
●
System number
●
Caller list
●
Busy override
●
DISA
●
Speaker call
●
Call detail recording
●
Hotline destinations
●
Text messages, advisory messages
●
Internal calls
●
Internal directory
●
CDB printout
●
Night answer
●
optiClient Attendant
●
Park slot
●
Prime Line
●
Traffic restriction groups
●
Voice mail
●
Toll restriction
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Tenant Service
3.10.1 Tenant Service Configuration
Definition
The HiPath 3000 systems can be used as a tenant service, which allows it to be used
simultaneously by more than one customer. All features have the same functionality
for all customers.
However, certain resources must be divided among the tenants (customers). They
can be assigned to one, several, or all tenants. The resources to be divided are:
●
Stations
●
Trunk groups
●
PC-AC (optiClient Attendant)
●
Intercept position
●
Announcement devices, voice mail
●
Traffic restriction matrix (ITR matrix)
●
Door opener
●
Hotline
●
DISA trunks
●
Traffic restriction groups determine the ability of tenants to access each other.
●
Hotline destinations can be configured for each system.
●
A PC-AC can be assigned to each tenant.
●
Six MOH devices can be defined for six possible ITR groups. This means that the
analog interfaces used for connection are part of the ITR groups. Which MOH device is used depends on the ITR group of the station that places the call on hold.
You cannot use the logical port “0” as an MOH source.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-233
3000sb3.fm
Features
Tenant Service
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Number of tenant service systems
3
3
3
–
–
Hotline destinations
6
6
1
–
–
Announcement devices
16
4
1
–
–
MOH-devices
6
6
6
–
–
Trunk groups
16
16
8
–
–
Number of trunk group
keys per optiset E or
optiPoint 500 telephone
6
6
6
–
–
Max. number of entrance telephones
4
4
4
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-234
Requirement or Condition
Call detail recording
central (CDRC)
Only one CDRC exists for all tenants.
Internal calls
Internal calls are possible between stations in different
systems if allowed by the traffic restriction groups.
Prime Line
Prime Line can be configured only for the entire system.
CDB printout
The database can only be printed for the entire system.
Internal directory
The internal directory displays the names of all stations
and speed-dialing numbers in the system.
Switch
It is not possible to transfer undialed trunks.
Simplified dialing
Simplified dialing is not possible.
Speed transfer
Speed transfer is not possible.
Intercept
Intercept can be configured only for the entire system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Tenant Service
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Tenant
Users can configure a maximum of three different tenants.
System configuration
The system configuration can be changed from only one
telephone (programming telephone).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-235
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11 Other Features
3.11.1 Voice Channel Signaling Security
Definition
This feature prevents tones from being injected in the voice channel, so that data on
the voice channel are not corrupted. With this feature, no tones can be injected in the
voice channel, and the connection cannot be overridden. A station configured as a
fax machine automatically receives signaling security.
optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones can also be protected by programming the
feature Call Waiting Rejection in the database.
Callers will not be able to camp on and will continue to receive busy tone.
This feature can only be set via database. For optiset E and optiPoint 500 display telephones, refer to the Requirements/Conditions table below for an alternative.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-236
Requirement or Condition
S0
This feature does not function with ISDN terminals.
Recalls
Recalls are postponed until the stations are free.
Call waiting
Call waiting tone can also be suppressed from optiset E
and optiPoint 500 telephones with display, using a procedure (*87=Call waiting tone off; #87=Call waiting tone on).
This has no effect on display signaling.
Call hold
A station on hold always has signaling security.
Conference
If a station in a conference has activated call waiting rejection, an unprotected station can still be camped-on.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.2 Date and Time Display
Definition
The system contains a real-time clock and a calendar. Each optiset E and optiPoint
500 telephone with display indicates the time and date information based on this
clock.
In the case of digital trunks (not for U.S.), the date and time are set automatically, provided that the information is transmitted from the central office (during the first outgoing call). The system changes automatically from standard time to daylight savings
time (and vice versa).
When manually setting the time of day, observe the following:
●
after a system boot
The “ISDN time” always overwrites the time that was manually set after a system
boot when the first outgoing ISDN trunk call is made.
●
when the system is running
If the time that was manually set differs from the “ISDN time” that is received by
2 - 70 minutes, the system uses the “ISDN time”.
If the difference is < 2 minutes or > 70 minutes, the system uses the time that
was manually set.
If it is not possible to synchronize using the ISDN trunk, the switchover data can be
entered in a table that is internal to the system. Edit the table using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
The day and month when daylight savings time should begin or end is specified for
each year. The system switches over, as appropriate, at 2 or 3 a.m.
The date can be displayed in the following formats:
●
Europe: 20.JUN 01
●
USA: JUN 20.01
●
International: 20 JUN 01
●
International 2: 20.06.01
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-237
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Date/time
3-238
Requirement or Condition
Changes can be made from the configuration station only.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.3 Relays
Definition
HiPath 3000 provide control outputs (relays) on an optional control relay module. This
enables you to perform the following functions from any connected telephone by entering codes:
●
Manual switch on and off
●
Timer-controlled switch
●
Door opener control
●
Connection-controlled entrance telephone amplifier
●
Door busy display
●
Night bell
●
Announcement device start and stop control
●
External music on hold (MOH) control
●
second ringer simulation
●
simulation of call charge pulses
●
station active
The optional control relay modules STRB (with HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350) and
STRBR (with HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300) can be implemented with four control inputs and four outputs each for functions such as monitoring, alarm, control and adjustment. This can be used in security systems or Property Management Systems
(PMS). A control relay module can be connected for each system (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300). The relay card REAL which provides four
control outputs is available for HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
The signal input function (control input) is triggered by closing any of the external
floating contacts. The external electric circuit is supplied by the control relay module
and electrically isolated from the system controller by means of an optocoupler.
The relays can be controlled via codes from every connected telephone and remotely
via the trunk line (DISA) by the station user associated with the relay function or for
with the aid of the feature Associated Services.
Assigning Functions to the Actuators (Relays)
●
No function type
The relevant actuator is either not operating or is entered as a common ringer under Call management, Call destination lists.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-239
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
●
Manually on and off type
The relay can be activated or deactivated for switching purposes by means of the
codes Activate or deactivate selected switch. In the case of key terminals this
function can also be programmed on one key. A specific station, a group or all
stations can be allocated to this relay type by selecting NONE. For this relay type,
shutdown can be delayed if a value greater than 0 is entered in the Switching time
field. The switching time is a multiple of 100ms.
●
Automatic off after timeout type
The relay can be activated or deactivated as a time switch by means of the code
Activate selected switch (see above). For key terminals this function can also be
programmed on a key. A specific station, a group or all stations can be allocated
to this relay type by selecting NONE. The switching time is a multiple of 100ms.
●
Door busy indicator type
The relay is activated if the allocated station ceases to be in the idle condition.
This means that the handset has been picked up, the loudspeaker is activated or
the extension is being called. The relay is deactivated when the allocated station
returns to the idle condition. This means that the handset has been replaced, the
loudspeaker has been deactivated and the extension is not being called. The relay can also be activated directly by means of the code Activate/deactivate selected switch. For system telephones, this function can also be programmed on
a key. If the relay was activated by means of a code or a key, the status of the
allocated station is ignored and the relay can only be deactivated again by means
of a code or a key.
Practical uses: Door busy indicator Do not disturb, Meeting, Conference, PC
connection for data transmission (power management). A specific station must
be allocated to this relay type. In the case of this relay type, shutdown can be delayed if a value greater than 0 has been entered in the switching time field. The
switching time is a multiple of 100ms.
●
Second ringer simulation type
The relay is activated for the allocated station if it is being called. This relay is deactivated when the called party answers or the call is terminated. This relay is not
clocked. A specific station must be allocated to this relay type. In the case of this
relay type, shutdown can be delayed if a value greater than 0 has been entered
in the `switching time' field. The switching time is a multiple of 3 seconds.
●
Door opening system type
See Automatic after timeout type. The text Door opening system is displayed for
the allocated terminals.
3-240
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
●
Doorphone amplifier type
The relay is activated when connected to the doorphone. The relay is deactivated
when disconnected from the doorphone or entrance telephone/loudspeaker. This
makes it possible to control a doorphone amplifier so that it is only activated when
required. A doorphone or the loudspeaker port must be allocated to this relay
type.
●
Music-on-hold type
The relay is activated if at least one station or a line in the system is not in the
idle condition. The relay is deactivated if all stations and lines in the system are
in the idle condition.
Practical application: Activation of a tape device, CD player, PC connection
power management etc. NONE must be entered as allocated station for this relay
type, and it must only occur once in the system. In the case of this relay type,
shutdown can be delayed if a value greater than 0 has been entered for the
Switching time field. The switching time is a multiple of 100ms.
●
Station active type
The relay is activated if the allocated station is active. This means that the handset has been picked up or the loudspeaker has been activated. The relay is deactivated if the allocated station resumes the idle condition. This means that the
handset has been replaced or the loudspeaker has been deactivated. The relay
can also be activated directly by means of the code Activate/deactivate selected
switch. For system telephones, this function can also be programmed on a key.
If the relay was activated by means of a code or a key, the status of the allocated
station is ignored and the relay can only be deactivated again by means of a code
or a key. A specific station must be allocated to this relay type. In the case of this
relay type, shutdown can be delayed if a value greater than 0 has been entered
in the Switching time field. The switching time is a multiple of 100ms.
Assigning Actuator Names
Any names (up to 16 characters) can be assigned to the actuators to be administered.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
REAL
x
x
STRB / STRBR
V1.0 or later
–
–
–
–
–
–
3-241
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
DISA
3-242
Requirement or Condition
Relays can be controlled from the outside via trunk access.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.4 Sensors
Definition
HiPath 3000 support control inputs (sensors) via an optional control relay module.
When a sensor is activated, the assigned station is called automatically. After the station answers the call, a message can be played from an announcement device. The
signal input function activates when an external floating contact closes. Optocouplers
provide electrical isolation between the external circuit and the system controller.
The sensors can initiate the following functions:
●
Distinctive ringing on telephones
●
Message display on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display
●
Analysis of announcement device start and stop signals
●
Answering machine control
●
Automatic dialing with a predefined telephone number (internal number, group
ringing or external destination call number)
●
Activation of the following services for a STN (with code + STN):
●
●
–
Actuator on/off
–
Do-not-disturb feature on/off
–
Call forwarding on/off
–
Codelock on/off
–
Send message texts
–
Withdraw message texts
–
Night service on/off
–
Ring transfer on/off
Direct activation of the following services (without code+STN):
–
Actuator on/off
–
Use speed dialing system
Error signaling; the following types are possible:
–
Display of programmable error message (sensor name, max. 10 characters:
for example, Temp-Alarm) on a specific optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone
(no acoustic signaling)
–
Display of calls on a specific optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with error
message during call (destination station number)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-243
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
–
Error entry in error history (entry in error memory = activated)
Destination Call Number
An associated analog port is programmable for the sensors. This port is called by the
system once a setup signal has been received. The calling party then overrides this
connection. A recorded announcement can be activated via an answering machine
connected to this port, which informs the dialed station of the response of the sensor.
An analog port programmed in this way cannot be contacted from the outside.
If an external call number has been programmed for a sensor, but an analog port has
not, the external connection will be established but an audible signal in relation to the
response of the sensor is not transmitted. However, if necessary, the called STN can
identify the origin of the call on the basis of the call number (CLIP).
Message Texts Box Control Data
Input of the control string with a maximum of 24 characters for the Phonemail system
(mailbox call number). If the connection has been established, the control string is
transmitted to the recorded announcement port. If a recorded announcement port is
not available, the control string is transmitted to the destination.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
–
HW requirements
–
SW requirements
–
x
x
–
–
STRB / STRBR
–
–
V1.0 or later
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Special ring
3-244
Requirement or Condition
If the notified station is an internal station, a special ring
sounds.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.5 Multilingual Text Output
Definition
The language for display messages can be selected system-wide or for a specific station only. Depending on the particular system, the following languages are available:
●
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
(four fixed and four variable languages):
Dutch*, English (UK), English (US), French, German, Italian*, Portuguese*,Spanish*
●
HiPath 3250 with SBS, HiPath 3150 with SBS (two fixed and two variable languages):
English (UK), French*, German, Italian*
●
HiPath 3250 with SBSCO, HiPath 3150 with SBSCS (four fixed and four variable
languages):
Dutch*, English (UK), English (US), French, German, Italian*, Portuguese*,
Spanish*,
The languages marked ”*” are variable and can be replaced (overloaded) by one of
the available languages from the list below. This is possible only with HiPath 3000
Manager E.
You cannot reload an individual text language. Variable languages that should not be
replaced (overloaded) must therefore always be specified separately. It is not possible
to reload a fixed language once it is already there.
Available languages: Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (UK), English
(US), Estonian, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Serbo-Croatian, Slovak, Slovenian,
Spanish, Swedish, Telekom (Germany), Turkish.
Note the following with regard to system-wide and station-specific language settings:
●
Default language setting
You set the language when you enter the country initialization code during system booting. The parameters for Germany are the defaults.
If the APS does not contain the local language set during country initialization, it
uses German as the default language until you replace one of the variable languages in the APS with the local language.
●
Changing the language setting system-wide
You can access system administration by entering a code or using the service
menu on the first two telephones with display in the system. Select the desired
language from the service menu to switch all stations to the new language.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-245
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
●
Changing the language setting for an individual station
You can change language of individual stations only from the first two stations
with display in the system. To change the language of a station, specify the station in the service menu and the language to be used.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
System administration The following languages are not available for system administration: Czech, Serbo-Croatian, Slovenian, and Turkish.
3-246
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.6 Associated Dialing
Definition
With a PC, users can have the system set up a voice connection from one station (typically their own, but not necessarily so) to another station within the system. With analog telephones, the PC uses a dialing aid interface (Teleint in Germany). Another option is to connect a PC to an ISDN S0 application bus.
Any authorized station in the system can execute associated dialing for another station. The user defines the station number of the destination station in the PC address
book and activates dialing. The PC seizes the ISDN S0 application bus and transmits
the station number to the system using an ISDN message.
The user accesses the function by dialing a code and specifying the station for which
a number should be dialed. The system then interprets this information as though the
specified station were dialing.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Trunk group
Depending on the system configuration, you may have to
dial a trunk group code in order to seize a trunk.
Call forwarding
A call waiting operation activated on the station for which
the number is to be dialed is not carried out.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-247
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.7 Associated Services
Definition
An authorized user can activate or deactivate services for any other station in the system using a procedure. Authorized users initiate access by entering a code and the
station number that they want to activate or deactivate. The system behaves the
same as if the initiating station were activating the feature for itself.
With this feature, users can control the following:
●
Do not disturb
●
Call forwarding
●
Telephone lock
●
Group ringing
●
Advisory message
●
Hunt group
●
Reset services
●
Actuators
●
Night answer
●
Timed reminder
All features set by another station can be deactivated from the station on which the
feature was set. If the destination station has the feature Telephone lock active, services cannot be activated at that telephone. Likewise, a feature which was activated
at a telephone before the telephone was locked and is still active, cannot be deactivated with the Associated Services feature.
The destination station must first be authorized in database (where this applies), in
order to use the feature/function.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-248
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
ISDN terminal
Requirement or Condition
From an ISDN terminal, dial the substitute code (75) for the
asterisk (*).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-249
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.8 Display Number of Stations with Direct Trunk Access (for Austria
Only)
Definition
You can use system administration to display the number of stations with direct trunk
access available in the system. This includes all stations currently in operation which
have at least outward restricted trunk access.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Display
3-250
Requirement or Condition
Available in Austria only
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.9 Services in the Talk State
Definition
During a call, a station can activate services or perform administrative tasks in the
system via system administration.
Users activate this feature by pressing the Program/Service key or, with a non-display
or an analog telephone, by pressing the Consultation key or hook switch flash.
The features that can be activated during a call are identified in each of the descriptions.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Call forwarding
Requirement or Condition
Call forwarding can be activated during a call.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-251
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.10 Reset Activated Features
Definition
Users can reset all of the features currently set on the telephones by entering a code.
The following features can be reset:
●
Call forwarding
●
Send/cancel messages
●
Advisory message
●
Group ringing
●
Hunt group
●
Station number suppression
●
Silent camp-on
●
Do not disturb
●
Ringer cutoff
●
Timed reminder
●
Cancel all callbacks
The system can also reset the above features per telephone from a local or remote
location using the HiPath 3000 Manager E administration tool. The administrator first
downloads the information to HiPath 3000 Manager E and working off-line can selectively view the state of each of the features activated on each telephone. In HiPath
3000 Manager E, the administrator can reset all these features on any telephone and
upload the file to the HiPath 3000 system.
The following table illustrates the features that can be reset from the station by dialing
the access code #0, individually.
Station
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Call Forward
Call Forward on
Received messages
Advisory message
Answer text
Group Ringing
3-252
Leave Hunt Group
Hunt Group
Caller ID suppression
Suppress Calling ID
Call Waiting Tone
Call Waiting Tone
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Ringer cutoff
Disable incoming ring
The additional features in the HiPath 3000 Manager E System Status - Flags screen:
Room Monitor, Lock Code, Call Connection and Direct answering will not be deactivated.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Send messages
You can also use Reset all services to delete received
messages.
Sensors/send messages
A warning can be sent via a sensor to a station in the form
of a text message (send message) and then reset by a different relay.
Cancel all callbacks
Access the procedure from Reset all services.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-253
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.11 Relocate (Hoteling)
Danger
In systems with the E911 emergency service activated for the USA (see Section
3.6.19 on Page 3-178), you are not allowed to use the Relocate feature if the system
has more than one Location Identification Number (LIN).
Definition
This is an expansion of the Relocate feature found in V1.0 or earlier.
The new Relocate feature allows an optiset E and optiPoint 500 station to use a procedure to change the assignment between the physical telephone port and the logical
station data (user profile).
Example: the telephone used by station 220 is connected to the second port of the
SLMO board in slot 01 (220 = 0102) and the telephone used by station 330 is on the
fourth port of the SLMO board in slot 03 (330 = 0304). After executing the relocate
function, the station data belonging to station 220 is assigned to the fourth port of the
SLMO board in slot 03 (220 = 0304) and the data belonging to station 330 is assigned
to the second port of the SLMO board in slot 01 (330 = 0102).
You may only exchange user profiles of the same type of optiset E or optiPoint 500
(key layout).
If you exchange user profiles from different types of optiset E or optiPoint 500s, individually programmed key functions on the basic device are replaced with the default values.
You can also use Relocate on preconfigured SLMO or SLU boards, which means on
boards that are not physically present, and on SLMO or SLU ports that do not have
telephones connected.
Examples: The feature is useful in companies that have a large number of field representatives. These staff members are provided with a pool of workstations in the
company headquarters. Furthermore, a separate station configuration (station number, key programming, trunk access, etc.) is defined for each staff member. To carry
out work at the company headquarters, the staff member selects a workstation and
activates the Relocate feature on the accompanying optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone. This provides him or her with his or her personal user profile (station configuration).
A customer has 24 hour help desk operation that does not use UCD. Each desk position will have three different users each day. With the Relocate feature enhancement
a user will be able to relocate a virtual port configuration to any desk that is available.
This will then allow the user to receive calls to the DID numbers assigned to that user.
3-254
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
An additional application of this Relocate feature would be if two users decide to
change desk locations and both users share the same phone types. The users can
easily perform the Relocate operation without the assistance of a Telecommunications engineer.
If you want to use the Relocate feature, you must enable it system-wide. You can carry
out one of the following steps on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone to activate
it (the telephone lock PIN is not required if the PIN is set to the default “00000”.):
●
Enter “Relocate” code + internal number of the destination station + telephone
lock PIN
●
Start the service menu, enter “Relocate” + internal number of the destination station + telephone lock PIN
●
Press the appropriate programmed key and enter the internal number of the destination station + telephone lock PIN
After you have entered the destination station number, no other stations may use the
feature until the procedure has completed. When executing the exchange, both telephones involved are reset.
The display of the new station number (display “Stn. number: XXXXX”) on both telephones signals that the feature has executed successfully.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 SMR-J and later
V1.2 SMR-E and later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Host-client configura- You can only initiate the feature on optiset E or optiPoint
tion (master-slave
500 host (master) telephones in the idle state.
configuration)
The data from any client (slave) stations that may be connected will also be exchanged. The affected client (slave)
telephones are reset during the execution of the exchange,
just as the hosts (master) are.
Assistant T
It is not possible to execute the feature on telephones that
have programming authorization.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-255
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Subject
3-256
Requirement or Condition
UCD
You cannot execute the feature if a UCD agent is logged on
to one of the (host (master)) telephones involved.
DISA
You cannot execute the feature over DISA/DISA internal.
Associated services
If the user confirms the feature with associated services
(default: *83<DID>#9419) the call does not follow the call
management for non-physical ports.
It is not possible to activate the feature via associated services.
Physically not available stations
For incoming calls to stations, which are no longer physically available, the call follows the call management (CFW to
PM instead dropping the call to the intercept). This mechanism is available 1 minute after proceeding with this feature
or 5 minutes after a system hard restart.
Display status information
If a relocate session was successful the user will see in the
optiset E or optiPoint 500 display status information. Higher
prior display texts like „View Messages“ cover up the status
indication.
Key LED
The feature access can be set up on a key of an optiset E
or optiPoint 500 station. The LED of this key will be never
used.
Code lock
Hoteling is possible with code lock active. To delete the status indication, during code lock active, is possible.
Activation of relocate
Activation of the feature is only possible if the station is idle.
Frst two SLMO or
SLU hardware ports
The feature cannot be accessed on the first two SLMO or
SLU hardware ports.
optiClient
You cannot execute the feature with optiClient.
IP device
You cannot execute the feature with any IP device.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.12 Automatic Wake-up System/Timed Reminders
Definition
Each user can program an appointment. When activated, a timed reminder is issued
at the scheduled time. The appointment can be programmed for a single reminder
(once within a 24-hour period) or for regularly scheduled daily reminders.
The time format is four-digits. The first two digits are the hour, and the second two
digits are the minutes. A 12-hour clock mode is supported for the U.S.: users enter
the four digits and then select am (key 2) or pm (key 7). The default is am. The mode
for all other countries is the 24-hour clock system.
The default timed reminder sounds for 20 seconds and will repeat a maximum of five
repeats at 1-minute intervals. The timed reminder is cleared automatically as soon as
the user lifts the handset or presses the speaker button, or after the fifth repeat (number of repeats is configurable). Alternatively, a programmed timed reminder can be
canceled using a procedure. Display telephones also support queries.
The duration of signaling, the time between signals, and the number of repeats are
configurable.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
50
50
SW requirements
Maximum no. of timed
reminders (systemwide)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
50
50
50
3-257
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-258
Requirement or Condition
Appointments
Standard analog telephones, optiset E entry, optiset E basic, optiPoint 500 entry, and cordless telephones support
only programming of non-repeating (once only) appointments
Timed reminders
A timed reminder which is due but cannot be signaled (user busy, for example), is postponed until the next cycle.
Influence of other active features
Activation of other features such as call forwarding, do not
disturb, group ringing, ringer cutoff has no effect on timed
reminder, in other words the timed reminder is always issued at the telephone at which it was activated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.13 Delete All Station Numbers
Definition
This feature allows you to delete all station numbers quickly and easily (refer to Table
3-4).
Using this feature, it is much easier to customize the default numbering plan when installing a new system or retain an existing numbering plan when replacing a non-Siemens system.
Table 3-4
HiPath 3000—Deleting Station Numbers
Type of Number
Default Station Numbers
Delete
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3250
HiPath 3150
HiPath 3300
Station numbers
100-349
500-749
100-278
500-687
11-30
51-70
Yes
Station DID numbers
100-349
500-749
100-287
500-687
11-30
51-70
Yes
Trunk numbers
7801-7920
7801-7860
801-816
Yes
Trunk group codes
(external codes)
0 = World
9 = U.S.
0 = World
9 = U.S.
0 = World
9 = U.S.
No
80-84
80-84
82-88
Yes
850-859
850-859
---
Yes
USBS station number
Internal & DID
891
891
891
Yes
IMOD station number
Internal & DID
890
890
890
Yes
Digital modem
Internal & DID
879
879
77 & 879
Yes
Group numbers
Internal & DID
350-499
350-499
31-50
Yes
Internal attendant code
(intercept position)
9 = World
0 = U.S.
9 = World
0 = U.S.
9 = World
0 = U.S.
Yes
DID attendant code
(intercept station)
0 = World
9 = U.S.
0 = World
9 = U.S.
0 = World
9 = U.S.
No
Substitution for "*"
75
75
75
Yes
Substitution for "#"
76
76
76
Yes
*xxx
#xxx
*xxx
#xxx
*xxx
#xxx
No
Service codes
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-259
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-260
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.14 Team/Top
Definition
Team/Top is based on MULAP lines, which are generally “looped” via several telephones. These telephones are combined in a MULAP group that has only one station
number in the system (for more information, refer to Section 3.11.14.3).
3.11.14.1 Team Configuration
Example of a Team with Two Members
MULAP 201
MULAP 202
Group Call On/Off
Group Call On/Off
MULAP 202
MULAP 201
DSS Telephone B
DSS Telephone A
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
DSS
Key
Tel. B
MULAP 2 with
No. 202
0
MULAP 1 with
No. 201
Figure 3-8
Tel. A with No. **201
DSS
Key
Tel. A
0
Tel. B with No. **202
Example of a Team with Two Members
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-261
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
The Team configuration in Figure 3-8 includes the following components:
●
MULAP 1 and MULAP 2: MULAPs (basic MULAP groups) that appear on both
Telephone A and Telephone B.
●
DSS keys: Telephone A to Telephone B and Telephone B to Telephone A.
A group call key allows you to activate or deactivate incoming MULAP call signaling.
Table 3-5
Transfer in Team (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Not Set)
(Not for U.S.)
Operation
Tel. A
M1
Tel. A
DSS Key B
Tel. B
M1
Tel. B
DSS Key A
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation, exclusive, common);
XXX = being called; XXXX = ringing
Tel. B is talking on M1
X
X
X
–
Tel. B presses DSS Tel. A key
X
XXXX
XX
X
XXXX
–
XXX
XXX
Tel. A answers (2)
X
X
XX
X
Tel. B performs screened
transfer to Tel. A (3)
X
–
X
X
Tel. B performs unscreened
transfer to Tel. A (1)
or
1) Tel. B performs unscreened transfer; call is transferred to M1.
2) Tel. A answers and could answer the call on hold on M1 by call pickup (menu).
3) Tel. B performs screened transfer to Tel. A and Tel. A continues to conduct the call on M1.
3-262
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Table 3-6
Transfer in Team (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Set) (for
U.S. Only)
Operation
Tel. A
M1
Tel. A
DSS Key B
Tel. B
M1
Tel. B
DSS Key A
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation, exclusive, common);
XXX = being called; XXXX = ringing
Tel. B is talking on M1
X
X
X
–
Tel. B presses DSS Tel. A key
(1)
X
XXXX
XX
X
Tel. A answers (2)
X
X
XX
X
Tel. B goes on-hook (3)
XX
–
XX
–
Tel. A retrieves M1 (4)
X
–
X
X
1) Tel. B switches lines (exclusive hold), switches to the local station number and calls Tel. A under
the local station number. M1 continues to be signaled as busy on Tel. A.
2) Tel. A can answer only by going off-hook or pressing the Tel. B DSS key. Tel. A then conducts
the call under the local station number.
3) If Tel. B goes on-hook, the connection to Tel. A is released and M1 is placed on common hold.
4) Tel. A can retrieve the held call by pressing M1.
Table 3-7
Tel. A
Team—Sequence of Operations for Consultation Hold on Second
Line
M1
M2
Explanation
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation,
exclusive, common);
XXX = being called; XXXX = ringing
Call on M1
X
-
XX
-
Presses M2
-
XX
Call on M1
X
-
Ringing on M2
X
XXXX
If ringing for MULAP 2 is activated on
Tel. A, Tel. A hears an advisory ring.
XX
XXXX
Dial tone
If ringing for MULAP 2 is activated on
Tel. A, Tel. A hears an advisory ring.
Presses M2
-
XX
Call on M1
X
-
XX
X
Consultation hold
Consultation hold
Switches to M2
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Dial tone
M1 is released, M2 is placed on consultation hold, dial tone remains.
M1 is released, consultation call on M2.
Dial tone
3-263
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Table 3-7
Tel. A
Team—Sequence of Operations for Consultation Hold on Second
Line
M1
M2
Explanation
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation,
exclusive, common);
XXX = being called; XXXX = ringing
Call on M2
XX
X
Consultation hold
XX
XX
Presses M1
XX
-
M2 is released, consultation call on M1.
Tel. B
DSS Key A
M2
Explanation
Conducts call with
Tel. A
X
-
Tel. A was called by means of DSS
key A.
Consultation hold
XX
-
Dial tone
Presses M2
XX
XX
Dial tone
Consultation call on M21, dial tone remains.
1 Because of dual signaling, DSS key A continues to indicate call on hold (state of local station number is always signaled as well).
Example of a Team with Eight Members
MULAP 1
MULAP 8
0
0
Tel. A
Tel. B
0
Tel. H
Figure 3-9
3-264
0
Tel. G
0
Tel. C
0
Tel. D
0
0
Tel. F
Tel. E
Example of a Team with Eight Members
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Service
Programmable
MULAP 1
Group Call On/Off
Wahlwiederhol.
Programmable
MULAP 2
DSS Tel. B
Mikrofon ein/aus
Programmable
MULAP 3
DSS Tel. C
Lautsprecher
Programmable
MULAP 4
DSS Tel. D
Programmable
MULAP 5
DSS Tel. E
Programmable
MULAP 6
DSS Tel. F
Programmable
MULAP 7
DSS Tel. G
Release
MULAP 8
DSS Tel. H
Figure 3-10
Team with Eight Members: Default Key Assignments for Tel. A on
key module
The following options are available for assigning Team keys using HiPath 3000 Manager E:
No key assignment
●
Assignment to first or second key module
●
A key module is automatically added (refer to example in Figure 3-10). If applicable, existing keys are overwritten.
Assignment to first free keys
●
Free keys on the telephone and any existing key modules are used. If no keys
are available, key modules are added. Key assignment sequence for Team: Local MULAP, Group Call key, other MULAPs, DSS keys.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-265
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Maximum number of
Team/Top configurations
500
50
10
10
10
Maximum number of
stations (members) in
a Team/Top configuration
10
10
8
8
8
Maximum number of
telephones in a Team/
Top configuration
10
10
8
8
8
Maximum number of
MULAPs per telephone
32
32
10
10
10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Manually configured
basic MULAP group
Members of a basic MULAP group can use key programming to
Configure a MULAP key for the basic MULAP group.
●
Configure DSS keys to other members.
●
Program a “Group Call” key.
●
Universal Call Distribution (UCD)
You cannot use MULAPs in the universal call distribution
system.
Configuration Options
This feature can be configured using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Configuring the Feature Using Assistant T
Teams should normally be configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E. Configuration
using Assistant T is possible only to a limited extent.
3-266
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Configuring the Feature Using HiPath 3000 Manager E
HiPath 3000 Manager E can be used to configure a default Team (Team/Top mask).
Members can be added to the team by drag and drop. The basic MULAP group(s)
and DSS keys are configured automatically. The basic MULAP groups are assigned
the station numbers of the primary station and the primary station is assigned a pseudo station number (examples: 4711 becomes **4711, 12345 becomes **2345,
654321 becomes **4321).
Configure the feature using HiPath 3000 Manager E as follows:
Step
Action
1.
Configure team (default)
Options
2.
Incoming calls
3.
Team/Top
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-267
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.14.2 Top Configuration
Example of a Top Configuration with One Executive and One Secretary
Programmable
Group Call On/Off
Programmable
DSS Executive
Exec. MULAP 201
Exec. MULAP 201
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP
DSS Secretary
Programmable
Secr. MULAP 202
Secr. MULAP 202
Programmable
Programmable
Basic MULAP
(Secr. MULAP)
with No. 202
Exec. MULAP
with No. 201
0
0
Exec. with No. **201
Secr. with No. **202
0
Figure 3-11
Exec. CMI with No. 77801
Example of Top with One Executive and One Secretary
This Top configuration includes the following components:
3-268
●
Executive MULAP 201 with an executive and executive CMI as executives and
with a secretary as member.
●
Basic MULAP 202 with a secretary as primary station and an executive and executive CMI as members.
●
DSS keys: Secretary to executive (executive CMI) and executive to secretary.
●
Ring transfer keys: For controlling incoming MULAP call signaling. The default
setting for the ring transfer key is “deactivated” (LED off). Calls are signaled on
the secretary.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
In addition, incoming MULAP call signaling can be activated or deactivated by means
of a group call key (on non-executive telephones only). Ring transfer has priority,
meaning that the group call key is activated only when ring transfer is deactivated.
Table 3-8
Transfer in Top (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Not Set) (Not
for U.S.)
Operation
Executive Telephone
Exec.
Secr.
MULAP MULAP
DSS Key
Secretary
Exec.
CMI
Mobile
Tel.
Secretary Telephone
Secr.
Exec.
DSS Key
MULAP MULAP Executive
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation, exclusive, common); XXX = being called;
XXXX = ringing
Secr. is talking on exec. MULAP
X
X
Secretary presses DSS Executive key (1)
X
XXXX
Secretary performs unscreened
transfer to exec. or exec. CMI (2)
XXXX
X
XXXX
XX
X
XXXX
XXX
XXX
XX
X
X
X
or
Executive answers (3)
X
Secretary performs screened
transfer to executive (4)
X
X
1) Call signaled on executive MULAP and executive CMI.
2) Secretary performs unscreened transfer; call is transferred to executive MULAP.
3) Executive answers. Executive could also answer the held call on executive MULAP by call pickup (menu).
4) Secretary performs screened transfer to exec. and exec. continues to conduct the call on exec. MULAP.
Table 3-9
Transfer in Top (“Switch Lines for DSS” System Option Set) (for U.S.
Only)
Operation
Executive Telephone
Exec.
Secr.
MULAP MULAP
DSS Key
Secr.
Exec.
CMI
Mobile
Tel.
Secretary Telephone
Secr.
Exec.
DSS Key
MULAP MULAP Executive
X = busy; XX = hold (consultation, exclusive, common); XXX = being called;
XXXX = ringing
Secr. is talking on exec. MULAP
X
X
Secretary presses DSS Executive key (1)
X
XXXX
Executive answers
X
X
X
XXXX
XX
X
XX
X
Secretary hangs up after executive answers (2)
XX
XX
X
Executive retrieves executive (3)
X
X
X
1) Secretary switches lines; executive is placed on exclusive hold; call signaled on exec. MULAP and exec. CMI.
2) Secretary goes on-hook; connection between exec. and secr. is released. Executive is placed on hold.
3) Executive can retrieve held call on executive MULAP.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-269
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Example of Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries
Executive MULAP 1
Secretary MULAP 1
Executive MULAP 2
Secretary MULAP 2
0
Exec. 1
0
Exec. 2
Figure 3-12
3-270
0
Secr. 1
0
Secr. 2
Example of Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries
The following options are available for assigning Top keys using HiPath 3000 Manager E:
No key assignment
●
Assignment to first or second key module
●
A key module is automatically added (refer to examples in Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14). If applicable, existing keys are overwritten.
Assignment to first free keys
●
Free keys on the telephone and any existing key modules are used. If no keys
are available, key modules are added. Key assignment sequence for Top: DSS
Executive 1, Exec. MULAP 1, Ring Transfer Exec. MULAP 1, DSS Secretary 1
(on executive telephone) or Group Call (on secretary telephone), DSS Executive 2, Exec. MULAP 2, etc.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Service
Programmable
Programmable
DSS Executive 2
Wahlwiederhol.
Programmable
Exec. MULAP 1
Exec. MULAP 2
Mikrofon ein/aus
Programmable
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP 1
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP 2
Lautsprecher
Programmable
DSS Secretary 1
DSS Secretary 2
Programmable
Secr. MULAP 1
Secr. MULAP 2
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Release
Programmable
Programmable
Bild 3-13
Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries: Default Key Assignments for Executive 1 on key module
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-271
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Service
Programmable
DSS Executive 1
DSS Executive 2
Wahlwiederhol.
Programmable
Exec. MULAP 1
Exec. MULAP 2
Mikrofon ein/aus
Programmable
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP 1
Ring Transfer
Exec. MULAP 2
Lautsprecher
Programmable
Group Call On/Off
DSS Secretary 2
Programmable
Secr. MULAP 1
Secr. MULAP 2
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Programmable
Release
Programmable
Programmable
Figure 3-14
3-272
Top with Two Executives and Two Secretaries: Default Key Assignments for Secretary 1 on key module
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Maximum number of
Team/Top configurations
500
50
10
10
10
Maximum number of
stations (members) in
a Team/Top configuration
10
10
8
8
8
Maximum number of
telephones in a Team/
Top configuration
10
10
8
8
8
Maximum number of
MULAPs per telephone
32
32
10
10
10
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Manually configured
executive MULAP
group
Members of an executive MULAP group can use key programming to
Configure a MULAP key for the executive MULAP
●
group.
Configure DSS keys to other members.
●
Program a “Group Call” key.
●
Program a ring transfer key for each executive MULAP
●
group.
Note:
In an executive MULAP group, the executive should program a DSS key to the secretary (station number) and the
secretary should program a DSS key to the executive (station number).
Executive as primary
station
An executive can also be a primary station in a basic MULAP group but can be defined as an executive only in an
executive MULAP group.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-273
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Executive ring
If an executive in the executive MULAP group calls a nonexecutive in the local executive MULAP group, the call is
signaled by a special, acoustic executive ring.
Group call key, incoming MULAP call signaling
●
●
●
3-274
In the executive MULAP group, incoming MULAP call
signaling can be administered only for non-executives.
Executives cannot configure a group call key (for activating and deactivating MULAP call signaling) for the
executive MULAP group.
If necessary, the ringer cutoff function can be used to
deactivate the acoustic ring on an executive telephone. An advisory ring is issued.
Non-executives (secretaries) can configure a group
call key for activating and deactivating MULAP call signaling. Ring transfer has priority, meaning that the
group call key is activated only when ring transfer is
deactivated. Signaling on the two keys is separate.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Subject
Call transfer key, incoming MULAP call
signaling
Requirement or Condition
●
●
●
●
●
All members of an executive MULAP group can program a local ring transfer key for each executive MULAP. A secretary with multiple executives has multiple
executive MULAPs and, therefore, multiple ring transfer keys.
The default setting for the ring transfer key is “deactivated” (LED off). Calls are signaled on the secretary.
When the ring transfer key is pressed (LED on), MULAP call signaling is transferred within the executive
MULAP group. Executives are signaled with MULAP
call signaling and non-executives are signaled visually.
Calls between members of the executive MULAP
group or within a Top are not affected by ring transfer:
Executives in the executive MULAP group always ring.
Calls to another executive MULAP group always take
ring transfer into account. Exceptions: Calls set up by
means of a DSS key.
Ring transfer can be activated or deactivated using a
– Code: Analog telephones, CMI telephones, optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones.
Afterwards, the MULAP number must be suffix-dialed.
– Menu (after dialing the ring transfer code): CMI
telephones, optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display.
The ring transfer state is not indicated by a special dial
tone.
Ring transfer has priority, meaning that the group call
key is activated only when ring transfer is deactivated.
Signaling on the two keys is separate.
Conversion to V1.0
Top functions (executive/secretary) from earlier releases of
Hicom 150 E Office (such as Rel. 2.2) cannot be converted
to HiPath 3000 V1.0.
Top configuration
If the Top configuration has more than one executive and
one secretary, you need to use a key module.
Universal Call Distribution (UCD)
You cannot use MULAPs in the universal call distribution
system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-275
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Configuration Options
This feature can be configured using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Configuring the Feature Using Assistant T
Tops should normally be configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E. Configuration using Assistant T is possible only to a limited extent.
Configuring the Feature Using HiPath 3000 Manager E
HiPath 3000 Manager E can be used to configure a default Top (Team/Top mask).
Members can be added to the team by drag and drop. The executive MULAP group,
basic MULAP group and its MULAP key, and the ring transfer and DSS keys are configured automatically. The basic and executive MULAP groups are assigned the original station numbers of the primary station/executive and the primary station/executive is assigned a pseudo station number (examples: 4711 becomes **4711, 12345
becomes **2345, 654321 becomes **4321).
Configure the feature using HiPath 3000 Manager E as follows:
Step
3-276
Action
1.
Configure Top (default)
Options
2.
Incoming calls
3.
Team/Top
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.14.3 MULAP Groups
There are two types of MULAP group:
●
Basic MULAP groups
These groups form the basis for Team configurations. In addition, secretary MULAPs are configured by means of basic MULAP groups.
Members can be primary stations, primary station CMIs and non-primary stations.
Primary stations and primary station CMIs are automatically assigned the “outgoing preference” and incoming MULAP call signaling (tone, LED and display).
The following can be administered:
–
“Outgoing preference” (automatic outgoing seizure) for all primary stations
and primary station CMIs.
–
“Incoming preference” (automatic incoming seizure) for all members.
–
Incoming MULAP call signaling for all members.
–
DSS keys for all members.
All members can activate and deactivate MULAP call signaling for each MULAP
using a key (Group Call).
●
Executive MULAP groups
These groups form the basis for executive/secretary configurations (Top). All
members of the Top (CHESE) become members of the executive MULAP; the executive(s) function as primary stations.
The following members are possible: Executive 1, 2 ..., CMI executive 1, 2 ...,
conference corner tel. executive 1, 2 ..., secretary 1, 2 ..., CMI secretary 1, 2 ...
An executive MULAP group defines which members will be executives (= primary
stations). These members are automatically assigned the “outgoing preference”
without incoming MULAP call signaling (tone and display).
All non-executives (= non-primary stations) are automatically assigned incoming
MULAP call signaling (tone, LED and display).
The following can be administered:
–
“Outgoing preference” for all executives, CMI executives and conference corner telephone executives.
–
“Incoming preference” for all members.
–
Incoming MULAP call signaling for all non-executives.
–
DSS keys for all members.
–
Ring transfer key.
Non-executives can activate and deactivate MULAP call signaling using a key
(Group Call).
Secretary MULAPs are configured by means of basic MULAP groups.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-277
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Telephone Types
The following types of telephone can be defined as both primary stations and nonprimary stations in a basic or executive MULAP group:
●
Analog telephones
●
Cordless telephones (CMI)
●
all optiPoint 500 telephones described in Section 6.2 and the optiset E telephones described in the Hicom 150 H V1.0 Service Manual
LED Statuses of a MULAP Key
The LED for the MULAP key indicates the status of the MULAP group and can assume the following signaling statuses:
●
LED off = MULAP free (seizure possible).
●
LED on = MULAP busy (seizure not possible).
●
LED flickering = MULAP being called (call can be answered).
●
LED flashing slowly = MULAP on hold (call can be retrieved or picked up).
A key can be configured for a MULAP group number on each station (including on a
busy lamp field and optiClient Attendant).
LED Statuses of a DSS key
The LED for the DSS key indicates the status of the DSS destination as follows:
3-278
●
LED off = DSS destination is free.
●
LED on = DSS destination is busy (off-hook, in talk state, etc.) or the telephone
on which the DSS key was configured is calling the destination.
●
LED flashing rapidly = The telephone (DSS destination) is not being called by a
DSS key.
Example: Telephone A has a DSS key to telephone B. Telephone C calls telephone B. The DSS key LED on telephone A flashes rapidly.
●
LED flickering = The telephone (DSS destination) is calling the telephone on
which the DSS key was configured.
●
LED flashing slowly = The telephone on which the DSS key was configured has
placed a destination on hold.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
General MULAP Functionality
Incoming Calls to a Free MULAP
All the members of the
The MULAP is busy and the caller receives a busy sigMULAP group have de- nal. There is no call signaling on the MULAP.
activated the MULAP
ring (group call off) and/
or have activated do not
disturb.
At least one member of
the MULAP group has
activated the MULAP
ring (group call on) and
deactivated do not disturb.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
The call is signaled on all members of the MULAP group
(LED).
Members of the MULAP group who are currently
●
free, have activated the MULAP ring, and have not
activated do not disturb are also signaled by an
acoustic ring and display.
Members of the MULAP group who are free and
●
have activated the ringer cutoff feature are also signaled by an advisory ring.
Busy stations in the MULAP group (busy on another
●
line) that have activated the MULAP ring and have
not activated do not disturb are signaled by
– An acoustic advisory ring (single ring) and, after scrolling, an “Accept waiting call” message
on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones.
– An advisory tone (single short tone) on analog,
CMI and optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones without display.
The latter is not affected by do not disturb.
Note:
The advisory ring is also issued for calls to the local station number (for example, call to DSS key or call to general call key).
3-279
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Incoming Calls to a Busy MULAP
All the members of the
MULAP group are busy.
●
●
●
An internal caller receives a busy signal and camps
on after a timeout. An external caller camps on immediately.
The busy members of the MULAP group are signaled by:
– A call waiting tone and, after scrolling, an “Accept waiting call” message on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones.
– A call waiting tone on analog, CMI and optiset
E and optiPoint 500 telephones without display.
In the case of busy MULAP group members who
have activated do not disturb, the caller receives a
busy signal regardless of whether the station has
activated or deactivated the MULAP ring.
There is no change in signaling for any “other”
members of the MULAP group.
Answering of Incoming Calls
Signaled MULAP key
Calls can be answered by going off-hook, pressing the
(LED with call signaling) speaker key or pressing the MULAP key.
If the user goes off-hook or presses the speaker key, the
incoming preference applies (automatic incoming seizure).
An incoming call (LED with or without call signaling) can
always be answered using the MULAP key, regardless
of the incoming preference.
Incoming Preference
Incoming preference
(automatic incoming seizure)
●
●
●
3-280
Although the MULAP settings determine the incoming preference, this setting applies to a particular
telephone. If more than one MULAP is connected to
a telephone, an incoming preference can be set for
each MULAP. Only the last setting entered for the
incoming preference applies to the telephone.
If incoming preference is deactivated, a call cannot
be answered by going off-hook or pressing the
speaker key; the system attempts to execute an outgoing seizure.
If “No incoming preference” is selected for a telephone, the setting applies to all incoming calls to
this telephone. Calls to the local station number can
be answered only by pressing a station number,
DSS or general call key.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Outgoing Calls
Initiating an outgoing call An outgoing call can be initiated by going off-hook,
pressing the speaker key, or pressing a call, digit, MULAP, station number or DSS key.
When an outgoing call is initiated, a station number is
assigned and the called party is displayed. In the default
configuration (device without MULAP), the local station
number is assigned when the line is seized. If seizure is
via a MULAP, the MULAP group number is assigned.
Outgoing Preference
Outgoing preference
(automatic outgoing seizure)
●
●
●
●
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Each station is assigned an outgoing preference.
The primary stations in the MULAP groups and the
executives in the executive MULAP groups are assigned the MULAP group number as a preference.
Primary stations and executives always have the
same preferences.
If the outgoing preference for a primary station or
executive changes, it is also changed for the other
primary stations and executives in this MULAP
group.
When the user goes off-hook, presses the speaker,
station number, MUSAP or general call key, or dials
while on-hook, the preference is assigned as a station number for the outgoing seizure.
If the MULAP preference is busy when the user
goes off-hook or presses one of the above-mentioned keys, an overflow to the local station number
is possible only on analog, CMI and optiset E entry
telephones. Other optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones must select a free trunk.
Application: An executive CMI goes off-hook. The
executive MULAP (its outgoing preference) is still
seized by the secretary. The executive CMI receives
a dial tone (overflow) for the local station number. At
the end of dialing, the station number of the executive MULAP appears in the display of the called party.
If the user presses a MULAP key, the outgoing preference is not used. Instead, the group number of
the MULAP key is used.
3-281
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Busy Signaling
If one MULAP group member presses the MULAP key
or seizes the MULAP by preference (goes off-hook,
presses the speaker key or dials while on-hook), MULAP keys indicate the busy state on all the stations in
the MULAP group.
Station Number Key, DSS Key
●
●
●
●
3-282
The destination of a station number key can be a
station number or a group number.
An outgoing seizure using a station number key is
output to the outgoing preference. If the outgoing
preference is a MULAP, the MULAP is also seized.
If a station number key is activated during a call on
a MULAP, the call is placed on consultation hold.
The station number is always entered as the destination of a DSS key. It is also possible to configure
destinations that do not belong to a basic or executive MULAP group.
Differences:
– A DSS key bypasses the outgoing preference
and the local station number is always output (a
MULAP is not seized).
– A DSS key switches lines (for U.S. only) or initiates consultation hold (not for U.S.) if the active call is being conducted on a MULAP.
– At the destination, a DSS key bypasses call
management and ring transfer but follows call
forwarding.
DSS on executive or primary station:
The executives in the executive MULAP group or
the primary stations in the basic MULAP group
have the “free” status as a group; in other words, as
soon as one is busy, the DSS and station number
keys indicate busy.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Line Switchover
●
●
●
●
●
Line switchover is possible only from the call state.
Otherwise, the line is released.
A line switchover is always executed between two
MULAP keys.
Between a MULAP and a DSS key,
– A line switchover is executed = for U.S. only
– Consultation hold is activated = not for U.S.
The setting is selected by means of the “switch lines
for DSS” option, which is part of the country default
settings.
After pressing the hold key, the party initiating hold
receives a dial tone (on the outgoing preference)
and can set up an outgoing call or answer an incoming call on another line key.
If a user presses another free, calling or held MULAP key (line switchover) during a call (outgoing or
incoming) on a MULAP key (call state), the first MULAP is also placed on exclusive hold.
The party who initiated hold can retrieve a MULAP
on exclusive hold at any time by pressing the MULAP key. The active call is then placed on exclusive
hold.
Both external and internal calls can be placed on
hold. All the members of the MULAP can retrieve a
MULAP on common hold at any time.
Call Pickup
Calls to MULAP groups are not signaled in any call pickup group and cannot be picked up.
Night, Intercept and Overflow Destinations
MULAP groups can be used as night, intercept and
overflow destinations.
Telephone Directory
Administration (Assistant T/HiPath 3000 Manager E) indicates which station number or name will appear when
the directory is displayed.
Call Forwarding
CF destination
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
A MULAP group can also be a call forwarding destination.
3-283
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Call forwarding per MULAP group
●
●
●
●
●
After dialing the CF-per-MULAP code, the user
must enter the MULAP number. optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with a display and CMI telephones use the same menu system as a CF device.
The user must also enter the MULAP number when
programming a CF-per-MULAP key. The menu system is the same as for a CF key.
Instead of entering the MULAP number, the user
can press the MULAP key.
A partially programmed (with MULAP number, without CF destination) or fully programmed (with MULAP number and CF destination) CF-per-MULAP
key can also be programmed.
For each MULAP, a CF-per-MULAP key with an internal or external destination can be configured for
each telephone.
Call forwarding via asso- In this case, the MULAP number must be entered twice,
ciated services
once to indicate the source and once to indicate the
trunk.
Execution of call forwarding
●
●
●
Secretarial function
transfer
3-284
When a forwarded MULAP is seized, a special dial
tone is activated.
When a call is forwarded, a CF device has priority.
A call is forwarded to the station CF destination. If
CF per MULAP is activated, the call is forwarded to
the MULAP CF destination.
There is no parallel signaling on the MULAP and CF
destination. Only the call forwarding destination is
called.
Using the ring transfer function, the secretary can switch
calls to the executive and initiate a secretarial function
transfer by means of CF per MULAP. The deputy can
override call forwarding (caller is a CF destination), in
which case the executive is called directly on the MULAP. The executive can receive calls directly by deactivating CF per MULAP.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Results and signaling of
a CF device and CF per
MULAP
●
●
●
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
If a CF device is activated for a primary station or
executive, this state is indicated by a special dial
tone on all the primary station or executive telephones within the same MULAP. The CF device can
be deactivated from any primary station or executive telephone.
The CF destination is stored in the telephone that
initiated call forwarding. CF is signaled (LED, display and special dial tone) on all primary stations or
executives.
If CF per MULAP is activated, this state is indicated
by the LED for the CF-per-MULAP key (fully and
partially programmed) of all the members of the
MULAP group (no continuous display). Any member of the MULAP group can deactivate CF per MULAP.
If a MULAP is entered as a CF destination, this
state is indicated by the CF device LED (slowly
flashing) of the primary stations in the MULAP
group and by the CF-per-MULAP LED of all the
members.
If a member attempts to activate CF per MULAP
and a primary station has already activated a CF
device, a warning is issued. The action is not executed until the primary station deactivates the CF
device.
3-285
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Number/Name Display
●
●
●
●
●
When an outgoing call is set up, a station number is
assigned (local station number or MULAP group
number).
When an incoming MULAP call is answered, the
MULAP group number is assigned.
In the case of calls to a MULAP:
– Before the call is answered, the display of the
calling party shows the MULAP name and/or
MULAP number being called.
– After the call is answered, the display of the
calling party shows the station name and/or
MULAP number of the answering party.
In the case of calls from a MULAP station (MULAP
key or preference), the display of the called and answering parties always shows the station name
and/or MULAP number.
The following generally applies to outgoing seizures: If a station conducts a call using the local station number and the outgoing preference differs
from the local station number, the display of the
called party always shows the station number of the
outgoing preference.
Consultation Hold, Recall, Conference
3-286
Consultation hold state
The following activities are among the options available
in the menu in the consultation hold state:
Return to held call
●
Toggle
●
Transfer
●
Conference
●
When the user goes on-hook, the call is transferred or
an immediate recall is performed.
Consultation hold on local MULAP
If a MULAP group member is a primary station, it can
reach the other members of the same MULAP by activating consultation hold and then dialing the local MULAP number. This is useful if no station number key or
DSS key is configured or if the station number of the
member is unknown.
Example of an application: An executive wishes to transfer the call to his or her CMI or conference corner telephone. The executive activates consultation hold on the
local executive MULAP. Only the executive stations ring
because ring transfer within the executive MULAP is ignored. The executive can pickup the call on his or her
CMI or conference corner telephone.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Unscreened and
screened transfer (important Top feature)
If a member of the local MULAP is called while on consultation hold (by dialing the local station number, pressing the station number key or pressing the DSS key (not
for U.S.)), the ring/call continues to be signaled/conducted on the MULAP after the transfer. Before the transfer,
“common hold” is signaled on both MULAP members
and the held call can be picked up.
Recall after transfer,
hold or immediately after
going on-hook during
consultation hold
This function is signaled only on the MULAP station initiating consultation hold or hold. The MULAP LED indicates a call (busy indication on all other MULAP stations). The call is always signaled by an acoustic ring
and display (MULAP ring and group call are ignored).
Consultation hold on
second line
“Consultation hold on a second line” occurs when a second MULAP line is activated after consultation hold is
initiated from a MULAP line.
This function is useful when activating features that can
only be activated from consultation hold (such as transfer and conference).
Once a second line has been placed on consultation
hold, the first line is released.
Example of an application: A call is being conducted on
MULAP M1. By pressing a trunk key, the user switches
the line to MULAP M2, thus placing M1 on exclusive
hold. A new connection is set up on M2. In order to add
the party on M1 to a conference, the user must press
consultation hold, M1 (M2 is released) and conference.
The conference continues on M1.
Instead of being added to a conference, the call can be
transferred. In this case, the two parties are interconnected and M1 is released.
Conference
A conference can always be initiated or expanded (to
maximum five participants).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-287
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Callback, Message Waiting, Caller List
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3-288
Callback and Message Waiting are station-related
features. If a member of a MULAP initiates a callback or sends a text message, the sender (i.e. only
the initiating station in the MULAP) is called back.
When the callback is initiated on a busy MULAP, it
is executed as soon as the MULAP is released.
When the callback is initiated on a free MULAP, the
primary stations of the basic MULAP or the executives of the executive MULAP are monitored. The
callback is not executed until a primary station or
executive has been activated.
The MULAP is always called when the callback is
executed. This means that a callback initiated on a
free executive MULAP will also call the executive
MULAP when it is executed.
When a user sends a text message to a MULAP, the
message is delivered to all the primary stations in
the basic MULAP or all the executives in the executive MULAP.
The message waiting LED for the mailbox is also
activated on all the primary stations in the basic
MULAP or executives in the executive MULAP.
MULAP calls are indicated only in the caller list of
the primary stations and executives.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.15 Storing Procedures on Procedure Keys
Definition
This feature allows the user to configure procedure keys and to program them with
procedures. The programming (storing) follows the same steps as the normal execution of a procedure.
If you use a procedure key during a call, DTMF signals are automatically sent in the
B channel. A consultation hold is not initiated.
Procedures can contain internal and external station numbers and additional information. Some of the possibilities are:
●
Trunk group code number + ACCT + destination station number
●
Trunk flash code + destination station number
●
Code numbers for control of services + destination station number
(such as send/query message (Message Waiting): * 68 + station number + text
number)
●
Digit combination for Voice Mail or for answering machine
●
Call waiting or busy override when destination station is busy
●
Initiation of a callback when destination station is idle or busy
The following table shows which services (features) can be programmed on procedure keys. The table also shows any conditions that apply to the use of the procedure
keys.
Comments
during incoming
call
during outgoing
call
in the talk state
in the busy state
in the digit inputstate (at least 1
digit dialed)
Use of the procedure key not possible
in the digit inputstate (no digit
dialed)
Feature
Account code (ACCT)
Account code ACCT in
prefix
Advisory message on
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Associated dialing
Associated services
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-289
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Comments
during incoming
call
during outgoing
call
in the talk state
in the busy state
in the digit inputstate (at least 1
digit dialed)
Use of the procedure key not possible
in the digit inputstate (no digit
dialed)
Feature
Automatic wake-up system: activate appointment
Key with toggle
function
Automatic wake-up system: deactivate appointment
Key with toggle
function
Callback requests - display or delete
X
X
X
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Call forwarding, internal
or external, on
X
X
Call forwarding, external,
on (not for tenant services)
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Call forwarding, logon
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Call forwarding, night
destination on
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Dial station speed dialing
X
X
Dial system speed dialing
X
X
Call forwarding per MULAP
Directed call pickup
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Door opener via adapter
box
DTMF transmission
X
DTMF transmission in the
talk state using procedure key
Flash on analog trunk
3-290
Group ringing off
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Group ringing on
X
X
Key with toggle
function
Night answer off
X
X
Key with toggle
function
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Night answer on
Park on
Parked call retrieval
X
X
X
X
X
X
Comments
during incoming
call
during outgoing
call
in the talk state
in the busy state
in the digit inputstate (at least 1
digit dialed)
Use of the procedure key not possible
in the digit inputstate (no digit
dialed)
Feature
X
Key with toggle
function
X
Key with toggle
function
X
Key with toggle
function
Radio paging system, answer
Radio paging system,
page
Release trunk (emergency trunk access)
X
X
X
X
Retrieval of an external
call from common hold
Send messages (message waiting)
Silent monitoring
X
X
X
X
Speaker call
X
X
X
X
Switch relays off
X
X
Switch relays on
X
X
System telephone book
Telephone Data Service
TDS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Voice selections
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-291
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-292
Requirement or Condition
Procedure length
A maximum of 32 characters can be stored in a proceudre
key.
optiClient Attendant
It is not possible to configure procedure keys.
Second key level
No procedures can be configured on the second key level
(Shift).
Pause
A pause can be inserted in the programming process by
pressing the redial key.
Suffix-dialing
Procedure keys can be used in suffix-dialing.
PIN
It is not possible to program procedures that require a PIN
(such as activating or deactivating an individual telephone
lock).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Other Features
3.11.16 Customer-Specific Display (V3.0 and later)
Definition
The feature allows you to make customer-specific adjustments to the optiPoint 400
CorNet-IP-TS, the optiClient 130, and the optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephone displays when the telephones are in the idle state.
You can change only the right portion (maximum of 15 characters) of the second display line, which displays “HiPath” as a default. For example, you can enter a company
identification or hotel name here. The text lines up with the left part of the date if the
length of the text allows it.
16:53
123456
Figure 3-15
16:53
123456
Figure 3-16
Th 07 FEB 02
HiPath
>
Default Display in Idle State
Th 07 FEB 02
Sea View Hotel >
Example of a Customer-Specific Display in Idle State
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V3.0 or
later
x
V3.0 or
later
x
V3.0 or
later
x
V3.0 or
later
x
V3.0 or
later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Display
Requirement or Condition
The display appears only when the telephone is in the idle
state.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-293
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12 Networking
In private and public networks, switching operations are performed by trunk interfaces, numbering plans, least cost routing functions, and station number translations.
HiPath 3000 provide networking on digital trunks using the CorNet-N (from Section
3.12.4) or QSig (Section 3.12.19) networking protocol.
In addition to the capability described here, to network HiPath 3000 systems using
CorNet-N and QSig, for V1.0 and later you can also use IP Networking (HiPath
3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300). HiPath
HG1500 makes this possible. For information on the startup and configuration, refer
to the HiPath HG1500 Administration Instructions.
CorNet-N is a data protocol from Siemens AG for digital communication between HiPath 3000 and Hicom 300 E and other private communications servers from
Siemens AG.
QSig is a data protocol for digital communication between HiPath 3000 and Hicom
300 E and the communications servers of other manufacturers.
The HiPath 3000 systems (HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500) can
be connected to other Communications Servers to form private networks. The system
can use analog tie lines (TIEL board in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700) or digital T1
services (TST1 in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500, TMST1 in HiPath 3750 and HiPath
3700) to support network call traffic. Varying degrees of network functionality, from
basic call routing to transparent user features, can be achieved, depending on the signaling format. Software features for basic connectivity through advanced CorNet-N
ISDN networking come standard in the basic HiPath 3000 system.
For examples of maximum possible distances from the CO for CorNet-N direct networking, refer to Table 2-42 on page 2-97.
Satellite Tie Line
HiPath 3000 systems can be configured for basic call handling between other communications systems supporting common E&M signalling protocol. The HiPath 3000
LCR features can be implemented to support a coordinated dialing plan in simple network designs. The HiPath 3000 support off-premise call forwarding over these types
of tie-trunk circuits and can be used to route inbound call traffic to remote answering
destinations.
While this simple network design does not afford feature transparency, economical
call routes using analog E&M tie lines or standard T1/D4 tie lines can be used. The
HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 do not support an analog tie-line interface card.
3-294
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
●
CorNet-N call traffic and signalling (for U.S. Only)
CorNet-N is a point-to-point (peer-to-peer) protocol and requires an ISDN link for
signalling and call traffic between connected systems. A standard clear channel
T1 facility is required between systems to support the CorNet-N application. No
ISDN signalling or ISDN feature of the public-switched telephone network
(PSTN) is used in a CorNet-N network.
CorNet-N call information (digitized voice or data) is handled over 64-Kbps B
channels. The call setup and call intelligence are communicated between systems over an associated D channel. This technique is called Message-Oriented
Signaling/Common Channel Signaling (CCS/MOS). A T1/DS0 facility used for
CorNet-N ISDN calls has a capacity of 23 B channels + 1 D channel. Multiple T1
links can be configured in a logical call route using the system’s LCR feature.
●
CorNet-N and international links
The HiPath 3000 can be configured at installation to be used in either US mu-law
or international a-law digital PCM formats. Digital T1 interface cards cannot be
used in a system defined for a-law use and E1 cards cannot be used in a mu-law
system. External transmission equipment capable of handling both a-law and
mu-law formats is required to support matching the two international PCM formats. Exchange carriers handling international traffic can often supply this service.
Whereas T1 interfaces offer 24 channels (23+1) at a total bandwidth of 1.544
Mhz, an E1 interface (also known internationally as an S2 interface) provides 32
channels (31+1) with a total bandwidth of 2.048 Mhz.
In an international network between a T1 equipped system and an E1 equipped
system, only 23 B channels can be used. The remaining 9 channels of the E1
interface are not used.
●
CorNet-N on fractional T1
The HiPath 3000 support fractional T1 service, which can be used in a CorNetN, PRI or analog T1 (non-ISDN) environment. Any of the B channels that have
been disabled in the HiPath 3000 configuration can be used for other T1 applications. External multiplexing equipment is required to provide mapping of the alternate application’s T1 channels into the unused B channels of the CorNet-N
link. (Refer to CorNet-N Configuration and Sales Positioning guides).
●
CorNet-N and data applications
ISDN data applications are supported over CorNet-N links using the STLS4,
STMD8, ILAN card and ISDN adapter.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-295
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
●
CorNet-N network topologies
The HiPath 3000 can be configured in point-to-point, star, or mesh network configurations, with other HiPath 3000 systems (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3750 only)
and/or with other Siemens ICN systems. (Refer to CorNet-N Configuration and
Sales Positioning guides for details).
●
CorNet-N network and HiPath 3000 system feature compatibility
All the following CorNet-N features are supported between HiPath 3000 systems.
Refer to the CorNet-N Configuration and Sales Positioning guides for complete
feature compatibility between the HiPath 3000 and other Siemens Communications Systems.
3.12.1 Satellite CS Capability
Definition
Users can connect the HiPath 3000 system to an existing communications server
(CS) as a satellite CS and use the functions of the second CS.
Tie trunk traffic can be processed via direct connections between the CSs as well as
via public trunks and dedicated lines. In addition, with HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700,
users can process tie trunk traffic via E&M trunks.
Basic interconnection of two communication systems can be formed by connecting
analog station interfaces from one system to loop start analog trunks of the other system. This type of connection provides only basic connectivity between systems. To
support such connectivity, the HiPath 3000 provide a configurable trunk flash which
changes the flash from a ground signal to an open loop to signal the other system.
The Assistant T parameter CO or PBX or the HiPath 3000 Manager E Trunk Type parameter changes the flash from long to short.
3-296
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
x
x
x
–
–
Digital
trunk
board or
analog
tie trunk
board
Digital
trunk
board
Digital
trunk
board
–
–
–
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Closed numbering
With closed numbering, trunk group codes must be deleted for CorNet trunk groups, although trunk access codes
remain.
Least cost routing
(LCR)
In a CS with CO access, LCR must be active to handle
transit calls.
CorNet-N trunk
groups
On CorNet-N trunk groups that can seize a trunk in the remote CS, the second discriminating digit in the trunk group
must be entered from the remote CS.
Analog trunks
On analog external trunks, a flash (not ground) signals the
main CS.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-297
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.2 Tie Trunk Via TIEL
Definition
The TIEL (Tie Line Ear & Mouth) board supports tie traffic with other private communication systems and contains four two-way analog tie trunks with E&M signaling for
HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700. Each tie trunk has eight connections: two incoming
speech paths, two outgoing speech paths, two incoming signaling paths, and two outgoing signaling paths.
The speech paths can switch between four-wire and two-wire modes. To ensure highquality transmission, a four-wire connection should be used for analog networks. The
advantage of providing separate speech paths for incoming and outgoing calls is that
it helps maintain call stability (echo). Repeaters in the transmission equipment can
also compensate for attenuation losses.
The E&M signaling paths exchange signals that control connection setup and cleardown. Depending on the requirements of the remote system or the transmission
equipment, you can use different types of interfaces that have a different number of
wires or different potentials.
Before placing a tie trunk in service, you must determine which interface type the two
participating systems should share.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-298
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
–
–
–
–
HW requirements
TIEL
board
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or
later
–
–
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.3 Closed Numbering
Definition
In private networks, users can assign station numbers, trunk access codes, and feature codes according to a customer-defined numbering plan.
HiPath 3000 support both closed and open numbering. If unique extension numbers
are used within the network, any user in the network can call another extension by
dialing its extension number.This is a closed numbering plan.
CorNet-N dial plans support extension numbering. In the CorNet-N network, users
assign unique private extension numbers of up to six digits. This type of numbering
is also called closed numbering.
An open numbering plan is also supported for networks that use a leading digit and
a common system dial plan for each location.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Numbering
Requirement or Condition
Users can change internal numbering only using HiPath
3000 Manager E.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-299
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.4 Toll Restriction with CorNet-N
Definition
HiPath 3000 support satellite CS traffic via CorNet-N. The system can be operated
as a node (CS without CO access, CorNet-N trunk group only), transit node (CS with
at least two CorNet-N trunk groups, no central office), and gateway (CS with CO and
CorNet-N trunk groups).
In addition to the basic call functions (outgoing and incoming calls), the CorNet-N system supports the toll restriction feature.
If users operate the HiPath 3000 in networked environments, the user’s toll restriction
is checked, transmitted, or received in the incoming direction (class-of-service transfer) when a CorNet-N trunk is seized. To a gateway system, the system performs
standard class-of-service toll restrictions for outgoing calls and when an extension
answers.
A station’s toll restriction class of service (COS) is passed from communication server
to communication server within a CorNet-N network. When a call originating in a remote system is destined for an external trunk route, the HiPath 3000 perform COS
checking of the calling party before allowing the call to proceed.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
Restrictions
V1.0 or later
Host/client
(master/slave)
Client
(slave)
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Classes of service
3-300
Requirement or Condition
The following 15 classes of service exist for class-of-service transfer:
Internal access only (0)
●
Outward restricted trunk access (1)
●
Local public network (2-13, including 11 allowed/de●
nied lists)
Unrestricted trunk access (14)
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Classes of service for
two networked systems
When there is an external seizure of a station from the satellite CS (with COS 2-13) over the main CS, the main CS’s
first denied list always does the seizing.
For this reason, keep the first denied line of the main CS
free for the assessment of the stations from the satellite
CS.
The system keeps COS 0, 1 and 14 of the satellite CS.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-301
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.5 Call Detail Recording With Networking
Definition
In a networked environment, each system records call details locally. Networking
does not affect call detail recording in HiPath 3000. Call details continue to be recorded for outgoing calls provided they are transmitted by the main CS. In environments
with satellite CSs without a separate central office, the main CS centrally records call
details that originate within the main CS (call detail recording central [CDRC]).
In addition, CDRC logs call detail information received for incoming calls (for example,
transfer of a toll call from a networked system).
In networked environments, a centralized call accounting device can be used to
record all calls originated or in transit through the hub system.
Each system can only record calls that are routed through its own trunks or transit
calls. A centralized CDR device can be used to collect CDR data from each individual
systems’ RS-232 interface.
CDR data that originates in one node is not transmitted to another network node. The
secondary CDR collecting devices located at each node are typically polled by a main
CDR device located at the main node to collect the stored data. Siemens’ responsibility is limited to the data provided out of the RS-232 port. Integration of external devices must be confirmed with Siemens ICN prior to installation.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Buffer box
Requirement or Condition
If a system in a network has local trunk accesses, a local
buffer box can be used for the call charges.
Call via the trunk gate- If a station in a CS conducts an outgoing call via the CO
way of the remote CS access of the remote CS, the call details that apply to the
CS in which the trunk is seized are output as call type 6 (direct outward dialing).
3-302
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.6 Incoming Call
Definition
CorNet-N handles incoming calls the same way as any other internal calls. Users can
configure digit analysis in the networked system so that they can reach all HiPath
3000 extensions by dialing the prefix.
The extension number corresponds to the external numbering plan and is analyzed
accordingly. When the connection is made, the following information is passed to the
remote CS placing the call:
●
Toll restriction
●
Extension number
●
Station name
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-303
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.7 Consultation Hold/Transfer/Pickup
Definition
When users activate consultation hold between a HiPath 3000 station and a station
in a networked system, the consultation hold is initially set up via a second B channel.
Whenever possible, the connection is set up by path replacement (path replacement
activates after connection). If path replacement is not possible, the connection remains on the second B channel.
When an external call is transferred to a station connected via CorNet-N, the station
number, name, and class of service for the A and C stations are transmitted.
Users can pick up from the networked system if the call is identified as a consultation
call. If the consulted party picks up the call, the request from the main CS causes the
call to be switched in transit, and the system disconnects the consulting party. If the
consulted party disconnects the consultation call, the consultation is automatically reconnected to the last call on hold.
Unscreened transfer is possible to a busy or idle station in a remote node.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-304
Requirement or Condition
Unscreened transfer
Unscreened transfer is possible on a free or busy station in
a networked system.
Call pickup groups
with fractional T1s
If you are using a portion of B channels on a T1 for data
applications (for example, with a data server), you must bar
the data B channels from being used for call pickup
groups. Do this by deselecting the B channel modes incoming and outgoing in HiPath 3000 Manager E.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.8 Recall
Definition
The system initiates a recall if the network cannot perform an unscreened transfer.
The recall applies locally and not network-wide.
In homogeneous HiPath 3000 networks, an unanswered call from one node to another recalls the initiating station in the originating node.
In non-homogeneous networks, an unanswered call to a non-HiPath 3000 system recalls at the transferring system’s intercept position or originator, depending on the
system configuration.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-305
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.9 Call Waiting
Definition
Networked systems handle call waiting the same way as internal call waiting.
Corresponding D channel messages are generated for waiting calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-306
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.10 Distinctive Ringing in the Network
Definition
The calls are evaluated in the network and signaled accordingly.
CorNet-N calls are handled and signaled the same as internal calls.
Distinctive internal and external ring types are provided over CorNet-N.
Network station-to-station calls provide internal ringing patterns, whereas external
trunk calls routed over CorNet-N provide external ringing patterns.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-307
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.11 Callback on Free/Busy
Definition
Users can activate the callback feature across systems. The user interface is the
same as for internal callback. Instead of the internal extension number, the number
of the networked station is stored and displayed.
If an open-numbering scheme is used, this feature only operates in a CorNet-N network of two HiPath 3000 systems, where at least one system is an HiPath 3750 or
HiPath 3700.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-308
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.12 Station Number/Name Display
Definition
In addition to the calling station’s number, HiPath 3000 transmit the calling station’s
name via CorNet-N. When a name is available for incoming calls, the station displays
the name instead of the station number.
This feature supports both uppercase and lowercase letters. In addition, users can
configure whether the telephone display shows the caller’s name or station number.
The HiPath 3000 send both the calling station number and calling station name (if applicable) via the ISDN D channel.
If external and internal calls are routed via CorNet-N to another node, it is necessary
to split the B channels of a T1 span for internal and external traffic. This can lead to
the situation that for certain calls not all 23 B channels are available.
In an incoming call from another node’s ISDN trunk, the calling party’s Caller ID is received on the HiPath 3000 optiset E or optiPoint 500.
An ISDN trunk call transferred or redirected from the HiPath 3000 (either by a station
or by a voice processing device) passes the calling party’s Caller ID to the next node.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Station number suppression
Requirement or Condition
Each user can use the station number suppression function to activate or deactivate station number and name display.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-309
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.13 Call Forwarding With Rerouting
Definition
Calls can be rerouted for call forwarding via CorNet-N to optimize B channel utilization.
For example, station A in CS 1 calls station B in CS 2. Station B then forwards the call
to station C in CS 1. The two B channels between CSs 1 and 2 are released. This
means that the connection is set up directly within CS 1. For this to be possible, both
CSs must activate rerouting.
HiPath 3000 users can forward their incoming internal and/or external calls to users
within their own system, to a node within the private network, or off-site (if the feature
is allowed in the system administration). Call forwarding-no answer is possible using
Call Management pseudo ports in the HiPath 3000 system.
Pseudo numbers are used for identification and steering purposes. A pseudo number
is a call number/DID number assigned to a port not associated to a physical device.
The pseudo numbers are assigned in the Set up station screen (HiPath 3000 Manager E) and can be configured with a name and Call Management steering information.
Pseudo numbers cannot be programmed as Repertory Dial (Repdial) keys on the optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephones. Pseudo numbers can be forwarded using the Associated Services feature code (*83) from a station with the Associated Services authorization flag activated.
Route optimization can be defined in the database as follows:
●
Rerouting is deactivated
●
Reroute only if the route is known
●
Rerouting is always activated
This option is only available for CorNet-N networking, and must be activated in the
same way in both networked systems.
Refer to the CorNet-N Configuration Notes for the proper setting.
3-310
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-311
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.14 Toggle
Definition
The conditions described under Section 3.1.3, Toggle also apply to networked systems. That is, station users can use the Toggle feature to toggle between callers, including those originated or received on CorNet-N call routes.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Call hold
3-312
Requirement or Condition
A station on hold cannot toggle between calls.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.15 Conference
Definition
The conditions described in Section 3.1.6, Conference also apply to networked systems.
Voice station users on the HiPath 3000 can establish internal and external conference
calls using local and CorNet-N call routes as needed. The system limits the number
of conferees in a conference to five. A party in another node connected to the conference via CorNet-N is allowed to add additional parties within its own node using its
own conference circuit. Members of a conference within another node will not be updated with the conference display information (number of conferees in the conference) of the HiPath 3000 system.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Conference
Requirement or Condition
A conference can be set up between voice stations only.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-313
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.16 Central Attendant Console
Definition
A central attendant console supports the switch and recall functions in the network.
A local intercept position can redirect intercepted calls via a networked station (with
call forwarding).
Pseudo numbers can also be entered that are forwarded to a remote system for centralized answering applications. The Associated Service feature must be used to call
forward the pseudo number to the target location.
The console display shows the calling party number if available. There is no indication
specific display for intercept—same display as for incoming external calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-314
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.17 Sharing System Speed Dialing in a Gateway System
Definition
Satellite CSs can share the system speed-dialing destinations in a gateway system.
However, the local telephone directory cannot display the system speed-dialing numbers of the gateway system.
There are some restrictions, depending on the type of system in the network. Refer
to the Configuration Notes prior to installation.
The satellite station user must dial the gateway system’s speed-dialing number. Service code conflicts must not exist between the nodes. The service code is analyzed
via LCR and sent to the destination node
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-315
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.18 Sharing a Central Voice Mail Server
Definition
Users in a networked system can program call forwarding to a central voice mail server. HiPath 3000 stations are informed of calls received by means of the message waiting indication (either the optiset E or optiPoint 500 LED, the optiset E or optiPoint 500
display, or the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 analog telephone’s broken dial tone or
message).
The central voice mail server can be queried in DTMF mode.
In a homogeneous HiPath 3000 networks, the centralized voice mail system must be
located at the HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700 system. Special attention should be taken
during the presales investigation concerning the amount of traffic from all nodes to
the voice mail server. The HiPath 3000 support a maximum of 8 VMIe analog ports
connected from the voice mail server to the HiPath 3750 or HiPath 3700.
With the Siemens PhoneMail system, users can assign one mailbox to up to six independent telephones so that the Message Waiting indication is turned on at all telephones assigned to this mailbox. These telephones can be part of different systems
that are served by the same PhoneMail system. The Plus Feature package is required for this function. The PhoneMail SW level must be 6.3 or above.
If external and internal calls are routed via CorNet-N, it is necessary to split the CorNet-N link B channels for internal and external traffic. This can lead to a situation
where, for certain calls, not all B channels are available.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Follow the configuration guidelines.
3-316
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.19 QSig (Not for U.S.)
Definition
CorNet-N is usually the protocol used for networking HiPath CS’ with each other.
QSig, the cross-vendor signaling protocol, is used for networking HiPath and non-HiPath CS’. In homogeneous networks, HiPath 3000 supports the following basic features.
In QSig environments, you can operate HiPath 3000 as an end node, transit node, or
gateway.
You can use the QSig protocols, which are based on the following specifications:
●
ECMA V1.0 and ECMA V2.0 (for the MWI feature only)
with the partial specifications
– ETS 300172: Basic Call/ECMA 143
– ETS 300239: Generic Functions / ECMA 165
●
ISO partial specifications
– ISO 11572: Basic Call, ID Identifications (CLIP, CLIR, COLP, COLR)
– ISO 13868: Name Identification
– ISO 13869: Call Transfer
– ISO 13870: Call Completion (Call Completion Busy, Call Completion No Reply)
– ISO 13873: Call Forward Unconditional
– ISO 15506: Message Waiting Indication
These networked systems collectively act like a single system, transmitting the following over the S0 trunk:
●
Callback option
●
Station number
●
Name
●
Party category
●
Transit counter
Called parties with toll restriction 0 (no direct trunk access) for a QSig trunk, cannot
answer an incoming QSig call for another station (call pickup, trunk key). However, direct calls and forwarded calls to the B party are possible.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-317
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
Interworking With Other Protocols
●
CorNet-N
All existing features implemented for both CorNet-N and QSig support interworking in the QSig direction and vice-versa. The only exceptions are the callback feature (CCBS/CCNR) and the message waiting indication (MWI) because the message flows between the two protocols and the ones between two nodes are too
different.
●
ETSI
The requirements for interworking between CorNet-N and ETSI apply here as
well.
3.12.19.1 Basic Features
Numbering plan
●
ISDN numbering plan
●
The system does not support a private numbering plan.
Call detail recording
Direct inward dialing (external)
●
In the local system: Same as before.
●
There is no transfer of call charges in transit traffic.
Consultation hold
●
In the local system: Same as before.
●
To remote system:
Consultation calls over a second trunk are possible, that is the calls are switched
from the local system over two B channels, and they can be transferred. When a
user releases the call, the call last placed on hold becomes active.
Callback
3-318
●
Users can activate completion of calls - no reply (CCNR) or completion of calls
to busy subscribers (CCBS) to the remote system. They can activate CCNR if the
other party does not answer or if a call is waiting. They can activate CCBS in the
following situations: The other party is busy with one or multiple calls, engaged
in a consultation call or a conference, or has activated do not disturb.
●
Users cannot set a callback to a call forwarding destination, a member of a group
call or hunt group, a room monitor, or an entrance telephone.
●
Callback calls are deleted manually, when the CS is reset, a trunk fails, a port is
reprogrammed. The same applies to calls from A94B and from B94A.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
Call forwarding
●
The system supports only the CFU (call forwarding unconditional) QSig version.
●
To optimize B channel usage a forwarded call to a telephone of the main PBX is
handled in accordance with the specifications for Call Forwarding/Partial Rerouting. If partial rerouting is rejected, forward switching is used.
●
If HiPath 3000 is a gateway, forward switching is implemented.
Name display
●
Only UPPERCASE letters are transferred. Users can specify whether a transferred name or the caller’s station number is displayed.
3.12.19.2 Central Attendant Position/Attendant Console
This function is available in transit only.
3.12.19.3 Intercept
For operation in networked environments, users can configure an external station
number as the attendant console or intercept position in HiPath 3000. If an intercept
occurs in a CS, based on the locally valid intercept criteria, the call is forwarded to the
external station number programmed in the CS or discarded.
The central attendant console intercepts calls according to the CINT (call interception) QSig specification. The cause of the intercept, which is transferred in encoded
format, is an important item of data.
The attendant always intercepts calls via a second B channel, because problems
could otherwise occur in a network with different CSs.
3.12.19.4 Originator of the Intercept
The dialed digits or the station number of the party originating the intercept can be
sent to the intercept destination as the originator of the intercept.
In the HiPath 3000 systems, users specify only the number of the station where the
intercept originated. In the case of call forwarding and hunt groups, this is the original
station dialed. No information is transferred if the caller dials an incorrect or incomplete number.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-319
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.19.5 Busy Override
An authorized network station (such as the central attendant position or a HiPath
3000 station with override authorization) can override a call being conducted at a
busy station in the network. Users cannot override conference calls in HiPath 3000.
The feature is implemented according to QSig specification CI (call intrusion).
The HiPath 3000 systems handle a busy override according to QSig in a network just
like an internal busy override. This means that every user who is authorized to override busy calls is authorized to do so throughout the network. The override operation
transforms a two-party call into a three-party call.
3.12.19.6 Recall
This feature activates a recall to the originating station in the network, for example if
a transfer was unsuccessful. The feature is implemented according to QSig specification RE (recall).
3.12.19.7 Message Waiting Indication (MWI)
This feature allows you to activate and delete the Mailbox key (callback signaling).
It supports the sending of messages (using the service menu or a code) from the idle,
ringing, busy and talk states, and message reception. You cannot select text messages. Because the protocol does not support the transmission of text information, the
receiving end always receives and displays the “Please call back” message.
A central voice mail server in the QSig network can also initiate a message. In this
case, the name administered for this voice mail server for callback access is displayed. It is not possible to send a message to voice mail.
In the case of Octopus E 300/800, message waiting indication is supported either for
voice mail or for other stations. If the feature is activated for voice mail, it must be deactivated for other stations.
3-320
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.19.8 Central Cross-System Busy Signaling
This feature is supported only in the direction of an Octopus E 300/800 system (A6,
Release 6.3 or later) from Deutsche Telekom AG. The destination of cross-system
busy signaling can only be the central Octopus E 300/800 attendant console (AC).
Systems in the QSig network can report the operating states of selected stations to
the central attendant console of a CS (can be main CS or satellite CS). The following
operating states can be signaled for the telephones:
●
Free
●
Busy internally
●
Busy externally
●
Defective
The numbering plan in this network must be closed and it must be possible to access
the CS via the first administered QSig port on the remote system.
Operating states cannot be transmitted via CSs functioning as gateway or transit
nodes.
3.12.19.9 System Telephone Lock-Reset Code (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
Manufacturer-specific expansions to the QSig protocol (QSig+) allow the individual
telephone lock code of a station networked over QSig+ to be reset to the default value
“00000”.
Initiate the reset with the code “System telephone lock/Reset code” or by selecting
the correct entries in the service menu. The system then prompts you to enter the station number (with the leading trunk group code, if needed)
Requirements for resetting the telephone lock code:
●
The telephone number of the telephone that you are using to initiate the reset
must be entered as a station for “system telephone lock” (system settings).
●
The system must be networked over the QSig+ protocol with the ISO-QSig protocol version.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-321
3000sb3.fm
Features
Networking
3.12.19.10 COS Changeover (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
Manufacturer-specific expansions to the QSig protocol (QSig+) allow you to activate
the telephone lock of a station networked over QSig+ with the “System telephone
lock/COS changeover” feature.
The effects on the telephone are the same as for the individual telephone lock: the
trunk access is reduced to the COS set system-wide (default = 1).
Initiate the COS changeover with the code “System telephone lock” or by selecting
the correct entry in the service menu. Then the system prompts you to enter the station number (with the leading trunk group code, if needed)
!
"
#
Requirements for COS changeover:
●
The telephone number of the telephone that you are using to initiate the
changeover must be entered as a station for “system telephone lock” (system
settings).
●
The system must be networked over the QSig+ protocol with the ISO-QSig protocol version.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-322
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13 Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.1 Silent Reversal at Start and End of Call (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Many countries use silent reversal to mark the beginning and end of outgoing calls
on loop start trunks. These criteria are used for time recording within central call detail
recording. This is particularly important when exact tracking of call charges is required (as in a hotel).
The feature can be configured per circuit.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
HW requirements
x
–
–
–
–
V1.0 or later
–
–
Loop start trunk
–
–
TML8W
SW requirements
General requirements
x
TLA2/4/8 + GEE12
TLA4R
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Silent Reversal
Requirement or Condition
In countries where silent reversal is not signaled at the end
of a call, the call duration is determined by the calling party
hanging up the phone.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-323
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.2 Advice of Charges at Station During Call (AOC-D) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Call charge information can be recorded on both analog and digital trunks.
Call charge evaluation for connections on loop start trunks is performed using the call
charge pulses transmitted from the trunk in countries where call charge pulses are
used.
In the case of digital trunks, the display on the user’s telephone shows the call detail
information received during an external call with the “AOC” (advice of charges) feature, assuming that the carrier provides this information.
The following types of AOC are supported in the public network:
●
AOC-S - Advice of charges at call setup
–
Call charge display on the telephone is the same as for AOC-D.
–
The charges are not displayed if the call was not fully set up or if HiPath 3000
is unable to evaluate the call detail information of a service provider.
●
AOC-D = Advice of charges during call
●
AOC-E = Advice of charges at end of call
As long as the user has not initiated another action, the final call charges for a call are
displayed for a specific period of time at the end of a call and then added up in call
charge memory.
Call charge pulses are converted to monetary amounts on the basis of the call charge
factor defined as a currency amount (including any extra charges that may apply) per
call charge unit or pulse (refer to Section 3.13.11, Call-Charge Display With Currency
(Not for U.S.)).
3-324
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
x
x
Loop start:
GEE8;
optiset E
or optiPoint 500
telephone
with display
SW requirements
x
Loop start:
GEE12/16/50;
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
V1.0 or later
General requirements
Call charge information from public network
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Analog telephone
On analog telephones, call charge pulses can be updated
using a relay and a call charge counter.
Loop start
Loop start trunks require a separate call metering receiving equipment board.
Transfer
In the case of AOC-D, the station to which a call is transferred receives only those call charges that have accrued
since the transfer.
Recall
If a call is returned as a recall for unscreened transfer, the
overall amount is displayed and calculated.
Toggle
Call charges for the current call are always displayed.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-325
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.3 Call Duration Display on Telephone
Definition
A call duration display is provided for external calls (outgoing or incoming) when no
call charge information is available.
The starting point for call detail recording is set for analog trunks by means of a timer
(5 seconds after end of dialing). The timer used is Artificial end-of-selection.
In the case of digital trunks, recording is started when the call is received (at connect).
The Call Duration is displayed on the display line above the feature prompts. The format is HH:MM:SS.
The dialed number is displayed until the Connect message is received (ISDN trunks)
or until the end of the pseudo-answer timer. Post-dialed digits are displayed for approximately 5 seconds, then the Call Duration display is returned to the display. When
the user goes on-hook, the idle state display is presented: Current time and date.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
S0 / cordless telephone
3-326
Requirement or Condition
The system does not support the call duration display feature on S0 and cordless telephones (not for U.S.).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.4 Call Detail Recording at Station (CDRS) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
●
Every optiset E, optiPoint 500, analog telephone, S0 (or MSN), and cordless telephone in the system has two storage devices:
–
A call charge summation memory (call detail memory)
At the end of an external call, the system adds the final charges to the charges already stored in the call detail memory on the station. optiset E and optiPoint 500 users with a display can display their current charges by entering
a code.
–
An individual call memory
The system adds up the charges incurred during a call in this memory, even
if the call consists of individual call segments, as in the case of the toggle feature. At the beginning of a new call, the individual call memory is reset to 0.
The contents of the individual call memory appear first. A short time later, the
contents of the cumulative call charge memory are displayed.
●
You can use the system telephone (phone with programming authorization) as a
charge display station. The user of this station can use the system administration
to:
–
Display the cumulative call charge memory for one station.
–
Display the cumulative call charge memory for all stations (organized by station numbers).
–
Reset the cumulative call charge memory memory for a specific station.
Call charge pulses are converted to monetary amounts on the basis of the call charge
factor defined as a currency amount (including any extra charges that may apply) per
call charge unit or pulse (refer to Section 3.13.11, Call-Charge Display With Currency
(Not for U.S.)).
From the system telephone, you can print the latest CDRS data on a printer connected to the V.24 interface, thereby priting the cumulative call charges for all stations connected to the system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-327
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
CDRS Data Output to UP0/E Port
You can also output the CDRS data to a UP0/E port. To do this, an optiset E control
adapter, to which you can attach a printer or terminal, must be connected to this port.
The system supports only one adapter per call data output. You can configure the output as follows:
●
On the communications server, set call data output to adapter.
●
Enter the telephone number.
●
If only one optiset E control adapter is connected, you can choose any slot in the
telephone.
●
If two optiset E control adapters are connected, set the right adapter to Printer
Pipe Mode for call data output. The other adapter is used in API1 or API2 mode.
●
The transmission rate is permanently set to 9600 baud.
GET Data Output via LAN Interface
You can transfer CDRS data to external applications via the LAN interface (Ethernet)
(for more information, refer to Chapter 4).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
General requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
Loop start:
GEE8;
optiset E
or optiPoint 500
telephone
with display
x
Loop start:
GEE12/16/50
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
V1.0 or later
Call detail information from the public network
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Adapter in API2 mode If an optiset E control adapter is in API2 mode, you cannot
switch it to Printer Pipe mode.
3-328
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.5 Call Detail Recording, Attendant (CDRA) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
The CDRA feature enables you to selectively record the call details for incoming and
outgoing voice calls for which at least one call charge pulse has accumulated.
Call charge pulses are converted to monetary amounts on the basis of the call charge
factor defined as a currency amount (including any extra charges that may apply) per
call charge unit or pulse (refer to Section 3.13.11, Call-Charge Display With Currency
(Not for U.S.)).
If a V.24 (RS-232) port was programmed for CDRA in the customer database, the call
details are output to the printer. If the telephone is an optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display that has a programmed CDRA display key, the charges are also
signaled on the station.
CDRA Data Output to UP0/E Port
You can also output the CDRA data to a UP0/E port. To do this, an optiset E control
adapter, to which you can attach a printer or terminal, must be connected to this port.
The system supports only one adapter per call data output. You can configure the output as follows:
●
On the communications server, set call data output to adapter.
●
Enter the telephone number.
●
If only one optiset E control adapter is connected, you can choose any slot in the
telephone.
●
If two optiset E control adapters are connected, set the right adapter to Printer
Pipe Mode for call data output. The other adapter is used in API1 or API2 mode.
●
The transmission rate is permanently set to 9600 baud.
CDRA provides the following data at the end of each call segment:
●
Internal station number or name of the station.
●
The external station number dialed (for outgoing calls) or the station number of
the calling party (for incoming calls).
●
Time (beginning of call) in hours, minutes, and seconds.
●
Call duration in hours, minutes, and seconds.
●
Amount due in local currency.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-329
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
The data is entered at the beginning of each call segment and at the end of the call.
Up to 20 call segments can be logged simultaneously. This data is stored in the system until it is output to the printer and deleted from the attendant console using a procedure. If an overflow occurs, the oldest entry is overwritten first. The stored data is
lost if there is a power failure.
Signals on the CDRA display key:
●
LED lights up continuously:
New CDRA call details that have not yet been displayed are waiting.
●
LED off:
Either CDRA call details that have been displayed at least once are waiting, or no
entry was made.
Configuring a station as a pay phone (automatic CDRA):
If an internal station is configured as a pay phone, all chargeable calls are automatically identified as CDRA calls. A call that is transferred to another station from the pay
phone is logged as a CDRC or CDRA call, depending on how the pay phone is configured.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
(call detail recording)
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
Loop start:
GEE8
x
x
x
x
Loop start:
GEE12/16/50
–
–
HW requirements
(telephone)
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
General requirements
Call details from the public network
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-330
Requirement or Condition
Call charges
Each call segment is assigned to the user who picked up
the segment.
Conference
In a conference, each external connection is recorded separately as a single segment.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Subject
Pay phone
Requirement or Condition
A user can always display the call charges of only those
call segments which were conducted from the assigned
pay phones.
Adapter in API2 mode If an optiset E control adapter is in API2 mode, you cannot
switch it to Printer Pipe mode.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-331
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.6 Call Detail Recording Per Trunk (CDRT) (Not for U.S.)
Definition
The system has a cumulative memory function for call charge amounts accrued per
trunk. One memory area is permanently assigned to each trunk.
A system telephone can display and delete the cumulative memory via the system
administration. Call charge deletion requires confirmation. The current CDRT data
can be printed out via system administration. The printout contains a list of CDRT
data for all trunks connected to the system. The current CDRT data can be printed
out on a printer connected to one of the V.24 (RS-232) interfaces on the system.
Call charge pulses are converted to monetary amounts on the basis of the call charge
factor defined as a currency amount (including any extra charges that may apply) per
call charge unit or pulse (refer to Section 3.13.11, Call-Charge Display With Currency
(Not for U.S.)).
CDRT Data Output to UP0/E Port
You can also output the CDRT data to a UP0/E port. To do this, an optiset E control
adapter, to which you can attach a printer or terminal, must be connected to this port.
The system supports only one adapter per call data output. You can configure the output as follows:
●
On the communications server, set call data output to adapter.
●
Enter the telephone number.
●
If only one optiset E control adapter is connected, you can choose any slot in the
telephone.
●
If two optiset E control adapters are connected, set the right adapter to Printer
Pipe Mode for call data output. The other adapter is used in API1 or API2 mode.
●
The transmission rate is permanently set to 9600 baud.
CDRT Data Output via LAN Interface
You can transfer CDRT data to external applications via the LAN interface (Ethernet)
(for more information, refer to Chapter 4).
3-332
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
x
Loop start:
GEE8
optiset E
or optiPoint 500
telephone
with display
SW requirements
General requirements
x
x
Loop start:
GEE12/16/50
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
x
x
optiset E or optiPoint
500 telephone with
display
V1.0 or later
Call details from the public network
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Adapter in API2 mode If an optiset E control adapter is in API2 mode, you cannot
switch it to Printer Pipe mode.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-333
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.7 Account Code (ACCT)
Definition
The account code feature is used together with central call detail recording (CDRC).
This feature enables you to assign call charges for a specific project to an account
code so that call charges for specific projects can be printed out.
Users can enter an ACCT from any station.
ACCT offers two procedures and three options:
Procedures:
●
Mandatory ACCT:
Users must enter an ACCT before the start of a call (after a trunk group is seized).
For incoming calls, the ACCT entry is optional. The system applies the ACCT according to the option selected. If least cost routing is active, a flag in the dial plan
signals that you need to enter an ACCT after the access code. The system treats
this input as a “mandatory ACCT”.
ENB
LCR Active
LCR Inactive
Mandatory Dial Plan
(35-8-3)
Mandatory ACCT TG Set
ACCT requested
ACCT requested
SSD
ISD
Redial
Caller list
DSS key
A mandatory ACCT can be defined in the dial plan (LCR).|
●
3-334
Optional ACCT:
Users can enter an optional ACCT from any telephone before the start of a call.
During an incoming or outgoing call, users can enter the ACCT from Upn telephones only. You can enter an ACCT during a call from optiset E entry, optiset E
basic, and optiPoint 500 entry telephones only if the ACCT feature was programmed on a key or if automatic DSS system-wide has been turned off.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Options:
●
ACCT not checked:
The system does not check for an ACCT, which means you can enter an 11-digit
ACCT. If the ACCT is less than 11 digits long, press # to mark the end of the procedure. If the ACCT is 11 digits long, you can dial another number immediately
afterward (depending on the option, you need to enter the trunk group code or
the station number).
On analog (DP) and ISDN telephones, the “not checked” option can be used only
if the ACCT is 11 digits long. Otherwise, the system will not complete dialing. You
cannot use the # key or the substitution code to mark the end of input on these
telephones.
●
ACCT list checked:
The system checks the ACCT against a list of verifiable ACCTs and accepts only
valid entries. You can enter 11-digit ACCTs in the list. After entering a valid ACCT,
you can dial another number immediately (depending on the option, you need to
enter the trunk group code or the station number). Do not press # to mark the end
of the input. The system rejects invalid ACCTs by outputting a negative confirmation tone.
●
Number of ACCT digits checked:
The system checks an ACCT entry only to determine the number of digits. The
number of digits (11 max.) to be checked is set in the system. After the system
checks the number of ACCT digits, you can dial another number immediately (depending on the option, you need to enter the trunk group code or the station number).
Account codes are not printed out of call detail recording (CDRC) if the RS-232 output
is connected directly to a printer because the printer format does not have a sufficient
number of columns. However, if a call-accounting device is used, the compressed format of CDRC will include the account code information.
The ACCT is assigned to all subsequent parts (even if transferred or forwarded to another station) of the current call for CDRC.
There are 1000 possible account code entries; only digits 0-9 are allowed in an account code number.
If an optiset E or optiPoint 500 user finds that during a call the current account code
applied to a call is incorrect or that a different account code is needed, the user can
enter a different code number. The system will overwrite the currently flagged account
code. CDRC sends a call record after each segment; therefore, previously completed
call segments will be identified with the old account code number.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-335
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
The non-verified and forced parameters determine, per trunk group, whether an account code is optional (non verified) or mandatory (forced). There are 16 possible
trunk groups for the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3500 systems, and eight for the HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300 system. The default setting is
non-verified (optional).
If you select forced for a trunk group, all stations using that trunk group are required
to use account codes to dial out. If you want some users to use account codes and
other users not to use account codes, you need to program different trunk groups.
With the Check number of characters option, the contents of the account code number are not checked. You determine how many digits are permitted by using the dropdown list box Characters to be checked in HiPath 3000 Manager E, or Code Length
in Assistant T. The number of digits checked can be from one to eleven digits.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Number of ACCTs in
the system
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Max. length of ACCT
11
11
11
11
11
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-336
Requirement or Condition
DISA, external CF,
callback, transit
The system does not query the mandatory ACCT.
Electronic notebook
(ENB)
You can program ACCT code + ACCT + station number in
the ENB.
Conference
An ACCT entered during a conference with external station is assigned to all participating calls and trunks.
Redial
For V1.2 or later, an ACCT entered can also be stored in
redial memory. This requires that you set the appropriate
system-wide flag (refer to Section 3.6.1, Last Number Redial (LNR)).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Least cost routing
(LCR)
Mandatory ACCT is possible with or without LCR.
Telephones
Users of telephones without displays must dial the seizure
code after the ACCT.
On system telephones with displays, a prompt to enter the
ACCT appears on the screen.
S0 telephones
If the unchecked ACCT option is selected on S0 telephones, you must always enter the full number of digits
(you cannot press #).
If the ACCT is checked, or a fixed number of digits is entered, the system detects the end of the ACCT.
ACCT while on a call
Only optiset E and optiPoint 500 users can enter an account code while engaged in a call.
When to enter ACCT
You can enter an account code from any type of terminal
(optiset E, optiPoint 500, analog) before the call begins
(before line seizure). Only an optiset E or optiPoint 500
telephone (includes optiClient Attendant) can enter an account code during an incoming or outgoing external call.
No check option
This option is not possible if there are trunk groups flagged
with the forced (mandatory) entry procedure. That is, the
parameter forced and the option No check are mutually exclusive.
Invalid entry
If the ACCT entry is incorrect, the user sees the display Invalid entry and the call is dropped.
Non-display telephones
If an account code is required, the user hears silence after
dialing the trunk group access code. If the user does not
dial an account code within 30 seconds (this timer is not
variable), the user receives a busy tone, and the call is
dropped. If the correct entry is made, confirmation tone
(three short bursts of tone) is heard and the user can proceed with dialing.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-337
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.8 Call Detail Recording Central (CDRC)
Definition
The HiPath 3000 can transmit consecutive call detail recording central (CDRC) information for each call segment completed or for each incoming call to a connected device. The device is normally a PC for analyzing the received data or a printer.
In V1.2 and later, call data records can be recorded for external calls that were not
completed. For example, this gives the party calling proof that the destination station
did not accept the attempted call (marked in the output log with the call time
“00:00:00”). The “CDRC outgoing without connection” feature applies to digital external traffic using ISDN and CorNet-N/Qsig and to all stations. With analog external traffic (loop start), a call data record is always recorded, no matter whether “CDRC outgoing without connection” has been configured or not.
Call charge pulses are converted to monetary amounts on the basis of the call charge
factor defined as a currency amount (including any extra charges that may apply) per
call charge unit or pulse (refer to Section 3.13.11, Call-Charge Display With Currency
(Not for U.S.)).
The following options are available for exporting the data to an external output device:
3-338
●
Application programming interface (V.24) (RS-232)
CDRC data is exported to call detail recording applications such as Teledata.
●
PC attendant console port
Users can also forward the CDRC data to a optiClient Attendant (PC attendant
console port). This transfers the call data to the Charge.dat file, which is created
or updated whenever a new record is entered. You can use software to evaluate
this data. The PC attendant console supports the optiset E control adapter, optiset E data adapter, and UP0/E card.
●
UP0/E port
An optiset E control adapter, to which you can attach a printer or PC, must be
connected to the UP0/E port. The system supports only one adapter per call data
output. You can configure the output as follows:
–
On the communications server, set call data output to adapter.
–
Enter the telephone number.
–
If only one optiset E control adapter is connected, you can choose any slot
in the telephone.
–
If two optiset E control adapters are connected, set the right adapter to Printer Pipe Mode for call data output. The other adapter is used in API1 or API2
mode.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
–
●
The transmission rate is permanently set to 9600 baud.
LAN interface (Ethernet)
CDRC data can be exported to external applications via the LAN interface (Ethernet) (for more information, refer to Chapter 4).
The CDRC output can be in two different formats:
●
Compressed format (via V.24 / via LAN) for PC or call charge computer
The system outputs all data (including ACCT) without separating spaces, without
headers, and without form feed. Call charge pulses, call charge amounts or arithmetic units are output.
●
Long format for printer
The system outputs all data (except ACCT) separated by spaces, with header (in
the language selected for the system) and form feed. The call charge amount is
output.
The following rules apply to the line format:
●
The carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF) control characters are transmitted at
the end of each record.
●
Data not supplied and unused fields are filled with spaces.
●
In compressed format, the data output is consecutive. No form feed (FF) is transmitted.
●
In long format, each page contains a one-line header followed by a blank line. After 62 characters are printed, a form feed automatically executes.
The output contains the following information:
●
Date (at end of call), 8 characters
●
Time (at end of call), 8 characters
●
Number of seized trunk, 3 characters
●
Internal station number (max. 6 digits)
●
Incoming ring duration
●
Call duration, 5 characters
●
External station number (up to 25 digits if available)
●
Call charge pulse/amount, 11 characters (blank in U.S.)
●
Additional information (such as incoming call, outgoing call, transferred call, conference, DISA, call setup charges), 2 characters
The following data is always compressed prior to output:
●
ACCT (up to 11 digits)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-339
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
●
MSN used (up to 11 digits for multi-device connections)
●
LCR access code (trunk access code, 6 digits)
●
LCR route used (path table, 2 digits)
●
Additional data in U.S.:
–
PRI Nodal Service
–
PRI WATS band
–
PRI Carrier Identification Code
Information element—contains the following call information:
●
Incoming connection, voice/3.1khz audio
●
Outgoing connection, voice/3.1kHz audio.
●
Incoming connection, other services
●
Outgoing connection, other services
●
Incoming connecting forwarded
●
Outgoing connection forwarded
●
Int/ext/ext conference with incoming connection/transit through external transfer
●
Conference with outgoing connection/transit through external transfer
●
Outgoing connection via call forwarding to external destination
Call information is output immediately when an incoming call is received—only used
in external applications.
The above information elements have a special designation if DISA was involved in
the call.
Options
3-340
All fields are predefined and cannot be changed except for the options mentioned
in this section.
●
The last four digits of the destination number can be suppressed in the call
record. If selected, the last four spaces are filled with the symbol ?.
●
The Call Duration field can be suppressed from the record. If selected, this field
is blank.
●
Incoming calls can be recorded. The default value is No (only outgoing calls are
recorded.
●
A call record is started as soon as an incoming call starts ringing into the system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
●
Other configurable parameters: which RS-232 port is to be used for the CDRC
output and the baud rate (2400, 9600, or 19200).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
SW requirements
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
General requirements
Printer, call charge computer
Number of calls buffered
300
150
50
50
50
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
PC/printer failure,
buffer full
If the connected device fails, some records are buffered in
the system and transmitted when the device is reactivated.
If the buffer is full, all additional data records are lost.
Timer for analog
trunks
A system pseudo-answer timer (Artificial End-of-Dial) is
used when the call is placed over analog trunks without answer supervision to determine the beginning of the call
record
CDRC outgoing without connection
No logging takes place
for call attempts that are not allowed (LCR, denied
●
lists).
for premature termination of the call attempt.
●
Charges before connect
If charges arise even before the connection is made (such
as occurs in Austria), these are recorded, regardless of
whether or not “CDRC outgoing without connection” has
been selected.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-341
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Output formats
●
Compressed Output Format for Call Details – Output via Application Programming Interface (V.24) (RS-232)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Date (8 characters)
|
2 Time (8)
|
|
3 Trunk (3)
|
|
| 4 Internal station number (6)
|
|
| |
5 Ring duration (5)
|
|
| |
|
6 Call duration (8)
|
|
| |
|
|
7 Station number (25)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
8 Call charge pulses (11) (blank in U.S.)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
9 Information element (2)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| 10 ACCT (11)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
11 MSN (11)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
12 Seizure code (5)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
13 LCR route (2)
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
| ...
|
|
| |
|
|
|
|
| |
|
|
|
...
V
V
V V
V
V
V
V
V V
V
V
V
11.12.0008:23:23 4
16
00:05:2302317324856
12 2
902725 841
(1)
11.12.0009:12:45 3
18
00:01:23834756
34 212345678901
2
(2)
11.12.0009:25:34 2
1100:34
1
(3)
11.12.0010:01:46 1
12
00:12:5383726639046287127384
5 2
11.12.0010:03:42 2
14
05:42:4338449434444495598376
245 2
11.12.0010:23:24 2
15
00:02:221234567890123412????
83 2
(4)
11.12.0011:12:45 3
18
00:01:23834756
34 2
12.12.0012:23:34 3
1200:1500:03:12
1
(5)
12.12.0012:23:50 4
11
00:03:583844733399
7 2
12.12.0013:23:54 3
17
00:02:233844733399
8 5
(6)
12.12.0014:05:24 3
18
00:01:23834756
31 2
12.12.0014:38:43 2
12
00:03:242374844
63 2
(7a)
12.12.0014:43:33 3
12
00:00:255345545556
5 2
(7b)
12.12.0014:44:12 2
12
00:12:122374844
12 8
(7c)
12.12.0014:44:12 3
12
00:12:125345545556
10 8
(7d)
12.12.0014:56:24 2
12
00:23:462374844
84 2
(7e)
13.12.0009:43:52 1
5
00:01:0539398989983
76 4
(8)
14.12.0012:23:34 1
600:1400:02:3427348596872347569036
3
(9)
** 100 calls lost **
(10)
15.12.0009:44:34 4
15
00:02:12189????
23 2
15.12.0009:56:33 3
14
00:05:451283394495
28 2
15.12.0012:20:26 1
12
0230298007766
0
(11a)
15.12.0012:23:34 1
1200:3400:02:340230298007766
1
(11b)
15.12.0013:43:25 3
15
00:05:2408972212345
1
(12a)
15.12.0013:43:25 4
15
00:05:240231471154321
74 9
(12b)
15.12.0013:45:28 4
18
0230298007252
0
(13a)
15.12.0013:45:28 4
32
0230298007252
0
(13a)
15.12.0013:45:28 4
16
0230298007252
0
(13a)
15.12.0013:46:18 4
1600:50
0230298007252
1
(13b)
15.12.0013:49:28 4
16
00:00:0002317324856
2
(14)
01.01.0000:00:00 8
23 2
(15)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3-342
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Explanation of the sample entries shown on page 3-342:
(1)
Outgoing connection from stn 16 on trunk 4 using the MSN “902725”. End of
call at 8:23:23 on 12/11/00. Duration of the call: 5 minutes, 23 seconds.
Called number: 02317324856. Accrued call charge pulses (blank in U.S.):
12. The seizure code “841” was used for call setup.
(2)
Outgoing connection with 11-digit account code (ACCT) “12345678901”.
Route “2” was used for LCR.
(3)
Unanswered incoming call without station number (missing origin address,
active station number suppression CLIR at calling station).
(4)
Outgoing connection with suppression of the last 4 digits.
(5)
Incoming connection with ringing and call duration.
(6)
Forwarded call.
(7)
Int/ext/ext conference:
(7a) Stn 12 sets up a first external call on trunk 2 (“2374844”),
(7b) Stn 12 sets up a second external call on trunk 3 (“5345545556”),
(7c) Stn 12 is involved in a conference with trunk 2 and
(7d) with trunk 3.
(7e) Trunk 3 drops out of the conference. The call on trunk 2 is treated like a
normal outgoing call.
(8)
Outgoing connection (other services).
(9)
Incoming connection (other services).
(10)
Loss message: 100 records were lost.
Due to a problem such as the following:
Connected device is turned off or suffers a power failure
●
Printer is out of paper
●
Printer is offline
●
Printer has a paper jam
●
CDRC output is interrupted by CDB output
●
Interface cable is defective or incorrect
●
In these or similar cases, the call records accumulated during this time are
buffered in the system. The first 300 (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700), 150 (HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500) or 50 (HiPath 3350, HiPath 3300 and HiPath
3250 [not for U.S.]) records can be buffered.
Additional records are only counted by the system and then discarded. If the
connection can be restored to the connected device, a loss message indicating the number of lost records (that is,100 calls lost) is issued after the buffered records are output.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-343
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3-344
(11)
Incoming call with transmitted caller station number:
(11a) Caller list: When the call arrives, an information line is immediately output indicating the date, time, trunk, station number, incoming external station
number (if available), and information element “0” (used, for example, with a
PC: start database search -> message appears on station’s monitor).
(11b) Station 12 accepted the call after a ringing duration of 34 seconds. This
line is output at the end of the call.
(12)
Call forwarding with an external destination:
(12a) Incoming call for station 15 on trunk 3 with transmitted station number,
no ringing duration due to call forwarding (see 12b),
(12b) Call forwarded (12a) to trunk 4 for station number 0231471154321, 74
call charge pulses (not for U.S.) have accrued for the forwarded call.
(13)
Incoming call to subscriber group (stations 18, 32, and 16):
(13a) The three entered stations are called simultaneously; they are listed in
the order in which they were entered in the group (the second station is listed
first).
(13b) The call was not accepted by any group member. After the call has
ended, a line is output indicating the ringing duration for the last called or entered station.
(14)
Outgoing connection attempt (CDRC outgoing without connection) from Stn
16 on line 4 at 13:49:28 (1:49:28 p.m.) on December 15, 2000. Number
called: 02317324856.
(15)
Output after a power failure or reset: 23 call detail units on trunk 8 were
present before the power failure.
When a power failure or reset occurs, the call charges accrued for each trunk
are stored in nonvolatile system memory (CDRT).
The system checks for consistency between the output and internally stored
data following a power failure or system restart. The system also checks to
determine whether call charges are still stored that have not yet been output
via the V.24 (RS-232) interface. If this is the case, the system outputs a data
line using the format illustrated in the example (15) for each affected trunk:
(output does not include station number).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
●
Compressed Output Format for Call Details – Output via LAN Interface
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 Date (8 characters)
|
2 Time (8)
|
|
3 Trunk (3)
|
|
| 4 Internal station number (6)
|
|
| | 5 Ring duration (5)
|
|
| | | 6 Call duration (8)
|
|
| | | |
7 Station number (25)
|
|
| | | |
|
8 Call charge pulses (11) (blank in U.S.)
|
|
| | | |
|
| 9 Information element (2)
|
|
| | | |
|
| | 10 ACCT (11)
|
|
| | | |
|
| | |
11 MSN (11)
|
|
| | | |
|
| | |
|
12 Seizure code (5)
|
|
| | | |
|
| | |
|
|
13 LCR route (2
|
|
| | | |
|
| | |
|
|
| ...
|
|
| | | |
|
| | |
|
|
|
...
V
V
V V V V
V
V V V
V
V
V
13.12.99;08:23:23;4;16;;00:05:23;02317324856;12;2;12345678901;902725;841;;
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Call detail records can be output via a LAN interface using two different settings:
DOS mode (carriage return (CR), line feed (LF)) = default or UNIX mode (line
●
feed (LF)) at the end of a call data record.
Separators (“;” = default or “|”) between the logical elements of a call data
●
record; the record is no longer position-oriented.
Table 3-10
Field
position
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 1 of 7)
Fields
Definition
(V.24 output only)
Number of Orientation
characters
1
1 to 8
Date at end of call: DD.MM.YY
(DD = day, MM = month, YY = year)
8
Left
2
9 to 16
Time at end of call segment or an unanswered incoming call: hh:mm:ss
(hh = hours: value range 00 - 23, mm =
minutes: value range 00 - 59, ss = seconds: value range 00 - 59)
8
Left
3
17 to 19
Trunk: Trunk number
Value range 1 - 120
3
Right
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-345
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 2 of 7)
Fields
Definition
Number of Orientation
characters
(V.24 output only)
4
20 to 25
Station: Internal station number
Value range: 000000 - 999999 (missing
digits are replaced by spaces.)
In the case of unanswered calls, this is the
last station called (as in a hunt group, call
forwarding, call forwarding—no answer).
With group call, this is the last station entered. In the case of answered calls, it is the
station that accepted the call. A programmed SNO prefix (with networking
only) is not output.
If the internal numbering was converted to
a maximum 6-digit numbering plan, the
converted station number is output.
6
Right
5
26 to 30
Ringing duration of an incoming external
call: mm:ss
(mm = minutes: value range 00 - 59, ss =
seconds: value range 00 - 59)
The system displays all incoming calls as
long as the output of ringing duration has
been configured in the system. If a counter
overflow occurs (duration > 59:59), “59:59”
is output. A change in date or time during
system operation can result in this situation.
5
Left
6
31 to 38
Duration of the call or call segment:
hh:mm:ss
(hh = hours: value range 00 to 23,
mm = minutes: value range 00 to 59,
ss = seconds: value range 00 to 59)
If a connection has not been established for
an incoming call, 8 spaces are output here.
If a counter overflow occurs (duration >
23:59:59), “23:59:59” is output.
8
Left
3-346
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
7
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 3 of 7)
Fields
Definition
(V.24 output only)
39 to 63
Dialed or received external station number
(if available):
nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
(n = dialed or received characters: value
range: 0 - 9, *, #, ?)
Output occurs for incoming and outgoing
calls (if available). With outgoing calls, the
dialed station number or, if available, the
station number transmitted via COLP is displayed. In the case of an active data protection function, the last four digits dialed are
replaced by the symbols ????. If no station
number information is available, 25 spaces
are output.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Number of Orientation
characters
25
Left
3-347
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
8
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 4 of 7)
Fields
Definition
Number of Orientation
characters
(V.24 output only)
64 to 74
Call charge pulses for a call segment:
zzzzzzzzzzz (blanks in U.S.)
(z = digit: value range 0 - 9)
You can select either call charge pulses or
call charge amounts.
11
Right
Use the call charge factor, which is defined
as a currency amount (including a mandatory surcharge) for each call charge unit or
pulse, to convert call charge pulses to monetary amounts (see Section 3.13.11, CallCharge Display With Currency (Not for
U.S.)).
Setting the call charge factor:
With calculation detail: call charge fac●
tor = 100% + mandatory surcharge
Without calculation detail: call charge
●
factor = amount/unit + mandatory surcharge
The system records the call charges with or
without a surcharge depending on the calculation detail (Section 3.13.11):
Call Charge
Display
Calculation Detail
With
Without
Pulses
HiPath arithmetic Call charge
units output with- pulses output
out surcharge
without surcharge
Amounts
HiPath arithmetic
units output with
surcharge
Monetary
amounts output
with surcharge
The system outputs the data whenever
charges accrue for the call segment (even
when calls are transferred). If no call
charge information is available, these 11
positions remain blank.
3-348
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
9
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 5 of 7)
Fields
Definition
(V.24 output only)
75 to 76
Information element: additional information
Value range: 0 - 9
Meaning:
1 = Incoming connection (voice/
●
3.1 kHz audio call)
2 = Outgoing connection (voice/
●
3.1 kHz audio call)
3 = Incoming connection (other servic●
es)
4 = Outgoing connection (other servic●
es)
5 = Incoming connection forwarded
●
6 = Outgoing connection forwarded
●
7 = Int/ext/ext conference with incom●
ing connection/transit through external
transfer
8 = Conference with outgoing connec●
tion/transit through external transfer
9 = Outgoing connection via call for●
warding to an external destination
0 = Call information (caller list) is out●
put immediately when an incoming call
is received (output can be suppressed). This can be used, for instance, for a database search by a PC.
When multiple stations are called, a
line is output for each individual station
(without ring duration, call duration, call
detail information).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Number of Orientation
characters
2
Right
3-349
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 6 of 7)
Fields
Definition
Number of Orientation
characters
(V.24 output only)
Continua- 75 to 76
tion of 9
●
●
●
●
●
+20 = Offset as a code for call setup
charges (connection setup without call
duration)
+30 (HiPath 3000 V1.0 and later) = offset as an ID for a follow-up data record
in the case of
– call duration > 24 h.
– contiguous call segments with the
same line/station number (for example, after transferring a call, after clearing a conference).
Can occur in combination with offset
+40.
+40 = Offset for a data record with transit code (by an extension in the subsystem). Can occur in combination
with offset +30.
+50 = Offset as a code for DISA calls
+70 = combination of offsets +30 and
+40
2
Right
10
77 to 87
Account code (ACCT) entered by the user
for this call: ppppppppppp
(p = ACCT digit: value range 0 - 9)
If an ACCT has not been entered, 11 spaces are output. If the ACCT is shorter than
11 digits, the remaining characters are
filled with spaces.
11
Left
11
88 to 98
MSN used: mmmmmmmmmmm
(m = MSN digit: value range 0 - 9)
Information is displayed if the user has programmed an MSN key. Non-existent characters are replaced by spaces. If MSN information is not available (as in a point-topoint connection), 11 spaces are output instead of these characters.
11
Right
12
99 to 103 Seizure code used, access code: bbbbb
(b = digit of the seizure code: value range 0
- 9)
Non-existent characters are replaced by
spaces.
5
Right
3-350
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Table 3-10
Field
position
Compressed Output Format—Explanation of Output Fields (Sheet 7 of 7)
Fields
Definition
(V.24 output only)
Number of Orientation
characters
13
104 to
105
LCR route used: rr
(r = digit of the dialed route: value range 0 9)
Non-existent characters are replaced by
spaces.
2
Right
14
106 to
107
PRI nodal service: nn
(n = digit: value range 0 - 9)
Non-existent characters are replaced by
spaces.
2
Right
15
108
PRI WATS band: w
(w = digit: value range 0 - 9)
If no information is available, a space is output.
1
–
16
109 to
112
PRI Carrier Identification Code (CIC): cccc
(c = CIC digit: value range 0 - 9)
Non-existent characters are replaced by
spaces.
4
Right
14
106 to
107
U.S.-specific fields are filled with blanks in
other countries.
2
Right
15
108
1
–
16
109 to
112
4
Right
17
113 to
114
2
–
End of line control character
(carriage return [CR], line feed [LF])
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-351
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
Long Output Format for Call Data
●
The header in the long output format (Figure 3-16) is output in the language used
across the system.
After 62 lines have printed (including header), a form feed (FF) is carried out and
the next page begins with a header.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Date
Time
Trk
11.12.93
11.12.93
11.12.93
11.12.93
08:23:23
09:12:45
09:25:34
10:01:46
Stn Call
4
3
2
1
Duration Station number
16
00:05:23 02317324856
18
00:01:23 834756
11 00:34
12
00:12:53 83726639046287127384
Amount I
20,23
0,69
413,69
2
2
1
2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Table 3-11
Long output format - explanation of output fields
Field
Fields
Date
1 to 8
See Table 3-10, Field position 1
8
Left
Time
10 to 17
See Table 3-10, Field position 2
8
Left
Trk
19 to 21
See Table 3-10, Field position 3
3
Right
Stn
23 to 28
See Table 3-10, Field position 4
6
Right
Call
30 to 34
See Table 3-10, Field position 5
6
Left
Duration
36 to 43
See Table 3-10, Field position 6
8
Left
Station
number
45 to 64
Dialed or, if available, the received external
station number:nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
(n = dialed or received character: value
range 0 - 9, *, #, ?)
See also Table 3-10, field position 7
20
Left
Amount
66 to 76
Call charge amount for a call segment:
zzzzzzzzzzz (blank spaces in U.S.)
(z = digit: value range 0 - 9)
Output always occurs when call charges
accrue for the call segment (even with
transferred calls). If no call detail information is available, these 11 characters are
filled with spaces. A comma (,) separates
the amount from the decimal places.
11
Right
I
78 to 79
See Table 3-10, field position 9
2
Right
–
80 to 81
End of line control character
(carriage return [CR], line feed [LF])
2
–
3-352
Definition
Number of Orientation
characters
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.9 Toll Fraud Monitoring
Definition
This feature can provide the customer with protection against toll fraud.
In the case of trunk-to-trunk connections, the customer can detect a possible fraudulent use by monitoring outgoing trunk calls.
When connection times exceed a defined duration, an indication is displayed on the
attendance console (AC). If necessary, the connection can be released by means of
a procedure.
No default time (Toll Fraud monitoring timer) is specified for this feature; that is, the
attendant console will not be alerted unless the timer is set to a specific value.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-353
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.10 Printer Pipe Mode (V.24 [RS-232] Range Extension for Call Data)
Definition
This feature outputs call charges to the optiset E control adapter. Only one printer
pipe mode can be active in a system, and only one call detail recording (CDR) output
can be supported in a system (via RS-232 or the optiset E control adapter).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Settings
3-354
Requirement or Condition
The parameters for call data output to the optiset E control
adapter are permanently set to 9600,N, 8, 1.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
3.13.11 Call-Charge Display With Currency (Not for U.S.)
Definition
Call charge information received with the AOC (advice of charges) feature during external calls on digital trunks appears on the telephone display, provided that the carrier makes this information available.
The public network supports the following AOC types:
●
AOC-D = Charging information during the call
●
AOC-E = Charging information at the end of a call
●
AOC-S = Charging information at call setup
With AOC-D and AOC-S, digital exchanges can also transmit currency amounts that
are then added to the call data evaluated in the system. These amounts are not multiples of the call charge pulses or call detail units; they are actual currency amounts.
The new calculation accuracy parameter helps avoid inaccuracies from arising when
recording the call data. It determines
●
The number of decimal points the system uses for evaluating the call data = minimum currency amount.
●
The maximum number of currency amounts added up in memory = maximum total currency amount.
Set the Calculation accuracy parameter so that the system accuracy is equal to the
accuracy of the currency amounts transmitted by the ISDN exchange. If the maximum
of three decimal places is insufficient, the system automatically rounds up the number
to the next unit. The following values are possible:
Calculation Accuracy
3
(Pounds Sterling)
2
Minimum Currency
Amount
1 x 10–3 = 0.001
1 x 10–2 = 0.01
1
1 x 10–1 = 0.1
0
(Italian Lira)
1 x 100 = 1
Maximum Currency
Amount
1 x 10–3 x (232 – 1) =
around 4.3 million
1 x 10–2 x (232 – 1) =
around 43 million
1 x 10–1 x (232 – 1) =
around 430 million
1 x 100 x (232 – 1) =
around. 4.3 billion
If you set Calculation accuracy = delete, the system switches back to evaluating call
data in the form of call-charge pulses.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-355
3000sb3.fm
Features
Features for Call Detail Recording
You cannot use HiPath arithmetic units if the digital exchange supplies call charge
pulses.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
SW requirements
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
x
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Plus Products
3-356
Requirement or Condition
Select the factor for converting call detail units to currency
amounts as follows:
Conversion factor =
(call charge factor in %) / (100 x 10calcuation accuracy)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14 Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
Definition
The HiPath 3000 system complies with the DSS1 standard, which specifies the requirements for the uniform communication structure standardized by ETSI throughout Europe.
Euro-ISDN provides users with various features that can be activated either permanently in the trunk or by means of a procedure. It is not necessary to configure the
feature specifically.
The features available with Euro-ISDN and HiPath 3000 are listed below.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Long S0 bus
Not available with TA-S0 and STMD8 (HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700).
Features
Operation for features is the same as for analog stations.
Control is by means of information elements in the protocol.
PC connected to S0
A PC can be connected to the internal S0 applications bus
using an ISDN S0 card.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-357
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.1 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Definition
This feature allows a direct connection via the public network to an extension in a
communications server using the ISDN numbering plan.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
–
–
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
DID
3-358
Requirement or Condition
The extensions in the communications server must have at
least outward restricted class of service, and direct inward
dialing must be permitted.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.2 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Definition
Multiple subscriber numbers enable you to assign several different station numbers
on the same S0 basic access (bus or multi-device connection). You can assign each
terminal an MSN up to 11 digits long so that it can be called selectively.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk board
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
MSN
MSNs can be up to 11 digits long.
If an MSN is too long, the system evaluates the first 11 digits, beginning at the right.
MSN
The system activates features based on MSNs.
CDRC
Call detail recording central is possible.
MSN
If the MSN for a Setup is missing or invalid, a default MSN
appropriate to the situation is used. When a station number is specified that is already in use (optiset E or optiPoint
500), the Setup is rejected.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-359
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.3 Default Station Number Instead of Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Definition
This feature was created to increase security and to settle call charges (in a hotel environment, for example). Previously, the system was able to automatically configure
each valid MSN. This meant that the settlement of call charges and call detail recording took place under a number which the CS operator did not necessarily enter.
In addition to dialing an MSN, users now have the option of dialing the internal default
station number instead.
Below is a brief explanation:
The system assigns a sequential default number to each port, and therefore each
telephone, in ascending order (starting with 101 in the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
system). This means that each ISDN S0 bus is assigned a default number. For an
ISDN adapter, the default number is identical to the number of the logical port in the
client (secondary) optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone. The system assigns valid station numbers by default, although they can be changed with HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Every station number is always assigned to one logical port number.
The default numbers can be used as follows:
●
Outgoing call setup:
The system sets up the call using the default number, regardless of the MSN sent
by a telephone or application. Customers are billed on the basis of the default
number (in a hotel environment, this can be the room number), combined with a
fixed number combination.
●
Incoming call setup:
When a customer equates the MSN of an application (which may be installed on
a notebook computer and connected to the hotel telephone network via an ISDN
adapter) with the default number of a hotel room (combined with a fixed number
combination), callers can reach the PC directly from the outside by direct inward
dialing.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-360
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.4 Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)
Definition
This feature transmits the caller’s own station number to the called party, where it can
be displayed if proper equipment is available. The public network must support station
number transmission.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
CLIP
Requirement or Condition
Must be released by the carrier.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-361
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.5 Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Definition
This feature suppresses the transmission of the calling party’s station number. The
public network must support suppression (temporary or permanent).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
Co feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-362
Requirement or Condition
CLIR
Calling line identification restriction can be defined across
the system.
CLIR
HiPath 3000 Manager E can be used to ignore an activated
CLIR setting across the system, allowing the calling party’s
station number to be displayed (on the development level
only). This can be useful for emergency calls and in similar
situations.
CLIR
Calling line presentation restriction per station:
*86 = activate
●
#86 = deactivate
●
It is not possible to ignore an activated CLIR setting per
station.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.6 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)
Definition
This feature allows the calling party to determine whether the connection has actually
been connected to the station called or whether it was picked up by a different station.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 with display
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
COLP
Requirement or Condition
Must be released by the carrier.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-363
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.7 Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Definition
This feature suppresses transmission of the called party’s station number to the calling station. Called parties can use COLR to prevent their numbers from being displayed on a calling station.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
COLR
3-364
Requirement or Condition
Same CDB entry as CLIR.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.8 Advice of Charge (AOC)
Definition
This feature offers the user call detail information and must be provided by the pubic
network. The information is transmitted in three ways:
●
AOC-S - Advice of charges at call setup
–
Call charge display on the telephone is the same as for AOC-D.
–
The charges are not displayed if the call was not fully set up or if HiPath 3000
is unable to evaluate the call detail information of a service provider.
●
AOC-D - Advice of charges during the call.
●
AOC-E - Advice of charges at the end of the call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
AOC
Requirement or Condition
Some countries transmit call charge pulses instead of the
amount. In this case, the received pulses are converted to
currency amounts using a call charge factor (as on analog
trunks).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-365
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.9 Call Forwarding (CF)
Definition
There are three different call forwarding types:
●
Chaining call forwarding unconditional
Users can activate variable call forwarding or call forwarding preset by key programming (unconditional, immediate) for the following call types:
–
Incoming internal calls only
–
Incoming external calls only
–
All calls
This is possible even if the same station is already set as a forwarding destination
or if the forwarding destination has already activated call forwarding.
The message “Chaining invalid” no longer appears when you enter a second call
forwarding destination during programming.
When a user forwards a dialed party to a station which already activated unconditional, immediate call forwarding to another station, the system monitors the
number of call forwarding operations allowed. A preprogrammed counter limits
the number of call forwarding operations to a total of 5.
The following example clarifies this procedure:
–
Stn A activated call forwarding to stn B: 1. CFU
–
Stn B activated call forwarding to stn C: 2. CFU
–
Stn C activated call forwarding to stn D: 3. CFU
–
Stn D activated call forwarding to stn E: 4. CFU
–
Stn E activated call forwarding to stn F: 5. CFU
–
Stn F activated call forwarding to stn G: 6. CFU (not possible)
If stn X calls stn A, the call reaches stn F, not stn G.
The system forwards the counters with CFU, but not with CFB or CFNR.
●
Call forwarding busy (CFB))
Same as CFU but only if the line is busy.
●
Call forwarding no reply (CFNR))
Same as CFU, but only if the call is not answered within 15 seconds (time is configurable).
Use call management to define the lines for busy and no reply.
3-366
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
CF
Not possible with an S2M line.
CF
In the case of a point-to-point connection, the entire line is
forwarded. In the case of a point-to-multipoint connection,
only the MSN assigned to the extension with programming
authorization is forwarded. If no MSN is assigned to this
station. call forwarding cannot be activated.
CF
Call forwarding is always executed for the first basic access, that is the first S0 port must also be available in the
system.
Internal to S0
Internal stations support CFU only (to prevent conflicts
with call management).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-367
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.10 External Call Forwarding
Definition
Any user who has an MSN as a DID number can activate and deactivate external call
forwarding for this MSN, provided that the user is authorized to use external call forwarding. A total of 10 multiple subscriber numbers can be forwarded.
If you have assigned an MSN to a subscriber group, any member of the group can
activate and deactivate external call forwarding for this MSN.
Users can enter only one forwarding destination per MSN.
There are three different versions of the feature:
●
Call forwarding unconditional (CFU)
The carrier forwards all calls to this MSN directly, regardless of the MSN status.
●
Call forwarding busy (CFB)
Calls are forwarded only if the MSN dialed is busy.
●
Call forwarding no reply (CFNR)
Calls are forwarded only if the destination does not answer the incoming call within a preset period of time, such as 15 seconds (time is configurable).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-368
Requirement or Condition
CFU
External call forwarding has a higher priority than night answer.
CFU
The number of MSNs for external call forwarding cannot
exceed 10.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.11 Call Deflection (CD)
Definition
If a station has activated external call forwarding, HiPath 3000 attempt to forward calls
to the trunk using this feature. In this case, the new call destination and the station
number of the forwarding station are provided to the trunk in the call deflection activation message when the call arrives. If external call forwarding by call deflection is
not possible, the system handles call forwarding.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
–
–
–
–
–
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
Call detail information
When call deflection is used, HiPath 3000 receive no call
detail information for the forwarded call.
Customers are billed by their local Telecom.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-369
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.12 Subaddressing (SUB)
Definition
Subaddressing allows the addressing capacity to be expanded regardless of the
ISDN station number or additional information to be transmitted to the station dialed.
This makes it possible to initiate certain procedures.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
SUB
3-370
Requirement or Condition
The flow of information is in one direction only.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.13 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)
Definition
This feature makes it possible to identify unwanted callers. The feature is activated in
the public network, and the caller’s station number and name are also stored in the
public network. With each incoming call, the release of the connection to the called
station is delayed for a specific period of time after the caller hangs up, enabling the
called station to activate this feature. Release is delayed only if the feature has been
requested from the carrier or facility provider.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
MCID
Malicious call ID is supported only on a direct trunk connection and not in tie traffic (QSig or CorNet-N).
MCID
Trunk release is delayed.
MCID
The malicious call ID class of service can be programmed
for individual stations.
MCID internal to S0
Activation is forwarded to the trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-371
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.14 Competition of Calls to Busy Subscribers (CCBS)
Definition
This feature sets automatic callback from an external station that is busy. When the
station becomes free, the trunk attempts to set up a connection between the two stations.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-372
Requirement or Condition
CCBS
The feature must be supported by the trunk and the remote
station.
CCBS
Does not function with 1TR6.
CCBS
A callback option to the networked system is generated
within networked communications servers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.15 Call Hold (CH)
Definition
Users can interrupt a call in progress without releasing it. Doing so places the call on
hold. Call hold (CH) is important in conjunction with other features such as call waiting, consultation hold, toggle, and three-party conference. The ISDN port on hold receives an indication of the hold state and retrieval of the call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
CH
The feature is available only on multi-device connections.
In communications servers, the call is held in the server.
The information element is sent to the trunk.
CH
Non-ISDN stations do not receive an advisory announcement (except that the station is placed on hold in the CS).
CH
A call can be placed on hold only in the active phase or
during connection setup.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-373
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.16 Three Party Service (3PTY)
Definition
A three-party (3PTY) conference is possible with a multi-device connection. The conference status is indicated at the ISDN port.
On the user side, note that the other conference participants join the conference in
the system, that is, only one B channel is needed for the S0 applications bus.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Conference
3-374
Requirement or Condition
For multi-device connections only. In the case of CSs, the
conference is executed in the CS. The information element
is transmitted to the trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.17 Call Waiting (CW)
Definition
When a busy party receives a call, a call waiting tone indicates that another call has
arrived and may be answered. The call waiting status is transmitted to the trunk.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
Digital trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
CW (call waiting)
Requirement or Condition
For multi-device connections only. In the case of CSs, call
waiting is executed in the CS. The information element is
transmitted to the trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-375
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.18 Telephone Portability (TP)
Definition
This feature allows a user to park a call on the bus, unplug the telephone, plug it in
again at another location on the bus, and resume the parked call. The parked station
receives a message indicating that the user is porting. The user has three minutes to
move the telephone.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk board
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-376
Requirement or Condition
TP
At multi-device connections only. In the case of CSs, the
external station is parked in the CS. The information element is transmitted to the trunk.
TP
The call must be resumed within 3 minutes.
TP
This feature cannot be used with services such as fax,
teletex and data transmission.
TP internal to S0
In the case of a Gigaset ISDN, this feature is used for a
handover between two radio cells and for implementing the
call park feature. Implementation is by the system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.19 User to User Signaling (UUS1)
Definition
This feature allows users to exchange messages during connection setup. The network transmits the messages transparently; checking only the length. Three UUS
services are available:
●
UUS1: Information is exchanged in control messages for connection setup and
during connection release.
●
USS2: Information is exchanged during the ringing phase. The number of messages is limited to two per trunk group. USS2 is available for telecommunications
ports only.
●
USS3: Information is exchanged during the active state of a connection.
HiPath 3000 currently support only UUS1.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
x
x
x
x
x
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
Requirement or Condition
USS1
In the case of a multi-device connection, the user must ensure that only one device transmits a message to an incoming call.
USS1
HiPath 3000 currently support only UUS1
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-377
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.20 Explicit Call Transfer (ECT)
Definition
A station with two calls can connect the other two call parties to one another. One of
the calls must have already been set up. Transfer before and after answering is possible.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
3-378
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 trunk connection
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
–
–
–
–
–
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.21 Point-to-Point Connection on the User Side
Definition
It is possible to configure an S0 port on the user side as a point-to-point connection,
for example to use a connected fax server. The port is assigned a station number that
supports direct inward dialing. Call forwarding can also be programmed at this port.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
S0 subscriber line
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
x
x
CO feature
–
–
–
–
–
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
PtP
Requirement or Condition
Only the DID, CLIP, CLIR, and AOC features are supported.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-379
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.22 Programming National and International Codes for Outgoing Calls
Definition
The caller’s station number, including the trunk access code (0, for example), the national prefix (0, for example) or the international prefix (00, for example), appears in
the optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephone display, the caller list, and dialing aids (such
as Smartset).
Carriers are reached by dialing a separate national prefix (1 digit) or international prefix (2 digits). If a HiPath 3000 system provides access to more than one carrier (separate port or shared port), it is not possible to determine the carrier from which incoming calls arrive.
To represent a prefix, this feature enables you to configure the national and international access codes (national and international prefixes). A number between 0 and 9
can be used as the values for the programmable digits.
This allows calls to be answered with the help of caller lists and Smartset even when
carriers are used. The existing prefixes are also used for the carriers.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
HW requirements
x
x
S0 board
SW requirements
x
x
–
–
V1.0 or later
CO feature
–
–
–
–
–
Station feature
x
x
x
x
x
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
National or international prefix
3-380
Requirement or Condition
Only one national or international prefix exists for the entire
system. The programmed prefix (and the carrier codes)
can be up to 2 digits long.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.23 Caller ID After Release (Police)
Definition
This feature places the calling party’s number in caller list 0 after the call is released.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-381
3000sb3.fm
Features
Euro-ISDN Features (Not for U.S.)
3.14.24 Collect Call Barring for ISDN Trunks (V3.0 and later)
Definition
This feature allows the automatic release of incoming collect calls in the network; other calls are not changed.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
HW requirements
SW requirements
3-382
x
x
x
x
Digital trunk connection
V3.0
or later
V3.0
or later
V3.0
or later
V3.0
or later
V3.0
or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
3.15 U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
Definition
In the United States, ISDN is offered by most local telephone companies. ISDN is an
all-digital voice and data transmission technology. In contrast to analog transmissions, ISDN uses B (bearer) channels to carry voice and data traffic and a D (data)
channel to carry customer call data and control signals. There are two basic types of
ISDN interfaces. These interfaces are the primary rate interface (PRI) and the basic
rate interface (BRI).
A PRI is for large commercial telephony operations and consists of 23 B channels and
1 D channel. A BRI is for smaller or residential-type telephony needs and consists of
2 B channels and 1 D channel. To configure these ISDN interfaces, users must know
the type of HiPath 3000 system that they are configuring. The following are the ISDN
interfaces that were designed to work with the HiPath 3000 system:
●
BRI with the HiPath 3350 and HiPath 3300
●
Both PRI and BRI with the HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500
●
PRI with the HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
The ISDN features are activated at the central office (CO).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-383
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
3.15.1 PRI
Introduction
The HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3500 systems can be configured to support Primary Rate services from the public network. A primary rate interface (PRI) consists of 23 bearer (B) channels and 1 data (D) channel. Each channel supports 64 Kbps of bandwidth.
The HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700 support a maximum of five T1 interfaces (TMST1)
that can be configured as primary rate interfaces. A Channel Service Unit (CSU) is
required for each interface connected to the public network. (Siemens ICN supports
certain models of CSU that have been tested with the HiPath 3000. Contact your Siemens ICN representative for the model numbers). The HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700
support a maximum of four Call by Call (CBC) groups. Each group can be configured
with a maximum of eight CBC trunk groups.
The HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 support one T1 interface (TST1 module) that can
be configured as a primary rate interface. A CSU is required for each interface connected to the public network. The HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 support a maximum
of one CBC group. The group can also be configured with a maximum of eight CBC
trunk groups. Typically, the entire T1 span is placed in a single trunk group, but depending on the application, the primary rate channels can be separated into discrete
route groups. This may be required for applications where a portion of the channels
can be separated out for non-system data applications.
A span or spans must be selected as the reference interface for the Central Office. A
hierarchical table is provided for assigning four reference-clock points. If the primary
clock source fails, the next clock source specified is used as the reference. When the
primary clock source returns, the system automatically resynchronizes to this clock.
A maximum of four reference clocks can be defined per system.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
x
x
–
TMST1
TST1
–
Number of T1 modules per system
5
1
–
Number of CBC
groups per system
4
1
–
Number of trunk
groups per CBC group
8
8
–
Feature available in
HW requirements
3-384
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
SW requirements
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
V1.0 or later
Depending on the PRI provider’s requirements, users need to configure some or all
of the following for PRI setup:
●
Signal, protocol, and emulation type
●
Frame/line/encoding
●
B channel allocation mode and identifier
●
Number of B channels
●
Trunk group calling service
For networking with PRI, customers can use either tie trunks or the public-switched
telephone network.
Protocol type allows customers to select the interface between the HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 or HiPath 3500 and the PRI provider. Protocols are different
for local exchange carriers (LECs) and for inter-exchange carriers (IECs). Customers
might prefer an IEC, for example, if they want to place calls on a tie trunk using station
numbers without going through the local exchange.
Customers can choose a different carrier and protocol for each PRI span. The HiPath
3000 systems support seven commonly used LEC protocols and seven commonly
used IEC protocols.Table 3-12 and Table 3-13 on page 3-386 show the protocols
available for each slot.
LEC Protocols
Table 3-12
LEC Carrier
Supported LEC Protocols
Switch
Protocol
AT&T
5ESS
Custom
AT&T
5ESS
NI-2
Bell Canada
DMS100
Custom
GTE
GTT5
NI-2
Nortel
DMS100
Custom
Siemens
EWSD
Custom
Siemens
EWSD
NI-2
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-385
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
IEC Protocols
Table 3-13
IEC Carrier
Supported IEC Protocols
Switch
Protocol
AT&T
4ESS
Custom
MCI
DMS250
AT&T 4ESS emulation
MCI
DEX600
AT&T 4ESS emulation
Sprint
DMS250
AT&T 4ESS emulation
Westinghouse
DMS250
AT&T 4ESS emulation
GSA
DMS250
DMS250
GSA FTS 2000
5ESS
5ESS
Emulation type is determined by the protocol. Users need to select the emulation
type that matches the ISDN service they have ordered: Super Frame (SF) or Extended Super Frame (ESF).
The data format for SF emulation is inverted high-level data link control (HDLC); The
data format for ESF is normal HDLC.
Frame/line/encoding allows customers to select the type of encoding used on the D
channel. The choices are normal or inverted. Normal is the default. The type of frame
and line encoding depends on the protocol. HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3500 automatically set the correct type of frame and line encoding according to the protocol.
B channel allocation mode and identifier allows customers to select the system
method of finding an available B channel when needed. The choices are high and low.
High begins searching at the highest-numbered B channel of the highest-numbered
T1 span in the PRI trunk group and continues in descending order. Low begins
searching at the lowest-numbered B channel of the lowest-numbered T1 span in the
PRI trunk group and continues in ascending order.
Select the opposite mode from that used by the CO; this will avoid collisions when
both the CO and the HiPath 3000 are trying to seize a channel.
Number of B channels allows users to enter the number of B channels for the system, so that the system knows where to begin searching for channels to allocate. The
number entered here depends on the number of B channels that the customer has
ordered.
3-386
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
Trunk group calling service allows users to select the type of service for each trunk
group. The HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath 3300 support 36
types of trunk group service. Customers select the type of service according to the
service ordered from the ISDN provider.
If you are unsure the trunk group calling service, consult the ISDN provider for more
information.
The following tables outline the voice and data services available through the public
network providers in the North American market.
Table 3-14
Inter-Exchange (IEC) Protocol Calling Services
ATT 4ESS
MCI
DMS250/
MCI
DEX600
SPRINT
DMS250
Westing.
DMS250
In-WATS
(800)
Megacom
800-TFM
MCI 800
Out-WATS
Megacom
MCI Prism- SPR Ultra
WATS
WATS
WICN-Out- N/A
WATS
In-WATS
(900)
Multiquest
MC!/900
N/A
N/A
N/A
MCI 800
N/A
N/A
N/A
AT&T SDDN MCI VN-VS SPRINTVPN
N/A
N/A
Intl VPN
AT&T SDNGSDN
N/A
SPRINTVPN
N/A
N/A
SDS 56
Accu-SDS
NONE
Accu-SDS
Accu-SDS
N/A
SDS 94-c/r
Accu-SDS
NONE
Accu-SDS
Accu-SDS
N/A
Intl IN-WATS Inter-800
PVN
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
ULTRA 800 WICN-InWATS
FTS2000
DMS/5ESS
N/A
3-387
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
Table 3-15
Local Exchange (LEC) Protocol Calling Services
AT&T
5ESS/
Siemens
EWSD
3-388
Nortel
DMS100
Bell Cnd
DMS100
Generic NI2
Siemens NI2
AT&T 5ESS NI2
In-WATS (800)
Megacom
DMS100 InWATS
NI2 InWATS
Out-WATS
Megacom
DMS100 Out- NI2 OutWATS
WATS
In WATS (900)
N/A
N/A
N/A
Intl InWATS (800)
N/A
N/A
N/A
PVN
N/A
DMS100 PV
N/A
Multiband OutWATS
Megacom
DMS100 Out- NI2 OutWATS
WATS
Access to LEC operator
None
None
None
Access to default IEC op- None
erator
None
None
Equal access to IEC Long Megacom
Distance services
DMS100 Out- NI2 OutWATS
WATS
Basic CO access
None
None
None
Access to IEC operator
None
None
None
SDS-56
None
None
None
SDS-64 c/r
None
None
None
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
3.15.2 BRI
Introduction
To set up the HiPath 3000 for BRI ISDN, users must receive service profile identifier
designator (SPID) numbers from the telephone company (telco). SPID numbers identify the type of ISDN service and the variety of features that customers receive. In addition, to allow direct access to specific devices, some BRI interfaces can be set up
with CACH EKTS. Depending on the central office (CO) switch type, users have to
configure either call appearance identification (CAID) values (also known as CACH
values) or phantom direct inward dialing (PDID) numbers for all devices that make external calls.
Depending on the central office (CO) protocol selected, users need to configure some
or all of the following parameters for BRI setup:
●
CO protocol
●
SPID administration
●
CAID administration (AT&T or EWSD)
●
PDID administration (DMS100)
●
Feature identification number (FIN) for message waiting
●
CO Features (Transfer/Conference/Drop)
●
Feature identification number (FIN) for Transfer, Conference and Drop
●
CACH EKTS flag (AT&T or EWSD)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-389
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
CO protocol is the interface between the HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and
HiPath 3300 and the CO of the BRI provider. Select the protocol that the BRI provider
uses. support the following CO protocols:
●
AT&T NI1
●
AT&T Custom
●
Siemens NI1
●
Nortel NI1
Nortel NI1 requires PDID values instead of CAID values; for more information refer to
PDID administration on page 3-391.
If you are unsure of the CO protocol, consult the ISDN provider.
SPID administration allows customers to set service profile identification designator
values. Each BRI line is assigned two SPID values. The HiPath 3000 systems support
a maximum of eight SPID values. The SPID values can be assigned to any combination of digital stations or digital data terminals and could be required for some data
terminals. SPID numbers are used by the CO to identify each terminal for features
such as message waiting, call transfer, and conference. Customers must configure
the numbers in sequence according to the order of the stations in the system. A primary directory number is assigned to each SPID address number.
Consult the BRI provider for specific SPID number information.
CAID administration allows customers to set call appearance identification values
when the CO switch type is AT&T or EWSD. CAID values are one or two digits that
are assigned by the central office to the primary and secondary system numbers. A
CAID value represents a talk path from a voice station or a data terminal to a BRI
channel. A station must have at least one associated CAID value programmed to
place or receive an external call directly without attendant intervention. Each device
in the system can have up to four CAID values.
Multiple CAID values must be assigned to a station to allow for external telephone
functions, such as to answer camp-on calls and conference calls. CAID values are
used to simulate multiple call handling at a single desktop station. That is, each CAID
number simulates an additional extension (a call appearance), but the additional extension numbers do not actually represent outside trunk lines.
3-390
Some COs do not assign CAID values to ISDN data terminals. If you do not know
the CAID numbers assigned to the system, consult the BRI provider.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN (for U.S. Only)
PDID administration allows customers to set phantom direct inward dialing identification numbers (PDIDs). PDID numbers take the place of CAID values in the Nortel
DMS100 NI1 CO only. Customers can assign PDID numbers to all voice and data terminals in the system. This allows incoming calls to be routed to the specified station
or ISDN terminal without attendant intervention.
The PDID number can be from 1 to 7 digits in length, corresponding to a traditional
seven-digit phone number.
PDIDs or directory numbers (DNs) are assigned by the ISDN provider.
FIN for message waiting allows users to set the feature identification number (FIN)
for the BRI message waiting feature provided by the LEC. The LEC assigns FIN values to associate the feature with specific HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 or
HiPath 3300 stations; contact the LEC to obtain the FIN values for the stations.
The message waiting FIN value can only be assigned to stations with primary directory numbers.
With FIN for message waiting, customers must enter a FIN value for each station. Every station must have a FIN value assigned; however, each station can have the same
number.
CO features (Transfer/Conference/Drop) allows the customer to enable the CO features Transfer, Conference, and Drop.
FIN for Transfer, Conference and Drop allows customers to set the feature identification numbers (FIN) for the BRI Transfer, Conference, and Drop features provided
by the LEC in the case of NI1 (AT&T NI1, Siemens NI1, or Nortel NI1). The FIN must
be the same for all the BRI interfaces; contact the LEC to obtain the FIN values for
these features.
CACH EKTS flag allows customers to indicate which of the BRI interfaces are configured within the LEC as CACH EKTS.
CACH is one of the methods used to have BRI emulate an analog hunt. Although
there is a CACH setting in the NT DMS, it does not react in the same manner; the
CACH setting in the DMS does not allow the sharing of DNs. Administration of CACH
values in the HiPath 3000 is referred to as CAID (Call Appearance IDentification) administration.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-391
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16 U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.1 Multi-Device Connection
Definition
An ISDN multi-device connection enables users to connect multiple ISDN terminals
(such as Internet and ISDN video devices) on an ISDN S0 applications bus. You can
use the direct inward dialing (DID) number field to assign multiple subscriber numbers
(MSNs) that will uniquely identify the devices.
Related Topics
●
Section 3.16.10, Multiple Subscriber Number, on page 3-401
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
x
x
x
STMD8
or ISDN
adapter
STLS4
STLS4R
or ISDN
adapter
STLS4
STLS4R
or ISDN
adapter
V1.0 or later
Requirements and Conditions
Subject
3-392
Requirement or Condition
ISDN terminals
Any parallel-connected ISDN terminals must be given an
MSN to ensure call assignments.
Trunk groups with PP
and PMR
If you connect different basic access points (point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint) to the system, they must be entered in different trunk groups, and Prime Line must be deactivated.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.2 Call-By-Call Service Selection
Definition
Call-by-Call service selection (CBC) lets the user select a different type of service for
each channel, such as INWATS channels and some OUTWATS channels within the
same trunk group.
The following are the four main features provided through call-by-call (CBC):
●
Foreign Exchange Non-ISDN Facility
This trunk type enables users to originate or terminate calls as if there was a local
CS in the foreign (remote) central exchange office. Access to the foreign exchange (FX) is possible via LCR or trunk group access codes.
●
Tie Trunk Non-ISDN Facility
This trunk type enables users to connect to a privately leased analog Tie Trunk
network. Access for originating calls is possible through LCR. Terminating Tie
Trunk calls are routed according to the called party number (CdPn).
●
OUTWATS Facility
This feature allows customers to place calls to certain areas at special lower
rates.
●
INWATS Facility
This feature supports the 800 area code that provides callers toll-free access to
the terminating party. This is a terminating only service.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
Simulated Facility
Groups (SFG)
Requirement/Condition
FX and Tie Trunk incoming and outgoing calls require an
SFG access code, which is assigned by the telephone
company at the time of subscription.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-393
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.3 Dedicated (Pre-Provisioned) Service Selection
This feature simplifies the service ordering process by supplying ordering codes that
tell the central office how to configure the HiPath 3000.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-394
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.4 Transfer
Definition
This feature allows calls to be transferred the same as non-ISDN calls.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-395
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.5 Camp-On
Definition
This feature allows calls to be camped-on until the busy line is free. Once the line is
free, the user call is signaled through.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-396
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.6 Conference Call
Definition
This feature allows multiple callers to communicate simultaneously.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-397
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.7 Equal Access
Definition
This feature complies with the FCC requirement to provide equal access to alternate
carriers.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-398
V1.0 or later
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.8 Special Access Selection
Definition
With this feature users can select specific access codes. HiPath 3000 systems support the following four options:
●
Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) Operator Access
The system routes calls through the PRI to the network after the user dials 0 to
connect to the LEC operator.
●
Inter-exchange Carrier (IEC) Operator Access
After the user dials an operator access code, a carrier identification code (CIC),
and a 0, the system routes the call through the PRI and to the network, connecting the call to the IEC operator.
●
Operator Assisted Credit Card Call Access
This feature routes PRI calls to the network using an operator access code, a 0
or 01, and a called party number (CdPn), allowing operator assisted calls with a
calling card.
●
N11 Access
Most commonly used for 911 access, this feature routes PRI calls to the network
via an operator access code and N11, where N is any digit from 1 to 9.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
–
3-399
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.9 Direct Inward Dialing
Definition
The basic electronic key telephone system (EKTS) supports the sharing of directory
numbers over several ISDN lines, allowing for direct inward dialing (DID).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
x
x
x
STMD8
STLS 4
STLS 4
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
DID
3-400
Dependency/Limitation
The extensions in the CS must at the very least be outward
restricted and direct inward dialing must be permitted.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.10 Multiple Subscriber Number
Definition
Multiple subscriber numbers (MSNs) are used to identify ISDN terminals connected
to an S0 bus in the HiPath 3000 systems. MSNs are 11 digits in length. They are entered in the DID number field in system administration.
You can assign each ISDN terminal one or two MSNs, depending on the application.
A device requiring 64 Kbps of bandwidth must be assigned one MSN; a device requiring 128 Kbps of bandwidth must be assigned two MSNs. The call number associated
with the MSN is dialed to reach the device during an internal data or voice transaction.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
x
x
x
STMD8 or
ISDN adapter
STLS4
STLS4R
or ISDN
adapter
STLS4
STLS4R
or ISDN
adapter
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
Dependency/Limitation
MSN
MSNs are assigned in the DID number field for each ISDN
terminal. This number is used as the internal SPID for the
device.
Primary Directory
Number (PDN)
The PDN associated with public network BRI link must be
entered in the DID field for the ISDN terminal to initiate
calls to the external network.
MSN for internal use
only
Enter a seven-digit number not associated with the PDN in
the DID field.
External SPIDs
The public network SPIDs for the ISDN links can be assigned to any station in the system.
B channels
The number of external data calls is limited to the number
of B channels installed in the system.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-401
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
Subject
3-402
Dependency/Limitation
Access
B channels are dedicated to the specific ISDN terminal
and should be placed in a separate trunk group to ensure
access if more than one BRI trunk is installed.
MSN
If the MSN for a Setup is missing or invalid, a default MSN
appropriate to the situation is used. When a station number is specified that is already in use (optiset E or optiPoint
500), the Setup is rejected. If an MSN is too long, a rightjustified evaluation of the digits is performed.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.11 Calling Line Identification Presentation
Definition
The calling line identification presentation (CLIP) feature transmits the caller’s own
station number to the interface called. The station number can be displayed on suitable telephones. Station number transmission must be supported in the public network.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
x
x
x
HW requirements
optiset E or optiPoint 500 telephone with display
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-403
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.12 Call Forwarding
Definition
All calls for the ISDN port can be forwarded. Three different types of call forwarding
(CF) are available:
Call forwarding unconditional (CFU)
●
All calls for the ISDN port are immediately forwarded to any port.
Call forwarding busy (CFB)
●
Same as CFU but only for busy trunk.
Call forwarding no reply (CFNR)
●
Same as CFU but only if the call is not answered within a specified period (15 s).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
3-404
Dependency/Limitation
CF
Forwarding is always performed for the first basic access,
necessitating that the first S0 port is present in the system.
CF
This service is activated telephony, speech, and 3.1 kHz
audio only.
Internal to S0
Only CFU is supported for internal station, otherwise, conflicts with call management would occur.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.13 Call Hold
Definition
Call hold (CH) is important in conjunction with other features such as call waiting, consultation hold, toggle, and three-party conference. The ISDN port on hold receives an
indication of the hold state and retrieval of the call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
Dependency/Limitation
CH
Possible at multi-device connections only. In the case of
PABXs, the connection is placed on hold in the CS. The information element is transmitted to the trunk.
CH
Non-ISDN stations do not receive an advisory announcement (except that the station is placed on hold in the CS).
CH
A call can be placed on hold only in the active phase or
during connection setup.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-405
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.14 Three-Party Service
Definition
A three-party (3PTY) conference is possible with a multi-device connection. The conference status is indicated at the relevant ISDN port.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
3-406
Dependency/Limitation
3PTY
At multi-device connections only. In the case of CSs, the
conference is executed in the CS. The information element
is transmitted to the trunk.
3PTY internal to S0
The other conference participants are connected in the
system; therefore, only one channel is required to the S0
bus.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.15 Call Waiting
Definition
If a station is busy and a second call is pending, the busy station receives call waiting.
The call waiting (CW) status is transmitted to the trunk. The busy station has the option of answering the waiting call.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Dependencies/Limitations
Subject
CW
Dependency/Limitation
At multi-device connections only. In the case of CSs, call
waiting is executed in the CS. The information element is
transmitted to the trunk.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-407
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.16 Connected Line Identification Presentation and Restriction
Definition
The Connected Line Identification (COLI) Presentation and Restriction feature provides the user with a display of the number called, or it restricts the user’s networkprovided number from being displayed to the calling party.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-408
V1.0 or later
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.17 Dialed Number Identification Service
Definition
The Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) feature translates an external user’s
CO LEC/IEC number to a customer-defined DNIS number.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
–
3-409
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.18 B Channel Selection
Definition
This feature searches the low-low B channel selection algorithm for an available B
channel, starting each new search at the lowest numbered B channel of the lowest
numbered DS1 facility in the PRI trunk group, and it continues in ascending order. In
addition, this feature searches the high-high B channel selection algorithm for an
available B channel, starting each new search at the highest numbered B channel of
the highest numbered DS1 facility in the PRI trunk group, and it continues in descending order.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-410
V1.0 or later
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.19 Originating B Channel Selection Implementation
Definition
For originating calls, this feature specifies a preferred B channel to the CO. If the preferred B channel is not available, the CO responds with an alternate B channel.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
–
3-411
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.20 Terminating B Channel Selection
Definition
For terminating calls, the CO specifies the B channel it has selected. If the HiPath
3000 determines that the requested B channel is not available and that it is not exclusive, the HiPath 3000 responds with an alternate B channel.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
–
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
No appropriate
B-channel
3-412
Requirement/Condition
If the HiPath 3000 cannot accept the call on an appropriate
B channel, it rejects the call with cause value #34, channel
congestion, or cause value #44, requested channel not
available.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.21 B Channel Cut-Through Operation Mode
Definition
North American ISDN PRI most often requires that the B channel voice path cutthrough to the network before connecting. This cut-through operation is different than
most other parts of the world. For this reason, the ISDN service providers often provide in-band tones or announcements that require a cut-through of the voice path.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
–
3-413
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.22 Digital Keypad to DTMF Conversion on PRI
Definition
This feature converts digital keypad information to dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF)
signals and sends the signals in-band over the PRI B channel.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-414
V1.0 or later
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.23 En-Bloc Sending
Definition
With this feature, the HiPath 3000 sends and receives blocks of data (complete telephone numbers) to and from the public network. The numbers are stored in the system and not forwarded to the network until the user finishes dialing.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
–
3-415
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.24 Data Calls
Definition
This feature transfers data over the PRI. Facility type and LEC/IEC calling service influence this service. Refer to the specific vendor for specific requirements for PRI data
transmission.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
–
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
3-416
V1.0 or later
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.25 Basic Electronic Key Telephone System
Definition
Electronic Key Telephone System (EKTS) is a National ISDN-1 standard that supports call appearances according to the directory number. This group-sharing capability associates a telephone on any interface with a particular directory number.
EKTS enables sharing of telephone features like call management, caller ID, conference calling, and call forwarding.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
–
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-417
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.26 Call Appearance Call Handling Electronic Key Telephone System
Definition
Call Appearance Call Handling Electronic Key Telephone System (CACH EKTS) simulates multiple call handling at a single desktop station. Users can receive multiple
calls for the same directory on several ISDN lines using one of the call appearance
IDs that is assigned to the directory number. With this feature, the CO can offer a call
on multiple interfaces because the directory number call appearances are shared.
This allows the HiPath 3000 to respond to the call with an idle interface. CACH is
called call appearance identification (CAID) in the HiPath 3000.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
–
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
–
V1.0 or later
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
Requirement/Condition
Call appearance iden- In a basic EKTS system CAID values are not supported.
tification (CAID) valThe AT&T 5E and Siemens EWSD central offices support
ues
the CAID format. The Northern Telcom central offices use
phantom DID numbers instead of CAID values.
3-418
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.27 Called and Calling Party Display
Definition
With called and calling party number display services like dialed number identification
service (DNIS) and automatic number identification (ANI) are provided by the network. DNIS is for T1 digital trunks and ANI is for PRI trunks. The calling party number
(CPN) is displayed on a suitable display telephone.
With this feature, the system performs the following functions:
$
%
#
&'(&')#
2.
Translates the digits into an account number, customer name, or company name
3.
Routes the call
4.
Displays the information on the telephone display
Users can override this feature system wide.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
x
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
V1.0 or later
Requirements/Conditions
Subject
Requirement/Condition
T1 Trunks
T1 trunks support DTMF signaling only.
Protocols
The protocols for processing ANI and DNIS digits depends
on the service and the carrier.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-419
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.28 Connected Party Display
Definition
For users calling from a HiPath 3000 telephone, this feature displays the connecting
party number through the BRI if the public network provides it. If the connected party
number information is restricted, the HiPath 3000 does not forward or use the connected party number for any purpose.
Users can override this feature system wide.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
3-420
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
–
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
–
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.29 Message Waiting
Definition
This feature indicates that there is a message waiting through one of the following indicators:
●
Displaying a message on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display
●
Signaling with a flashing LED
●
After lifting the handset for analog telephones
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
–
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
V1.0 or later
3-421
3000sb3.fm
Features
U.S. ISDN Features (for U.S. Only)
3.16.30 Internal Voice Mail
Definition
When the HiPath 3000 systems forward a call arriving over the ISDN/Central Office
interface to the local voice mail system, the control information specifies where the
forwarded call originated. The system alerts users that they have a message waiting
through the following methods:
●
Displaying a message on optiset E and optiPoint 500 telephones with display
●
Signaling with a flashing LED
●
Picking up the handset
Model-Specific Data
Subject
3-422
HiPath 3750
HiPath 3700
HiPath 3550
HiPath 3500
HiPath 3350
HiPath 3300
Feature available in
–
x
x
HW requirements
–
–
–
SW requirements
–
V1.0 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb3.fm
Features
Host Link Interface
3.17 Host Link Interface
Definition
Communication between HiPath 3000 and the applications running on host computers (Plus Products) is facilitated by:
●
the V.24 (RS-232) application programming interface (CSTA protocol,
19200 baud)
–
Customers must use a converter to support Plus Products that use ACL-H2.
The converter converts all messages and message procedures based on the
ACL-H2 protocol to the CSTA protocol and vice versa. The converter has
been implemented as a driver that runs under Microsoft Windows 95/98.
–
Plus Products that support the CSTA protocol standardized by ECMA can be
connected directly (for example, Hicom Agentline Office V1.1 CSTA).
●
An S0 interface configured as a station (ISDN/USBS)
●
An optiset E ISDN adapter or optiPoint ISDN adapter (TA S0) (ISDN/USBS)
●
the LAN interface (Ethernet)
For more information on this subject, refer to Chapter 4.
●
the PSTN interface.
For more information on this subject, refer to Chapter 4.
HiPath 3000 support CSTA Phase II and CSTA Phase III.
The connected application determines whether CSTA Phase II or Phase III will be
used for connection setup.
Contact your local service center for up-to-date information about the applications
supported in the different countries.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3-423
3000sb3.fm
Features
Host Link Interface
HiPath 3000 Interfaces for Applications
Application
ACL-H2
●
V.24 application interface
–
CSTA
Converter connection
CSTA
COM
Device
driver
Host (Plus product)
–
CSTA
Direct connection
CSTA
COM
Host (Plus product)
●
S0 interface, ISDN adapter
CSTA over USBS
CSTA
COM
Host (Plus product)
●
LAN interface:
–
HiPath 3000 (LIM)
CSTA over IP
CDRC over IP
Admin over IP
Data
COM
IP client
Host (Plus product)
–
CSTA over IP
HiPath 3750, HiCDRCover IP
Path 3550, HiPath
Admin over IP
3350, HiPath 3700,
HiPath 3500, HiData
Path 3300 (HiPath
HG1500 board)
COM
IP client
VCAPI
Host (Plus product)
Plus product administration over PPP
Administration over PPP
●
PSTN interface
Data
COM
IP client
Host (Plus product)
Figure 3-17
3-424
HiPath 3000 - Interfaces for Applications
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Overview
4 HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
4.1 Overview
Chapter Contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the table.
Topic
LAN Connecting Capabilities
page 4-2
IP Trunking
page 4-7
IP Payload Switching
page 4-17
Workpoint Clients
page 4-19
Wireless LAN
page 4-24
Applications over IP
page 4-31
Administration & Fault Management
page 4-35
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-1
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
LAN Connecting Capabilities
4.2 LAN Connecting Capabilities
4.2.1 LAN Connection using an LIM board
Implementation of the LIM submodule on a central board in the HiPath 3000 systems
allows the following applications for example:
●
Administration
–
APS update (TFP)
–
Back up CDB on TFTP server
●
Fault monitoring (maintenance)
●
Call charge output
●
TAPI 3rd-party applications supported
Data is transferred by using the SNMP protocol. Internet connection (routing) and
Voice over IP are not available with the LIM board.
HiPath 3000
Central Board
LIM
Customer
LAN
SNMP
e.g. PC with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Figure 4-1
4-2
e.g. PC for
Network Management
LAN Connection using the LIM Board
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
LAN Connecting Capabilities
4.2.2 LAN Connection using HiPath HG1500
4.2.2.1 Overview
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
Central Board
Central Board
ISDN
telecommunications
network
ISDN Board
ISDN Board
HG1500
HG1500
Customer
LAN
Customer
LAN
Voice over IP
Voice over IP
e.g. optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS
e.g.optiClient 130
Figure 4-2
PCs for Internet connection, VoIP,
administration etc.
LAN Connection using HiPath HG1500
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-3
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
LAN Connecting Capabilities
4.2.2.2 Definition
HiPath HG1500 is a voice and data gateway that can be implemented in HiPath 3000
(HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3700, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300).
This allows you to connect your system directly to Ethernet LANs (10/100 Mbps); in
turn the communications system can be connected to the communications server in
the LAN. Voice, fax and data communication is available over the ISDN operator network from every PC that is networked over the LAN.
HiPath HG1500 includes a H.323 gateway, which supports voice communication over
IP networks in compliance with standards.
The communications server HiPath 3000 thus forms the interface to the company’s
internal Ethernet LAN, where communications solutions and applications with multiuser capability can be implemented as follows:
4-4
●
optiClient 130 with optiset E functionalities
●
LAN-LAN link over ISDN
●
Remote LAN access/teleworking
●
RAS accesses now also using analog and GSM modems
●
Access to the Internet
●
Data communications services such as fax transmission and Euro file transfer
●
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) over TAPI and CAPI
●
Supports TAPI 3rd Party Applications (CSTA over LAN)
●
SNMP support
●
Improved serviceability with initial installation
●
Unified Messaging with the ixiServer Siemens Package
Fax server application for LAN users, can be integrated into MS-Outlook/Postoffice with fax receipt/dispatch and SMS dispatch.
●
Voice networking over IP connections (IP trunking)
●
Supports QoS standards
●
Windows 2000 support
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
LAN Connecting Capabilities
4.2.2.3 Hardware Notes
HiPath HG1500 is a HXGM2 board in HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700, the HXGS2
board in HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 and the HXGSR2 board in HiPath 3500 and
HiPath 3300. The power supply comes from the system.
The board includes a V.24 interface for initial startup. You will require a special adapter cable for initial startup with SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol). An RJ45 jack has
been provided for connecting to the LAN.
4.2.2.4 System Requirements
●
HiPath 3000 V1.0 or later
●
At least one Euro-ISDN basic access (connection to the network or another communications system)
●
At least one free slot in the basic system
●
Requirements for the LAN PC
–
Pentium III with at least 166 MHz, 64-MB SDRAM
–
Windows 95, 98 or 2000 or WindowsNT 4.0 Client PC
–
Network protocol TCP/IP or IPX/SP
4.2.2.5 System Environment
●
Shared/switched LAN 10/1000 Base T
●
Client/server and peer-to-peer networks with TCP/IP protocol
●
Networks with Novell Netware and IPX/SPX protocol
4.2.2.6 Interfaces and Protocols
●
Up to 48 channels (16 channels per HG1500) can be used (for system-dependent capacities see Table 2-1)
●
Ethernet 10/100 Mbps autosense
●
SNMP
●
CAPI 2.0 interface
●
TAPI 2.0 interface
●
Support of the PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP security protocols
●
H.323 (ITU standard)
●
G.711, G.723.1 voice coding
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-5
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
LAN Connecting Capabilities
●
PV.23bis for analog remote access PP and PPP multilink protocol
●
V.110 bit rate adaptation for remote access using GSM
●
QoS to DIFFSERV and IEEE 802.1p
4.2.2.7 Supported Voice over IP Clients
●
optiClient 130
●
Standard H.323 Client
●
optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS
4.2.2.8 Determining the number HiPath HG 1500 boards necessary
The following table shows the number of HiPath HG 1500 boards (B-channels) necessary based on the existing IP workpoint clients.
A prerequisite for value calculation is that a station must spend 10% of its working
time in call status. Provisions should be made for more B-channels (HiPath HG 1500
boards) in high traffic volume environment (e.g. call centers).
Table 4-1
Number of required B-channels (HiPath HG 1500 boards)
IP Workpoint Clients in the system
Required number of B-channels
0–3
2
4 – 12
4
13 – 16
6
17 – 38
8
39 – 54
10
55 – 70
12
71 – 86
14
87 – 96
16
Recommendation for over 100 IP workpoint clients:
an additional two B-channels must be provided for every 15 IP workpoint clients.
The HiPath HG 1500 boards HXGM / HXGM2 each feature max. 16 B-channels.
HXGS / HXGS2 / HXGSR / HXGSR2 boards each feature max. 8 B-channels per
board. Within this context, B-channels stand for DSP resources, one of which is reserved for music-on-hold.
4-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
4.3 IP Trunking
4.3.1 Overview
HiPath 3000
S0 Board
HiPath 3000
ISDN
telecommunications
network
S0 Board
HG1500
HG1500
Customer
LAN
CorNet “tunneling” over IP
Figure 4-3
IP Trunking
The implementation of IP telephony between the HiPath 3000 communications platforms has several advantages for our customers such saving on expensive leased
lines for telephony only, the convergence of communications networks for voice and
data over several locations, a standard contact partner for the infrastructure and other
advantages.
The main advantage for users of IP telephony is a significant saving on costs by using
a single infrastructure for data and voice. This advantage can be even further expanded by using the voice compression procedure, which allows existing lines to be
used much more effectively. For example, up to three calls can be conducted simultaneoulsy on a single ISDN channel if an optimized compression algorithm is used.
A considerable reduction in costs can be expected particularly for companies that already have a broad-band intranet. IP Trunking is available over the integrated ISDN
router HiPath HG1500 voice/data (Hicom Xpress@ LAN 1.1 Data/Voice).
●
max. 16 channels per HG1500
●
max. 16 nodes for 1000 subscribers per network
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-7
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
HiPath HG1500has been extended to include the following features:
●
Quality of Service (IEEE 802.1d)
●
Type of Service (RFC 791)
●
Differentiated Services (RFC 2474)
●
Assured Forwarding, AF (RFC 2597)
●
Expedited Forwarding, EF (RFC 2598)
●
Compression to ITU G.723.1 or ITU G.711, adjustable
Note:
Compression to ITU G.723.1 and QoS IEEE 802.1 d can be adjusted for each board.
The B channels used for networking, the channels for routing and the channels provided for the IP clients are shared out amongst the total number of available B channels.
4.3.2 Features of IP Networking
Transparency for End Users
●
Special workpoint clients (terminals) are not required because voice data is not
converted into IP packages in the workpoint client, but rather in the LAN gateway.
●
Network-wide features are transferred which means that use of the workpoint clients has not changed and consequently, the user-friendliness of the telephone
has not been affected.
●
MFV tones are supported. Consequently, you can perform suffix-dialing or listen
to your voicemail over the IP network.
Fax (Group 3) and analog Modem as well as Data Transmission with X.75 over IP
Implementation of the integrated router HiPath HG1500 means that analog fax and
modem connections as well as data connections of the type X.75 can be transmitted
between IP-networked communications platforms without the need for additional
hardware. The system recognizes the connection type required on the basis of the
configured station type (fax, modem or language) and automatically establishes a
connection in the IP network.
The following connection types are supported:
●
4-8
Realtime fax transmission is supported in accordance with the ITU-T standard
T.30 (fax group 3). Faxes are transmitted between the networked communications platforms at a maximum speed of 14.4 kbps (V.17).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
●
Data can be transmitted via modem over the IP network at a speed of 33.6 kbps
using the ITU-T standard V.42.
●
Data transmission to the ITU-T standard X.75
Support of Network-wide Features
The CorNet-NSUB protocol is supported in an IP network which means that CorNetN-specific features are transmitted over the IP network (tunnelling).
Overall, the features that are transmitted today in the HiPath 3000 Corporate Network, are also transmitted in the IP network although the old network has been enhanced in certain respects (see Section 4.3.3, “Network-wide Features with IP Networking”).
Central Attendant Console
A central, system-wide attendant console can be configured within the IP network.
The option to have a busy signal across the communications platform is new.
Note:
The busy signal across the communications platform is only available with optiClient
Attendant.
Automatic Routing
Automatic routing to a backup or alternative network can be executed for new connections. A voice network (ISDN, for example) can also operate as a backup network.
This ensures that the high availability of the HiPath 3000 will not be affected when IP
networks are being used by voice and fax connections. Automatic routing is initiated if
●
the communications platform called is not available (due to faults or an overload
in the IP network for example)
●
no more capacity available in LAN accesses (maximum number of B-channels
for LAN gateway exceeded)
●
explicitly requested for connections (fax or modem connections, for example).
Note:
ISDN lines are required as trunk connections for routing data connections or VoIP
connections over the integrated ISDN routers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-9
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
Standard Numbering Plan
Telephone numbers are converted into the IP addresses of the remote communications platform (nodes) within the LAN access (HiPath HG1500). To ensure that the IP
address of the correct target node is implemented, a “routing table” must be created
which assigns the correct IP address to each telephone number or respective tie
trunk or prefix number. A standard numbering plan is required for this purpose. To
make it easy to use and to reduce service costs, we recommend that numbering goes
according to communications platforms. This means that the internal telephone numbers of all platforms are the same length, but begin with different digits.
Standard Compliance
●
Connection protocol
“Voice over IP” to ITU H.323
●
4-10
Voice transmission - Audio Codecs
–
ITU G.711
–
ITU G.723.1
●
Echo suppression to ITU-T G.165
●
Prioritization of data – Quality of Service (QoS)
–
IEEE 802.1d
–
RFC2474 Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
–
RFC791 Type of Service (TOS)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
4.3.3 Network-wide Features with IP Networking
New features have been added to the functionality of networking over digital leased
lines via CorNet-N.
Table 4-2
Services Provided Across the Communications Platform with
Networking
Function Name
Network-wide features
using CorNet-N-Subset/
IP Networking
Description of the Function
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Additional system
services
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Connection setup
Direct inward dialing in the network
Different rings (internal/external)
Transmission of number and name
Number or name shown on display
Callback on busy/free
Advice of charges output at subscriber line (AOC-D)
Call forwarding
Call forwarding (rerouting for optimization of B-channel use.)
Message waiting indicator for callbacks and voicemail messages
Call waiting
Network-wide class-of-service (max. 4 classes of
service)
Network-wide shared numbering plan
Display of name and number suppressed
Consultation hold (over second B-channel)
Transfer (over second B-channel with release of tie
trunk when station transferred)
Conference with max. 5 stations (display function not
universal)
Toggle
Hunt group and group call across all nodes)
Directed joining and leaving a group, across all
nodes
Hunt group overflow
Call detail recording for all nodes (communications
platforms) in the network (central solution)
4-11
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
Table 4-2
Services Provided Across the Communications Platform with
Networking
Function Name
Additional system services (continued)
Description of the Function
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Transit traffic
Least cost routing (LCR)
Call pickup (call pickup with subscribers from other
nodes (systems))
Follow Me
Chain call forwarding (maximum number of stations
monitored over several nodes)
Activate and deactivate features in IP-networked
communications platforms with user prompts at optiPoint 500 and optiset E workpoints.
(night answer, for example)
Central attendant console (optiClient Attendant) with
busy signal (the states free, internal/external busy
and faulty are signalled for stations in IP-networked
communications platforms.)
Central attendant console functions (forward, assign, recall, hold)
Use of only one B-chan- The following features cannot be used over a dedicated
nel over CorNet N sub- line if a B-channel has already been seized:
set
Consultation hold
●
Transfer
●
Toggle
●
Conference
●
Outside IP Networking, HiPath 3000 provide an option for conventional networking
over CorNet-N and QSig (ECMA V1.0 and ECMA V2.0). For information on this topic,
please refer to Section 3.12, “Networking”.
4-12
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
4.3.4 Requirements of the IP Network
Requirements of the Bandwidth
In general, voice quality is heavily dependent on the quality of the IP network and its
components such as switches and routers, for example. In networks that can provide
QoS (see page 4-16), customers have reported that the voice quality is extremely
good despite compression using ITU G723.1.
However, to achieve this voice quality, the criteria described below must be fulfilled
with regard to bandwidth and delay.
Required Connection Bandwidth
The customer network must fulfill the following requirements to ensure perfect transmission of voice over LAN:
●
Switched LAN with 100 Mbps
●
Separate port at the switch for each component involved in the IP network (no
hubs used as concentrators)
●
All components involved in voice transmission must support IEEE 802.1d at least
(layer 2).
●
In addition, all components involved must use routing to DiffServ standard RFC
2474 and the ToS standard (Type of Service) RFC 791.
Implementation in shared environments is possible but has not been released and is
not recommended as quality cannot be guaranteed.
IP Trunking with HiPath 3000 can also be operated in networks that have routing components.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-13
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
Bandwidth
The bandwidth for voice must be available in the network at all times. Consequently,
the network must be analyzed prior to installation of the components. The following
data is required to calculate the required bandwidth for voice transmission in an IP
network in relation to the number of simultaneous connections:
Type
Bandwidth per connection Bandwidth per connection
in the Ethernet
in the WAN
Voice with ITU
G.723.1
44 Kbps
19 Kbps
Voice with ITU
G.711
180 Kbps
83 Kbps
All values refer to the lowest packaging level.
Type
Record size
Bandwidth required
Busy signal (optiClient Attendant)
300 Byte
3 Kbps
Call data record
200 Byte
1 Kbps
ACD information
3.5 K
10 Kbps
Bandwidth required by supplementary services
The specified bandwidth represents the load with respect to a maximum volume of
calls with 1400 BHCA (this is the maximum traffic with connected ACD application.).
Accordingly, the minimum bandwidth required is as follows:
Required bandwidth
Formula [Kbps] (approximate values)
With ITU G.711
N x 180/83 (voice)
+ N x 4 (BLF+CDR)
+ 10 (ACD)
With ITU G.723.1
N x 44/19 (voice)
+ N x 4 (BLF+CDR)
+ 10 (ACD)
N = number of simultaneous voice connections
4-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
When configuring fax or modem transmissions using the formula described above
(outband transmission) the following are also required for each configured connection
●
approximately 20 Kbps for fax group 3 (V.17, 14 Kbps)
●
approximately 40 Kbps for modem connections (V.34, 33.6 Kbps).
Requirements of Delay Times
To achieve natural communication, the delay time in a voice connection (network delay) should not exceed 50 ms (one-way delay). Delays of more than 50 ms in one direction impair natural communication. The effect is similar to that experienced with
voice connections over satellite. The maximum number of HOPs must not exceed 15.
The delay can be reduced particularly effectively by means of priority control.
Caution is advised if the network is operated over lines with low bit rates (connection
of a branch office to the head office using 128 Kbps). If the trunk lines are overloaded,
delays may occur thus causing the quality of the voice transmission to deteriorate. We
therefore recommend that you provide higher bandwidths (reserves) or that you implement the G.723.1 Codec.
Maximum Package Losses
Package losses must not exceed 3 %. Deterioration in voice quality which is linked to
package losses is more severe with G.723.1 than with G.711.
Minimization of Broadcast/Multicast Traffic
In accordance with the rules of good network design, broadcast/multicast traffic
should be kept to a minimum. This can be achieved by structuring the network (VPN
for example) using routers/layer 3 switches and by implementing layer 2 switches,
which recognize multicasting.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-15
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Trunking
Provision of QoS in Data Networks
The required Quality of Service (QoS) discussed in the previous sections can be
guaranteed in a data network by means of the following:
●
●
●
4-16
Network design,
–
by reserving bandwidth for voice in an IP network (PVC in ATM, B-channels
in the ISDN network, for example), or
–
by means of bandwidth reservation procedures (such as RSVP) in an IP network
–
by configuring VPNs
–
by overdimensioning the network capacity.
By giving priority to voice over data:
–
Quality of Service (QoS) to IEEE 802.1d
–
Type of Service (ToS) to RFC 791
–
Differentiated Services (DiffServ - DS) to RFC 2474
By means of the following extra options:
–
Switch/router gives priority to “voice ports” over “data ports”, or
–
Switch/router gives priority to all packages with an IP address for the communications platforms.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Payload Switching
4.4 IP Payload Switching
Introduction
IP payload switching optimizes communication between LAN-based IP workpoint clients.
In the past, two B-channels (with two DSP resources) in the HiPath HG 1500 and HiPath 3000-internal switching network were seized for internal network calls.
In HiPath 3000 V3.0 and later, VoIP voice data (payload) is transferred directly between two IP workpoint clients in the network. When this happens, both IP workpoint
clients have full access to all system features.
Payload switching is also implemented for IP networking (PBX routing).
By ceasing to use B-channels, we have managed to preserve HiPath HG 1500 resources and facilitate a higher volume of network-internal call traffic.
A B-channel is still required on the HiPath HG 1500 for connections to the following
stations and lines:
●
UP0/E stations (optiset E, optiPoint 500)
●
Analog stations
●
ISDN stations
●
Trunks and tie lines (MSI, S0, S2M)
Example: a consultation call to an optiPoint 500 telephone is set up during an existing
connection between two IP workpoint clients. A HiPath HG 1500 B-channel is necessary for this consultation call.
In the case of conferences, the number of B-channels seized corresponds to the number of stations and IP workpoint clients involved.
A HiPath HG 1500 DSP resource (no B-channel) is permanently reserved for playing
music-on-hold.
Example: a license was acquired for two B-channels and six clients. Six optiPoint 400
standard CorNet-IP-TSs are logged on. The following scenario is possible in this
case: two stations can conduct an external call, while two stations are listening to
MoH and two stations are talking to each other.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-17
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
IP Payload Switching
Prerequisites
The following components are necessary for using payload switching:
●
IP workpoint clients
–
optiClient 130 V2.0
–
optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS V3.0 (CorNet-IP-TS protocol variant)
optiPoint 300 advance and the optiPoint IPadapter (supported up to and including
V1.2) are not supported.
●
HiPath HG 1500 boards with Digital Signal Processor DSP (voice and data).
Payload switching can be configured using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
4-18
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Workpoint Clients
4.5 Workpoint Clients
4.5.1 optiClient 130
Definition
The optiClient is a computer-based approximation of optiset E telephone functionality.
Through the use of VoIP and support of the H.323 standard all of the main CorNetTS features are available to the customer directly on the PC when the client is being
used in conjunction with HiPath 3000. You can communicate with all voice terminals
that are connected through the gateway HiPath HG1500 which is integrated in the HiPath 3000 systems. The client is a simple software solution. Figure 4-4 shows two
possible applications for the optiClient 130
●
Implementation of the optiClient 130 at the LAN of the HiPath 3000 V1.2
●
Implementation of the optiClient 130 as a home workstation using remote access
HiPath 3000
optiClient 130
with remote access
Central Board
ISDN
telecommunications
network
ISDN Board
HG1500
ISDN
Internet
connection
Implementation
as home workstation for
example
Customer
LAN
optiClient 130
Figure 4-4
Options for Implementing the optiClient 130
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-19
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Workpoint Clients
Features
optiClient 130 uses optiset E functionalities in conjunction with HiPath 3000. In addition, the client is also equipped with ACD functions.
●
ACD keys/displays
–
ACD, logon
–
ACD, log off
–
ACD, available
–
ACD, not available
–
ACD, night service on
–
ACD, night service off
–
ACD, night destination on
–
ACD, night destination off
–
ACD, call queue status
●
Code lock, on/off/change
●
Reset services for own station
●
Electronic directory (private)
●
Electronic directory (global)
●
Terminal ID
●
Fault indicator
●
Home workstation (remote access with G.723)
●
Message (message waiting) - send/read/answer
●
Call charge display for active connection
●
Call charge display for own station
Minimum Requirements of the PC
4-20
●
Pentium II 233 MHz
●
128-MB RAM
●
200-MB free hard disk space
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Workpoint Clients
System Components
●
Software solution on CD-ROM
●
Documentation on CD-ROM
●
Operating system: Windows NT V.4.0 and Windows 98 (Windows 2000 in preparatory stages)
Properties
●
Supports all of the main features in accordance with CorNet-TS
●
Voice compression: G.711, G.723.1
●
Standard LAN protocols (Ethernet, IP, UDP, TCP, RTP...)
●
H.323 protocol
●
Interoperability with Microsoft NetMeeting via T 120
●
H.323 Client with H.323/H.320 gateway support
Technical Data
●
Usable transmission bandwidth for voice connections: max. 64 Kbps
●
Audio compression: G.711, G.723.1 (software codec)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-21
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Workpoint Clients
4.5.2 optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS
The IP telephone optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS allows the user to carry out
telephone calls in the same old simple way over a data network.
All HiPath 3000 features that are offered in the display dialog, in the service menu,
and on function keys are available (except for Relocate).
Figure 4-5
optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS
Advantages of the IP Telephone
4-22
●
Quick and error-free dialing directly from the address book of a PC application
(for example, MS Outlook) using CTI (TAPI).
●
Simple and convenient administration because it uses the standard protocols
DHCP, SNMP, HTTP.
●
Software updates and upgrades of the features possible using FTP.
●
The use of the H.323 standard allows the telephone to communicate with other
H.323-compatible systems.
●
The two switching Ethernet interfaces and Internet protocol (IP) allow the user to
telephone on both the company’s internal Intranet and the public Internet.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Workpoint Clients
Main Features
●
12 function keys with LEDs
●
Alphanumeric LCD display (swivel) with 2 lines, 24 characters each
●
3 dialog keys for interactive user prompts: “Yes”, “Back”, and “Next”
●
Full duplex speakerphone mode with echo suppression for adapting to the room
●
2 settings keys (plus/minus) for ringer volume, ringer pitch, alerting tone, speaker
quality
●
Interfaces:
●
–
10/100 Mbps Ethernet port (self-configuring) for LAN connection
–
10/100 Mbps Ethernet port (self-configuring) for PC connection
Suitable for wall mounting
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-23
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
4.6 Wireless LAN
4.6.1 HiPath Wireless BreezeNET
The HiPath Wireless BreezeNET product is a network platform for the cordless networking of PCs, notebooks and local subnetworks (LAN). Furthermore, the product
can also be used in the HiPath environment for mobile networking of IT terminals
(handheld phones, mobile IP telephones, clients, ...).
The radio components are fully compatible with HiPath products and consequently
make all LAN solutions offered in the HiPath environment available as mobile units.
Transmission speeds of up to 11 Mbps and full compatibility with traditional, corded
Ethernet networks mean that employees in a company can call up e-mails, documents, databases and the Internet/intranet from any location within the radio range
using cordless solutions.
HiPath Wireless BreezeNET consists of two main components:
●
the access point = sending station of the wireless LAN and
●
the mobile client = notebook with PCMCIA.
The access point is the interface to the outside world and is connected to the corded
company LAN. The mobile client is the “networked” terminal on which the data and
voice applications that are offered can be used.
Examples of the Wireless LAN Implementation
4-24
●
Wireless offices
Small networks with several PCs can be set up completely without any cables, in
offices rented on a temporary basis for example.
●
Wireless LAN hotspots
In meeting rooms or in the area of workstations for employees in the field.
●
Full-coverage installation of Wireless LAN in a company
Full-coverage provision with Wireless LAN is the perfect solution if a company is
spread over several branch offices and employees often have to travel from one
location to another. Using Wireless LAN you can use your notebook to connect
to your company’s LAN at any time and in any branch office without the need for
extra cables.
●
Networking buildings
Distances of up to 10 km can be bridged using a Wireless LAN bridge. This allows fast and economical network connection between buildings without expensive excavation work or without having to lease carrier services.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
●
Networking two HiPath 3000
Using a Wireless LAN bridge two systems can be networked with one another
over TCP/IP. This network is a good solution if the systems are located in two different buildings and there is no direct cable or network connection between the
buildings.
4.6.2 Implementation Scenarios
4.6.2.1 Mobile optiClient 130
Figure 4-6
Mobile optiClient 130
The optiClient 130 offers users a high degree of flexibility and full ease of communication regardless of the user’s location.
In the solution illustrated in Figure 4-6 the optiClient 130 is installed on a notebook.
This notebook must be equipped with a PCMCIA slot and the relevant sound card to
support the optiClient 130 software. The wireless network connection to the Wireless
LAN is established using the WLAN-PCMCIA card.
HiPath 3000 is connected using the HiPath HG1500 gateway.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-25
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
4.6.2.2 Wireless LAN Network Between Two HiPath 3000
Figure 4-7
Wireless LAN Network
Two HiPath 3000 systems can be networked quickly and economically using the
Wireless LAN network. The entire range of HiPath functions is transmitted (tunneled)
via the radio link using the TCP/IP protocol.
The systems networked over the Wireless LAN appear to the user as a “large HiPath
system”. Not only is the voice connection set up via the radio link, but the networked
systems are also administered and the optional HiPath AllServe server PC accessed.
Each HiPath 3000 system requires a HiPath HG1500 board which is connected to the
Wireless LAN bridges for networking.
Depending on the antennas used, distances of up to 10 km can be bridged. The 15dBi antenna used in the standard package permits distances of up to 3 km.
4-26
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
4.6.3 Main Components of HiPath Wireless BreezeNET
The devices described operate using the frequency hopping procedure in the 2.4
GHz range and are thus largely protected from interference.
Additional accessories such as special wall brackets, antenna clips, various amplifiers for antenna signals are available for the following components.
4.6.3.1 Access Point PRO.11
Figure 4-8
Access Point AP-10 PRO.11
The access point is the master station in the HiPath Wireless platform and, in turn,
the central Wireless LAN access node.
The access point creates a WLAN radio cell in which the WLAN station adapter and
WLAN PCMCIA-PC cards (and thus the connected workpoint clients) can communicate with one another and gain access to the corded Ethernet LAN.
To cover more extensive areas, several access points whose radio areas must overlap have to be installed. These are installed in the same way as those in DECT base
stations.
The following variants with one Ethernet connection each are available:
●
AP-10 PRO.11 (Figure 4-8) with two integrated omnidirectional antennas.
●
AP-10D PRO.11 for the connection of high-gain external antennas.
●
AP-10DL PRO.11 for the connection of high-gain external antennas for implementation in Europe in compliance with the ETSI standard.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-27
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
4.6.3.2 PCMCIA-PC Card PRO.11
Figure 4-9
PCMCIA-PC Card SA-PCR PRO.11
WLAN PCMCIA PC cards allow wireless communication between notebooks and
PDAs with PCMCIA II compatible slots and an Access Point PRO.11 and, as a result,
access to the corded Ethernet LAN.
The capacity to create an effective and cordless connection makes the WLAN PCMCIA PC cards perfect for implementation in environments in which users are constantly on the move. Examples are companies, hospitals, trade and university campuses.
Two variations of the PC card are available:
●
SA-PCR PRO.11 (Figure 4-9) with two integrated retractable omnidirectional antennas.
●
SA-PCD PRO.11 with two connections for external antennas.
4.6.3.3 Station Adapter PRO.11
Figure 4-10
Station Adapter SA-10 PRO.11 and SA-40 PRO.11
The station adapter converts a device with an Ethernet interface (desktop computers,
printers and other devices for example) into a cordless LAN workstation.
This workstation communicates with another cordless workstation within the same radio cell supply area and accesses all network resources over the Access Point
PRO.11 such as file servers, corded workstations, printers and shared databases, for
example.
Every device with an Ethernet interface — regardless of manufacturer or operating
system — can be connected quickly and transparently with a Wireless LAN. Special
drivers or configurations need not be installed.
4-28
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
The following versions and variations of the station adapter are available:
●
●
Single station adapter with an Ethernet connection:
–
SA-10 PRO.11 with two integrated 2dbi omnidirectional antennas.
–
SA-10D PRO.11 for implementation with external antennas.
–
SA-10DL PRO.11 for connecting high-gain external antennas, for implementation in Europe in compliance with the ETSI standard.
Four port station adapter with four Ethernet connections:
–
SA-40 PRO.11 with two integrated omnidirectional antennas.
–
SA-40D PRO.11 for implementation with external antennas.
–
SA-40DL PRO.11 for connecting high-gain external antennas, for implementation in Europe in compliance with the ETSI standard.
4.6.3.4 Workgroup Bridge PRO.11
Figure 4-11
Workgroup Bridge WB-10D PRO.11
The workgroup bridge establishes a second extended cordless network, which connects locations to corded networks up to 9.6 km apart. In Europe this distance is restricted to 2.5 km as a result of ETSI regulations. In areas that are not subject to regulations, this distance can extend to up to 60 km.
This allows a central Ethernet LAN to be connected with the LANs in one or more
branch offices.
Three variations of the workgroup bridge are available:
●
WB-10 PRO.11 with two integrated 2dbi omnidirectional antennas.
●
WB-10D PRO.11 (Figure 4-11) with two connections for external antennas.
●
WB-10DL PRO.11 for connecting high-gain external antennas, for implementation in Europe in compliance with the ETSI standard.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-29
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Wireless LAN
4.6.3.5 Wireless Base Unit BU-DS.11
The BU-DS.11 is a base station in compliance with IEEE 802.11b, which is used either to connect an individual remote location or several remote locations with a central
server or an Internet connection.
4.6.3.6 Wireless Bridge RB-DS.11
RB-DS.11 connects a remote Ethernet network with a BU-DS.11 Wireless base unit
to a central server or an Internet location.
4.6.4 Extension of a Wireless LAN Network
Existing Wireless LAN networks support modular expansion. In the case of an expansion, a distinction must be made between the integration of additional workpoint clients and the expansion of the actual radio network.
Additional workpoint clients can easily be integrated into an existing WLAN network.
To do this, a PCMCIA-WLAN PC card is simply implemented in a notebook or a station adapter is connected to the Ethernet port on the new device. When you enter the
ESS-ID and the optional WEP key you can communicate in the Wireless LAN network
area.
To extend a WLAN network to include additional radio cells, extra access points have
to be set up at the appropriate positions. The existing network has to be precisely
planned and analyzed (radio coverage) before locations for the access points can be
selected and before they can be incorporated into the existing radio network. These
tasks must be performed by specially trained personnel.
4-30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Applications over IP
4.7 Applications over IP
4.7.1 Call Detail Recording Central (CDRC) via IP
In HiPath 3000, you can start up the central call data output function only once, which
means that it is available to only one application at a time. Three different modes exist
to support the various requirements of the different applications.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
x
x
x
LIM
or
HiPath HG1500 board
SW requirements
x
x
LIM
LIM
V1.2 or later
4.7.1.1 TFTP Client in HiPath 3000
External
application
HiPath 3000
TFTP
client
TFTP protocol
TFTP
server
Alternative
server
Figure 4-12
CDRC via IP - TFTP Client in HiPath 3000
Controlled by a programmable timer and a fixed threshold value determining the call
data buffer capacity (around 80 percent of the call data buffer full), the TFTP client
(HiPath 3000) sends call data to the TFTP server (external application). If the system
cannot set up a connection to the TFTP server, it addresses an alternative server. If
this server is also unavailable, it outputs an SNMP trap or error message (“Unable to
output data”). The system tries to set up another connection every 60 seconds. A call
data buffer overflow causes an error message to be entered in the error history file.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-31
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Applications over IP
4.7.1.2 TCP Client in HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
External
application
TCP
client
Figure 4-13
TCP protocol
TCP
server
CDRC via IP - TCP Client in HiPath 3000
When call data records accumulate, the TCP client (HiPath 3000) sets up a TCP/IP
connection to an external TCP server (external application) and transmits the data.
The connection remains active continuously so that the system can send any further
accumulated data, transmitting each data record separately.
4.7.1.3 TFTP Server in HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
TFTP
server
External
application
TFTP protocol
TFTP
client
TFTP
client
Figure 4-14
CDRC via IP - TFTP Client in HiPath 3000
The external application (TFTP client) requests output of the call data records. To do
this, the application must set up a connection and indicate the service (GET gez.txt),
after which it receives all accumulated call data records. It releases the connection
after the transfer.
The application’s request for call data can be controlled automatically or using an
SNMP trap (see Section 4.8.2). HiPath 3000 sends the SNMP trap (“data available”)
to the external application, generating the trap using a programmable threshold value
determining the call data buffer capacity (0 to 80 percent of the call data buffer full).
4-32
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Applications over IP
4.7.2 CSTA via IP
HiPath 3000 uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) for CSTA via IP, detecting
and automatically correcting lost data packets over a permanent connection.
A total of three CSTA clients or applications can connect to HiPath 3000 simultaneously via the LAN, and thus can use CSTA via IP simultaneously. Restrictions may
apply to applications that use certain services. For example, only one application at
a time can start the message registration function.
External
applications
CSTA
client
HiPath 3000
TCP/IP
server
LAN
CSTA
client
Up to 3 CSTA clients (external applications) can be
served simultaneously.
CSTA
client
CSTA
client
Figure 4-15
HiPath 3000 - CSTA via IP
For an external application to address HiPath 3000, it must know the TCP port (7001)
of the TCP/IP server implemented in HiPath 3000 as well as the IP address.
Data packets sent from an application to HiPath 3000 -- that is, packets containing the
HiPath IP address, TCP port 7001, and protocol type TCP -- are accepted for further
processing.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-33
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Applications over IP
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
4-34
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
–
–
HW requirements
LIM
or
HiPath HG1500 board
–
–
SW requirements
V1.2 or later
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
4.8 Administration & Fault Management
4.8.1 Overview
HiPath 3000 with a LIM or a HiPath HG1500 board can be administered centrally over
a LAN connection from one or more PCs using SNMP. The following functionalities
can be implemented:
●
Administration and fault management of a system (SNMP)
●
APS update (TFP)
●
CDB backup on TFTP server
●
Network management
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
HiPath 3000
Central Board
Central Board
Central Board
Central Board
LIM
LIM
LIM
LIM
Customer
LAN
SNMP
e. g. PC with
e. g. PC with
HiPath 3000 Manag- Network Management
er E
Figure 4-16
e. g. PC with
e. g. PC with
HiPath 3000 Manag- Network Management
er E
HiPath 3000 - Administration over LAN
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-35
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
4.8.2 SNMP Functionality
4.8.2.1 Introduction
As part of the TCP/IP protocol family, the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an easy-to-use platform for performing management tasks in the HiPath 3000
system software. SNMP is used as a kind of management agent in HiPath 3000, making it possible to monitor and administer LAN components (including HiPath 3000 itself) from a central location. This involves
●
addressing HiPath 3000 via the TCP/IP protocol family.
●
allowing external management applications, such as HP Open View and IBM
Tivoli, to access data in HiPath 3000 (using SNMP messages, such as GET, SET,
TRAP)
●
implementing remote maintenance tasks (online port status, enabling and disabling ports, determining free ports)
●
transmitting service-related class B errors
●
visualizing the operating status of HiPath 3000 systems.
4.8.2.2 Overview of SNMP Functions
Management Information Bases (MIBs)
MIBs define the volume of data that can be administered via SNMP. They are data
models that describe the network elements to be administered in a very specific form.
HiPath 3000 supports
4-36
●
standard MIB II (according to the RFC1213 Internet standard), which provides Internet and router functions;
●
parts of the RMON 1/2 standard MIBs (RFC 1757, RFC 2021), which support
–
Error history
–
Trap configuration
–
TFTP configuration
–
General system information
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
●
a user-specific MIB that processes HiPath-specific statistic data (feature
counters) and internal error messages (error history), covering the following areas:
–
ControlGroup – status variables, general configuration, supplementary
TFTP configuration data
–
SystemInfoGroup – system configuration and status
–
StatisticsGroup – statistic data on features
–
ErrorHistoryGroup – Error history in HiPath format
Error messages are forwarded in the form of SNMP traps via the LAN to a
specific external management application. The SNMP traps form the error
history data structure (time stamp, error class, error description).
These components use the IP protocol according to OSI layer 3 and the UDP protocol
according to layer 4. The SNMP protocol stack uses port numbers. The system supports the SNMP protocol version 1.0.
SNMP Messages
The following commands control SNMP messages for communication between the
SNMP management agent (HiPath 3000) and external applications:
●
GET – retrieve data from agent
●
GET NEXT – read out data sequentially
●
SET – write data
●
TRAP – alarm messages issued by the SNMP agent
There is an integrated mechanism for generating SNMP traps in the event of class B
errors. The SNMP management agent evaluates the error messages. In the case of
defined errors, it generates specific traps and transmits them in the form of IP data
records to a configurable IP address (a total of five SNMP V1.0-compatible applications are supported, including HP Open View Network Node Manager).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-37
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
4.8.3 Administering HiPath 3000 via the LAN Interface
You can administer HiPath 3000 via a computer connected to the LAN.
HiPath 3000
Central Board
LIM *
Customer
LAN
PC with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
* A HiPath HG1500 board can be used instead of the LIM board: HXGM, HXGM2 for HiPath 3750
and HiPath 3700, HXGS, HXGS2 for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 or HXGSR, HXGSR2 for HiPath
3500 and HiPath 3300.
Figure 4-17
HiPath 3000 - Administration via the LAN Interface
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
4-38
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
LIM
or
HiPath HG1500 board
x
x
LIM
LIM
V1.2 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
4.8.4 Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 via PPP
You can administer multiple HiPath 3000 systems from a central service center via
PPP (point-to-point protocol). Each HiPath 3000 is addressed via its PSTN (public
switching telephone network) interface.
You must enter a router call number (DID number) for every PSTN interface in the service center for external access to HiPath 3000. This number is not the station number
previously used for administration via an integrated digital modem (B channel) or integrated analog modem (IMODC).
You can establish a connection between the service center and HiPath 3000 via the
integrated digital modem (B channel) or the integrated analog modem (IMODC). The
point-to-point protocol (PPP) is used in both cases for data exchange.
HiPath 3000
PSTN
(analog or
digital telecommunications
network)
Central Board
Modem
Figure 4-18
Service center
service PC
with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
PSTN
interface
Remote Administration of HiPath 3000 via PPP
If the connection is established via callback, HiPath 3000 first of all denies a connection request from the service center (HiPath 3000 Manager E). A callback is then set
up to the service center’s calling party number transferred via the PSTN connection’s
D channel.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
x
x
x
x
x
CBCPR
CBCC or
CBRC
CBCC or
CBRC
SBSCO
SBSCS
V1.2 or later
4-39
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
4.8.5 Remote Administration of Plus Products via PPP
You can use HiPath 3000 to administer Plus Products from a central service center.
HiPath 3000 only provides the transmission medium for this. The actual Plus Product
administration is performed via special software programs, such as pcANYWHERE.
HiPath 3000 is addressed from the service center via its PSTN (public switching telephone network) interface. The Plus Products connected to a LAN can be reached via
the HiPath 3000’s LAN interface (LIM). In this case, HiPath 3000 acts like a router.
You must enter a router call number (DID number) for every PSTN interface in the service center for external access to HiPath 3000.
You can establish a connection between the Plus Product and the service center via
the integrated digital modem (B channel) or the integrated analog modem (IMODC).
The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is used in both cases for data exchange.
HiPath 3000
PSTN
(analog or
digital telecommunications
network)
Central Board
Modem
LIM *
PSTN
interface
Service center
service PC
with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Customer
LAN
Plus Products
* A HiPath HG1500 board can be used instead of the LIM board: HXGM, HXGM2 for HiPath 3750
and HiPath 3700, HXGS, HXGS2 for HiPath 3550 and HiPath 3350 or HXGSR, HXGSR2 for HiPath
3500 and HiPath 3300.
Figure 4-19
4-40
Remote Administration of Plus Products via PPP
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
If a Plus Product supports SNMP traps, these can be transferred from the HiPath
3000 to the service center.
Access Mechanism
A ist of up to twenty remote structures controls access from the service center to the
customer LAN and vice versa. Each remote structure contains the following information:
●
The IP address of the service center (= PSTN partner in the service center) for
setting up connections from the customer LAN to the service center and for the
automatic transmission of error messages (SNMP traps).
●
The DID number (part of the numbering plans) for direct identification of this remote structure.
●
Up to five PSTN remote numbers marked as incoming (for identifying the remote
structure - when dialing the router call number) and/or outgoing (for use as callback address).
●
Short hold mode yes/no
–
If “Short hold = yes” is selected, an inactive PSTN connection is cleared
down after a set time *+'
#
*
+"
#
%
–
If “Short hold = no” is selected, a ,)"&
remains permanently active until the end criterion is received.
●
Short hold (sec.)
This parameter describes the length of time in seconds after which an inactive
PSTN connection is cleared down.
●
Callbk yes/no
●
–
If “Callbk = yes” is selected, a connection request is first of all denied. Then
the first station number marked as outgoing in the remote structure found is
called back. Three attempts are made to set up the connection, then the next
outgoing station number is used. The system stops trying to set up the callback after three unsuccessful attempts.
–
If “Callbk = no” is selected, the connection is set up immediately.
Remote analog modem
If you select “yes”, the V.34 protocol in the B channel is used for an outgoing connection via the ISDN line.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
4-41
3000sb4.fm
HiPath 3000 in the LAN Network
Administration & Fault Management
●
IP mapping yes/no
If a number of different customers have the same IP address, you can use address mapping to achieve unique IP address assignment in the various customer
LANs.
–
If “IP mapping = yes” is selected, you can map an IP address which is assigned to multiple customers to a unique “virtual” IP address. You can perform IP mapping for up to twenty address entries.
Examples:
IP data transfer from the customer LAN to the service center via the PSTN
interface: IP customer LAN is transformed by HiPath 3000 into an IP virtual
LAN.
IP data transfer from the service center to the customer LAN via the PSTN
interface: IP virtual LAN is transformed by HiPath 3000 into an IP customer
LAN.
–
●
If “IP mapping = no” is selected, IP address mapping is not available.
Security mechanisms for connection setup
Use the PAP (PPP authentication protocol) and/or CHAP (challenge-handshake
authentication protocol) to determine whether
–
the Plus Product (client) must be authenticated at HiPath 3000 (host) or
–
the HiPath 3000 (host) must be authenticated at the Plus Product (client).
Authentication is based on the user ID and the password.
Model-Specific Data
Subject
Feature available in
HW requirements
SW requirements
4-42
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
x
x
x
LIM
or
HiPath HG1500 board
x
x
LIM
LIM
V1.2 or later
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Overview
5 Serviceability
5.1 Overview
Introduction
This chapter describes the options available to the service technician and the customer for
●
performing system administration tasks on site
●
performing system administration tasks from a remote location (remote operation)
●
performing service and maintenance tasks
●
identifying faults
Chapter Contents
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the table.
Topic
System Administration Options
page 5-2
●
System Administration from a System Telephone
page 5-3
●
System Administration using the Service PC
page 5-3
●
Administration of the HiPath HG1500
page 5-5
Options in the Service Department
page 5-6
●
Customer Database Backup (CDB Backup)
page 5-6
●
Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS)
page 5-7
●
Diagnosis Options
page 5-9
●
Error Messages
page 5-17
●
Correcting Errors
page 5-18
●
Remote Service
page 5-20
●
Access Security
page 5-24
●
Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures
page 5-31
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-1
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
System Administration Options
5.2 System Administration Options
Overview
Administration on site
Customer
Assistant TC
Access with user name and
password
Technician
Assistant T
Access with user name and
password
Customer
HiPath 3000 Manager C
Access with customer ID and
password
Technician
HiPath 3000 Manager E
Access with technician ID
and password
123
456
789
00
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
↵ ←→
↑↓
Administration from a remote location
Technician
Figure 5-1
5-2
HiPath 3000 Manager E
(customized for remote center)
Access via callback with
technician ID and password
Minor system adjustments
by
customer
Limited system adjustments
by
service technician
Limited system adjustments
and administration
by customer
Complete system adjustments and administration
by service technician
Complete system adjustments and administration
by service technician,
APS transfer
System Administration Options
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
System Administration Options
5.2.1 System Administration from a System Telephone
All systems in the HiPath 3000 product family can be administered to the full extent
via a system telephone. The rights of individual user will determine the extent to
which he or she can perform administration tasks. Information on the various user
groups and their access rights is contained in Section 5.3.7.2.
Administration by the Technician using Assistant T
This data area is password-protected to limit access to trained service technicians.
With just a few exceptions, all system settings are available. Assistant T gives you the
ability to make changes spontaneously on site, that is, without requiring any other
tools.
You can only enter the service menu with a user ID and password.
Administration by the Customer using Assistant TC
This gives customers the option to perform a defined range of system settings themselves. These include, for example, configuring and changing speed-dialing destinations, assigning names for stations and lines.
To protect individual customer data such as speed-dialing destinations or call detail
information, it is not possible to enter the service menu unless you have user ID and
password.
5.2.2 System Administration using the Service PC
Service tools with Windows user interface and integrated help functions are available
for the economical modification of larger volumes of data and for setting specific system data. The rights of the individual user will determine the extent to which he or she
can perform administration tasks. Information on the various user groups and their
access rights is contained in Section 5.3.7.2.
You can access the communications platform using:
●
ISDN adapter on the system telephone (64 kbps B-channel access)
●
V.24 (RS-232) interface on the system (9600/1200 baud)
●
Internal S0 bus (64 kbps/CAPI 2.0)
●
Remote access over an ISDN trunk (64 kbps B-channel access)
●
Remote access over an analog trunk (integrated 14400 baud modem)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-3
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
System Administration Options
Technical Requirements for the Service PC
To implement the different service tools, the PC used must meet the technical listed
in the following table.
Table 5-1
Technical Requirements for the Service PC
PC Component
Requirement
CPU
PC must fulfill the minimum requirements of the operating
system.
Monitor
VGA
RAM
PC must fulfill the minimum requirements of the operating
system.
Hard disk
50 MB free capacity (minimum)
Floppy drive
3,5”, 1.44 MB
Serial interface
COM1, (COM2)
Mouse
Microsoft-compatible mouse
Printer
Any Windows-compatible printer
Operating system
Windows 95/98/2000/NT
Administration by the Customer using HiPath 3000 Manager C
This allows the customer to administer customer-specific data using a PC. The user
interface has been adapted from the HiPath 3000 Manager E interface and the help
functions have been adjusted to the needs of the customer.
Administration by the Technician using HiPath 3000 Manager E
"
#-
5-4
●
Acquiring and generating customer data (including off-line generation)
●
Copying and backing up customer data
●
Loading system software (APS transfer)
●
Displaying stored error messages with error history
●
Service orders, such as restarting boards
●
Resetting activated features
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
System Administration Options
●
Creation and printing of:
–
Key labels for optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones
–
Customer data printouts
–
Main distribution frame layout
●
User and password administration for after sales service.
●
Database conversion routine.
Access to the system using HiPath 3000 Manager E is only available with a valid user
name and associated password that have been entered in the system.
#
#
.'
"
Because sensitive system data can be processed, users are required to undergo the
relevant training course before using the HiPath 3000 Manager E.
5.2.3 Administration of the HiPath HG1500
Assistant I allows you to administer the voice and data gateway HiPath HG1500. It is
provided in the basic HiPath HG1500 package.
Users (customers and technicians) can modify all of the main functions to their individual requirements directly over the LAN (for example numbers and IP addresses of
external partners, assignment of B-channels, timer settings, security mechanisms
(firewalls)).
Consequently, the system can be administered (initially) directly over the LAN interface using the PC and Hicom Assistant I Office. For information on the procedure
please refer to the administration instructions for HiPath HG1500.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-5
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3 Options in the Service Department
5.3.1 Customer Database Backup (CDB Backup)
Definition
CDB backup means that a backup copy of the customer database (CDB) is saved on
the Multimedia Card MMC. The Run LED signals that a CDB backup, which takes
about 30 s, is in progress on the MMC by repeatedly switching off for a short time.
5.3.1.1 Automatic Customer Data Backup
The HiPath 3000 provides a dual-level system that guarantees complete customer
data backup. A complete CDB backup version can be found on the MMC at any time.
Deltas to this backup are stored in an SRAM area (with battery backup) in the central
control board. If the SRAM area is full, the customer data is automatically backed up.
This means that the entire CDB, including SRAM content, is copied from the SDRAM
in the central control board to the MMC. The current CDB is simultaneously stored on
the MMC along with the “old” CDB, which is not deleted until the current CDB is completely stored on the MMC.
In case of a power outage, the SDRAM content that has no battery backup is completely lost. However, by reaccessing the CDB backup on the MMC, the system’s database can be restored to the state it was in prior to the power outage.
Regardless of the volume of changes to the database, HiPath 3000 always performs
an automatic complete CDB backup at midnight, system-time.
5.3.1.2 Manual Customer Data Backup
You can perform a manual CDB backup using Assistant T or HiPath 3000 Manager E
(in online mode).
However, be aware that it is not possible to deliberately abort a manual backup that
is initiated using Assistant T. Once the CDB backup process starts, it should be ended because the backup continues to run in the background.
The CDB, including the call detail data, can also be restored from the MMC manually.
5-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.2 Relocate/Transfer Application Processor Software (APS)
Two memory areas for the application processor software are reserved on the MMC.
To be able to store two complete APS and to keep the transfer time as low as possible,
part of an APS is stored in a compressed format. The APS is decompressed after it
has been transferred from the MMC into the SDRAM area of the central control board.
5.3.2.1 Transferring an APS by Replacing the MMC
The simplest way of transferring an APS is to exchange the MMC with the “old” APS
for the MMC with the “new” APS.
The MMC can be replaced with and without interrupting the power:
●
No power interruption: CDB of the system remains intact.
●
With power interruption: system’s CDB incorporated onto the MMC.
5.3.2.2 APS Transfer
Options
The APS Transfer feature is available with the HiPath 3000 Manager E. It facilitates
●
●
an on-site APS transfer by connecting directly using
–
the V.24 interface
The transfer takes about 30 minutes.
–
an ISDN adapter (not compatible with HiPath 3150) or an S0 subscriber port.
Transfer times with this option are about 25 minutes.
an APS transfer using remote service from a central service center using
–
the integrated analog or digital modem or
–
a LAN (see Chapter 4).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-7
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Function
This feature transfers the new APS in its entirety and stores it in the available area of
the MMC. After the transfer has been completed, the system analyzes the checksum
and subsequently reports whether or not
●
an error was found.
If so, you have to delete the transferred APS.
●
the APS transfer was successful.
You can then activate the APS immediately or at a later time.
Resetting the system initiates the changeover from the old APS to the new APS. If
problems occur during this process, the old APS is reactivated. Once the changeover
is successful, the old APS is deleted from the MMC.
In case of power outage, the SDRAM content that has no battery backup is completely lost. By reaccessing the current APS on the MMC, the system can be restored to
the state it was in prior to the power outage.
5-8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3 Diagnosis Options
5.3.3.1 Recording Board Status
5.3.3.1.1 Central Control Boards
Run LED
A Run LED that displays the system’s operating capacity is located on all central control boards of the HiPath 3000 product line.
Table 5-2
Run LED - Meaning of the LED Status
Run LED
Meaning
off
Power outage
on
Reset key quickly pressed
off
Reset key pressed longer than 5 s (LED disappears as verification for initiating a reload.)
on
System boot
off
for 0.1 s
Loading operation: APS in SDRAM/Loadware/Card data
blinking
0.5 s on/0.5 s off
Normal operating condition (zero load)1
blinking
0.1 s on/0.1 s off
MMC removed or defective
1 The blinking rhythm depends on the load. The higher the load, the slower the blinking rhythm.
Options Available?
You can call up the following options using the HiPath 3000 Manager E:
●
CMA
●
CMS
●
LIM
●
IMODC
●
MPPI, AM (only with HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150), UAM (only with HiPath 3550,
HiPath 3350) or UAMR (only with HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300)
The presence of one of these announcement and music modules is displayed as
„Option 5”. The ALUM4 option cannot be displayed.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-9
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3.1.2 Power Supplies
Table 5-3
Power Supply Status Displays
Board
Status Display
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700
UPSM
The LED displays the operating status (on or off).
HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500, HiPath 3300
PSUC, PSUCR
The LED displays the 5 V output voltage.
PSUP, PSUPR
The LED displays the 5 V output voltage.
UPSC-D, UPSC-DR
●
●
A green LED displays the 5 V output voltage.
A yellow LED displays the additional power of –48 V
output voltage provided by an external power supply
unit (EPSU2 or EPSU2R).
HiPath 3250, HiPath 3150
PSU One
The LED displays the operating status (on or off).
5.3.3.1.3 Peripheral Boards
View Status of Peripheral Boards
You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T to view the statuses of all peripheral boards. Display is limited to the following statuses per board:
●
Board not inserted
●
Board defective (not loaded)
●
Board disabled
●
Board enabled (active)
●
Board busy (at least one station or line from this board is disconnected, is being
called, or is busy).
For ISDN boards, the status of the reference clock is displayed:
●
No reference clock
●
Reference clock for clock generator is created.
When viewing the status of the board using the HiPath 3000 Manager E, all peripheral
boards integrated into the system are presented in a table. The status display is updated every 3 seconds.
5-10
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
With the Assistant T, you can only view the status of one board at a time. You can also
update the status display by pressing a key.
You cannot perform additional activities with the HiPath 3000 Manager E and Assistant T while viewing the status of a board.
Table 5-4
Slot
HiPath 3000 Manager E - Example of Status Display of Peripheral
Boards
Board
1
STLS2
2
SLU8
3
SLA4
4
TLA8
Not insert- Defective
ed
Locked
out
Idle
X
Busy
Clock
source
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
6
7
TS2
8
SLA16
X
9
10
SLMO24
X
HiPath 3750, HiPath 3700: LEDs on Peripheral Boards
All peripheral boards are equipped with LEDs for displaying the status of a board or
port.
Locking out and Releasing Boards and Ports
Using the HiPath 3000 Manager E and Assistant T, you can lock out a complete station or trunk module. Lockout prevents the connection from being seized again after
the current connection has ended. Lockout or release settings are also retained after
a reset.
You cannot lock out the first SLMO/SLU board because administration through the
Assistant T uses its first two ports.
If you try to lock out the last active trunk, you will be notified that remote service
through the service center is no longer possible.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-11
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3.2 Recording Trunk Status
HiPath 3000 records the current status of each individual trunk in a table. If the status
changes, the new status along with the time stamp is entered. You can use HiPath
3000 Manager E to view the trunk status, in which case the following information is
provided.
Data
Content
Date
Date of the event (as stored in system)
Time
Time of the event (as stored in system)
Trunk number
Number of the trunk
Slot/Port
Slot and port number
Status
●
●
5-12
Trunk status:
– Inactive
– Incoming call
– Outgoing call
– Trunk-to-trunk connection
– Trunk disabled (using lockout switch or HiPath
3000 Manager E)
– Trunk failure
Number of the connected station
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3.3 Recording Station Status
HiPath 3000 records the current status of each individual station in a table. You can
use HiPath 3000 Manager E to view the station status, in which case the following information is provided.
Data
Content
Station name
Name of the selected station
Slot/Port
For example: 7-1
Telephone model
For example: optiPoint 500 advance
Telephone status
Active/inactive
DID number
External number of the selected station
Language
Menu language of selected station
Connection status
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Inactive: The telephone is idle.
Busy: The telephone is off the hook, but
not yet dialed.
Waiting: The telephone call is in the
queue.
Connected: The telephone is connected
to a second telephone with a trunk or a
hunt group member.
Holding: The telephone is on hold.
Error: The connection cannot be established due to an error (invalid telephone
number).
Call: The telephone is called.
Connected to
The number of the connected station or trunk
Forwarding status
●
●
●
●
Destination
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
Off: No call forwarding activated.
Internal: Call forwarding activated only for
internal calls.
External: Call forwarding activated only
for external calls.
All: Call forwarding activated for all calls.
Number of call forwarding destination
5-13
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Data
Activated features
Content
Status of activated features (on or off):
Do not disturb
Call forwarding (device status)
●
Advisory text
●
Room monitor
●
Code lock
●
Station number suppression
●
Group ringing
●
Ringer connection
●
Hunt group
●
Silent call waiting
●
Handsfree answerback
●
Call waiting release
●
Transfer of ringing (only for MULAP)
●
Call forwarding MULAP (only for MULAP)
●
●
Connected station
List of the connected stations
5.3.3.4 Recording the Status of the V.24 Interface
You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to view the current status of the V.24 interface,
in which case the following information is provided.
●
Status of the trunks (1 = active trunk, 0 = inactive trunk)
The individual trunks are assigned as follows:
DTR = HiPath 3000
DSR = Telephone
RTS = HiPath 3000
CTS = Telephone
Viewing the status of the V.24 interface enables falsely connected or damaged
cables to be recorded (For more information on this, refer to Help in the HiPath
3000 Manager E.).
●
5-14
V.24 Monitoring
The number of sent or received bytes within a time period to be selected can be
recorded and then displayed or saved using a text editor
(default = MS WordPad®).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3.5 Trace Options
Tracing ISDN Activities
This feature enables ISDN telephones and ISDN trunks to be traced in real-time.
ISDN activities are routed to HiPath 3000 Manager E and saved in a trace file. Only
the ISDN sequences are displayed on the monitor, not the content of the ISDN messages.
For recording errors, the Tracestop can be
●
coupled to a certain error number.
●
activated using remote access.
●
activated manually from a telephone (if the customer discovers an error such as
double connections).
If the trace session is over, you can start the ISDN Message Decoder (ISDN Tracer)
and use it to convert the trace file into a readable format (only English). You can also
read out the trace data using remote service.
The ISDN Message Decoder is a 32 bit application which converts the ISDN layer 3
messages and information elements into a readable format. Since you cannot find out
from the trace file whether it deals with an information element from a Euro ISDN or
a QSig configuration, you have to select the protocol. You may select the following
settings from the main menu:
●
Raw (default setting)
●
Euro ISDN
●
QSig V1
With the “Raw” setting, the Hex values are only decoded, not interpreted. With the
other two settings, the Hex values are decoded and interpreted per feature (CC, AOC,
...).
Tracing Call-related Activities
You can trace all activities from any telephone, trunk, etc., that is released by a call.
These include consultation calls, conference calls, hunt groups, for example.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-15
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.3.6 Error History
HiPath 3000 provides an error history where accrued errors are classified according
to error class and error number. It also includes the date and time the error occurred.
You can use HiPath 3000 Manager E to read out the error memory.
Section 5.3.4 provides information on error classification.
5.3.3.7 Testing Telephones
After startup and country adaptation, you can activate the telephone test on any optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephone using a code or the service menu. This test
checks the display (your number is displayed), LEDs, and calls. The tests ends automatically after a period of time.
During the test, you can satisfy yourself that the visual and audio components function properly.
5.3.3.8 Analyzing System-wide Use of Feature
HiPath 3000 has counters that record the system-wide use of features, such as caller
list, call forwarding, busy override. You can view the counter statuses using HiPath
3000 Manager E.
5-16
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.4 Error Messages
Classification
Accrued errors are classified according to error class and error number. The three different error classes are described below:
●
Error Class A = Customer-related error
HiPath 3000 Manager E fails to issue a signal or message. Class A errors are
indicated on the optiPoint Attendant display. The customer can correct them without service support.
The only error messages currently included are: “Printer alarm” (caused by empty paper tray), “Fan failure” (caused by the fan breaking down in the HiPath 3500
and HiPath 3300 housing) and “Revisor alarm” (caused by an overflow in the
MMC log area).
For U.S. only: INVALID SPID (HiPath 3550, HiPath 3350, HiPath 3500 and HiPath
3300) signals that the service profile identifier (SPID) for BRI ISDN is incorrect.
●
Error Class B = Service-related errors
The HiPath 3000 Manager E signals Class B errors, which can be automatically
forward to a service center.
Errors of this class are caused by failure of the boards, individual ports, or trunks.
You can generally correct these errors by replacing the hardware, reconfiguring
the customer database, or by working together with the carrier.
●
Error Class C = Development-related errors
HiPath 3000 Manager E fails to issue a signal/message.
Class C errors require diagnosis and problem analysis by specialists.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-17
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.5 Correcting Errors
5.3.5.1 Automatic Error Correction
One of the below recovery actions is assigned to each error in the error memory.
These recovery actions are programmed to automatically correct errors that occur.
●
Hard restart
●
Reload board
●
Reload CDB backup
●
Port lockout
●
Power failure transfer (loop start)
●
None
A watchdog activates continuous loops.
If no recovery measure is assigned or if the one that is assigned fails, a service technician has to correct the error manually.
5.3.5.2 Manual Error Correction Without HiPath 3000 Manager E
Manually Activating Restart (Reset)/Reload
Pressing the reset button on the central control board
●
initiates a Reset (Hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB) if the
button is pressed for less than 5 seconds. The Run LED lights up when the Reset
button is pressed.
●
initiates a Reload if the button is pressed longer than 5 seconds. The Run LED
disappears after approximately 5 seconds as verification that the reload has
been initiated. The entire content of the customer database is replaced by its default version. All country and customer-specific settings are lost.
Locking out and Releasing Boards and Ports
You can lock out and release ports using the lockout switch located on the board.
Lockout prevents renewed seizure after the current connection has finished. It creates
5-18
●
a port lockout in an outgoing direction on analog trunk boards.
●
a port lockout in outgoing and incoming directions on trunk boards.
●
a lockout of the entire board for subscriber line modules.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.5.3 Manual Error Correction With HiPath 3000 Manager E
Initiating Restart (Reset)
This initiates an immediate hard restart of the entire system with the current CDB.
Initiating Reload Card
This the single board (loading Loadware) to reload.
Locking out and Releasing Boards and Ports
HiPath 3000 Manager E enables you to lock out an entire subscriber line module or
line circuit module and individual ports. The lockout prevents renewed seizure after
the current connection has finished. Release or lockout settings are retained after a
reset.
However, you cannot lock out the first SLMO/SLU board because administration
through Assistant T runs on its first two ports.
When attempting to lock out the last active trunk, you are subsequently notified that
remote service through the service center is no longer possible.
You cannot use HiPath 3000 Manager E to release boards and ports locked out with
the lockout switch.
Power Failure Transfer
You cannot initiate a power failure transfer to analog telephones using HiPath 3000
Manager E.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-19
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.6 Remote Service
Definition
Remote service is described as communication between the service center and HiPath 3000 using public telecommunications networks to fulfill service tasks. These
tasks are
●
remote system administration,
●
remote administration of Plus products via the system,
●
remote correction of system software (APS transfer),
●
automatic signaling of error messages.
Remote service facilitates the administration and maintenance of various communication systems from a central location. An integrated digital modem (B channel) or an
integrated analog modem ((IMODC) can be used to connect to the system.
HiPath 3000
Central Board
PSTN
(analog or
digital
telecommunications network)
Modem
Service center
Service PC
with
HiPath 3000 Manager E
LIM
Customer
LAN
Plus Products
Figure 5-2
5-20
Example of Remote Service
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Integrated Analog Modem (IMODC)
This modem enables remote access to all systems (not HiPath 3250 and HiPath
3150) in the HiPath 3000 product line. Access is achieved using any trunks, tie trunks,
and all subscriber lines. The IMODC is designed as a plug-in card.
Caution
Be sure to disconnect the system from the power supply before removing or inserting integrated analog modems (IMODC).
The IMODC is treated as a pseudo port. It receives a number in the system that can
be reached internally through direct internal dialing (DID). You can cancel the DID
number manually to prevent external access.
The following codes and parameters apply when the analog modem is in operation:
●
Transmission to V.22bis (2400 Bd), V.32 (9600 Bd), V.32bis (14400 Bd)
●
Error correction to V.42, MNP 2-4
●
Data compression to V.42bis, MNP 5
Integrated digital Modem (B Channel)
An integrated B channel modem is available with all systems in the HiPath 3000 product line. This type of modem facilitates remote access using both digital trunks, tie
trunks, as well as S0 subscriber lines. Data transmission is supported according to
Protocol X.75.
The digital modem is treated as a pseudo port. It receives a number in the system
that can be reached internally and through direct internal dialing. You can cancel the
DID number manually to prevent external access.
Access to the analog/digital modem
The customer must enable the access to both modems by entering a 6-digit PIN
code. If the service center is to make a connection to the HiPath 3000 over a modem,
it may be necessary to enter this individual code. It depends on which trunk type is
used for the modem access. The following applies to the system default:
●
Access over ISDN trunk = enable procedure: customer must enter PIN code.
●
Access over another trunk = login without code: PIN code is not necessary.
If necessary, the system administration (only by using Assistant T) can reset the PIN
code back to the default value.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-21
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.6.1 Remote System Administration
5.3.6.1.1 Remote Administration with HiPath 3000 Manager E
To establish a remote connection between HiPath 3000 and the service center (HiPath 3000 Manager E), the following options are available:
●
Callback
●
Service call using a code
●
Automatic error signaling
Any one of these options establishes a connection using the integrated digital modem
(B channel) or the integrated analog modem (IMODC).
Callback
HiPath 3000 can manage up to 6 different callback indices (callback passwords and
their relevant callback numbers), in which case the first callback connection is also
the destination of the automatic error signaling. For each callback connection, you
can select either the digital modem (B channel) or the analog modem (IMODC).
Service Call Using a Code
You can use any telephone to initiate a HiPath 3000 service call to the service center
by selecting the connection setup option “Service call using a code” and activating
the feature “Remote access immediately after installation”. In contrast to the usual
callback procedure, this callback (service call) is not activated by HiPath 3000 Manager E itself, but by any telephone you choose. Callback initialization is essentially
skipped.
The service call destinations are the six callback indices that also apply to callback.
You are not required to enter the relevant passwords.
Automatic Error Correction
Error Class B errors can be transferred to a service center automatically. For more
information on this, see Section 5.3.6.3.
5.3.6.1.2 DTMF Remote Administration
This feature facilitates remote system administration by transmitting DTMF signals.
The user interface (menu prompt) is the same as that of the Assistant T for system
administration on site. DTMF remote administration can be performed using either
the analog or digital trunks.
5-22
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.6.2 Remote Correction of System Software (APS)
The service center performs the APS transfer (see Section 5.3.2.2).
5.3.6.3 Remote Error Signaling
Error Class B errors can be automatically transferred to a service center. To do this,
the “Error signaling” flag has to be activated and a number entered under the callback
index 1.
The error report consists of one header and the error information that is transmitted
in binary form. The header contains a unique identifier that recognizes the customer
system that sent the error reports.
5.3.6.4 Remote Administration and Access Using PPP
You can establish a connection between the system/Plus product and the service
center using either the integrated digital modem (B channel) or the integrated analog
modem (IMODC). Data is exchanged in both cases using Point-to-Point-Protocols
(PPP).
For more detailed information on the possible functions, see Chapter 4, “HiPath 3000
in the LAN Network”.
5.3.6.4.1 Remote System Administration
You can also operate HiPath 3000 Manager E in conjunction with the relevant infrastructure (RDT network, router) using PPP.
For more information on this, see Section 4.8.4.
5.3.6.4.2 Remote Administration of Plus Products
You can manage Plus products from a central location using HiPath 3000. However,
HiPath 3000 only provides the means of transmission. Actual administration of the
Plus product is done using special software programs like pcANYWHERE.
For more information on this, see Section 4.8.5.
5.3.6.4.3 Remote Error Signaling Using SNMP
Plus products and the HiPath 3000 can transmit error messages (SNMP traps) to the
service center.
For more information on this, see Section 4.8.2.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-23
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.7 Access Security
5.3.7.1 Logon With User Name and Password
Security
To ensure that authorized users have access to the HiPath 3000 and to prevent unauthorized accesses, users must be identified by a user name and authorized by a
password. This applies to all local and remote administration and maintenance procedures using HiPath 3000 Manager E, Assistant T, HiPath 3000 Manager C, Assistant TC, and AMHOST.
After the first system startup and during country initialization, you can select between
the following security options:
●
variable password (default)
●
fixed password
Variable Password
Up to 16 users can be assigned their own user ID with individual name, password,
and a user group consisting of six pre-determined user groups (in Table 5-5). Only the
data authorized for the relevant user group can be read and administered.
During the first login, the system requests the identity of the user and asks for a new
password (max. 15 characters from the optiPoint 500 character set). This then overwrites the default user name (31994) and default password (31994). This first user is
then automatically assigned to the user group “System Maintenance”. The system informs the user that no user is configured in the system and that the user has been
assigned with “System Maintenance” authorization. Using HiPath 3000 Manager E or
Assistant T, additional users and their passwords can be configured in the user administration.
If a user forgets a password, it has to be deleted and reconfigured by a different authorized user. If all authorized users forget their passwords, the system must be regenerated.
Fixed Password
When using the fixed password, only fixed user groups with unchangeable default
user names and default passwords are used. Also, new users cannot be configured
in the user administration.
5-24
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Changing Password Types
Only with Assistant T can you change from a variable password to a fixed password
type and vice versa. To do this, you have to re-initialize the country settings. This
switches the entire content of the customer database (including user names and
passwords) to a default state.
If you perform country initialization in a system with a variable password, the previously created user names and passwords remain intact as long as you do not subsequently change the password type.
If a CDB is read from a system in which the default user names and passwords were
changed, this CDB cannot be loaded into a HiPath 3000 system that was changed to
a fixed password type. Before reading this CDB, you have to set up a user (user name
and password) in the system that matches a user group with a fixed password. Once
this user has been set up, the CDB can be read from the HiPath 3000. With this user
name and ID, you can now load the CDB into the system switched to the fixed password type.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-25
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.7.2 Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access Rights
User Groups With a Variable Password
The following table shows the six pre-determined user groups and their access rights.
1.
●
●
2.
●
●
X1
X
X
Assessing and archiving backup-related log files
Reader rights to system data (for example, error memory), not including confidential customer information
X2
3.
●
Access rights to all system data (not including development access rights) as long as no users are assigned
to other user groups.
X
4.
●
X3
X
●
Access rights to confidential customer information
Executing customer actions (for example, printing certain lists)
5.
●
Access rights to non-confidential customer information
X
X
6.
●
Access rights to parameters and call detail recording
actions (not including interface parameters for output
device)
X3, 4
X4
7.
●
Access rights of the “System Maintenance” user group
Setting and reading certain parameters to which no
other user group has access.
●
1
2
3
4
Setting up/deleting users
Assigning users to user groups
Development
User rights
Accounting
User
admin.
Audit
User groups
No.
Customer admin.
(Customer)
Variable Password: Pre-determined User Groups and Their Access
Rights
System maint.
(Service)
Table 5-5
X
X
As long as no user is assigned to the “User Administration” user group.
As long as no user is assigned to the “Audit” user group.
As long as no user is assigned to the “Customer administration” user group.
As long as no user is assigned to the “Accounting” user group.
5-26
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
User Groups With a Fixed Password
The following table shows the unchangeable user groups and their rights.
User groups
System maint. (Service)
Name/Password=
31994/31994
No.
User rights
1.
●
●
Development
Fixed Password: Fixed User Groups and Their Access Rights
Customer admin. (Cust.)
Name/Password:
– Assistant TC=*95/(Password
not necessary)
– Assistant C=office/office
Table 5-6
Assessing and archiving backup-related log files
Reader rights to system data (for example, error memory),
not including confidential customer data
X
X
X
2.
●
Access rights to all system data (not including development
access rights)
X
3.
●
Access rights to confidential customer information
Executing customer actions (for example, printing out certain
lists)
X
X
X
●
4.
●
Access rights to non-confidential customer information
X
X
X
5.
●
Access rights to parameters and call detail recording actions
(not including interface parameters for the output device)
6.
●
Setting up and reading certain parameters to which no other
user group has access.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
X
X
5-27
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.7.3 System Access Options
The user’s access rights, meaning the data that the user may read or manage, always
depend on the user group to which the user is assigned.
Service Tools
●
Assistant T and Assistant TC
Log in by entering your user name and password (regardless of code lock)
The system can only be accessed using the first two UP0/E connections from the
first SLMO/SLU board in the system.
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E and HiPath 3000 Manager C (local)
Log in by entering your user name and password.
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (remote), direct connection
Log in by entering your user name and password.
The system can be accessed directly using the integrated digital modem (B
channel) or the integrated analog modem. However, the user is required to establish a 5 digit access code beforehand.
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E (remote), callback connection
Log in by entering your user name and password.
The system can be accessed using the integrated digital modem (B channel) or
the integrated analog modem. However, you have to set up a callback index beforehand.
AMHOST
The AMHOST (Administration and Maintenance via HOST) feature allows Plus products to read certain system information and to change it, if necessary. To enable Plus
products to access the system, you have to set up a user without a user group in the
HiPath 3000 default user administration. Enter “AMHOST” as the user name and
“77777” as the default user password.
You can only change this password if the system is configured using a variable password. In this case, delete the “AMHOST” user and reconfigure the system with the
same user name and a new password.
5-28
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Chip Card Reader (only for Deutsche Telekom AG)
You cannot switch to a fixed password if using a system from Deutsche Telekom AG.
This feature allows for additional security measures due to an identification and authentication procedure that ensures proper access to Deutsche Telekom AG communication systems and prevents unauthorized access.
You can activate this feature by using a chip card. The service PCs at Deutsche Telekom AG are equipped with chip card readers that allow the PCs to boot only if the chip
card recognizes the technician’s individual chip card ID and if the password is entered
correctly. The chip card is also configured to recognize whether or not access to the
Octopus E system family exists.
To permit access to both user groups as well as individual technicians, you can decide, when logging on, whether you want to log on using the group ID in the chip card
or your individual ID. In both cases, the logon information is entered in a log file to
ensure that you, the chip card, user can be directly retraced.
Each Octopus system is provided with a default name and default password. When
you first log in, if
●
no chip card is recognized, you have to access the service PC using the default
name and password.
●
a chip card is recognized, the user administration starts up immediately.
In both cases, when logging on for the first time, you are required to enter the following in the user administration:
●
User name
●
User group (User Administration, Audit, System Maintenance, Administration,
Accounting, Development)
●
Password
These entries overwrite the default name and default password.
You can enter additional chip card users in the user administration manually or using
the chip card.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-29
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.7.4 Customer Data Security
When saving a customer database on the hard disk, a user table (part of the user administration) with user name and encrypted passwords are also saved. This guarantees access security when the customer database is opened offline later on.
When opening the customer database offline, you are requested to enter your user
name and password. The data that you enter is compared to the data in the user table. In this case, the user group verified during this process also determines the access rights.
When loading an offline customer database into HiPath 3000, the user table that goes
with it should not be loaded into the system. Otherwise, the system-specific user administration would be distorted.
5-30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.8 Automatic Logging of Administration Procedures
Definition
All accesses to customer-related data in the HiPath 3000 are automatically logged in
an area of the MMC (LOG area) reserved for this purpose. The information recorded
includes who the user is, the data manipulated by the user, and the time. An authorized user (member of the “Audit” user group) can transfer the system data to a PC
and assess it.
5.3.8.1 Logging
A log entry contains the following information:
●
Date and time
●
User name and user group
●
Type of activity (format identification) and activity (command entry)
5.3.8.1.1 Format Identification and Command Entry
The following format information is logged:
●
Assistant T (1)
All activities are logged, regardless of system access. The respective code with
the most important parameters is recorded as the command entry (for example,
station, number).
●
Assistant TC (2)
Same as Assistant T (1)
●
Session Information (3)
The system access is logged, regardless whether it is logged using Assistant T,
HiPath 3000 Manager E, or other HiPath systems. Possible command entries
are:
A0-1 = Login procedure
A0-2 = Logout procedure
A0-3 = Unauthorized login attempt
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E Database (4)
Access to the database is logged using HiPath 3000 Manager E. Possible command entries are:
A1-1 = Database read
A1-2 = Regeneration of CDB (Load CDB into the system)
A1-3 = Write database
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-31
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5-32
●
Program Systems (5)
APS transfers and system boots (for example, first bootup) are recorded. Possible command entries are:
– A2-1 = APSXF started
– A2-2 = APSXF ended
– A2-3 = APS boot (APS stamp also included)
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E Maintenance (6)
Maintenance activities which can be assigned with the following command entries are logged:
– B1-1 = Read error memory
– B1-2 = Delete error memory
– B2-1 = Out of service
– B3-1 = Read Direct Memory Access
– B3-2 = Write Direct Memory Access
– B4-1 = Delete base station status overload
– B4-2 = Delete base station restart
– B5-1 = Digital loopback change
– B6-1 = Trunk rolling change
– B7-1 = Read trunk status
– B8-1 = Delete trunk error counter
●
Simulated or pseudo Assistant T format (7)
The HiPath 3000 Manager E records the offline changes of a CDB as a “simulated” Assistant T command. For data areas subject to change by HiPath 3000
Manager E, pseudo areas are generated. When loading an offline CDB into the
system, the following simulated commands are logged as command entries:
C1 = Pseudo area “System parameter”
– C1-1 System fags/CMI
– C1-2 System intercept/AC
– C1-3 Tones and calls
– C1-4 Direction flag special (Variable direction#)
– C1-5 System settings
– C1-6 Host Link Interface
– C1-7 Relocate activation
C2 = Pseudo area “System timer”
– C2-1 System timer
C3 = Pseudo area “S0 configuration”
– C3-1 Station bus
– C3-2 Line supervision
– C3-3 Mode
C4 = Pseudo area “Lines”
– C4-1 Loop start parameter (Variable Slot/Line#)
C5 = Pseudo area “Digit analysis”
– C5-1 Internal number (Variable Stn#, Grp#)
– C5-2 Service codes
C6 = Pseudo area “Summer time”
– C6-1 Summer time
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
C7 = Pseudo area “Directions”
– C7-1 Direction flags (Variable direction#)
C8 = Pseudo area “Door setup”
– C8-1 Door setup (Variable door#)
C9 = Pseudo area “UCD Flags”
– C9-1 UCD Flags
C10 = Pseud area “Delete system counter”
– C10-1 Delete system counter
●
HiPath 3000 Manager E online (8)
Archives from the log file and the user administration are logged. Possible command entries are:
– D1-1 = Archive
– D2-1 = New user
– D2-2 = Delete user
– D3-1 = Change password
Logging External Accesses (Solutions, Applications)
Plus products used with “AMHOST” can only make limited changes. Because these
changes “automatically” run simultaneously (for example Check In and Check Out
for hotel solutions), these are not logged. Only the session information (user name
is “amhost”) with the command entries “Login procedure” and “Logout procedure”
are logged.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-33
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5.3.8.2 Issuing and Saving Log Data
Data is automatically logged in an area (LOG area) on the MCC reserved for this purpose. It cannot be switched off.
If approximately 80 % of the MMC log area capacity is exceeded, a Class A error is
issued. This error is dealt with like all Class A errors and is displayed on the optiPoint
Attendant as “Revisor Alarm.”
The log should now be read out and archived, meaning it should be saved in an archive file (file extension = arc). If an archive is not created, the oldest datablock is
overwritten if there is a danger of overflow.
You can only issue log entries using HiPath 3000 Manager E. You cannot retrieve the
log entries from the system until you have logged on as a user with “Revisor” rights.
Archive
If you request an archive (storage), the system checks whether or not there is already
an archive file (file extension = arc). If it is a file with log data from a previous archive,
the file must match the current customer. In case of a positive result, the system log
entries are retrieved and attached to the existing data in the archive file. At the same
time, the data in the system is deleted.
If malfunctions occur during this procedure (for example, line interruption), the entire
procedure ends and the archive has to be restarted.
If no archive is requested, the revisor can retrieve, view, and print the log entries.
However, log entries remain in the system.
Multimedia Card MMC
When replacing the multimedia card, the following applies:
5-34
●
If the memory area for logging data is empty, logging restarts.
●
If the memory area for logging data is not empty, logging continues.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
Example of a Log Printout
The following assumption applies as an example: The first system boot up has taken
place and customer-specific programming was completed.
1050
00-11-25 15:57:10
rev(R)
(6)D1-1
Archive
1051
00-11-25 15:58:22
rev(R)
(3)A0-2
Logout procedure
1052
00-11-26 09:20:15
serv(S)
(3)A0-1
Login procedure
1053
00-11-26 09:21:35
serv(S)
(4)A1-1
Database read
1054
00-11-26 09:21:52
serv(S)
(7)14-12-*(20)
Station name
1055
00-11-26 09:22:45
serv(S)
(4)A1-3
Write database
1056
00-11-26 09:23:25
serv(S)
(3)A0-2
Logout procedure
1057
00-11-26 10:10:15
pnkm(A) (3)A0-1
Login procedure
1058
00-11-26 10:11:15
pnkm(A) (2)14-12-”30”
Station name
1059
00-11-26 10:11:35
pnkm(A) (2)14-12-”31”
Station name
1060
00-11-26 10:12:15
pnkm(A) (3)A0-2
Logout procedure
1061
00-11-27 11:20:30
rev(R)
Login procedure
(3)A0-1
The sample printout (without consideration of headers and footers) refers to the following information concerning administration procedures:
●
The Revisor (“rev” user in “R” (Revision) user group) has generated an initial archive.
●
The Service (“serv” user in “S” (system maintenance) user group) has read out
the system database, changed 20 station names, and written them again to the
system.
●
The Customer (“pnkm” user in “A” (Administration) user group) has changed two
additional station names.
●
The Revisor has retrieved the most recent log entries and printed them out.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
5-35
3000sb5.fm
Serviceability
Options in the Service Department
5-36
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Overview
6 Desktop Products
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the desktop products of the HiPath 3000 system.
This chapter discusses the topics listed in the table.
Topic
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
page 6-2
Accessories for optiPoint 500 Telephone Solutions
page 6-17
optiset E
page 6-19
Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions
page 6-34
Telephones for HiPath cordless
page 6-35
Attendant Consoles
page 6-46
LAN Telephones/Adapters
page 6-53
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-1
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2 optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
The optiPoint 500 telephones described in this section are compatible with the optiset E telephones. It is possible to operate both telephone families on one UP0/E
board. You can also use telephones from the two families in mixed host-client configurations (earlier called the master-slave or primary-secondary configuration).
Introduction
optiPoint 500 telephones handle the digital communication of voice and data (voice
communication only for optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy). The three dialog keys and the display guarantee convenient and interactive operation. Furthermore, the key lamp principle visualizes the activated functions.
With the exception of optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy, the optiPoint
500 telephones have a USB 1.1 interface. This allows for PC-supported telephoning
and Internet access over the USB interface of a PC.
The add-on devices optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF allow you to increase the
number of available function keys.
The different optiPoint 500 adapters provide a flexible extension to the telephone
workstation. Additional devices (such as personal computers, fax equipment, telephones, headsets) can be connected quickly because it is easy to build them on to
the bottom of the telephones (not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy)
and because the adapters are “plug’n’play”.
You can find information not contained in this chapter in the optiPoint 500 Service
Manual.
Market Introduction
The market introduction of the optiPoint 500 telephones, adapters and add-on devices takes place in two steps:
6-2
●
Step 1, release 12/01: Contains all optiPoint 500 telephones, adapters and addon devices, described in this chapter and not included in step 2.
●
Step 2, release probably 03/02: Contains optiPoint 500 entry, optiPoint 500 economy, optiPoint acoustic adapter, optiPoint ISDN adapter, optiPoint recorder
adapter and optiPoint BLF.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
The optiPoint 500 product family includes the following telephones:
Table 6-1
optiPoint 500 Telephones
Telephone (product name)
Remark
optiPoint 500 entry
Telephone without display
optiPoint 500 economy
Telephone with display
optiPoint 500 basic
Telephone with display
optiPoint 500 standard (optiPoint 500 standard SL
(for U.S. only))
Telephone with display
optiPoint 500 advance
Telephone with display
Key Programming
Double key assignments
The programmable function keys of the optiPoint 500 telephones and the optiPoint
key modules can have double assignments. First define any key as the “Shift” key.
Only external phone numbers for outgoing dialing can be saved on the second
level that this provides.
LED signaling applies to the first key level only.
When the Shift function is pressed, the LED lights the Shift key. This signals that the
phone numbers on the second key level are available. The Shift function is deactivated after 5 s or after you press a phone number or if the you press the Shift key
again.
The optiPoint BLF function keys cannot have double assignments.
HiPath 3000 < V3.0 does not automatically detect optiPoint 500 telephones; it treats
them as if they were optiset E telephones:
optiPoint 500 telephones
Generation/detection by HiPath 3000 and HiPath 3000 Manager E
optiPoint 500 entry
–>
optiset E basic
optiPoint 500 economy
–>
optiset E advance plus/comfort
optiPoint 500 basic
–>
optiset E advance plus/comfort
optiPoint 500 standard
–>
optiset E advance plus/comfort
optiPoint 500 advance
–>
optiset E advance plus/comfort + optiset E key
module
Because optiPoint 500 advance has more function keys (4 + 15) than any optiset E
telephones (max. 4 + 8), the system generates an optiset E advance plus/comfort
with optiset E key module for the optiPoint 500 advance. HiPath 3000 Manager E also
recognizes this combination.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-3
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
Use the 4 + 8 function keys of the optiset E advance plus/comfort and the first 7 keys
of the optiset E key module to program the 4 + 15 function keys of the optiPoint 500
advance.
6.2.1 optiPoint 500 Telephones without Display
optiPoint 500 entry
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint 500 entry telephone is an economical entry-level model for access to the digital technology of the HiPath 3000 system. It is
designed for common areas and users who require minimal features. The optiPoint 500 entry
model has:
Eight preassigned function keys with LEDs
●
(can be reprogrammed with HiPath 3000
Manager E)
Open listening (speaker)
●
Two settings keys (plus/minus) for ringer
●
volume, ringer pitch, alerting tone, open listening
Wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capability for
●
adapters or add-on devices), no display
6-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.2 optiPoint 500 Telephones with Display
The following optiPoint 500 telephones include alphanumeric displays and provide interactive prompting while a call is in progress. Interactive prompting means that you
are offered only functions that are relevant to the current call status. You can access
these features using three optiGuide dialog keys: OK, Next and Previous (see
Figure 6-1).
Display
Peter Parker
Consultation?
Scroll
>
Invoke Conference?
Invoke Transfer?
Select
>
>
Display
Dialog keys
Figure 6-1
The User Interface for the optiPoint 500 Telephone with Display
For clarity, the functions are arranged in submenus.
You can also select the features directly by using the service key to enter their codes.
You can also assign functions or function loops (macros) to the specific function keys.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-5
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint 500 economy (not for U.S.)
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint 500 economy is an entrylevel display telephone with a comprehensive function package, including the
following features:
12 function keys with LEDs (4 that
●
can be programmed with HiPath
3000 Manager E, 8 freely programmable)
LCD swivel display (2 lines x 24
●
characters).
Three dialog keys for interactive
●
prompting (OK, Next, and Previous)
Open listening (speaker)
●
Two settings keys (plus/minus) for
●
ringer volume, ringer pitch, alerting
tone, open listening
Wall mounting
●
No modularity (no connecting capa●
bility for adapters or add-on devices)
optiPoint 500 basic
The optiPoint 500 basic is a professional
telephone with all the features of the optiPoint 500 economy, plus:
Interfaces and slots:
●
– 1 USB 1.1 interface
– 1 adapter slot (option bay)
– 1 interface for max. 2 add-on
devices
6-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint 500 standard / optiPoint 500 standard SL (for U.S. only)
Remark: optiPoint 500 standard and standard SL (for U.S. only) function exactly the
same on the HiPath 3000 systems.
The optiPoint 500 standard is a professional telephone with all the features of
the optiPoint 500 basic, plus:
Full duplex speakerphone mode
●
with echo suppression for adapting
to the room
optiPoint 500 advance
The optiPoint 500 advance is a professional telephone with all the features of
the optiPoint 500 standard, plus:
19 function keys with LEDs (4 that
●
can be programmed with HiPath
3000 Manager E, 15 freely programmable)
Interfaces and slots:
●
– 1 integrated USB 1.1 interface
– 2 adapter slots (option bays)
– 1 interface for max. 2 add-on
devices
– 1 headset connection (121
TR9-5)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-7
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.3 Comparison of Features on all optiPoint 500 Telephones
Table 6-2
Comparison of Features on all optiPoint 500 telephones
Feature
optiPoint 500 telephone
entry economy basic standard advance
Function keys with LEDs: variable
using HiPath 3000 Manager E)
8
4
4
4
4
Function keys with LEDs: programmable
–
8
8
8
15
12-element keypad (0 - 9, #, *)
x
x
x
x
x
Two settings keys (plus/minus)
x
x
x
x
x
Open listening
x
x
x
x
x
Full duplex speakerphone mode
–
–
–
x
x
Adapter slots (bay options)
–
–
1
1
2
USB interface
–
–
1
1
1
Three dialog keys
–
x
x
x
x
Display
–
2 x 24
2 x 24
2 x 24
2 x 24
Connection for optiPoint key module
–
–
x
x
x
Connection for optiPoint BLF
–
–
x
x
x
Optional wall mounting
x
x
x
x
x
159
220
64
214
220
68
214
220
68
214
220
68
214
220
68
Dimensions in mm:
Width
●
Depth
●
Height
●
Maximum length of the connecting
line in meters:
Without plug-type AC adapter
●
With plug-type AC adapter
●
Maximum length of connecting line
between primary and secondary
telephone (through phone adapter)
in meters
6-8
500
1000
100
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.4 optiPoint 500 Add-On Devices
You can use the optiPoint key module and optiPoint BLF add-on devices to increase
the number of available function keys on the optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard, and optiPoint 500 advance telephones.
The user usually installs the add-on devices. The installation instructions are on the
“Electronic Operating Instructions” CD.
Warning
Always disconnect the line cord before connecting add-on devices to the telephone.
Refer to Section 3.9.2 for model-dependent data for the optiPoint key module and the
optiPoint BLF.
optiPoint key module
The optiPoint key module is an add-on device that
should be mounted on the side of the telephone; it
provides an additional 16 keys, LEDs and labelling
areas for all purposes. Figure 6-2 shows the possible configurations.
It is possible to perform double assignment for the
keys. Only external numbers for outgoing dialing
can be saved on the second key level that is then
available (see page 6-3).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-9
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint BLF
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint BLF is an add-on
device that provides 90 additional keys, LEDs and labeling
areas for all purposes.
The connection to the telephone
or to an optiPoint key module is
made over an interface cable
with the following connectors:
input MW6 (RJ11), output MW8
(RJ45). Figure 6-2 shows the
possible configurations.
An local power supply (C39280Z4-C58, C39280-Z4-C70 =
USA, C39280-Z4-C66 = UK) is
inserted for the power; it can
supply a maximum of two optiPoint BLFs.
Programming Add-On Devices
An inserted add-on device automatically registers with the system and is then ready
for operation. You can program keys with HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant T. If
you replace the device, the information programmed under the keys is maintained
(stored in the customer database).
If a configuration other than the one shown in Figure 6-2 is used, the LEDs and keys
may not function correctly. You must update the database with HiPath 3000 Manager
E.
Example: You replace configuration E by configuration C. You must use HiPath 3000
Manager E to remove the optiPoint key module 2 from the database so that the LEDs
and keys function correctly.
You can also use Assistant T to delete optiPoint BLFs and optiPoint key modules.
The first optiPoint BLF that is initially connected to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath
3700, or HiPath 3500 automatically receives standard key assignments (default) for
the first 90 system ports. No standard assignment is made if you already configured
an optiPoint BLF with HiPath 3000 Manager E or if other optiPoint BLFs are connected.
6-10
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
Possible Configurations for the Add-On Devices
A
optiPoint
BLF
B
optiPoint
BLF
optiPoint
BLF
C
optiPoint
key
module
optiPoint
BLF
D
optiPoint
key
module
optiPoint
BLF
optiPoint 500 basic,
optiPoint 500 standard or
optiPoint 500 advance
Figure 6-2
optiPoint
BLF
The configurations C and D are only
possible in HiPath 3750 and HiPath
3700.
optiPoint 500 - Possible Configurations for Add-On Devices
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-11
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.5 optiPoint 500 Adapter
The different optiPoint 500 adapters (not optiPoint 500 entry and optiPoint 500 economy) allow flexible expansion of the telephone workstation by providing additional device connections (such as PC, fax equipment, telephones, headsets).
The adapters, which are to be mounted on the bottom of the telephone, are
“plug’n’play”. When a new telephone-adapter configuration is plugged in, it generates
a reset; a setup message notifies the system of the new configuration.
Option bays
Option bays (adapter
slots):
2 x for optiPoint 500
●
advance (shown
here)
1 x for optiPoint 500
●
basic and optiPoint
500 standard
Figure 6-3
6-12
optiPoint 500 - Option bays (Adapter Slots)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint analog adapter
The optiPoint analog adapter allows an analog
device (such as telephone (DTMF only),
group 3 fax, modem, cordless telephone) to be
connected to the optiPoint 500 telephone.
The connected analog device can send and receive calls on the UP0/E interface to the system
regardless of the connection status of the optiPoint 500 telephone, as long as a B channel is
available.
The adapter must always have a local power
supply for operating the connected analog device.
T/R interface properties:
Supply current: 30 mA
●
Busy signal when both B channels are busy
●
Ring sequence: 2.2
●
Supports only DTMF with Flash
●
No ground signaling allowed
●
Does not support: VoiceMail server with T/
●
R interface, message waiting lamp, dictating equipment, speaker, announcement device (such as start/stop).
optiPoint acoustic adapter
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint acoustic adapter is used for connecting
●
Active Speakerbox
●
Desk microphone
●
Headset, see Table 6-4 on page 6-18
●
Busy indication/door opener
●
Secondary bell/visual paging (with separate power supply over floating contact)
optiPoint recorder adapter
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint recorder adapter allows an external recorder or second headset to be
connected. Attention: The other party to the conversation must be informed that the
the conversation is being recorded.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-13
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
optiPoint ISDN adapter
- probably available from 03/02 on The optiPoint ISDN adapter provides the basic
ISDN access for S0 devices (max. 2), such as
S0-PC card, group 4 fax equipment, or video
communication devices (such as videoset or
videokit).
S0 telephones must have their own power supply for connection.
S0 interface properties:
Supports point-to-point and passive bus
●
connections
Wired for short passive bus configurations
●
Cable lengths
●
– Maximum 100 m (328 feet) with a cable
impedance of 75 ohms
– Maximum 200 m (656 feet) with a cable
impedance of 150 ohms (complies with
CCITT recommendation I.430)
The NT terminating resistors are integrated
●
into the ISDN adapter. Additional terminating resistors are included in the accessory
pack.
optiPoint phone adapter
The optiPoint phone adapter is used for connecting a second optiPoint 500 telephone (client
telephone) with its own power supply.
The system treats the client telephone as an independent telephone with a separate phone
number and its own B channel. The client telephone can send and receive calls regardless of
the connection status of the host telephone.
The maximum range between the host and client telephones is approximately 100 m (328
feet) (for J-Y (ST) 2x2x0.6, ∅ 0.6 mm).
6-14
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.6 Restrictions for Using optiPoint 500 Adapters
Adapter Categories
Each UP0/E port in the system provides two B channels. This means that you can connect two telephones, each with a separate phone number, to one UP0/E port.
Category 1 optiPoint 500 adapters
Each of the following adapters needs both B channels and can therefore only be used
once on a host telephone.
●
optiPoint analog adapter
●
optiPoint ISDN adapter
●
optiPoint phone adapter
If one of these adapters is used in the optiPoint 500 advance, only a category 2 adapter can be operated in the second slot.
Category 2 optiPoint 500 adapters
The following adapters can be used on the host and client telephones. This is also
true if a category 1 optiPoint 500 adapter is already connected.
●
optiPoint acoustic adapter
●
optiPoint recorder adapter
Number of adapters and add-on devices allowed by the system
see Table 8-1
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-15
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiPoint 500 (V3.0 SMR-3 and later)
6.2.7 Comparison of optiset E adapters and optiPoint 500 adapters
Table 6-3
Comparison of optiset E and optiPoint 500 adapters
optiset E
optiPoint 500
analog adapter
analog adapter
phone adapter
phone adapter
data adapter
integrated USB interface
control adapter
ISDN adapter
ISDN adapter
acoustic adapter
acoustic adapter
contact adapter
headset adapter
headset plus adapter
6-16
recorder adapter
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Accessories for optiPoint 500 Telephone Solutions
6.3 Accessories for optiPoint 500 Telephone Solutions
6.3.1 Local Power Supplies
You may need a local power supply if you are using large configurations or if you need
to extend the range.
You can connect the local power supply (part numbers in Table 6-4 on page 6-18) to
the line cords of a host or client telephone using two MW6 jacks and the connecting
cable supplied.
Data for local power supply AUL:06D1284:
●
Line voltage: 220 (230) Vac (U.S.: 120 Vac)
●
AC line frequency: 47 to 53 Hz
●
Output voltage: Max. 50 V, min. 30 V
●
Output current: Max. 250 mA
6.3.2 Headsets
A headset replaces the telephone handset, which means that the user’s hands are
free when telephoning.
You can use the headsets listed in Table 6-4 on the optiPoint 500 advance or over an
optiPoint acoustic adapter.
Figure 6-4
Headset
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-17
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Accessories for optiPoint 500 Telephone Solutions
6.3.3 Part Numbers
The current sales information contains the complete overview of all certified and deliverable products.
Table 6-4
Part Numbers for optiPoint 500 Telephones and Accessories
Telephone / Accessories
optiPoint 500 entry
optiPoint 500 economy
optiPoint 500 basic
optiPoint 500 standard
optiPoint 500 advance
optiPoint key module
optiPoint BLF
optiPoint phone adapter
optiPoint analog adapter
optiPoint ISDN adapter
optiPoint acoustic adapter
optiPoint recorder adapter
optiPoint 500 entry wall bracket
optiPoint 500 basic wall bracket
Local power supply
Local power supply, UK
Local power supply, 110 V USA
Headset Encore monaural
Headset Encore binaural
Headset Tristar
Headset Supra
Headset DuoSet
Headset Profile monaural
Headset Profile binaural
6-18
Color
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arctic
manganese
arsenic
arsenic
arsenic
arsenic
arsenic
arsenic
arsenic
Part Number
S30817-S7101-A101-*
S30817-S7101-A107-*
S30817-S7108-A101-*
S30817-S7108-A107-*
S30817-S7102-A101-*
S30817-S7102-A107-*
S30817-S7103-A101-*
S30817-S7103-A107-*
S30817-S7104-A101-*
S30817-S7104-A107-*
S30817-S7105-A101-*
S30817-S7105-A107-*
S30817-S7107-A101-*
S30817-S7107-A107-*
S30817-K7110-B108-*
S30817-K7110-B208-*
S30817-K7110-B308-*
S30817-K7110-B408-*
S30817-K7110-B508-*
C39363-A328-C338
C39363-A329-C338
AUL:06D1284
AUL:06D1287
AUL:51A4827
L30460-X1282-X1
L30460-X1282-X2
L30460-X1282-X3
L30460-X1282-X4
L30460-X1282-X5
L30460-X1283-X1
L30460-X1283-X2
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4 optiset E
The optiset E family of telephones supports digital voice and data communication
(voice only in the case of optiset E entry and standard). optiset E telephones with display also offer ease of use through the interactive user interface.
Add-on devices can add either 16 or 90 additional keys to an optiset E advance plus/
comfort, optiset E advance conference/conference, or optiset E memory telephone.
Dual key assignments:
You can assign dual functions to the programmable function keys on the optiset E
telephones and the optiset E key modules. To do this, you first have to define one
key as the Shift key. The second key level that this provides can contain only external numbers for outgoing dialing.
The LED applies only to the first key level.
Activating the Shift function causes the LED on the Shift key to light up. In this state,
you can access the station numbers on the second key level. Press a station number
key, press the Shift key again or wait five seconds to deactivate the shift function.
You cannot assign two functions to the Hicom Attendant busy lamp fields (BLFs).
optiset E adapters connect additional equipment such as PCs, analog telephones,
ISDN terminals, headsets, speakers, or recorders to optiset E telephones. optiset E
adapters are plug-and-play ready. This means that the system detects and activates
them automatically.
All telephone models are available in gray, and the optiset E memory and optiset E
advance plus/comfort telephones also come in black. The sockets for the connection
to the system and the power supply unit use MW (RJ) connectors.
The optiset E product family includes the following telephones:
Table 6-5
optiset E Telephones
Telephone (product name)
Remark
optiset E entry
Telephone without display
optiset E basic
Telephone without display
optiset E standard
Telephone with display
optiset E advance plus/comfort
Telephone with display
optiset E advance conference/conference
Telephone with display
optiset E memory
Telephone with display
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-19
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.1 optiset E Telephones Without Display
optiset E entry
The optiset E entry telephone is an economical
entry-level model for access to the digital technology of the HiPath 3000 system. It is designed for common areas and users who require minimal features. The optiset E entry
model has:
Three preassigned function keys with
●
LEDs (can be reprogrammed with HiPath
3000 Manager E)
Two volume control keys
●
Wall mounting
●
Function keys for the park, toggle, accept waiting call, and conference features can be programmed.
optiset E basic
The optiset E basic model has the same capabilities as optiset E entry, with the following additional features:
One slot for optiset E analog, data, ISDN or
●
phone adapter
Open listening (speaker)
●
On-hook dialing
●
Eight preassigned function keys with LEDs
●
(can be reprogrammed with HiPath 3000
Manager E)
Function keys for the park, toggle, accept waiting call, and conference features can be programmed.
6-20
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.2 optiset E Telephones with Display
The optiset E telephones with display include alphanumeric displays and provide interactive prompting while a call is in progress. Interactive prompting means that you
are offered only functions that are relevant to the current call status. You can access
these features using three optiGuide dialog keys: OK, Next and Previous (see
Figure 6-5).
Display
Peter Parker
Consultation?
Scroll
>
Invoke Conference?
Invoke Transfer?
Select
>
>
Display
Dialog keys
Figure 6-5
The User Interface for the optiset E Telephone with Display
For clarity, the functions are arranged in submenus.
You can also select the features directly by using the service key to enter their codes.
You can also assign functions or function loops (macros) to the specific function keys.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-21
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
optiset E standard
The optiset E standard is an entry-level display
telephone with a comprehensive function package, including the following features:
Three optiGuide dialog keys for interactive
●
prompting (OK, Next, and Previous)
12 function keys with LEDs (including 4 that
●
can be programmed with HiPath 3000
Manager E)
LCD swivel display (2 lines x 24 charac●
ters).
Speakerphone mode and open listening
●
2 keys (plus and minus) for adjusting the
●
volume and setting the volume of call signaling for incoming calls
Wall mounting
●
optiset E advance plus/comfort
The optiset E advance plus/comfort is a professional telephone package, with all the features
of the optiset E standard model plus:
Two adapter slots
●
Connection for up to four optiset E key
●
modules and Hicom Attendant BLF
6-22
Chinese versions of the optiset E standard and optiset E advance plus/comfort telephones are available with high-resolution displays.
optiClient Attendant: The professional PC attendant console connects to an optiset
E advance plus/comfort via an optiset E data adapter or optiset E control adapter.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
optiset E advance conference/conference
This telephone is an optiset E advance plus/comfort telephone with a full duplex
speakerphone.
The optiset E advance conference/conference
is a professional telephone with all the features
of the optiset E standard, plus:
Full duplex speakerphone mode and open
●
listening
Two adapter slots
●
Connection for up to four optiset E key
●
modules and Hicom Attendant BLF
optiset E memory
The optiset E memory is ideal for heavy
telephone use, such as for telemarketing and call center representatives.
Features include:
Three optiGuide dialog keys for in●
teractive prompting (OK, Next, and
Previous)
12 function keys with LEDs (includ●
ing 4 that can be programmed with
HiPath 3000 Manager E)
Alphanumeric keypad with integrat●
ed ENB functionality
●
●
●
●
●
●
Memory for approximately 350 ENB entries (such as name, address, and telephone number)
Swivel display (8 lines x 24 characters). Lines 1 through 6 are for the electronic
notebook and menu items; lines 7 and 8 are for interactive prompting.)
Two keys (plus and minus) for controlling the volume at the handset and setting
the volume of call signaling for incoming calls
Speakerphone mode and open listening
Two adapter slots
Connection for up to four optiset E key modules and Hicom Attendant BLF
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-23
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.3 Comparison of Features on all optiset E Telephones
Comparison of Features on all optiset E telephones
3
8
4
4
4
Function keys with LEDs: programmable)
–
–
8
8
8
12-element keypad (0 - 9, #, *)
X
X
X
X
X
Two keys (plus/minus
X
X
X
X
X
Open listening
–
X
X
X
X
Speakerphone mode
–
–
X
X
X
Adapter slot
–
1
–
2
2
Three dialog keys
–
–
X
X
X
Display
–
–
2 x 24
2 x 24
8 x 24
Connection for optiset E key module
–
–
–
X
X
Connection for an optiset E BLF
–
–
–
X
X
Alphanumeric keypad with integrated ENB
functionality
–
–
–
–
X
Optional wall mounting
X
X
X
X
–
155
253
155
253
216
253
216
253
299
253
500
1000
500
1000
500
1000
500
1000
500
1000
100
100
100
100
100
Maximum length of the connecting line in
meters:
Without plug-type AC adapter
●
With plug-type AC adapter
●
Maximum length of connecting line between primary and secondary telephone
(through phone adapter) in meters
memory
standard
advance conference/
conference
basic
Function keys with LEDs: variable using
HiPath 3000 Manager E)
Dimensions in mm:
Width
●
Depth
●
6-24
optiset E Telephone
entry
Feature
advance plus/comfort
Table 6-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.4 optiset E Add-On Devices
The following add-on devices are available for the optiset E advance plus/comfort, optiset E advance conference/conference and optiset E memory telephones:
optiset E key module
The optiset E key module is an add-on
device with additional dual assignment
function keys for optiset E telephones.
Features include:
32 programmable function keys
●
with LEDs
Up to 4 optiset E key modules per
●
telephone (connected using MW
(RJ) cables)
Hicom Attendant BLF
The Hicom Attendant BLF for optiset E
telephones is an add-on device with extra easily programmable function keys.
Features include:
90 programmable function keys
●
with LEDs
Refer to Section 3.9.2 on page 3●
212 for model-specific data relating
to the Hicom Attendant BLF.
You can connect the Hicom Attendant BLF to the telephone or to an optiset E key
module using an interface cable with the following connectors: Inlet MW6, outlet
MW8. Figure 6-6 shows several possible configurations. An optiset E local power
supply can supply power to up to two Hicom Attendant BLFs.
Programming Add-On Devices
Once it is connected, an add-on device automatically logs onto the system and is then
operational. You can program keys using either HiPath 3000 Manager E or Assistant
T. The information that you programmed on the keys remains when you replace addon devices (it is stored in the customer database).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-25
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
After changing one of the configurations shown in Figure 6-6 with another, the LEDs
and keys may no longer work properly. You must therefore update the database using
HiPath 3000 Manager E.
Example: You replaced configuration E with configuration C. To make sure that the
LEDs and keys function properly, you must remove optiset E key module 2 from the
database using HiPath 3000 Manager E.
You can use Assistant T to clear Hicom Attendant BLFs and optiset E key modules.
The first Hicom Attendant BLF, which is connected to HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 or HiPath 3500 for the first time, has default key assignments for the first
90 system ports. It does not have these default assignments if the Attendant BLF was
preconfigured using HiPath 3000 Manager E or if you connect additional Attendant
BLFs.
Add-On Devices: Possible Configurations
A
12
3
4
756
89
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
→
↵←
↑↓
B
12
3
4
756
89
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
↵←
→
↑↓
C
12
3
4
756
89
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
→
↵←
↑↓
D
12
3
4
756
89
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
→
↵←
↑↓
E
12
3
4
56
789
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
↵←
→
↑↓
F
12
3
4
756
89
0
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
GHI
MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
→
↵←
↑↓
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
optiset
E key
module
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
optiset
E key
module
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
optiset
E key
module
optiset
E key
module
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
optiset
E key
module
optiset
E key
module
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
optiset E advance plus/comfort
or advance conference/conference or memory
Figure 6-6
6-26
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
Hicom
Attendant
BLF
Configurations B, D and F are possible
only with HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3700.
optiset E - Add-On Devices: Possible Configurations
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.5 optiset E Adapters
The optiset E basic has only one adapter slot, which can be used for optiset E analog, ISDN, data, or phone adapters. The optiset E basic telephones do not support
headsets.
The optiset E entry and optiset E standard telephones do not support adapters.
The optiset E telephone adapters are plug-in
modules that enhance system performance
and versatility with additional applications such
as PC and fax connections.
optiset E data adapter
The optiset E data adapter provides for the connection of a PC. This adapter can be
used for the following applications: Dialing from a PC, telemarketing, caller recognition, company-wide telephone book, caller logging, startup of a Microsoft Windows
application using the caller’s station number, and call lists. The data adapter can be
used together with the optiset E acoustic adapter.
The connection of TAPI applications via an external TAPI 3.0 driver is supported.
optiset E acoustic adapter (not for U.S.)
The optiset E acoustic adapter provides for the connection of accessories (such as a
loudspeaker unit, microphone, or second receiver). It can be used with all other
adapters.
optiset E analog adapter
The optiset E analog adapter connects analog telephones and can be used together
with the optiset E data and acoustic adapters.
optiset E ISDN adapter
The optiset E ISDN adapter provides for the connection of standard ISDN S0 nonvoice telephones (DSS1 protocol1). It can be used with the optiset E data and acoustic adapters.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-27
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
optiset E phone adapter
The optiset E phone adapter provides for the connection of an additional system telephone that callers can reach under a separate, programmable station number. All optiset E telephones can be connected. The phone adapter can be used in a configuration with primary and secondary telephones.
Note: When you use the optiset E phone adapter, take into account the capacity limits of the system, and make sure that cables can be connected between the primary
and secondary telephone (if the second telephone is not in the same room).
optiset E contact adapter (not for U.S.)
The optiset E contact adapter has two floating connections (maximum 60 V/5 watts).
These contacts control external devices, such as lamps or secondary bells.
Port 1 signals the following telephone states that are displayed collectively on an external busy lamp. It is not possible to provide a separate lamp for each state:
●
Handset is taken off hook
●
Line key is activated
●
Loudspeaker is switched on
●
Headset is active.
Port 2 signals an incoming call and can control a secondary bell.
optiset E headset adapter
The optiset E headset adapter provides for the connection of two headsets to the telephone.
optiset E headset plus adapter
The optiset E headset plus adapter provides for the connection of two headsets and
a tape recorder to the telephone.
6-28
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
optiset E privacy module
The optiset E privacy module prevents unauthorized users from listening in on phone
conversations. Both parties in a call need to have a privacy device. To connect the
privacy module between the telephone and handset, simply reconnect the line cord.
The optiset E privacy module comes with the plug-type AC adapter needed for operation.
Observe the embargo regulations (import/export restrictions) that apply to the optiset E privacy module!
optiset E control adapter
The optiset E control adapter offers the same functionality as the optiset E data
adapter but does not support data transfer. This adapter also supports one headset
and the optiClient Attendant functionality.
optiPoint IPadapter
see Section 6.8.3, “optiPoint IPadapter (supported up to and including V1.2)”
optiLog 4me
optiLog 4me is a digital, single-channel speech recording device designed for operation with the HiPath 3000. Its design matches that of the optiset E telephone and it
can record up to 2900 hours of telephone calls.
Figure 6-7
optiLog 4me
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-29
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
You can set the optiLog 4me to the following modes in both digital and analog telephones:
●
Start Recorder
Recording begins when you press the Start key.
●
Trader Recorder
Records and stores all calls.
●
Malicious Call Recorder
Stores calls in their entirety when you press any button during the call.
●
Third Party Monitoring (not currently available with HiPath 3000)
optiLog 4me should be installed at the central station of the system. Recording
starts when you press the Monitor key on the telephone.
Furthermore, you can use the recorder to record conference calls using an external
microphone.
The optiLog 4me can be connected between the optiset E telephone and the handset. It can also be connected to the recorder output on the optiset E headset plus
adapter or on the optiset E data adapter. The optiset E local power supply is included
in the delivery.
6-30
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.6 Restrictions for Using optiset E Adapters
The table below shows the adapters (maximum of two) that can be used simultaneously in an optiset E advance plus/comfort, optiset E advance conference/conference, and optiset E memory telephones.
control
adapter1
data
adapter
headset
adapter
headset plus
adapter
ISDN
adapter1
phone
adapter1
acoustic adapter
(not for U.S.)
contact
adapter
optiset E
analog
adadapter1
Available optiset E adapter configurations
acoustic
adapter
Table 6-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
X
–
–
X
X
X
X
X
X
–
–
X
–
–
X
X
–
–
–
X
X
X
X
analog adadapter1
X
contact adapter
(not for U.S.)
X
X
control adapter1
X
–
X
data adapter
X
–
X
–
headset adapter
X
X
X
–
X
headset plus adapter
X
X
X
–
X
–
ISDN adapter1
X
–
X
–
–
X
X
phone adapter1
X
–
X
–
–
X
X
–
–
1 used in primary telephone
Adapters provide flexible and easy enhancements to the telephone.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-31
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
Adapter Implementation in Primary and/or Secondary Telephone
Table 6-8
Adapter Implementation in Primary and/or Secondary Telephone
optiset E
Primary
Secondary
Station Number
phone adapter
Yes
No
from secondary
analog adapter
Yes
No
from secondary
ISDN adapter
Yes
No
from secondary
or set MSN
acoustic adapter (not for U.S.)
Yes
Yes
–
data adapter
Yes
Yes
–
control adapter
Yes
No
–
headset adapter
Yes
Yes
–
headset plus adapter
Yes
Yes
–
contact adapter (not for U.S.)
Yes
Yes
–
Number of adapters and add-on devices allowed by the system
see Table 8-1
6-32
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
optiset E
6.4.7 Electronic Notebook
The Electronic Notebook (ENB) allows the users of an optiset E memory telephone
to store data, such as names, telephone numbers, company names, and fax numbers, and display them on the first five lines of the telephone display.
Customers can add, edit, delete, and search for the stored data.
They can also store frequently used system features in the ENB. Customers who
have programmed all function keys but want to add more system features, such as
mute, call forwarding, or telephone lock, can add these features to the ENB.
Parker Peter
00498972246730
Siemens AG, IC S BC 69
Fax:00498972212358
........................
08:29
FR 16.APR 01
Figure 6-8
Display of an ENB Entry (Example)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-33
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions
6.5 Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions
The certified products that can be delivered are listed in the Sales information.
Table 6-9
6-34
Accessories for optiset E Telephone Solutions
Headset
Headsets to 121 TR 9-5 (Siemens type):
Encore
●
Encore binaural
●
Tristar
●
Supra
●
Profile
●
Profile binaural
●
Recorder
One RJ11 jack for 600-ohm recorders. The following products have been tested successfully:
Atis CG 302 document recorder, IR 30 and IR 30E dig●
ital recorders
Grundig DT 3400 recording and playback station
●
Secondary bell
Connects to contact adapter at 24 V-60 V (max. 5 W) or via
a relay at higher power values.
External optical call
signaling with lamp
Connects to contact adapter at 24 V-60 V (max. 5 W) or via
a relay at higher power values.
Desk microphone
The desk microphone replaces the speakerphone integrated into the telephone and provides optimum support for
speakerphone mode.
It also allows you to move about freely when making phone
calls.
External speaker
You can improve the sound quality in speakerphone mode
by replacing the speaker integrated into the telephone with
this external speaker. The speaker can be set up by itself
or mounted on the wall. Use the slider on the external
speaker to set the basic volume, then adjust the call volume
on the telephone itself.
Second handset
An additional earpiece can help avoid disturbances caused
by background noise or enable another person to listen in
on the conversation.
Wall brackets
For mounting the optiset E entry, basic, standard, advance
plus/comfort, and advance conference/conference telephones on the wall.
Plastic cover
For covering empty adapter slots.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6 Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.1 Gigaset 2000C Feature Handset
The Gigaset 2000C feature handset has elements that allow the user to easily set up
and release voice connections as well as initialize and invoke procedures and enhanced features.
There is also a Tango version (country variant for certain Latin American countries
that use a different frequency range) of the Gigaset 2000C.
Figure 6-9
Feature Handset Gigaset 2000C
Main Features
●
12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)
●
3 function keys:
–
1 menu key for menu selection
–
2 dual-mode keys for up to four soft key functions
●
Seizure key (on-hook)
●
Release key (off-hook)
●
Hookswitch (register recall)
●
On/Off/Protect key
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-35
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
●
Illuminated graphical display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)
●
Enhanced user prompting with on-screen messages (multilingual)
●
Handset phone book for around 100 entries. Redial of the last five numbers.
●
Connection for a headset (Gigaset 2000H)
A Tango version of the Gigaset 2000C feature handset is also available.
Technical Specifications
●
6-36
Power supply by two battery cells:
–
NiCd (600 mAh is supplied): Talk time up to 7 hours, standby time up to 70
hours
–
NiMH (1100 mAh): Talk time up to 11 hours, standby time up to 110 hours
–
NiMH (1300 mAh): Talk time up to 13 hours, standby time up to 130 hours
●
Weight, including battery: around 165 g
●
Dimensions: 160 x 55 x 25 mm (L x W x D)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.2 Gigaset 2000C pocket Feature Handset
The Gigaset 2000C pocket feature handset has elements that allow the user to easily
set up and release voice connections as well as initialize and invoke procedures and
enhanced features.
A Tango version of the Gigaset 2000C pocket feature handset is not available.
Figure 6-10
Feature Handset Gigaset 2000C pocket
Main Features
●
12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)
●
3 function keys:
–
1 menu key for menu selection
–
2 dual-mode keys for up to four soft key functions
●
Seizure key (on-hook)
●
Release key (off-hook)
●
Hookswitch (register recall)
●
On/Off/Protect key
●
Illuminated graphical display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-37
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
Differences over the Gigaset 2000C feature handset:
●
External antenna
●
S 10-like illuminated keypad
●
No headset interface
Technical Specifications
6-38
●
Power supply by means of NiMH flat cells (880 mAh): Talk time up to 9 hours,
standby time up to 90 hours
●
Weight including battery: around 125 g
●
Dimensions: 137 x 43 x 20 mm (L x W x D)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.3 Gigaset active Robust Handset
The Gigaset active robust handset was specifically designed for use in heavy duty industrial surroundings. A special explosion-proof model is available for work areas
where explosions may occur. A Tango version is not available.
Figure 6-11
Robust Handset Gigaset active
Main Features
The Gigaset active has the same controls, indicators, and features as the Gigaset
2000C.
●
Vibration- and crack-resistant, dustproof housing
●
Key shape has been modified so that even users who wear protective gloves can
easily operate them.
●
Spray-resistant according to EN 60529 Cl .IP 64
●
Connection for a headset
●
Call acoustics adapted to industrial environment (including increased volume)
●
EX version meets explosion protection standards according to EN 50014/ 50020
with classification (EEx ib IICT4)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-39
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
Technical Specifications
●
6-40
Power supply by two battery cells:
–
NiCd (600 mAh is supplied): Talk time up to 7 hours, standby time up to 70
hours
–
NiMH (1100 mAh): Talk time up to 11 hours, standby time up to 110 hours
–
NiMH (1300 mAh): Talk time up to 13 hours, standby time up to 130 hours
●
Weight including battery: around 160 g
●
Dimensions: 160 x 55 x 25 mm (L x W x D)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.4 Gigaset 3000 Comfort Feature Handset
The Gigaset 3000 Comfort feature handset has elements that allow the user to easily
set up and release voice connections as well as initialize and invoke procedures and
enhanced features.
A Tango version of the Gigaset 3000 Comfort feature handset is not available.
Figure 6-12
Feature Handset Gigaset 3000 Comfort
Main Features
●
12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)
●
3 function keys:
–
1 menu key for menu selection
–
2 dual-mode keys for up to four soft key functions
●
Seizure key (on-hook)
●
Release key (off-hook)
●
Hookswitch (register recall)
●
Speakerphone
●
Illuminated graphical display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)
●
Enhanced user prompting with on-screen messages (multilingual)
●
Handset phone book for around 100 entries. Redial of the last five numbers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-41
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
Technical Specifications
●
6-42
Power supply by two battery cells:
–
NiCd (700 mAh is supplied): Talk time up to 10 hours, standby time up to 100
hours
–
NiMH (1100 mAh): Talk time up to 15 hours, standby time up to 160 hours
–
NiMH (1500 mAh): Talk time up to 20 hours, standby time up to 220 hours
●
Weight, including battery: around 165 g
●
Dimensions: 60 x 50 x 28 mm (L x W x D)
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.5 Gigaset 3000 Micro Feature Handset
The Gigaset 3000 Mikro feature handset has elements that allow the user to easily
set up and release voice connections as well as initialize and invoke procedures and
enhanced features.
Figure 6-13
Feature Handset Gigaset 3000 Micro
Main Features
●
12-button alphanumeric keypad (0-9,*,#)
●
3 function keys:
–
1 menu key for menu selection
–
2 dual-mode keys for up to 4 soft key functions
●
Seizure key (on-hook)
●
Release key (off-hook)
●
Hookswitch (register recall)
●
Illuminated graphic display (up to 4 lines and 16 columns)
●
Enhanced user prompting with on-screen messages (multilingual)
●
Handset phone book for approximately 100 entries. Redial of last five numbers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-43
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
Technical Specifications
●
Weight, including battery: Approx. 98 g
●
Dimensions: Approx. 122 x 43 x 18 mm (L x W x H)
6.6.6 Gigaset 2000L Charger
Charging option for Gigaset 2000C and Gigaset active handsets.
Warning
The Gigaset 2000L charging unit must not be implemented in environments where
there is a risk of explosion.
Main Features
Easy wall or desktop mounting
●
Charging option for 2 spare battery cells in battery
●
charging compartment
Visual display indicating the charging status of hand●
sets and spare battery cells
Charging times:
●
– For NiCd cells (600m Ah): 4 to 5 hours (in the
handset), 24 hours (in the battery compartment)
– For NiMH cells (1100/1300 mAh): 8 to 10 hours (in
the handset), approximately 40 hours (in the battery compartment)
6.6.7 Gigaset 2000L pocket Charger
Charging option for the Gigaset 2000C pocket handset.
Main Features
Easy wall or desktop mounting
●
Visual display indicating the charging status of the
●
handset
No charging option for spare battery packs
●
Comes with 220V local power supply
●
Approximately 7 hours charging time for NiMH batter●
ies in handsets
6-44
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Telephones for HiPath cordless
6.6.8 Gigaset 3000L Charger
Charging option for the Gigaset 3000C handset.
Main Features
Easy wall or desktop mounting
●
Visual display indicating the charging status
●
Charging times:
●
– For NiCd cells (600m Ah): 4 to 5 hours (in the
handset)
– For NiMH cells (1100/1300 mAh): 8 to 10 hours
(in the handset)
6.6.9 Gigaset 3000L Micro Charger
Charging option for the Gigaset 3000 Micro handset.
Main Features
Visual display indicating the charging status
●
Approximately 5 hours charging time for NiMH-Power
●
Pack (600 mAh) in handsets
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-45
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
6.7 Attendant Consoles
6.7.1 HiPath Attendant B Braille Console
Definition
The HiPath 3750, HiPath 3550, HiPath 3700 and HiPath 3500 systems include a convenient, user-friendly braille console as an attendant position for visually impaired attendants.
optiClient Attendant (PC attendant console) is required to operate the HiPath Attendant B braille console.
Braille Console
optiClient Attendant
Figure 6-14
HiPath Attendant B
Connecting a Braille Console to optiClient Attendant
The braille output line (40 characters) of the braille console displays the current optiClient Attendant status information. The keys on the braille console provide access
to nearly all optiClient Attendant functions, enabling visually impaired users to perform most of the same switching tasks as their non-visually impaired colleagues.
At power-on, the console starts in auto-information mode, providing the user with instructions on the main functions for orientation purposes. For further instructions, the
attendant can activate an information mode that provides extensive operating information on the braille output line.
The braille console automatically uses the language set in optiClient Attendant and
currently supports German and English. Other languages are under preparation.
6-46
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
–
–
–
Hardware requirements
Braille console
–
–
–
Software requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
–
Number of connectable braille consoles
1
–
–
–
1
The HiPath Attendant B braille console can be ordered directly from:
Winkler Kommunikationstechnik
Ahornstrasse 12
26180 Rastede/Ipwege
Germany
Tel.: ++49-89-4402-929292
Fax: ++49-89-4402-929294
Ordering designation: BT-H150 Office-PCVF-001-A
Delivery time is roughly six weeks after receipt of order.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-47
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
6.7.2 optiClient Attendant
Definition
optiClient Attendant provides a user-friendly and representative PC attendant console (PC-VPL) for the communications system family HiPath 3000. Consequently,
various applications such as Attendant, CDR and Electronic Telephone Directory, for
example, are available on a shared PC.
Popup menus with the features that are relevant to the individual state are displayed
on the PC monitor. Furthermore, you can call up attendant console features using
softkeys and the user interface can be adapted to suit the needs of the individual user.
Additional support is also available using the extensive help functions.
The electronic telephone directory helps the operator set up calls quickly and also
handle incoming ISDN calls by displaying the name of the caller (the numbers are
stored in the electronic telephone directory).
Main Features
6-48
●
Visual display of the AC operator’s tasks
●
Multitasking with other Windows applications
●
Ability to display station names or numbers on the busy lamp field
●
Busy indication for ISDN stations on the S0 bus
●
Busy indication for internal and external calls
●
MULAP feature (possible with optiClient Attendant Release 3.26 and later)
●
Electronic directory
●
Additional functions for optiClient Attendant, Version 5.0 and later
–
Expanded busy lamp field
–
Quick search with function key F12
–
Connection of an optiPoint 500 telephone over the USB interface
–
Connection as IP client
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
New features with HiPath 3000 V1.2 and later:
●
Identification of recall from “Call Parking”
In case of a recall due to a parked call, in addition to the call information, the position of the parked call is also displayed in the list box for waiting calls. After the
recall is accepted, the parking position appears for a short time in the system status line.
●
Connection of a parked call or an external held call to the party of an
attendant PC
After the attendant PC has announced the call, an external held call or a parked
call can be connected to the internal or external party of the attendant PC.
●
Caller ID for intercept and recall (in call state)
Caller ID from the connected or virtual optiset E telephones appears in the system status line of the attendant PC.
●
Additional displays for call forwarding (in ringing state)
In case of an outgoing call to a forwarded station, the status of the desired station
appears in the system status line. If a call is forwarded to an attendant PC, the
status of the attendant PC appears in the system status line.
In addition, internal calls (e. g. from the auto attendant/voicemail systems) to the
PC-AC can be assigned the same call priority as external calls. This can be performed by introducing a new flag at each port. If the flag is set
internal calls have the same priority as external calls and
●
the calling party immediately hears the ring tone rather than the busy tone (see
●
also Section 3.2.3, “Call Waiting Tone/Call Waiting” on page 3-46).
Model-Specific Data
Subject
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3150
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.) (not for U.S.)
Feature available in
x
x
–
–
–
Hardware requirements
see
“System Requirements” on page 6-50
–
–
–
Software requirements
V1.0 or later
–
–
–
No. of optiClient Attendants
6
–
–
–
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6
6-49
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
System Requirements
●
PC for optiClient Attendant (for U.S. only: UL Listed)
–
Without additional applications: Pentium 133 MHz with 16 MB RAM
–
With call detail applications or other applications: Pentium III 300 MHz with
32 MB RAM
●
64 MB RAM
●
Minimum screen resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels
●
Sound card with loudspeakers for signaling incoming calls
●
Microsoft-compatible mouse
●
CD-ROM drive or DVD drive
●
HiPath 3000
●
●
Operating system Windows®95, Windows®98, Windows®ME, Windows®NT,
Windows®2000 or Windows®XP
The operating system used depends on the type of installation (e. g. USB not
possible with Windows®95).
Other Requirements for Installation with
–
optiClient 130 V2.0
an operational installation of optiClient 130 V2.0 software
–
USB
optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500 standard or optiPoint 500 advance
an operational USB connection, i.e.: a USB cable connected to a PC USB
port with a virtual COM port driver installed
–
optiset E control/data adapter
a free V.24-(RS-232) interface (COM port 1 – 4)
–
UP0/E PCI card
3.5“disk drive
a free long PCI slot for UP0/E PCI card
For U.S. only: optiClient Attendant consists of three parts:
6-50
●
UP0/E PC card (Siemens Part Number S30807-Q5474-X100)
●
Handset (Siemens Part Number C39363-A7007-B10-3-ZSYS)
●
Handset cradle (Siemens Part Number C39363-A7007-A4)
WARNING (for U.S. Only)
optiClient Attendant is a UL Listed I.T.E. Accessory (2Z02) for use only in UL Listed
computers.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
6.7.3 optiPoint Attendant
Definition
Switching services can be performed in HiPath 3000 using a specially configured
telephone. This optiPoint Attendant (AC) also serves as an intercept position at the
same time. At the AC all calls accumulate if there is no direct inward dialing option, or
if a station could not be contacted using the call allocation algorithm in Call Management (intercept). The operator then forwards the incoming calls to the relevant stations.
For information on the model-dependent data of the optiPoint Attendant, please refer to Section 3.1.12 on page 3-37.
The system telephones optiset E standard, optiset E advance plus/comfort, optiset E
advance conference/conference, optiset E memory, optiPoint 500 basic, optiPoint 500
standard and optiPoint 500 advance can be configured as a optiPoint Attendant system.
The function keys of the system telephone used for optiPoint Attendant are preset as
follows and can be changed by the service technician if necessary:
●
Night answer (switches night answer on/off)
●
Telephone directory (opens the internal telephone directory)
●
Held calls (provides information on the number of held calls)
●
Busy override (goes into a busy connection)
●
Hold (holds a party)
●
External 1 (first external call, incoming/outgoing)
●
External 2 (second external call, incoming/outgoing)
●
Disconnect (disconnect or connect a call)
Depending on the individual customer’s requirements, optiPoint Attendant can be
equipped with key modules and/or with busy lamp fields (optiPoint BLF). The number
of function keys is increased accordingly (particularly the internal name keys) (see
Table 6-10).
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-51
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
Attendant Consoles
Table 6-10
optiPoint Attendant - Total Number of Function Keys after Addition
of Key Modules and BLFs
Total number of keys
16
32
48
64
90
106 122 180 196 212
Number of key modules
1
2
3
4
–
1
2
–
1
2
Keys on key modules
16
32
48
64
–
16
32
–
16
32
Number of BLFs (optiPoint BLF)
–
–
–
–
1
1
1
2
2
2
Keys on BLFs (optiPoint
BLF)
–
–
–
–
90
90
90
180 180 180
When a total of 2 key modules and 2 optiPoint BLFs are connected up a maximum of
212 internal name keys (with internal station number) with busy lamp indicator can be
shown.
6-52
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
LAN Telephones/Adapters
6.8 LAN Telephones/Adapters
6.8.1 optiClient 130
(see Section 4.5.1, “optiClient 130”)
6.8.2 optipoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS
(see Section 4.5.2, “optiPoint 400 standard CorNet-IP-TS”)
6.8.3 optiPoint IPadapter (supported up to and including V1.2)
This adapter, which is accommodated in a housing the same as the PNT, allows the
connection of optiPoint 500 and optiset E telephones over the LAN. The power supply
is provided by an local power supply.
Figure 6-15
Jacks for optiPoint IPadapter
The adapter has the following 2 MW (RJ) jacks
●
1 UP0/E connection for the optiPoint 500 or optiset E telephone (including. power
supply unit)
●
1 LAN connection - standard cable length is 5 m (max. 100 m possible)
Before the adapter is put into operation it must be set for the relevant mode by means
of the appropriate administration tasks.
These administration tasks can be carried out using the optiPoint 500 or optiset E
telephone that is connected to the adapter (basic settings only) and over the LAN using a PC (HTTP client, in which case all settings can be executed).
Figure 6-16 illustrates the main connections for the optiPoint IPadapter.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
6-53
3000sb6.fm
Desktop Products
LAN Telephones/Adapters
optiset E local power supply
“digital”
jack
123
456
789
00
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
GHIJKL
MNO
GHI MNO
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
PQRS
TUV
optiPoint IPadapter
↵ ←→
↑↓
optiPoint 500 or optiset E
telephone
“MW” jack
RJ11
RJ45
HiPath 3000
HiPath HG1500board
Figure 6-16
6-54
LAN
Main Connections for the optiPoint IPadapter
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
7 Plus Products and Applications
The functionality of the HiPath 3000 systems can be enhanced by adding Plus products and applications. These Plus products include automatic call distribution (ACD),
hotel applications, voice messaging services, call charge computing, video conferencing and mobile communication.
Communication between HiPath 3000 and the applications running on host computers (Plus Products) is facilitated by:
●
the V.24 (RS-232) application programming interface (CSTA protocol,
19200 baud)
–
Customers must use a converter to support Plus Products that use ACL-H2.
The converter converts all messages and message procedures based on the
ACL-H2 protocol to the CSTA protocol and vice versa. The converter has
been implemented as a driver that runs under Microsoft Windows 95/98.
–
Plus Products that support the CSTA protocol standardized by ECMA can be
connected directly (for example, Hicom Agentline Office V1.1 CSTA).
●
An S0 interface configured as a station (ISDN/USBS)
●
An ISDN adapter (TA S0) (ISDN/USBS)
●
the LAN interface (Ethernet)
For more information on this subject, refer to Chapter 4.
●
the PSTN interface.
For more information on this subject, refer to Chapter 4.
HiPath 3000 supports CSTA Phase II and CSTA Phase III.
The connected application determines whether CSTA Phase II or Phase III will be
used for connection setup.
For additional information, please refer to Section 3.17 on page 3-423.
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
7-1
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
List of certified Plus products and applications (date: 12.13.01)
In Table 7-1 the functioning of the Plus products/applications is confirmed on the
systems marked with “Yes”.
For information on which Plus product and which application is available in which
country, please contact the relevant office.
Before entering into any sales commitments, you should have the availability
and sales release for a product confirmed by the division in your region.
The current list of the certified Plus products and applications is available on the intranet (keyword is system connections):
http://netinfo4.wit.siemens.de/wnbs_home/se/organisation/team/se5/organisation/
appl/appl_d.htm#Applikationen/Produkte
Details on specific products and applications are available in the relevant data sheets
and product documentation.
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
Voice Mail Systems
Memo for Hicom
Rel. 3.00
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Infovoice
Rel. 4.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
PhoneMail S
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Hotel Voice Mail System
(CHCS)
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Hotel Voice Mail System
(CHCS)
Yes
Yes
–
–
Memo CDA for Hicom
Rel. 3.00
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Hicom Office PhoneMail
Entry
–
Yes
Yes
–
Hicom Office PhoneMail
Entry
–
Yes
Yes
–
Hicom Office PhoneMail
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Hicom Office PhoneMail
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
CAS 500
Yes
Yes
–
–
Call Xpress
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
D2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
D3000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Teleserver Memo Pro
Smartphone
7-2
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
D5000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Infobox
Yes
Yes
–
–
Mini-Mail
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memophone/Memophone twin
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
TeleData D/J
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
WinAccount
Yes
Yes
–
–
WinAccount
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Cosima TC for DOS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cosima TC for Windows
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TeleData Pro
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
TeleData Pro A
Yes
Yes
–
–
TeleData Office
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TeleData Office A
Yes
Yes
–
–
MS16/32, S16
not used
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tabs Windows
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TeleData Office IP
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
TeleData Office S
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tabs (ACL)
Yes
–
–
–
Fidelio (direct connection)
not used
Yes
Yes
–
–
Caracas Inn
Yes
Yes
–
–
Caracas Inn
Yes
Yes
–
–
Caracas Inn
Yes
Yes
–
–
Caracas Link
Yes
Yes
–
–
Caracas Link
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Caracas Desk
–
Yes
Yes
–
Caracas Desk
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Call charge computer
Hotel connections
Hospital connections
Himed for Windows
Nursing home connections
Residenz
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
7-3
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
ACD systems
Taskline 200
Yes
Yes
–
–
Taskline 200
Yes
Yes
–
–
Agentline 200
Yes
–
–
–
Agentline Office
Yes
Yes
–
–
Agentline Office
Yes
Yes
–
–
Office Look
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Office Look
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
HiPath ProCenter Office
Yes
Yes
–
–
Web Interaction Center
Office
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax 550
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax 690
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax 790
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Robofax
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Robofax AVI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ixiServer
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
David (DIIE)
Yes
Yes
–
–
DCI 740
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Pico-TI 14.4 Modem
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ELSA Microlink 56k Basic
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3Com U.S. Robotics
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Musiphone 2000 MS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Musiphone Multimax
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Musiphone Midimax M/S
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Musiphone Midimax vA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mozart MC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mozart MC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mozart CD
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sissy 200/400
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Fax connections
Modems/DCIs
Announcement devices
7-4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
Genius
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Genius ST
Yes
–
–
–
Super Genius
Yes
–
–
–
Music and announcement module
–
–
–
Yes
Universal module Hicom
150E
–
Yes
Yes
–
Ratiotel
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SLA
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
VOICE
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
proMOH
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XMU
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
MOO
–
–
–
Yes
MPPI
–
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Comsat radio converter
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Ecotel GSM900
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Ecotel ISDN/ISDNtwin
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Gigaset 3000 Comfort
Yes
Yes
–
–
Sinus 45 K
Yes
Yes
–
–
Gigaset 3000 Micro
Yes
Yes
–
–
SpectraLink 150 WTS
Yes
–
–
–
Phone Control System
(V24)
!
Yes
–
–
–
Phone Control System
(ACL)
!
Yes
–
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Musiphone Pro/
Pro@LAN
Musiphone 500 CC
Cordless connections
Cordless 150E
Cordless S (Gigaset
1054i)
Time recording systems
Video telephones
PCTL 4000
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
7-5
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
Videokit (PCS 100)
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Videokit Basic (PCS 50)
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Videoset Standard (Venue 2000)
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Teles Vision B/P
Yes
–
–
–
I-View
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Live 200
Yes
–
–
–
Hicom Xpress@LAN
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
HiPath HG 1500
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
HiPath HG 1500
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
CSA 120
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Radar B
"
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Radar B
#$
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Profi 200
Yes
–
–
–
ANT D6500
Yes
–
–
–
Ascom Tateco
Yes
–
–
–
Multitone Access 3000
Yes
–
–
–
TFE Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NovaTec Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Telrad V24 Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Telrad X31 Adapter
–
Yes
Yes
–
Elmeg ISDN-Adapter
Yes
–
–
–
EX PBX Adapter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TFE4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Smartset
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Smartset
%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Smartset 2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Attendant P Office
Yes
Yes
–
–
Hicom Attendant P
Yes
Yes
–
–
ComDial (CD16)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Radio paging equipment
Adaptors
CTI systems
7-6
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Hicom CTI TAPI 3P V1
Yes
Yes
–
–
Hicom CTI TAPI 3P V2
Yes
Yes
–
–
Hicom CTI TAPI 3P V2
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
–
–
Hicom CTI TAPI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Hicom CTI TAPI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adress Plus
Yes
–
–
–
WinPhone
Yes
–
–
–
Office Edition Advanced
Yes
Yes
–
–
XPhone
–
Yes
–
–
Exchange Telephone
Manager
Yes
Yes
–
–
TeleButler
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
CapiButler
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
AnNo Text EuroStar
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Snapware
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
AVM S0 PC card A1/B1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ITK S0 PC card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tina S0 PC card
Yes
–
–
–
Teles S0 PC card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Diehl PC card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Diehl PCMCIA card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Datev S0 PC card
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
I-Talk
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
I-Talk
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
I-Surf
Yes
–
–
–
I-Surf
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
ComDial (CD32)
HiPath TAPI 170
OrgAnice
Act
Theseus
Personal Call Manager
(PCM)
PC cards
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
7-7
3000sb7.fm
Plus Products and Applications
Table 7-1
List of Certified Plus Products and Applications for HiPath 3000
Plus Product/Application
Name
Version
HiPath 3750 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3250
HiPath 3700 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3300 (not for U.S.)
I-Surf USB
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
I-Surf USB
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Datus 20S
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
RAD Kilomux 2000
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Simux 3612
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
RAD Kilomux 2100
Yes
Yes
–
–
Private Network Terminator E
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PCopti Converter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PCopti E Converter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
GD Cash Card System
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
!
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
Braille terminal for Optiset
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Siedle entrance telephone
&%'(
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TopSec 702/703
Yes
Yes
–
–
Patton Modell 2035
–
Yes
Yes
–
Euroset 2010
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Euroset 2015
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CN Netcom Headset
–
Yes
–
–
Smartset BLF
Yes
Yes
Yes
–
EPOS 710/812/Dect70
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
phoneboard for Hicom
)
Yes
Yes
–
–
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Network connections
Miscellaneous
TelePassport
DoorCom Analog
7-8
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb8.fm
Capacities
8 Capacities
Table 8-1 on page 8-1 = feature capacities
Table 8-2 on page 8-13 = hardware capacities
Table 8-1
Expansion Limits and Capacities for HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0
PARAMETERS
SYSTEM
HiPath 3150 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3750
(not for U.S.) (not for U.S.) HiPath 3300 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3700
Agents
●
Agent IDs in system
-
-
-
150
150
●
Agents active simultaneously in system
-
-
-
150
150
●
Agents active simultaneously on a telephone
-
-
-
1
1
●
Total agents in system
-
-
-
Unlimited
Toll restriction:
●
Number of allowed lists
6
6
6
6
6
●
Number of denied lists
6
6
6
6
6
●
Allowed list, short (10 entries with 25 digits each)
5
5
5
5
5
●
Allowed list, long (100 entries with 25 digits each)
1
1
1
1
1
●
Denied list, short (10 entries
with 25 digits each)
5
5
5
5
5
●
Denied list, long (50 entries
with 25 digits each)
1
1
1
1
1
Trunks:
●
Total trunks (B channels) in
system
1
4
16
60
120
●
Max. number of loop start
(analog) trunks (dep. on
configuration)
-
-
16
60
120
●
Maximum number of S0 interfaces
1
2
8
30
60
●
Maximum number of S2M
boards
-
-
-
1
4
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
8-1
3000sb8.fm
Capacities
Table 8-1
Expansion Limits and Capacities for HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0
PARAMETERS
SYSTEM
HiPath 3150 HiPath 3250 HiPath 3350 HiPath 3550 HiPath 3750
(not for U.S.) (not for U.S.) HiPath 3300 HiPath 3500 HiPath 3700
●
Number of tie line analog
trunk boards (4 E&M lines
per board)
-
-
-
-
18
Call waiting:
●
Number of external waiting
calls per station
16
16
16
16
16
●
Number of internal waiting
calls per station
16
16
16
16
16
Caller list:
●
Number of entries in a list
10
10
10
10
10
●
Total lists in system
100
100
100
100
650
●
Number of lists per telephone with display or subscriber group
1
1
1
1
1
●
Number of digits per entry
25-digit station number + trunk group code
Call pickup groups:
●
Number of telephones per
group
8
8
8
32
32
●
Total groups per system
8
8
8
32
32
Call forwarding:
●
All calls: Active simultaneously
20
20
20
50
150
●
External: Number of CFW
keys per telephone
1
1
1
1
1
●
External: Number of digits
25-digit station number + trunk group code
Announcement before answering:
Number of callers for whom an
announcement can be played simultaneously
8-2
32
32
32
32
32
G281-0788-00, April 2002
HiPath 3000 V1.2-3.0, System Description
3000sb8.fm
Capacities
Table